New edition

2009
DENGUE
GUIDELINES FOR DIAGNOSIS,
TREATMENT, PREVENTION AND CONTROL
D
E
N
G
U
E

G
U
I
D
E
L
I
N
E
S

F
O
R

D
I
A
G
N
O
S
I
S
,

T
R
E
A
T
M
E
N
T
,

P
R
E
V
E
N
T
I
O
N

A
N
D

C
O
N
T
R
O
L




N
e
w

e
d
i
t
i
o
n
Neglected Tropical Diseases (NTD) TDR/World Health Organization
HIV/AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria (HTM) 20, Avenue Appia
World Health Organization 1211 Geneva 27
Avenue Appia 20, 1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland Switzerland
Fax: +41 22 791 48 69 Fax: +41 22 791 48 54
www.who.int/neglected_diseases/en www.who.int/tdr
neglected.diseases@who.int tdr@who.int
New edition
2009
DENGUE
GUIDELINES FOR DIAGNOSIS,
TREATMENT, PREVENTION AND CONTROL
A joint publication of the World Health Organization (WHO) and the Special Programme for Research
and Training in Tropical Diseases (TDR)
WHO/HTM/NTD/DEN/2009.1
Expiry date: 2014
© World Health Organization 2009
All rights reserved. Publications of the World Health Organization can be obtained from WHO Press,
World Health Organization, 20 Avenue Appia, 1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland (tel.: +41 22 791 3264;
fax: +41 22 791 4857; e-mail: bookorders@who.int). Requests for permission to reproduce or translate
WHO publications – whether for sale or for noncommercial distribution – should be addressed to WHO
Press, at the above address (fax: +41 22 791 4806; e-mail: permissions@who.int).
The designations employed and the presentation of the material in this publication do not imply the
expression of any opinion whatsoever on the part of the World Health Organization concerning the legal
status of any country, territory, city or area or of its authorities, or concerning the delimitation of its frontiers
or boundaries. Dotted lines on maps represent approximate border lines for which there may not yet be
full agreement.
The mention of specific companies or of certain manufacturers’ products does not imply that they are
endorsed or recommended by the World Health Organization in preference to others of a similar nature
that are not mentioned. Errors and omissions excepted, the names of proprietary products are distinguished
by initial capital letters.
All reasonable precautions have been taken by the World Health Organization to verify the information
contained in this publication. However, the published material is being distributed without warranty of any
kind, either expressed or implied. The responsibility for the interpretation and use of the material lies with
the reader. In no event shall the World Health Organization be liable for damages arising from its use.
Printed in France
Cover and Layout: P. Tissot WHO/HTM/NTD
WHO Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data
Dengue: guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control -- New edition.
1.Dengue - diagnosis. 2.Dengue - therapy. 3.Dengue - prevention and control. 4.Endemic Diseases -
prevention and control. 5.Fluid therapy. 6.Diagnosis, differential. 7.Disease outbreaks - prevention and
control. 8.Mosquito control. 9.Guidelines. I.World Health Organization.
ISBN 978 92 4 154787 1 (NLM classification: WC 528)
iii
Introduction, Methodology, Acknowledgements, Abbreviations, Preface
CONTENTS
Preface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- v
Methodology --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- vi
Acknowledgements -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- vii
Abbreviations -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ix
Chapter 1 Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
1.1 Dengue epidemiology ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
1.2 Burden of disease -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
1.3 Dengue in international travel -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
1.4 Transmission --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
1.5 References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 17
Chapter 2 Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
2.1 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
2.2 Delivery of clinical services and case management --------------------------------- 29
2.3 Recommendations for treatment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
2.4 References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 54

Chapter 3 Vector management and delivery of vector control services
3.1 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
3.2 Methods of vector control -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 60
3.3 Delivery of vector control interventions ------------------------------------------------------------- 72
3.4 References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 86
Chapter 4 Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
4.1 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
4.2 Considerations in the choice of diagnostic methods -------------------------------- 93
4.3 Current dengue diagnostic methods ---------------------------------------------------------------- 97
4.4 Future test developments ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 103
4.5 Quality assurance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 104
4.6 Biosafety issues -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 104
4.7 Organization of laboratory services ------------------------------------------------------------------ 104
4.8 References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 106
Chapter 5 Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
5.1 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 111
5.2 Dengue surveillance ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 111
5.3 Dengue preparedness planning and response -------------------------------------------- 123
5.4 Programme assessment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 128
5.5 References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 132
Chapter 6 New avenues
6.1 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 137
6.2 Dengue vaccines ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 137
6.3 Dengue antiviral drugs ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 141
6.4 References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 144
iv
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
v
Introduction, Methodology, Acknowledgements, Abbreviations, Preface
PREFACE
Since the second edition of Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis, treatment, prevention
and control was published by the World Health Organization (WHO) in 1997, the
magnitude of the dengue problem has increased dramatically and has extended
geographically to many previously unaffected areas. It was then, and remains today,
the most important arthropod-borne viral disease of humans.
Activities undertaken by WHO regarding dengue are most recently guided at the global
policy level by World Health Assembly resolution WHA55.17 (adopted by the Fifty-fifth
World Health Assembly in 2002) and at the regional level by resolution CE140.R17 of
the Pan American Sanitary Conference (2007), resolution WPR/RC59.R6 of the WHO
Regional Committee for the Western Pacific (2008) and resolution SEA/RC61/R5 of
the WHO Regional Committee for South-East Asia (2008).
This new edition has been produced to make widely available to health practitioners,
laboratory personnel, those involved in vector control and other public health officials,
a concise source of information of worldwide relevance on dengue. The guidelines
provide updated practical information on the clinical management and delivery of
clinical services; vector management and delivery of vector control services; laboratory
diagnosis and diagnostic tests; and surveillance, emergency preparedness and response.
Looking ahead, some indications of new and promising avenues of research are also
described. Additional and more detailed specific guidance on the various specialist
areas related to dengue are available from other sources in WHO and elsewhere,
some of which are cited in the references.
The contributions of, and review by, many experts both within and outside WHO have
facilitated the preparation of this publication through consultative and peer review
processes. All contributors are gratefully acknowledged, a list of whom appears under
“Acknowledgements”. These guidelines are the result of collaboration between the
WHO Department of Control Neglected Tropical Diseases, the WHO Department of
Epidemic and Pandemic Alert and Response, and the Special Programme for Research
and Training in Tropical Diseases.
This publication is intended to contribute to prevention and control of the morbidity and
mortality associated with dengue and to serve as an authoritative reference source for
health workers and researchers. These guidelines are not intended to replace national
guidelines but to assist in the development of national or regional guidelines. They are
expected to remain valid for five years (until 2014), although developments in research
could change their validity, since many aspects of the prevention and control of dengue
are currently being investigated in a variety of studies. The guidelines contain the most
up-to-date information at the time of writing. However, the results of studies are being
published regularly and should be taken into account. To address this challenge, the
guide is also available on the Internet and will be updated regularly by WHO.
vi
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
METHODOLOGY
These guidelines were written using the following methodology:
1. Writing team
Each chapter was allocated to a WHO coordinator and at least one non-WHO lead
writer. The non-WHO lead writers received a small fee for their work. Declarations of
interest were obtained from all lead writers and no conflicting interests were declared.
The lead writers were chosen because of their expertise in the field and their willingness
to undertake the work.
Since this guide has the broad scope of all aspects of prevention and control of dengue,
the lead writers were selected for technical expertise in the areas of epidemiology,
pathogenesis and transmission, clinical aspects, vector control, laboratory aspects,
surveillance and response, and drug and vaccine development.
2. Peer review
All the chapters were submitted to peer review. The peer review groups were determined
by the WHO coordinator and the non-WHO lead writers of each chapter. The groups
consisted of five or more peer reviewers, who were not paid for their work. Declarations
of interest were obtained from all peer reviewers. For those peer reviewers with potential
conflicting interests, the interests are declared below.
1

For each chapter, the process of reaching agreement on disputed issues differed. For
chapters 1, 3, 4 and 6, the comments of the peer reviewers were discussed electronically
within the group. Chapter 2 had a larger group whose members met for a consensus
group discussion. Chapter 5 required extensive discussion, but consensus was reached
without a consensus group meeting. Agreement on the chapter content was reached for
all the groups.
3. Use of evidence
For each chapter, items are referenced that (1) provide new data, (2) challenge current
practice, (3) describe ongoing research and (4) reflect key developments in knowledge
about dengue prevention and control.
Priority was given to systematic reviews when available. Additional literature searches
were conducted by the writing teams when items under 1--3 were identified, and
references from personal collections of experts were added when appropriate under 4.
The writing teams referred to the items under 1--4 in the text, and lists of references were
added at the end of each chapter.
1
Declared interests:
Chapter 1. Dr Anne Wilder Smith: principal investigator in dengue vaccine trial starting in 2009.
Chapter 4. Dr Mary Jane Cardosa: shareholder and director of company developing dengue diagnostic tests.
Chapter 6. Dr Robert Edelman: consultant for company involved in dengue vaccine research.
vii
Introduction, Methodology, Acknowledgements, Abbreviations, Preface
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This new edition of the dengue guidelines would not have been possible without
the initiative, practical experience of many years of working in dengue, and writing
contribution of Dr Michael B. Nathan, now retired from the World Health Organization
(WHO).
Dr Axel Kroeger of the Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases
(WHO/TDR) equally contributed to all parts of the guidelines.
Dr John Ehrenberg, Dr Chusak Prasittisuk and Dr Jose Luis San Martin, as WHO regional
advisers on dengue, contributed their unique experience to all chapters.
Dr Renu Dayal Drager (WHO) and Dr Jeremy Farrar (the Wellcome Trust) contributed
technical advice to several chapters.
Dr Raman Velayudhan (WHO) coordinated the finalization and publication of the guide
and advised on all the chapters.
Dr Olaf Horstick (WHO/TDR) assembled the evidence base, contributed to all chapters
and contributed to the finalization of the guide.
Special thanks are due to the editorial team of Mrs Karen Ciceri and Mr Patrick Tissot
at WHO.
The following individuals contributed to chapters as lead writers, advisers or peer
reviewers:
Chapter 1
Lead writers: Dr Michael B. Nathan, Dr Renu Dayal-Drager, Dr Maria Guzman.
Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Olivia Brathwaite, Dr Scott Halstead, Dr Anand Joshi,
Dr Romeo Montoya, Dr Cameron Simmons, Dr Thomas Jaenisch, Dr Annelies Wilder-
Smith, Dr Mary Wilson.
Chapter 2
Lead writers: Dr Jacqueline Deen, Dr Lucy Lum, Dr Eric Martinez, Dr Lian Huat Tan.
Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Jeremy Farrar, Dr Ivo Castelo Branco, Dr Efren Dimaano,
Dr Eva Harris, Dr Nguyen Hung, Dr Ida Safitri Laksono, Dr Jose Martinez, Dr Ernesto
Benjamín Pleites, Dr Rivaldo Venancio, Dr Elci Villegas, Dr Martin Weber, Dr Bridget
Wills.
Chapter 3
Lead writers: Dr Philip McCall, Dr Linda Lloyd, Dr Michael B. Nathan.
Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Satish Appoo, Dr Roberto Barrera, Dr Robert Bos,
Dr Mohammadu Kabir Cham, Dr Gary G. Clark, Dr Christian Frederickson, Dr Vu Sinh
Nam, Dr Chang Moh Seng, Dr Tom W. Scott, Dr Indra Vithylingam, Dr Rajpal Yadav,
Dr André Yebakima, Dr Raman Velayudhan, Dr Morteza Zaim.
viii
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Chapter 4
Lead writers: Dr Philippe Buchy, Dr Rosanna Peeling.
Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Harvey Artsob, Dr Jane Cardosa, Dr Renu Dayal-
Drager, Dr Duane Gubler, Dr Maria Guzman, Dr Elizabeth Hunsperger, Dr Lucy Lum,
Dr Eric Martinez, Dr Jose Pelegrino, Dr Susana Vazquez.
Chapter 5
Lead writers: Dr Duane Gubler, Dr Gary G. Clark, Dr Renu Dayal-Drager, Dr Dana Focks,
Dr Axel Kroeger, Dr Angela Merianos, Dr Cathy Roth.
Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Pierre Formenty, Dr Reinhard Junghecker, Dr Dominique
Legros, Dr Silvia Runge-Ranzinger, Dr José Rigau-Pérez.
Chapter 6
Lead writers: Dr Eva Harris, Dr Joachim Hombach, Dr Janis Lazdins-Held.
Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Bruno Canard, Dr Anne Durbin, Dr Robert Edelman,
Dr Maria Guzman, Dr John Roehrig, Dr Subhash Vasudevan.
ix
Introduction, Methodology, Acknowledgements, Abbreviations, Preface
ABBREVIATIONS
a.i. ad interim
ADE antibody-dependent enhancement
ALT alanine amino transferase
AST aspartate amino transferase
BP blood pressure
BSL biosafety level
Bti Bacillus thuringiensis israelensis
CD4 cluster of differentiation 4, T helper cell surface glycoprotein
CD8 cluster of differentiation 8, T cell co-receptor transmembrane glycoprotein
CFR case-fatality rate
COMBI communication for behavioural impact
DALY disability-adjusted life years
DEET diethyl-meta-toluamide
DENCO Dengue and Control study (multi-country study)
DEN dengue
DDT dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane
DF dengue fever
DHF dengue haemorrhagic fever
DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
DSS dengue shock syndrome
DT tablet for direct application
EC emulsifiable concentrate
ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
E/M envelop/membrane antigen
FBC full blood count
Fc-receptor fragment, crystallisable region, a cell receptor
FRhL fetal rhesus lung cells
GAC E/M-specific capture IgG ELISA
GIS Geographical Information System
GOARN Global Outbreak Alert and Response Network
GPS global positioning system
GR granule
HI haemagglutination-inhibition
HIV/AIDS human immunodeficiency virus/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome
ICU intensive care unit
IEC information, education, communication
IgA immunoglobulin A
IgG immunoglobulin G
IgM immunoglobulin M
INF gamma interferon gamma
x
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
IPCS International Programme on Chemical Safety
IR3535 3-[N-acetyl-N-butyl]-aminopropionic acid ethyl ester
ITM insecticide treated material
IV intravenous
LAV live attenuated vaccine
MAC-ELISA IgM antibody-capture enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
MIA microsphere-based immunoassays
MoE Ministry of Education
MoH Ministry of Health
NAAT nucleic acid amplification test
NASBA nucleic acid sequence based amplification
NGO nongovernmental organization
NS non-structural protein
NSAID non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
OD optical density
ORS oral rehydration solution
PAHO Pan American Health Organization
PCR polymerase chain reaction
PDVI Pediatric Dengue Vaccine Initiative
pH measure of the acidity or basicity of a solution
prM a region of the dengue genome
PRNT plaque reduction and neutralization test
RNA ribonucleic acid
RT-PCR reverse transcriptase-polymerase chain reaction
SC suspension concentrate
TNF alfa tumor necrosis factor alfa
T cells A group of lymphocytes important for cell-mediated immunity
TDR Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases
WBC white blood cells
WG Water-dispersible granule
WHO World Health Organizaion
WP wettable powder
YF yellow fever
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
1
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
CHAPTER 1

EPIDEMIOLOGY, BURDEN OF DISEASE
AND TRANSMISSION
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
3
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
CHAPTER 1. EPIDEMIOLOGY, BURDEN OF DISEASE AND
TRANSMISSION
1.1 DENGUE EPIDEMIOLOGY
Dengue is the most rapidly spreading mosquito-borne viral disease in the world. In the
last 50 years, incidence has increased 30-fold with increasing geographic expansion
to new countries and, in the present decade, from urban to rural settings (Figure 1.1). An
estimated 50 million dengue infections occur annually (Figure 1.2) and approximately
2.5 billion people live in dengue endemic countries (1). The 2002 World Health
Assembly resolution WHA55.17 (2) urged greater commitment to dengue by WHO
and its Member States. Of particular signifcance is the 2005 World Health Assembly
resolution WHA58.3 on the revision of the International Health Regulations (IHR) (3),
which includes dengue as an example of a disease that may constitute a public health
emergency of international concern with implications for health security due to disruption
and rapid epidemic spread beyond national borders.
Figure 1.1 Countries/areas at risk of dengue transmission, 2008
Data Source: World Health Organization Map
Production: Public Health Infrmation and Geographic
Information Systems (GIS) World Health Organization
The boundaries and names shown and the designations used on this map do not imply the expression of any opinion whatsoever
on the part of the World Health Organization concerning the legal status of any country, territory, city or area or of its authorities,
or concerning the delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries. Dotted lines or maps represent approximate border lines for which
there may not yest be fll agreement.
countries or areas at risk
(As of 1 November 2008)
The contour lines of the January and July isotherms indicate the potential geographical limits of the northern and
southern hemispheres for year-round survival of Adeas aegypti, the principal mosquito vector of dengue viruses.
July isotherm
10.C
January isotherm
10.C
© World Health Organization 2008
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
4
The following sections give an overview of the epidemiology and burden of disease in
the different WHO regions. All data are from country reports from the WHO regional
offces, unless referenced to a different source.

1.1.1 Dengue in Asia and the Pacifc
Some 1.8 billion (more than 70%) of the population at risk for dengue worldwide live in
member states of the WHO South-East Asia Region and Western Pacifc Region, which
bear nearly 75% of the current global disease burden due to dengue. The Asia Pacifc
Dengue Strategic Plan for both regions (2008--2015) has been prepared in consultation
with member countries and development partners in response to the increasing threat
from dengue, which is spreading to new geographical areas and causing high mortality
during the early phase of outbreaks. The strategic plan aims to aid countries to reverse
the rising trend of dengue by enhancing their preparedness to detect, characterize and
contain outbreaks rapidly and to stop the spread to new areas.
Figure 1.2 Average annual number of dengue fever (DF) and dengue haemorrhagic fever (DHF) cases
reported to WHO, and of countries reporting dengue, 1955–2007
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

c
a
s
e
s
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

c
o
u
n
t
r
i
e
s
70
60
50
40
30
20
1955-1959 1960-1969 1970-1979 1980-1989 1990-1999 2000-2007
10
0
1 000 000
900 000
800 000
700 000
600 000
500 000
400 000
300 000
200 000
100 000
0
908
122,174
15,497
295,554
479,848
925,896
Year
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
5
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
1.1.1.1 Dengue in the WHO South-East Asia Region
Since 2000, epidemic dengue has spread to new areas and has increased in the
already affected areas of the region. In 2003, eight countries -- Bangladesh, India,
Indonesia, Maldives, Myanmar, Sri Lanka, Thailand and Timor-Leste -- reported dengue
cases. In 2004, Bhutan reported the country’s frst dengue outbreak. In 2005, WHO’s
Global Outbreak Alert and Response Network (GOARN) responded to an outbreak with
a high case-fatality rate (3.55%) in Timor-Leste. In November 2006, Nepal reported
indigenous dengue cases for the frst time. The Democratic Peoples’ Republic of Korea is
the only country of the South-East Region that has no reports of indigenous dengue.
The countries of the region have been divided into four distinct climatic zones with
different dengue transmission potential. Epidemic dengue is a major public health
problem in Indonesia, Myanmar, Sri Lanka, Thailand and Timor-Leste which are in the
tropical monsoon and equatorial zone where Aedes aegypti is widespread in both urban
and rural areas, where multiple virus serotypes are circulating, and where dengue is a
leading cause of hospitalization and death in children. Cyclic epidemics are increasing
in frequency and in-country geographic expansion is occurring in Bangladesh, India
and Maldives -- countries in the deciduous dry and wet climatic zone with multiple virus
serotypes circulating. Over the past four years, epidemic dengue activity has spread to
Bhutan and Nepal in the sub-Himalayan foothills.
Reported case fatality rates for the region are approximately 1%, but in India, Indonesia
and Myanmar, focal outbreaks away from the urban areas have reported case-fatality
rates of 3--5%.
In Indonesia, where more than 35% of the country’s population lives in urban areas,
150 000 cases were reported in 2007 (the highest on record) with over 25 000 cases
reported from both Jakarta and West Java. The case-fatality rate was approximately
1%.
In Myanmar in 2007 the states/divisions that reported the highest number of cases
were Ayayarwaddy, Kayin, Magway, Mandalay, Mon, Rakhine, Sagaing, Tanintharyi
and Yangon. From January to September 2007, Myanmar reported 9578 cases. The
reported case-fatality rate in Myanmar is slightly above 1%.
In Thailand, dengue is reported from all four regions: Northern, Central, North-Eastern
and Southern. In June 2007, outbreaks were reported from Trat province, Bangkok,
Chiangrai, Phetchabun, Phitsanulok, Khamkaeng Phet, Nakhon Sawan and Phit Chit. A
total of 58 836 cases were reported from January to November 2007. The case-fatality
rate in Thailand is below 0.2%.
Dengue prevention and control will be implemented through the Bi-regional Dengue
Strategy (2008--2015) of the WHO South-East Asia and Western Pacifc regions. This
consists of six elements: (i) dengue surveillance, (ii) case management, (iii) outbreak
response, (iv) integrated vector management, (v) social mobilization and communication
for dengue and (vi) dengue research (a combination of both formative and operational
research). The strategy has been endorsed by resolution SEA/RC61/R5 of the WHO
Regional Committee for South-East Asia in 2008 (4).
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
6
1.1.1.2 Dengue in the WHO Western Pacifc Region
Dengue has emerged as a serious public health problem in the Western Pacifc Region
(5). Since the last major pandemic in 1998, epidemics have recurred in much of
the area. Lack of reporting remains one of the most important challenges in dengue
prevention and control.
Between 2001 and 2008, 1 020 333 cases were reported in Cambodia, Malaysia,
Philippines, and Viet Nam -- the four countries in the Western Pacifc Region with the
highest numbers of cases and deaths. The combined death toll for these four countries
was 4798 (offcial country reports). Compared with other countries in the same region,
the number of cases and deaths remained highest in Cambodia and the Philippines in
2008. Overall, case management has improved in the Western Pacifc Region, leading
to a decrease in case fatality rates.
Dengue has also spread throughout the Pacifc Island countries and areas. Between
2001 and 2008, the six most affected Pacifc island countries and areas were French
Polynesia (35 869 cases), New Caledonia (6836 cases), Cook Islands (3735
cases), American Samoa (1816 cases), Palau (1108 cases) and the Federal States of
Micronesia (664 cases). The total number of deaths for the six island countries was 34
(offcial country reports). Although no offcial reports have been submitted to WHO by
Kiribati, the country did experience a dengue outbreak in 2008, reporting a total of
837 cases and causing great concern among the national authorities and among some
of the other countries in the region.
Historically, dengue has been reported predominantly among urban and peri-urban
populations where high population density facilitates transmission. However, evidence
from recent outbreaks, as seen in Cambodia in 2007, suggests that they are now
occurring in rural areas.
Implementing the Bi-regional Dengue Strategy for Asia and the Pacifc (2008--2015) is
a priority following endorsement by the 2008 resolution WPR/RC59.R6 of the WHO
Regional Committee for the Western Pacifc (6).

1.1.2 Dengue in the Americas
Interruption of dengue transmission in much the WHO Region of the Americas resulted
from the Ae. aegypti eradication campaign in the Americas, mainly during the 1960s
and early 1970s. However, vector surveillance and control measures were not sustained
and there were subsequent reinfestations of the mosquito, followed by outbreaks in the
Caribbean, and in Central and South America (7). Dengue fever has since spread with
cyclical outbreaks occurring every 3--5 years. The biggest outbreak occurred in 2002
with more than 1 million reported cases.
From 2001 to 2007, more than 30 countries of the Americas notifed a total of 4 332
731 cases of dengue (8). The number of cases of dengue haemorrhagic fever (DHF)
in the same period was 106 037. The total number of dengue deaths from 2001 to
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
7
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
2007 was 1299, with a DHF case fatality rate of 1.2%. The four serotypes of the
dengue virus (DEN-1, DEN-2, DEN-3 and DEN-4) circulate in the region. In Barbados,
Colombia, Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Guatemala, French Guyana, Mexico,
Peru, Puerto Rico and Venezuela, all four serotypes were simultaneously identifed in one
year during this period.
By subregion of the Americas, dengue is characterized as described below. All data
are from the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO) (8).
The Southern Cone countries
Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Paraguay and Uruguay are located in this subregion. In the
period from 2001 to 2007, 64.6% (2 798 601) of all dengue cases in the Americas
were notifed in this subregion, of which 6733 were DHF with a total of 500 deaths.
Some 98.5% of the cases were notifed by Brazil, which also reports the highest case
fatality rate in the subregion. In the subregion, DEN-1, -2 and -3 circulate.
Andean countries
This subregion includes Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador, Peru and Venezuela, and
contributed 19% (819 466) of dengue cases in the Americas from 2001 to 2007. It is
the subregion with the highest number of reported DHF cases, with 58% of all cases (61
341) in the Americas, and 306 deaths. Colombia and Venezuela have most cases in
the subregion (81%), and in Colombia there were most dengue deaths (225, or 73%).
In Colombia, Peru and Venezuela all four dengue serotypes were identifed.
Central American countries and Mexico
During 2001–2007, a total of 545 049 cases, representing 12.5% of dengue in the
Americas, was reported, with 35 746 cases of DHF and 209 deaths. Nicaragua had
64 deaths (31%), followed by Honduras with 52 (25%) and Mexico with 29 (14%).
Costa Rica, Honduras and Mexico reported the highest number of cases in this period.
DEN-1, -2 and -3 were the serotypes most frequently reported.
Caribbean countries
In this subregion 3.9% (168 819) of the cases of dengue were notifed, with 2217 DHF
cases and 284 deaths. Countries with the highest number of dengue cases in the Latin
Caribbean were Cuba, Puerto Rico and the Dominican Republic, whereas in the English
and French Caribbean, Martinique, Trinidad and Tobago and French Guiana reported
the highest numbers of cases. The Dominican Republic reported 77% of deaths (220)
during the period 2001--2007. All four serotypes circulate in the Caribbean area, but
predominantly DEN-1 and -2.
North American countries
The majority of the notifed cases of dengue in Canada and the United States are
persons who had travelled to endemic areas in Asia, the Caribbean, or Central or South
America (9). From 2001 to 2007, 796 cases of dengue were reported in the United
States, the majority imported. Nevertheless, outbreaks of dengue in Hawaii have been
reported, and there were outbreaks sporadically with local transmission in Texas at the
border with Mexico (10,11).
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
8
The Regional Dengue Programme of PAHO focuses public policies towards a multisectoral
and interdisciplinary integration. This allows the formulation, implementation, monitoring
and evaluation of national programmes through the Integrated Management Strategy
for Prevention and Control of Dengue (EGI-dengue, from its acronym in Spanish). This
has six key components: (i) social communication (using Communication for Behavioural
Impact (COMBI)), (ii) entomology, (iii) epidemiology, (iv) laboratory diagnosis, (v) case
management and (vi) environment. This strategy has been endorsed by PAHO resolutions
(12–15). Sixteen countries and three subregions (Central America, Mercosur and the
Andean subregion) agreed to use EGI-dengue as a strategy and are in the process of
implementation.

1.1.3 Dengue in the WHO African Region
Although dengue exists in the WHO African Region, surveillance data are poor.
Outbreak reports exist, although they are not complete, and there is evidence that
dengue outbreaks are increasing in size and frequency (16). Dengue is not offcially
reported to WHO by countries in the region. Dengue-like illness has been recorded
in Africa though usually without laboratory confrmation and could be due to infection
with dengue virus or with viruses such as chikungunya that produce similar clinical
symptoms.
Dengue has mostly been documented in Africa from published reports of serosurveys
or from diagnosis in travellers returning from Africa, and dengue cases from countries
in Sub-Saharan Africa. A serosurvey (17) suggests that dengue existed in Africa as far
back as 1926--1927, when the disease caused an epidemic in Durban, South Africa.
Cases of dengue imported from India were detected in the 1980s (18).
For eastern Africa, the available evidence so far indicates that DEN-1, -2 and -3 appear to
be common causes of acute fever. Examples of this are outbreaks in the Comoros in various
years (1948, 1984 and 1993, DEN-1 and -2) (19) and Mozambique (1984--1985,
DEN-3) (20).
In western Africa in the 1960s, DEN-1, -2 and -3 were isolated for the frst time from
samples taken from humans in Nigeria (21). Subsequent dengue outbreaks have been
reported from different countries, as for example from Burkina Faso (1982, DEN-2) (22)
and Senegal (1999, DEN-2) (23). Also DEN-2 and DEN-3 cases were confrmed in
Côte d’Ivoire in 2006 and 2008.
Despite poor surveillance for dengue in Africa, it is clear that epidemic dengue fever
caused by all four dengue serotypes has increased dramatically since 1980, with most
epidemics occurring in eastern Africa, and to a smaller extent in western Africa, though
this situation may be changing in 2008.
While dengue may not appear to be a major public health problem in Africa compared
to the widespread incidence of malaria and HIV/AIDS, the increasing frequency
and severity of dengue epidemics worldwide calls for a better understanding of the
epidemiology of dengue infections with regard to the susceptibility of African populations
to dengue and the interference between dengue and the other major communicable
diseases of the continent.

Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
9
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
1.1.4 Dengue in the WHO Eastern Mediterranean Region (Figure 1.3)
Outbreaks of dengue have been documented in the Eastern Mediterranean Region
possibly as early as 1799 in Egypt (24). The frequency of reported outbreaks continue
to increase, with outbreaks for example in Sudan (1985, DEN-1 and -2) (25) and in
Djibouti (1991, DEN-2) (26).
Recent outbreaks of suspected dengue have been recorded in Pakistan, Saudi Arabia,
Sudan and Yemen, 2005--2006 (24). In Pakistan, the frst confrmed outbreak of DHF
occurred in 1994. A DEN-3 epidemic with DHF was frst reported in 2005 (27).
Since then, the expansion of dengue infections with increasing frequency and severity
has been reported from large cities in Pakistan as far north as the North-West Frontier
Province in 2008. Dengue is now a reportable disease in Pakistan. A pertinent issue
for this region is the need to better understand the epidemiological situation of dengue
in areas that are endemic for Crimean-Congo haemorrhagic fever and co-infections of
these pathogens.
Yemen is also affected by the increasing frequency and geographic spread of epidemic
dengue, and the number of cases has risen since the major DEN-3 epidemic that
occurred in the western al-Hudeidah governorate in 2005. In 2008 dengue affected
the southern province of Shabwa.
Since the frst case of DHF died in Jeddah in 1993, Saudi Arabia has reported three
major epidemics: a DEN-2 epidemic in 1994 with 469 cases of dengue, 23 cases of
DHF, two cases of dengue shock syndrome (DSS) and two deaths; a DEN-1 epidemic
in 2006 with 1269 cases of dengue, 27 cases of DHF, 12 cases of DSS and six
Figure 1.3 Outbreaks of dengue fever in the WHO Eastern Mediterranean Region, 1994–2005
DEN-2:
1994: 673 suspected cases, 289 confrmed cases
1995: 136 suspected cases, 6 confrmed cases
1996: 57 suspected cases, 2 confrmed cases
1997: 62 suspected cases, 15 confrmed cases
1998: 31 suspected cases, 0 confrmed cases
1999: 26 suspected cases, 3 confrmed cases
2000: 17 suspected cases, 0 confrmed cases
2001: 7 suspected cases, 0 confrmed cases
2005: 32 suspected (confrmed)
Al-Hudaydah, Mukkala, Shaabwa
(1994, DEN-3, no data);
Al-Hudaydah, Yemen
(September 2000, DEN-2, 653 suspected cases, 80 deaths (CFR = 12%));
Al-Hudaydah, Yemen
(March 2004, 45 suspected cases, 2 deaths);
Al-Hudaydah, Mukkala
(March 2005, 403 suspected cases, 2 deaths);
Somalia (1982, 1993, DEN-2)
Djibouti (1991-1992, DEN-2)
Sudan (No data)
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
10
deaths; and a DEN-3 epidemic in 2008 with 775 cases of dengue, nine cases of
DHF, four cases of DSS and four deaths. A pertinent issue for the IHR is that Jeddah is
a Haj entry point -- as well as being the largest commercial port in the country, and the
largest city with the busiest airport in the western region -- with large numbers of people
coming from high-burden dengue countries such as Indonesia, Malaysia and Thailand,
in addition to the dengue-affected countries of the region.

1.1.5 Dengue in other regions
As described above, dengue is now endemic in all WHO regions except the WHO
European Region. Data available for the European region (http://data.euro.who.int/
cisid/) indicate that most cases in the region have been reported by European Union
member states, either as incidents in overseas territories or importations from endemic
countries. [See also a report from the European Centre for Disease Prevention and
Control (28)]. However, in the past, dengue has been endemic in some Balkan and
Mediterranean countries of the region, and imported cases in the presence of known
mosquito vectors (e.g. Aedes albopictus) cannot exclude future disease spread.
Globally, reporting on dengue cases shows cyclical variation with high epidemic years
and non-epidemic years. Dengue often presents in the form of large outbreaks. There is,
however, also a seasonality of dengue, with outbreaks occurring in different periods of
the year. This seasonality is determined by peak transmission of the disease, infuenced
by characteristics of the host, the vector and the agent.

1.1.6 Dengue case classifcation
Dengue has a wide spectrum of clinical presentations, often with unpredictable clinical
evolution and outcome. While most patients recover following a self-limiting non-severe
clinical course, a small proportion progress to severe disease, mostly characterized by
plasma leakage with or without haemorrhage. Intravenous rehydration is the therapy
of choice; this intervention can reduce the case fatality rate to less than 1% of severe
cases. The group progressing from non-severe to severe disease is diffcult to defne, but
this is an important concern since appropriate treatment may prevent these patients from
developing more severe clinical conditions.
Triage, appropriate treatment, and the decision as to where this treatment should be
given (in a health care facility or at home) are infuenced by the case classifcation for
dengue. This is even more the case during the frequent dengue outbreaks worldwide,
where health services need to be adapted to cope with the sudden surge in demand.
Changes in the epidemiology of dengue, as described in the previous sections, lead
to problems with the use of the existing WHO classifcation. Symptomatic dengue virus
infections were grouped into three categories: undifferentiated fever, dengue fever (DF)
and dengue haemorrhagic fever (DHF). DHF was further classifed into four severity
grades, with grades III and IV being defned as dengue shock syndrome (DSS) (29).
There have been many reports of diffculties in the use of this classifcation (30–32),
which were summarized in a systematic literature review (33). Diffculties in applying
the criteria for DHF in the clinical situation, together with the increase in clinically
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
11
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
severe dengue cases which did not fulfl the strict criteria of DHF, led to the request
for the classifcation to be reconsidered. Currently the classifcation into DF/DHF/DSS
continues to be widely used. (29)

A WHO/TDR-supported prospective clinical multicentre study across dengue-endemic
regions was set up to collect evidence about criteria for classifying dengue into levels of
severity. The study fndings confrmed that, by using a set of clinical and/or laboratory
parameters, one sees a clear-cut difference between patients with severe dengue and
those with non-severe dengue. However, for practical reasons it was desirable to split
the large group of patients with non-severe dengue into two subgroups -- patients with
warning signs and those without them. Criteria for diagnosing dengue (with or without
warning signs) and severe dengue are presented in Figure 1.4. It must be kept in mind
that even dengue patients without warning signs may develop severe dengue.
Expert consensus groups in Latin America (Havana, Cuba, 2007), South-East Asia
(Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, 2007), and at WHO headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland
in 2008 agreed that:
“dengue is one disease entity with different clinical presentations and often with
unpredictable clinical evolution and outcome”;
the classifcation into levels of severity has a high potential for being of practical use in
the clinicians’ decision as to where and how intensively the patient should be observed
and treated (i.e. triage, which is particularly useful in outbreaks), in more consistent
reporting in the national and international surveillance system, and as an end-point
measure in dengue vaccine and drug trials.
Figure 1.4 Suggested dengue case classifcation and levels of severity
Probable dengue
live in /travel to dengue endemic area.
Fever and 2 of the following criteria:
• |uusou vou||u
• |us|
• /c|os u|u ou|s
• ¹ou||ouo| |os| oos|vo
• |ou|ooo|u
• /|, vu|||u su|
Laboratory-confrmed dengue
(important when no sign of plasma leakage)
Warning signs*
• /|uou|u| ou| o| |o|uo||oss
• |o|ss|o|| vou||u
• C||cu| |uu uccuuu|u|o|
• /ucosu| ||oou
• |o||u|u, |os||oss|oss
• |vo| o||u|uuo|| >2 cu
• |u|o|u|o|, |c|ouso | HC¹
concurrent with rapid decrease
in platelet count
*(requiring strict observation and medical
intervention)
Severe plasma leakage
leading to:
• S|oc| |DSS¦
• ||uu uccuuu|u|o| v|| |oso|u|o|,
distress
Severe bleeding
as evaluated by clinician
Severe organ involvement
• |vo| /S¹ o| /|¹ >=]000
• C|S |uou|ou co|scous|oss
• Hou|| u|u o||o| o|uu|s
CRITERIA FOR DENGUE ± WARNING SIGNS
CRITERIA FOR SEVERE DENGUE
DENGUE ± WARNING SIGNS SEVERE DENGUE
1. Severe plasma leakage
2. Severe haemorrhage
3.Severe organ impairment
without
with warning
signs
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
12
This model for classifying dengue has been suggested by an expert group (Geneva,
Switzerland, 2008) and is currently being tested in 18 countries by comparing its
performance in practical settings to the existing WHO case classifcation. The process
will be fnalized in 2010. For practical reasons this guide adapts the distinction between
dengue and severe dengue.
Additionally the guide uses three categories for case management (A, B, C) (Chapter 2).
1.2 BURDEN OF DISEASE
Dengue inficts a signifcant health, economic and social burden on the populations of
endemic areas. Globally the estimated number of disability-adjusted life years (DALYs)
lost to dengue in 2001 was 528 (34). In Puerto Rico, an estimated yearly mean of 580
DALYs per million population were lost to dengue between 1984 and 1994 -- similar
to the cumulative total of DALYs lost to malaria, tuberculosis, intestinal helminths and the
childhood disease cluster in all of Latin America and the Caribbean (35).
The number of cases reported annually to WHO ranged from 0.4 to 1.3 million
in the decade 1996 -- 2005. As an infectious disease, the number of cases varies
substantially from year to year. Underreporting and misdiagnoses are major obstacles to
understanding the full burden of dengue (36).
Available data from South-East Asia is largely derived from hospitalized cases among
children but the burden due to uncomplicated dengue fever is also considerable. In a
prospective study of schoolchildren in northern Thailand the mean annual burden of
dengue over a fve-year period was 465.3 DALYs per million, with non-hospitalized
patients with dengue illness contributing 44 -- 73% of the total (37).
Studies on the cost of dengue were conducted in eight countries in 2005-2006: fve
in the Americas (Brazil, El Salvador, Guatemala, Panama, Venezuela) and three in
Asia (Cambodia, Malaysia, Thailand) (38). As dengue also affected other household
members who helped care for the dengue patient, an average episode represented
14.8 lost days for ambulatory patients and 18.9 days for hospitalized patients. The
overall cost of a non-fatal ambulatory case averaged US$ 514, while the cost of a
non-fatal hospitalized case averaged US$ 1491. On average, a hospitalized case
of dengue cost three times what an ambulatory case costs. Combining the ambulatory
and hospitalized patients and factoring in the risk of death, the overall cost of a dengue
case is US$ 828. Merging this number with the average annual number of offcially
reported dengue cases from the eight countries studied in the period 2001 -- 2005
(532 000 cases) gives a cost of offcially reported dengue of US$ 440 million. This
very conservative estimate ignores not only the underreporting of cases but also the
substantial costs associated with dengue surveillance and vector control programmes.
This study showed that a treated dengue episode imposes substantial costs on both the
health sector and the overall economy. If a vaccine were able to prevent much of this
burden, the economic gains would be substantial.
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
13
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
Children are at a higher risk of severe dengue (39). Intensive care is required for severely
ill patients, including intravenous fuids, blood or plasma transfusion and medicines.
Dengue afficts all levels of society but the burden may be higher among the poorest who
grow up in communities with inadequate water supply and solid waste infrastructure,
and where conditions are most favourable for multiplication of the main vector, Ae.
aegypti.
1.3 DENGUE IN INTERNATIONAL TRAVEL
Travellers play an essential role in the global epidemiology of dengue infections, as
viraemic travellers carry various dengue serotypes and strains into areas with mosquitoes
that can transmit infection (40). Furthermore, travellers perform another essential service
in providing early alerts to events in other parts of the world. Travellers often transport
the dengue virus from areas in tropical developing countries, where limited laboratory
facilities exist, to developed countries with laboratories that can identify virus serotypes
(41). Access to research facilities makes it possible to obtain more detailed information
about a virus, including serotype and even sequencing, when that information would be
valuable. Systematic collection of clinical specimens and banking of serum or isolates
may have future benefts as new technologies become available.
From the data collected longitudinally over a decade by the GeoSentinel Surveillance
Network (www.geosentinel.org) it was possible, for example, to examine month-by-
month morbidity from a sample of 522 cases of dengue as a proportion of all diagnoses
in 24 920 ill returned travellers seen at 33 surveillance sites. Travel-related dengue
demonstrated a defned seasonality for multiple regions (South-East Asia, South Central
Asia, Caribbean, South America) (42).
Information about dengue in travellers, using sentinel surveillance, can be shared rapidly
to alert the international community to the onset of epidemics in endemic areas where
there is no surveillance and reporting of dengue, as well as the geographic spread of
virus serotypes and genotypes to new areas which increases the risk of severe dengue.
The information can also assist clinicians in temperate regions -- most of whom are not
trained in clinical tropical diseases -- to be alert for cases of dengue fever in ill returned
travellers. The clinical manifestations and complications of dengue can also be studied
in travellers (most of them adult and non-immune) as dengue may present differently
compared with the endemic population (most of them in the paediatric age group and
with pre-existing immunity). The disadvantage of such sentinel surveillance, however, is
the lack of a denominator: true risk incidence cannot be determined. An increase in
cases in travellers could be due to increased travel activity to dengue endemic areas,
for instance.
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
14
1.4 TRANSMISSION

1.4.1 The virus
Dengue virus (DEN) is a small single-stranded RNA virus comprising four distinct serotypes
(DEN-1 to -4). These closely related serotypes of the dengue virus belong to the genus
Flavivirus, family Flaviviridae.
The mature particle of the dengue virus is spherical with a diameter of 50nm containing
multiple copies of the three structural proteins, a host-derived membrane bilayer and a
single copy of a positive-sense, single-stranded RNA genome. The genome is cleaved
by host and viral proteases in three structural proteins (capsid, C, prM, the precursor of
membrane, M, protein and envelope, E) and seven nonstructural proteins (NS).
Distinct genotypes or lineages (viruses highly related in nucleotide sequence) have
been identifed within each serotype, highlighting the extensive genetic variability of
the dengue serotypes. Purifying selection appears to be a dominant theme in dengue
viral evolution, however, such that only viruses that are “ft” for both human and vector
are maintained. Among them, “Asian” genotypes of DEN-2 and DEN-3 are frequently
associated with severe disease accompanying secondary dengue infections (43–45).
Intra-host viral diversity (quasispecies) has also been described in human hosts.

1.4.2 The vectors
The various serotypes of the dengue virus are transmitted to humans through the bites
of infected Aedes mosquitoes, principally Ae. aegypti. This mosquito is a tropical
and subtropical species widely distributed around the world, mostly between latitudes
35
0
N and 35
0
S. These geographical limits correspond approximately to a winter
isotherm of 10
0
C. Ae. aegypti has been found as far north as 45
0
N, but such
invasions have occurred during warmer months and the mosquitoes have not survived
the winters. Also, because of lower temperatures, Ae. aegypti is relatively uncommon
above 1000 metres. The immature stages are found in water-flled habitats, mostly in
artifcial containers closely associated with human dwellings and often indoors. Studies
suggest that most female Ae. aegypti may spend their lifetime in or around the houses
where they emerge as adults. This means that people, rather than mosquitoes, rapidly
move the virus within and between communities. Dengue outbreaks have also been
attributed to Aedes albopictus, Aedes polynesiensis and several species of the Aedes
scutellaris complex. Each of these species has a particular ecology, behaviour and
geographical distribution. In recent decades Aedes albopictus has spread from Asia to
Africa, the Americas and Europe, notably aided by the international trade in used tyres
in which eggs are deposited when they contain rainwater. The eggs can remain viable
for many months in the absence of water (Chapter 3).

Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
15
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
1.4.2 The host
After an incubation period of 4--10 days, infection by any of the four virus serotypes
can produce a wide spectrum of illness, although most infections are asymptomatic
or subclinical (Chapter 2). Primary infection is thought to induce lifelong protective
immunity to the infecting serotype (46). Individuals suffering an infection are protected
from clinical illness with a different serotype within 2--3 months of the primary infection
but with no long-term cross-protective immunity.
Individual risk factors determine the severity of disease and include secondary infection,
age, ethnicity and possibly chronic diseases (bronchial asthma, sickle cell anaemia and
diabetes mellitus). Young children in particular may be less able than adults to compensate
for capillary leakage and are consequently at greater risk of dengue shock.
Seroepidemiological studies in Cuba and Thailand consistently support the role of
secondary heterotypic infection as a risk factor for severe dengue, although there are
a few reports of severe cases associated with primary infection (47–50). The time
interval between infections and the particular viral sequence of infections may also be of
importance. For instance, a higher case fatality rate was observed in Cuba when DEN-
2 infection followed a DEN-1 infection after an interval of 20 years compared to an
interval of four years. Severe dengue is also regularly observed during primary infection
of infants born to dengue-immune mothers. Antibody-dependent enhancement (ADE) of
infection has been hypothesized (51,52) as a mechanism to explain severe dengue in
the course of a secondary infection and in infants with primary infections. In this model,
non-neutralizing, cross-reactive antibodies raised during a primary infection, or acquired
passively at birth, bind to epitopes on the surface of a heterologous infecting virus and
facilitate virus entry into Fc-receptor-bearing cells. The increased number of infected cells
is predicted to result in a higher viral burden and induction of a robust host immune
response that includes infammatory cytokines and mediators, some of which may
contribute to capillary leakage. During a secondary infection, cross-reactive memory T
cells are also rapidly activated, proliferate, express cytokines and die by apoptosis in a
manner that generally correlates with overall disease severity. Host genetic determinants
might infuence the clinical outcome of infection (53,54), though most studies have been
unable to adequately address this issue. Studies in the American region show the rates
of severe dengue to be lower in individuals of African ancestry than those in other ethnic
groups. (54)
The dengue virus enters via the skin while an infected mosquito is taking a bloodmeal.
During the acute phase of illness the virus is present in the blood and its clearance
from this compartment generally coincides with defervescence. Humoral and cellular
immune responses are considered to contribute to virus clearance via the generation
of neutralizing antibodies and the activation of CD4
+
and CD8
+
T lymphocytes. In
addition, innate host defence may limit infection by the virus. After infection, serotype-
specifc and cross-reactive antibodies and CD4
+
and CD8
+
T cells remain measurable
for years.
Plasma leakage, haemoconcentration and abnormalities in homeostasis characterize
severe dengue. The mechanisms leading to severe illness are not well defned but the
immune response, the genetic background of the individual and the virus characteristics
may all contribute to severe dengue.
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
16
Recent data suggest that endothelial cell activation could mediate plasma leakage
(55,56). Plasma leakage is thought to be associated with functional rather than
destructive effects on endothelial cells. Activation of infected monocytes and T cells, the
complement system and the production of mediators, monokines, cytokines and soluble
receptors may also be involved in endothelial cell dysfunction.
Thrombocytopenia may be associated with alterations in megakaryocytopoieses by
the infection of human haematopoietic cells and impaired progenitor cell growth,
resulting in platelet dysfunction (platelet activation and aggregation), increased
destruction or consumption (peripheral sequestration and consumption). Haemorrhage
may be a consequence of the thrombocytopenia and associated platelet dysfunction
or disseminated intravascular coagulation. In summary, a transient and reversible
imbalance of infammatory mediators, cytokines and chemokines occurs during severe
dengue, probably driven by a high early viral burden, and leading to dysfunction of
vascular endothelial cells, derangement of the haemocoagulation system then to plasma
leakage, shock and bleeding.

1.4.4 Transmission of the dengue virus
Humans are the main amplifying host of the virus. Dengue virus circulating in the blood of
viraemic humans is ingested by female mosquitoes during feeding. The virus then infects
the mosquito mid-gut and subsequently spreads systemically over a period of 8--12 days.
After this extrinsic incubation period, the virus can be transmitted to other humans during
subsequent probing or feeding. The extrinsic incubation period is infuenced in part
by environmental conditions, especially ambient temperature. Thereafter the mosquito
remains infective for the rest of its life. Ae. aegypti is one of the most effcient vectors
for arboviruses because it is highly anthropophilic, frequently bites several times before
completing oogenesis, and thrives in close proximity to humans. Vertical transmission
(transovarial transmission) of dengue virus has been demonstrated in the laboratory
but rarely in the feld. The signifcance of vertical transmission for maintenance of the
virus is not well understood. Sylvatic dengue strains in some parts of Africa and Asia
may also lead to human infection, causing mild illness. Several factors can infuence
the dynamics of virus transmission -- including environmental and climate factors, host-
pathogen interactions and population immunological factors. Climate directly infuences
the biology of the vectors and thereby their abundance and distribution; it is consequently
an important determinant of vector-borne disease epidemics.
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
17
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
REFERENCES
1. WHO. Dengue and dengue haemorrhagic fever. Factsheet N
o
117, revised May
2008. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2008 (http://www.who.int/mediacentre/
factsheets/fs117/en/).
2. WHO. Dengue fever and dengue haemorrhagic fever prevention and control. World
Health Assembly Resolution WHA55.17, adopted by the 55th World Health Assembly,
2002 (http://www.who.int/gb/ebwha/pdf_fles/WHA55/ewha5517.pdf).
3. WHO. Revision of the International Health Regulations. World Health Assembly
Resolution WHA58.3, adopted by the 58th World Health Assembly, 2005 (http://
www.who.int/gb/ebwha/pdf_fles/WHA58/WHA58_3-en.pdf).
4. WHO/SEARO. Concrete measure key in controlling dengue in South East Asia.
Press Release SEA/PR/1479. New Delhi, World Health Organization Regional Offce
for South-East Asia, 2008. (http://www.searo.who.int/EN/Section316/Section503/
Section2463_14619.htm).
5. WHO. Denguenet in India. Weekly Epidemiological Record, 2004, 79(21):201--203
(http://whqlibdoc.who.int/wer/WHO_WER_2004/79_201-204(n
o
21).pdf).
6. WHO/WPRO. Dengue fever and dengue haemorrhagic fever prevention and
control. Regional Committee resolution WPR/RC59.R6, adopted by the WHO Regional
Committee for the Western Pacifc, 2008
(http://www.wpro.who.int/rcm/en/rc59/rc_resolutions/WPR_RC59_R6.htm).
7. PAHO. Plan continental de ampliación e intensifcación del combate al Aedes
aegypti. Informe de un grupo de trabajo, Caracas, Venezuela. Abril 1997. Washington,
DC, Pan American Health Organization, 1997 (Document OPS/HCP/HCT/90/97,
in Spanish) (http://www.paho.org/Spanish/AD/DPC/CD/doc407.pdf).
8. PAHO. Number of reported cases of dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever (DHF),
Region of the Americas (by country and subregion). Washington, DC, Pan American Health
Organization, 2008. (http://www.paho.org/english/ad/dpc/cd/dengue.htm).
9. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Travel-associated dengue -- United
States, 2005. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 2006, 55(25):700--702.
10. Ramos MM et al. Dengue Serosurvey Working Group. Epidemic dengue and
dengue hemorrhagic fever at the Texas-Mexico border: results of a household-based
seroepidemiologic survey, December 2005. American Journal of Tropical Medicine
and Hygiene, 2008, 78(3):364--369.
11. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Dengue hemorrhagic fever -- U.S.-
Mexico border, 2005. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 2007, 56(31):785--
789. Erratum in: Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 2007, 56(32):822.
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
18
12. PAHO. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever. Regional Committee resolution
CD43.R4, adopted at the 53rd session of the Regional Committee for the Americas,
43rd Directing Council. Washington, DC, Pan American Health Organization, 2001
(http://www.paho.org/english/hcp/hct/vbd/new-generation-resolutions.pdf).
13. PAHO. Dengue. Regional Committee resolution CD44.R9, adopted at the 55th
session of the Regional Committee for the Americas, 44th Directing Council. Washington,
DC, Pan American Health Organization, 2003
(http://www.paho.org/english/gov/cd/cd44-r9-e.pdf).
14. PAHO. Grupo de Trabajo sobre Dengue. Estrategia de Gestión Integrada para la
prevención y control del dengue en la Región de las Américas. 2.ª versión. Santa Cruz
de la Sierra, Bolivia. Pan American Health Organization, 2003 (Document OPS/
HDM/CD/440.07, in Spanish).
15. PAHO. Pan American Health Organization. Prevención y control del dengue en las
Américas. Resolución CSP27.R15. 27. a Conferencia Sanitaria Panamericana CSP27.
R15 (Esp.) 1--5 de octubre de 2007 (in Spanish).
16. Nathan MB, Dayal-Drager R. Recent epidemiological trends, the global strategy
and public health advances in dengue. Working paper 3.1 in: Report of the Scientifc
Working Group meeting on Dengue, Geneva, 1–5 October 2006. Geneva, World
Health Organization, Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases,
2007 (pp 29--34) (Document TDR/SWG/07).
17. Kokernot RH, Smithburn KC, Weinbren MP. Neutralising antibodies to arthropod-
borne viruses in human and animals in the Union of South Africa.
Journal of Immunology, 1956, 77:313–322.
18. Blackburn NK, Rawal R. Dengue fever imported from India: a report of 3 cases.
South African Medical Journal, 1987, 21:386–287.
19. Boisier P et al. Dengue 1 epidemic in the Grand Comoro Island (Federal Islamic
Republic of the Comores), March-May 1993. Annales de la Société Belge de Médecine
Tropicale, 1993, 74:217–229.
20. Gubler DJ et al. Dengue 3 Virus Transmission in Africa. American Journal of Tropical
Medicine and Hygiene, 1986, 35(6):1280--1284.
21. Carey DE et al. Dengue virus from febrile patients in Nigeria 1964–68. Lancet,
1971, 1:105–106.
22. Gonzalez JP et al. Dengue in Burkina Faso: seasonal epidemics in the urban area
of Ouagadougu. Bulletin de la Société de pathologie exotique et de ses fliales, 1985,
78:7–14.
23. Diallo M et al. Amplifcation of the sylvatic cycle of dengue virus type 2, Senegal,
1999--2000: entomologic fndings and epidemiologic considerations. Emerging
Infectious Diseases (serial online), 2003, March (date cited). Accessible at http://
www.cdc.gov/ncidod/EID/vol9no3/02-0219.htm.
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
19
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
24. WHO/EMRO. World Health Organization, Regional Offce for the Eastern
Mediterranean, Division of Communicable Disease Control, Newsletter, I2005, 6:7–8.
(http://www.emro.who.int/pdf/dcdnewsletter6.pdf).
25. Hyams KC et al. Evaluation of febrile patients in Port Sudan, Sudan: isolation of
dengue virus. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 1986, 35:860–
865.
26. Rodier GR et al. Epidemic dengue 2 in the city of Djibouti 1991–1992. Transactions
of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 1996, 90:237–240.
27. Bushra J. Dengue Virus Serotype 3, Karachi, Pakistan. Emerging Infectious Diseases,
2007, 13(1).
28. European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control. Dengue worldwide: an
overview of the current situation and implications for Europe, Eurosurveillance, 2007,
12(25). (http://www.eurosurveillance.org/ViewArticle.aspx?PublicationType=W&Vol
ume=12&Issue=25&OrderNumber=1).
29. WHO. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control,
2nd ed. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1997.
30. Guha-Sapir D, Schimmer B. Dengue fever: new paradigms for a changing
epidemiology. Emerging Themes in Epidemiology, 2005 (Open access journal, http://
www.ete-online.com/content/2/1/1).
31. Deen J et al. The WHO dengue classifcation and case defnitions: time for a
reassessment. Lancet, 2006, 368:170--173.
32. Rigau-Perez J. Severe dengue: the need for new case defnitions. Lancet Infectious
Diseases, 2006, 6:297–302.
33. Bandyopadhyay S, Lum LC, Kroeger A. Classifying dengue: a review of the
diffculties in using the WHO case classifcation for dengue haemorrhagic fever. Tropical
Medicine and International Health, 2006, 11(8):1238--1255.
34. Cattand P et al. Tropical diseases lacking adequate control measures: dengue,
leishmaniasis, and African trypanosomiasis. Disease control priorities in developing
countries, 2nd ed. New York, NY, Oxford University Press, 2006 (pp 451–466).
35. Meltzer MI et al. Using disability-adjusted life years to assess the economic impact
of dengue in Puerto Rico: 1984–1994. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and
Hygiene, 1998, 59:265–271.
36. Suaya JA, Shepard DS, Beatty ME. Dengue burden of disease and costs of illness.
Working paper 3.2 in: Report of the Scientifc Working Group meeting on Dengue, Geneva,
1–5 October 2006. Geneva, World Health Organization, Special Programme for Research
and Training in Tropical Diseases, 2007 (pp 35--49) (Document TDR/SWG/07).
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
20
37. Anderson K et al. Burden of symptomatic dengue infection in children at primary
school in Thailand: a prospective study. Lancet, 2007, 369(9571):1452--1459.
38. Suaya JA, Shepard DS, Siqueira JB, Martelli CT, Lum LCS, Tan LH, Kongsin S,
Jiamton S, Garrido F, Montoya R, Armien B, Huy R, Castillo L, Caram M, Sah BK,
Sughayyar R, Tyo KR, Halstead SB. Costs of dengue cases in 8 countries in the Americas
and Asia: A prospective study. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene,
2009, 80:846--855.
39. Guzman MG. Effect of age on outcome of secondary dengue 2 infections.
International Journal of Infectious Diseases, 2002, 6(2):118--124.
40. Wilder-Smith A, Wilson ME. Sentinel surveillance for dengue: international travellers
(unpublished report).
41. Wilson ME. The traveler and emerging infections: sentinel, courier, transmitter.
Journal of Applied Microbiology, 2003, 94:1S--11S.
42. Schwartz E. Seasonality, annual trends, and characteristics of dengue among ill
returned travelers, 1997–2006. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 2008, 14(7).
43. Leitmeyer KC. Dengue virus structural differences that correlate with pathogenesis.
Journal of Virology, 1999, 73(6):4738--4747.
44. Lanciotti RS et al. Molecular evolution and epidemiology of dengue-3 viruses.
Journal of General Virology, 1994, 75(Pt 1):65--75.
45. Messer WB. Emergence and global spread of a dengue serotype 3, subtype III
virus. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 2003, 9(7):800--809.
46. Halstead SB. Etiologies of the experimental dengues of Siler and Simmons. American
Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 1974, 23:974--982.
47. Halstead SB, Nimmannitya S, Cohen SN. Observations related to pathogenesis
of dengue hemorrhagic fever. IV. Relation of disease severity to antibody response and
virus recovered. Yale Journal of Biology and Medicine, 1970, 42:311–328.
48. Sangkawibha N et al. Risk factors in dengue shock syndrome: a prospective
epidemiologic study in Rayong, Thailand. I. The 1980 outbreak. American Journal of
Epidemiology, 1984;120:653--669.
49. Guzman MG et al. Epidemiologic studies on dengue in Santiago de Cuba, 1997.
American Journal of Epidemiology, 2000, 152(9):793--799.
50. Halstead SB. Pathophysiology and pathogenesis of dengue haemorrhagic fever. In:
Thongchareon P, ed. Monograph on dengue/dengue haemorrhagic fever. New Delhi,
World Health Organization, Regional Offce for South-East Asia, 1993 (pp 80--103).
Chapter 1: Epidemiology, burden of disease and transmission
21
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

1
51. Halstead SB. Antibody, macrophages, dengue virus infection, shock, and
hemorrhage: a pathogenetic cascade. Reviews of Infectious Diseases, 1989, 11(Suppl
4):S830--S839.
52. Halstead SB, Heinz FX. Dengue virus: molecular basis of cell entry and pathogenesis,
25-27 June 2003, Vienna, Austria. Vaccine, 2005, 23(7):849--856.
53. Kouri GP, Guzman MG. Dengue haemorrhagic fever/dengue shock syndrome:
lessons from the Cuban epidemic, 1981. Bulletin of the World Health Organization,
1989, 67(4):375--380.
54. Sierra B, Kouri G, Guzman MG. Race: a risk factor for dengue hemorrhagic fever.
Archives of Virology, 2007, 152(3):533--542.
55. Avirutnan P et al. Dengue virus infection of human endothelial cells leads to
chemokine production, complement activation, and apoptosis. Journal of Immunology,
1998, 161:6338--6346.
56. Cardier JE et al. Proinfammatory factors present in sera from patients with acute
dengue infection induce activation and apoptosis of human microvascular endothelial
cells: possible role of TNF-alpha in endothelial cell damage in dengue. Cytokine,
2005, 30(6):359--365.
22
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
23
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
CHAPTER 2

CLINICAL MANAGEMENT AND
DELIVERY OF CLINICAL SERVICES
24
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
25
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
CHAPTER 2. CLINICAL MANAGEMENT AND DELIVERY OF CLINICAL
SERVICES
2.1 OVERVIEW
Dengue infection is a systemic and dynamic disease. It has a wide clinical spectrum
that includes both severe and non-severe clinical manifestations (1). After the incubation
period, the illness begins abruptly and is followed by the three phases -- febrile, critical
and recovery (Figure 2.1).
For a disease that is complex in its manifestations, management is relatively simple,
inexpensive and very effective in saving lives so long as correct and timely interventions
are instituted. The key is early recognition and understanding of the clinical problems
during the different phases of the disease, leading to a rational approach to case
management and a good clinical outcome. An overview of good and bad clinical
practices is given in Textbox A.
Activities (triage and management decisions) at the primary and secondary care levels
(where patients are frst seen and evaluated) are critical in determining the clinical
outcome of dengue. A well-managed front-line response not only reduces the number
of unnecessary hospital admissions but also saves the lives of dengue patients. Early
notifcation of dengue cases seen in primary and secondary care is crucial for identifying
outbreaks and initiating an early response (Chapter 5). Differential diagnosis needs to
be considered (Textbox B).

Figure 2.1 The course of dengue illness
*
Days of illness
Temperature
Potential clinical issues
Laboratory changes
Serology and virology
Dehydration Shock Reabsorption
bleeding fuid overload
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Organ impairment
Hematocrit
Platelet
Viraemia
IgM/IgG
Febrile Critical Recovery phases Course of dengue illness:
40°
* Source: adapted from Yip (2) by chapter authors.
26
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
2.1.1 Febrile phase
Patients typically develop high-grade fever suddenly. This acute febrile phase usually
lasts 2–7 days and is often accompanied by facial fushing, skin erythema, generalized
body ache, myalgia, arthralgia and headache (1). Some patients may have sore
throat, injected pharynx and conjunctival injection. Anorexia, nausea and vomiting
are common. It can be diffcult to distinguish dengue clinically from non-dengue febrile
diseases in the early febrile phase. A positive tourniquet test in this phase increases the
probability of dengue (3,4). In addition, these clinical features are indistinguishable
between severe and non-severe dengue cases. Therefore monitoring for warning signs
and other clinical parameters (Textbox C) is crucial to recognizing progression to the
critical phase.
Mild haemorrhagic manifestations like petechiae and mucosal membrane bleeding
(e.g. nose and gums) may be seen (3,5). Massive vaginal bleeding (in women of
childbearing age) and gastrointestinal bleeding may occur during this phase but is not
common (5). The liver is often enlarged and tender after a few days of fever (3). The
earliest abnormality in the full blood count is a progressive decrease in total white cell
count, which should alert the physician to a high probability of dengue.

2.1.2 Critical phase
Around the time of defervescence, when the temperature drops to 37.5–38
o
C or less
and remains below this level, usually on days 3–7 of illness, an increase in capillary
permeability in parallel with increasing haematocrit levels may occur (6,7). This marks
the beginning of the critical phase. The period of clinically signifcant plasma leakage
usually lasts 24–48 hours.
Progressive leukopenia (3) followed by a rapid decrease in platelet count usually precedes
plasma leakage. At this point patients without an increase in capillary permeability will
improve, while those with increased capillary permeability may become worse as a
result of lost plasma volume. The degree of plasma leakage varies. Pleural effusion and
ascites may be clinically detectable depending on the degree of plasma leakage and
the volume of fuid therapy. Hence chest x-ray and abdominal ultrasound can be useful
tools for diagnosis. The degree of increase above the baseline haematocrit often refects
the severity of plasma leakage.
Shock occurs when a critical volume of plasma is lost through leakage. It is often
preceded by warning signs. The body temperature may be subnormal when shock
occurs. With prolonged shock, the consequent organ hypoperfusion results in progressive
organ impairment, metabolic acidosis and disseminated intravascular coagulation. This
in turn leads to severe haemorrhage causing the haematocrit to decrease in severe
shock. Instead of the leukopenia usually seen during this phase of dengue, the total
white cell count may increase in patients with severe bleeding. In addition, severe organ
impairment such as severe hepatitis, encephalitis or myocarditis and/or severe bleeding
may also develop without obvious plasma leakage or shock (8).
Those who improve after defervescence are said to have non-severe dengue. Some
patients progress to the critical phase of plasma leakage without defervescence and, in
27
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
these patients, changes in the full blood count should be used to guide the onset of the
critical phase and plasma leakage.
Those who deteriorate will manifest with warning signs. This is called dengue with
warning signs (Textbox C). Cases of dengue with warning signs will probably recover
with early intravenous rehydration. Some cases will deteriorate to severe dengue (see
below).

2.1.3 Recovery phase
If the patient survives the 24–48 hour critical phase, a gradual reabsorption of
extravascular compartment fuid takes place in the following 48–72 hours. General
well-being improves, appetite returns, gastrointestinal symptoms abate, haemodynamic
status stabilizes and diuresis ensues. Some patients may have a rash of “isles of white
in the sea of red” (9). Some may experience generalized pruritus. Bradycardia and
electrocardiographic changes are common during this stage.
The haematocrit stabilizes or may be lower due to the dilutional effect of reabsorbed
fuid. White blood cell count usually starts to rise soon after defervescence but the
recovery of platelet count is typically later than that of white blood cell count.
Respiratory distress from massive pleural effusion and ascites will occur at any time if
excessive intravenous fuids have been administered. During the critical and/or recovery
phases, excessive fuid therapy is associated with pulmonary oedema or congestive
heart failure.
The various clinical problems during the different phases of dengue can be summarized
as in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1 Febrile, critical and recovery phases in dengue
1 Febrile phase Dehydration; high fever may cause neurological disturbances and febrile
seizures in young children
2 Critical phase Shock from plasma leakage; severe haemorrhage; organ impairment
3 Recovery phase Hypervolaemia (only if intravenous fuid therapy has been excessive and/or
has extended into this period)
2.1.4 Severe dengue
Severe dengue is defned by one or more of the following: (i) plasma leakage that may
lead to shock (dengue shock) and/or fuid accumulation, with or without respiratory
distress, and/or (ii) severe bleeding, and/or (iii) severe organ impairment.
As dengue vascular permeability progresses, hypovolaemia worsens and results in
shock. It usually takes place around defervescence, usually on day 4 or 5 (range
days 3–7) of illness, preceded by the warning signs. During the initial stage of shock,
the compensatory mechanism which maintains a normal systolic blood pressure also
produces tachycardia and peripheral vasoconstriction with reduced skin perfusion,
28
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
resulting in cold extremities and delayed capillary refll time. Uniquely, the diastolic
pressure rises towards the systolic pressure and the pulse pressure narrows as the
peripheral vascular resistance increases. Patients in dengue shock often remain conscious
and lucid. The inexperienced physician may measure a normal systolic pressure and
misjudge the critical state of the patient. Finally, there is decompensation and both
pressures disappear abruptly. Prolonged hypotensive shock and hypoxia may lead to
multi-organ failure and an extremely diffcult clinical course (Textbox D).
The patient is considered to have shock if the pulse pressure (i.e. the difference between
the systolic and diastolic pressures) is ≤ 20 mm Hg in children or he/she has signs
of poor capillary perfusion (cold extremities, delayed capillary refll, or rapid pulse
rate). In adults, the pulse pressure of ≤ 20 mm Hg may indicate a more severe shock.
Hypotension is usually associated with prolonged shock which is often complicated by
major bleeding.
Patients with severe dengue may have coagulation abnormalities, but these are usually not
suffcient to cause major bleeding. When major bleeding does occur, it is almost always
associated with profound shock since this, in combination with thrombocytopaenia,
hypoxia and acidosis, can lead to multiple organ failure and advanced disseminated
intravascular coagulation. Massive bleeding may occur without prolonged shock in
instances when acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin), ibuprofen or corticosteroids have been
taken.

Unusual manifestations, including acute liver failure and encephalopathy, may be
present, even in the absence of severe plasma leakage or shock. Cardiomyopathy
and encephalitis are also reported in a few dengue cases. However, most deaths from
dengue occur in patients with profound shock, particularly if the situation is complicated
by fuid overload.
Severe dengue should be considered if the patient is from an area of dengue risk
presenting with fever of 2–7 days plus any of the following features:
• ¹|o|o s ovuo|co o| o|usuu |ou|uuo suc| us
– high or progressively rising haematocrit;
– pleural effusions or ascites;
– circulatory compromise or shock (tachycardia, cold and clammy extremities,
capillary refll time greater than three seconds, weak or undetectable pulse,
narrow pulse pressure or, in late shock, unrecordable blood pressure).
• ¹|o|o s su||cu|| ||oou|u
• ¹|o|o s u| u||o|ou |ovo| o| co|scous|oss ||o||u|u, o| |os||oss|oss couu
convulsions).
• ¹|o|o s sovo|o uus||o||os||u| |vo|vouo|| |oo|ss|o|| vou||u |c|ous|u o|
intense abdominal pain, jaundice).
• ¹|o|o s sovo|o o|uu| uou|uo|| |ucu|o |vo| |u|u|o ucu|o |o|u| |u|u|o
encephalopathy or encephalitis, or other unusual manifestations, cardiomyopathy)
or other unusual manifestations.
29
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
2.2 DELIVERY OF CLINICAL SERVICES AND CASE MANAGEMENT
2.2.1 Introduction
Reducing dengue mortality requires an organized process that guarantees early
recognition of the disease, and its management and referral when necessary. The key
component of the process is the delivery of good clinical services at all levels of health
care, from primary to tertiary levels. Most dengue patients recover without requiring
hospital admission while some may progress to severe disease. Simple but effective
triage principles and management decisions applied at the primary and secondary care
levels, where patients are frst seen and evaluated, can help in identifying those at risk
of developing severe disease and needing hospital care. This should be complemented
by prompt and appropriate management of severe dengue in referral centres.
Activities at the frst level of care should focus on:
– recognizing that the febrile patient could have dengue;
– notifying early to the public health authorities that the patient is a suspected case
of dengue;
– managing patients in the early febrile phase of dengue;
– recognizing the early stage of plasma leakage or critical phase and initiating
fuid therapy;
– recognizing patients with warning signs who need to be referred for admission
and/or intravenous fuid therapy to a secondary health care facility;
– recognizing and managing severe plasma leakage and shock, severe bleeding
and severe organ impairment promptly and adequately.

2.2.2. Primary and secondary health care centres
At primary and secondary levels, health care facilities are responsible for emergency/
ambulatory triage assessment and treatment.
Triage is the process of rapidly screening patients soon after their arrival in the hospital
or health facility in order to identify those with severe dengue (who require immediate
emergency treatment to avert death), those with warning signs (who should be given
priority while waiting in the queue so that they can be assessed and treated without
delay), and non-urgent cases (who have neither severe dengue nor warning signs).
During the early febrile phase, it is often not possible to predict clinically whether a patient
with dengue will progress to severe disease. Various forms of severe manifestations
may unfold only as the disease progresses through the critical phase, but the warning
signs are good indicators of a higher risk of developing severe dengue. Therefore, the
patient should have daily outpatient health care assessments for disease progression
with careful checking for manifestations of severe dengue and warning signs.
Health care workers at the frst levels of care should apply a stepwise approach, as
suggested in Table 2.2.
30
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Table 2.2 A stepwise approach to the management of dengue
Step I. Overall assessment
I.1 History, including information on symptoms, past medical and family history
I.2 Physical examination, including full physical and mental assessment
I.3 Investigation, including routine laboratory and dengue-specifc laboratory
Step II. Diagnosis, assessment of disease phase and severity
Step III. Management
III.1 Disease notifcation
III.2 Management decisions. Depending on the clinical manifestations and other circumstances,
patients may:
– be sent home (Group A);
– be referred for in-hospital management (Group B);
– require emergency treatment and urgent referral (Group C).
Section 2.3 gives treatment recommendations for the groups A–C.

2.2.3 Referral centres
Referral centres receiving severely ill dengue patients must be able to give prompt
attention to referred cases. Beds should be made available to those patients who meet
the admission criteria, even if elective cases have to be deferred. If possible, there
should be a designated area to cohort dengue patients, and a high-dependency unit
for closer monitoring of those with shock. These units should be staffed by doctors
and nurses who are trained to recognize high-risk patients and to institute appropriate
treatment and monitoring.
A number of criteria may be used to decide when to transfer a patient to a high-
dependency unit. These include:
– early presentation with shock (on days 2 or 3 of illness);
– severe plasma leakage and/or shock;
– undetectable pulse and blood pressure;
– severe bleeding;
– fuid overload;
– organ impairment (such as hepatic damage, cardiomyopathy, encephalopathy,
encephalitis and other unusual complications).

2.2.4 Resources needed
In the detection and management of dengue, a range of resources is needed to deliver
good clinical services at all levels. Resources include (10):
• Human resources: The most important resource is trained doctors and nurses.
Adequate health personnel should be allocated to the frst level of care to help
in triage and emergency management. If possible, dengue units staffed by
31
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
experienced personnel could be set up at referral centres to receive referred
cases, particularly during dengue outbreaks, when the number of personnel main
need to be increased.
• Special area: A well equipped and well staffed area should be designated for
giving immediate and transitory medical care to patients who require intravenous
fuid therapy until they can be transferred to a ward or referral health facility.
• Laboratory resources: The most important laboratory investigation is that of serial
haematocrit levels and full blood counts. These investigations should be easily
accessible from the health centre. Results should be available within two hours
in severe cases of dengue. If no proper laboratory services are available, the
minimum standard is the point-of-care testing of haematocrit by capillary (fnger
prick) blood sample with the use of a microcentrifuge.
• Consumables: Intravenous fuids such as crystalloids, colloids and intravenous
giving sets should be available.
• Drugs: There should be adequate stocks of antipyretics and oral rehydration salts.
In severe cases, additional drugs are necessary (vitamin K1, Ca gluconate,
NaHCO
3
, glucose, furosemide, KCl solution, vasopressor, and inotropes).
• Communication: Facilities should be provided for easy communication, especially
between secondary and tertiary levels of care and laboratories, including
consultation by telephone.
• Blood bank: Blood and blood products will be required by only a small
percentage of patients but should be made readily available to those who need
them.

2.2.5 Education and training
To ensure the presence of adequate staffng at all levels, the education and training
of doctors, nurses, auxiliary health care workers and laboratory staff are priorities.
Educational programmes that are customized for different levels of health care and that
refect local capacity should be supported and implemented widely. The educational
programmes should develop capacities for effective triage and should improve
recognition, clinical management and laboratory diagnosis of dengue.
National committees should monitor and evaluate clinical management and outcomes.
Review committees at different levels (e.g. national, state, district, hospital) should review
all dengue deaths, and, if possible, all cases of severe dengue, evaluate the health care
delivery system, and provide feedback to doctors on how to improve care.
In dengue-endemic countries, the knowledge of dengue, the vectors and transmission
of disease should be incorporated into the school curriculum. The population should
also be educated about dengue in order to empower patients and their families in their
own care – so that they are prepared to seek medical care at the right time, avoid self-
medication, identify skin bleedings, consider the day of defervescence (and during 48
hours) as the time when complications usually occur, and look for warning signs such as
intense and continuous abdominal pain and frequent vomiting.
The mass media can give an important contribution if they are correctly briefed.
Workshops and other meetings with journalists, editors, artists and executives can
32
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
contribute to drawing up the best strategy for health education and communication
without alarming the public.
During dengue epidemics, nursing and medical students together with community
activists can visit homes with the double purpose of providing health education and
actively tracing dengue cases. This has been shown to be feasible, inexpensive and
effective (11) and must be coordinated with the primary health care units. It is useful
to have printed information about dengue illness and the warning signs for distribution
to members of the community. Medical care providers must include health education
activities such as disease prevention in their daily work.
2.3 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR TREATMENT
2.3.1 A stepwise approach to the management of dengue (see Table 2.2)
2.3.1.1 Step I—Overall assessment
History
The history should include:
– date of onset of fever/illness;
– quantity of oral intake;
– assessment for warning signs (Textbox C);
– diarrhoea;
– change in mental state/seizure/dizziness;
– urine output (frequency, volume and time of last voiding);
– other important relevant histories, such as family or neighbourhood dengue,
travel to dengue endemic areas, co-existing conditions (e.g. infancy,
pregnancy, obesity, diabetes mellitus, hypertension), jungle trekking and
swimming in waterfall (consider leptospirosis, typhus, malaria), recent
unprotected sex or drug abuse (consider acute HIV seroconversion illness).
Physical examination
The physical examination should include:
– assessment of mental state;
– assessment of hydration status;
– assessment of haemodynamic status (Textbox D);
– checking for tachypnoea/acidotic breathing/pleural effusion;
– checking for abdominal tenderness/hepatomegaly/ascites;
– examination for rash and bleeding manifestations;
– tourniquet test (repeat if previously negative or if there is no bleeding
manifestation).
Investigation
A full blood count should be done at the frst visit. A haematocrit test in the early febrile
phase establishes the patient’s own baseline haematocrit. A decreasing white blood
cell count makes dengue very likely. A rapid decrease in platelet count in parallel with
a rising haematocrit compared to the baseline is suggestive of progress to the plasma
33
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
leakage/critical phase of the disease. In the absence of the patient’s baseline, age-specifc
population haematocrit levels could be used as a surrogate during the critical phase.
Laboratory tests should be performed to confrm the diagnosis. However, it is not necessary
for the acute management of patients, except in cases with unusual manifestations (Chapter
4).
Additional tests should be considered as indicated (and if available). These should include
tests of liver function, glucose, serum electrolytes, urea and creatinine, bicarbonate or
lactate, cardiac enzymes, ECG and urine specifc gravity.
2.3.1.2 Step II—Diagnosis, assessment of disease phase and severity
On the basis of evaluations of the history, physical examination and/or full blood count
and haematocrit, clinicians should be able to determine whether the disease is dengue,
which phase it is in (febrile, critical or recovery), whether there are warning signs, the
hydration and haemodynamic status of the patient, and whether the patient requires
admission (Textboxes E and F).
2.3.1.3 Step III—Management
Disease notifcation
In dengue-endemic countries, cases of suspected, probable and confrmed dengue should
be notifed as soon as possible so that appropriate public health measures can be initiated
(Chapter 5). Laboratory confrmation is not necessary before notifcation, but should be
obtained. In non-endemic countries, usually only confrmed cases will be notifed.
Suggested criteria for early notifcation of suspected cases are that the patient lives in or
has travelled to a dengue-endemic area, has fever for three days or more, has low or
decreasing white cell counts, and/or has thrombocytopaenia ± positive tourniquet test.
In dengue-endemic countries, the later the notifcation, the more diffcult it is to prevent
dengue transmission.
Management decisions
Depending on the clinical manifestations and other circumstances, patients may (12) be sent
home (Group A), be referred for in-hospital management (Group B), or require emergency
treatment and urgent referral (Group C).
2.3.2 Treatment according to groups A–C
2.3.2.1 Group A – patients who may be sent home (see the home care card for dengue
in Textbox G)
These are patients who are able to tolerate adequate volumes of oral fuids and pass urine
at least once every six hours, and do not have any of the warning signs, particularly when
fever subsides.
34
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Ambulatory patients should be reviewed daily for disease progression (decreasing white
blood cell count, defervescence and warning signs) until they are out of the critical
period. Those with stable haematocrit can be sent home after being advised to return to
the hospital immediately if they develop any of the warning signs and to adhere to the
following action plan:
• ||cou|uuo o|u| ||u|o o| o|u| |o|,u|u|o| so|u|o| |C|S¦ ||u| uco u|u o||o| |uus
containing electrolytes and sugar to replace losses from fever and vomiting.
Adequate oral fuid intake may be able to reduce the number of hospitalizations
(13). [Caution: fuids containing sugar/glucose may exacerbate hyperglycaemia
of physiological stress from dengue and diabetes mellitus.]
• Cvo ou|uco|uuo| |o| |u| |ovo| | ||o ou|o|| s u|cou|o||u||o ¹|o ||o|vu| o|
paracetamol dosing should not be less than six hours. Tepid sponge if the patient
still has high fever. Do not give acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin), ibuprofen or other
non-steroidal anti-infammatory agents (NSAIDs) as these drugs may aggravate
gastritis or bleeding. Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) may be associated with Reye’s
Syndrome.
• ||s||uc| ||o cu|ouvo|s ||u| ||o ou|o|| s|ou|u |o ||ouu|| |o |oso|u| uuouu|o|,
if any of the following occur: no clinical improvement, deterioration around the
time of defervescence, severe abdominal pain, persistent vomiting, cold and
clammy extremities, lethargy or irritability/restlessness, bleeding (e.g. black
stools or coffee-ground vomiting), not passing urine for more than 4–6 hours.
Patients who are sent home should be monitored daily by health care providers
for temperature pattern, volume of fuid intake and losses, urine output (volume and
frequency), warning signs, signs of plasma leakage and bleeding, haematocrit, and
white blood cell and platelet counts (see group B).
2.3.2.2 Group B – patients who should be referred for in-hospital management
Patients may need to be admitted to a secondary health care centre for close observation,
particularly as they approach the critical phase. These include patients with warning
signs, those with co-existing conditions that may make dengue or its management more
complicated (such as pregnancy, infancy, old age, obesity, diabetes mellitus, renal
failure, chronic haemolytic diseases), and those with certain social circumstances (such
as living alone, or living far from a health facility without reliable means of transport).
If the patient has dengue with warning signs, the action plan should be as follows:

• C||u| u |o|o|o|co |uouu|oc|| |o|o|o |uu ||o|uo, Cvo o||, so|o|c so|u|o|s
such as 0.9% saline, Ringer’s lactate, or Hartmann’s solution. Start with 5–7 ml/
kg/hour for 1–2 hours, then reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours, and then
reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr or less according to the clinical response (Textboxes H,
J and K).
• |oussoss ||o c||cu| s|u|us u|u |ooou| ||o |uouu|oc|| || ||o |uouu|oc|| |ouu|s
the same or rises only minimally, continue with the same rate (2–3 ml/kg/hr)
for another 2–4 hours. If the vital signs are worsening and haematocrit is rising
rapidly, increase the rate to 5–10 ml/kg/hour for 1–2 hours. Reassess the
clinical status, repeat the haematocrit and review fuid infusion rates accordingly.
35
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
• Cvo ||o u|uuu |||uvo|ous |uu vo|uuo |oou|ou |o uu||u| uoou oo||uso|
and urine output of about 0.5 ml/kg/hr. Intravenous fuids are usually needed
for only 24–48 hours. Reduce intravenous fuids gradually when the rate of
plasma leakage decreases towards the end of the critical phase. This is indicated
by urine output and/or oral fuid intake that is/are adequate, or haematocrit
decreasing below the baseline value in a stable patient.
• |u|o||s v|| vu|||u su|s s|ou|u |o uo||o|ou |, |ou||| cu|o o|ovuo|s u|||
the period of risk is over. A detailed fuid balance should be maintained.
Parameters that should be monitored include vital signs and peripheral perfusion
(1–4 hourly until the patient is out of the critical phase), urine output (4–6 hourly),
haematocrit (before and after fuid replacement, then 6–12 hourly), blood
glucose, and other organ functions (such as renal profle, liver profle, coagulation
profle, as indicated).
If the patient has dengue without warning signs, the action plan should be as follows:
• ||cou|uuo o|u| |uus || |o| |o|o|u|ou s|u|| |||uvo|ous |uu ||o|uo, o| 0'´
saline or Ringer’s lactate with or without dextrose at maintenance rate (Textbox
H). For obese and overweight patients, use the ideal body weight for calculation
of fuid infusion (Textboxes J and K). Patients may be able to take oral fuids after
a few hours of intravenous fuid therapy. Thus, it is necessary to revise the fuid
infusion frequently. Give the minimum volume required to maintain good perfusion
and urine output. Intravenous fuids are usually needed only for 24–48 hours.
• |u|o||s s|ou|u |o uo||o|ou |, |ou||| cu|o o|ovuo|s |o| |ouoo|u|u|o ou||o||
volume of fuid intake and losses, urine output (volume and frequency), warning
signs, haematocrit, and white blood cell and platelet counts (Textbox L). Other
laboratory tests (such as liver and renal functions tests) can be done, depending
on the clinical picture and the facilities of the hospital or health centre.
2.3.2.3 Group C – patients who require emergency treatment and urgent referral when
they have severe dengue
Patients require emergency treatment and urgent referral when they are in the critical
phase of disease, i.e. when they have:
– severe plasma leakage leading to dengue shock and/or fuid accumulation
with respiratory distress;
– severe haemorrhages;
– severe organ impairment (hepatic damage, renal impairment, cardiomyopathy,
encephalopathy or encephalitis).
All patients with severe dengue should be admitted to a hospital with access to
intensive care facilities and blood transfusion. Judicious intravenous fuid resuscitation
is the essential and usually sole intervention required. The crystalloid solution should
be isotonic and the volume just suffcient to maintain an effective circulation during the
period of plasma leakage. Plasma losses should be replaced immediately and rapidly
with isotonic crystalloid solution or, in the case of hypotensive shock, colloid solutions
(Textbox M). If possible, obtain haematocrit levels before and after fuid resuscitation.
36
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
IV crystalloid 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2
hours, then:
reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours;
reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours.
If patient continues to improve, fuid can be
further reduced.
Monitor HCT 6–8 hourly.
If the patient is not stable, act according
to HCT levels:
if HCT increases, consider bolus fuid
administration or increase fuid administration;
if HCT decreases, consider transfusion with
fresh whole transfusion.
Stop at 48 hours.
YES
HCT = haematocrit
There should be continued replacement of further plasma losses to maintain effective
circulation for 24–48 hours. For overweight or obese patients, the ideal body weight
should be used for calculating fuid infusion rates (textboxes J and K). A group and cross-
match should be done for all shock patients. Blood transfusion should be given only in
cases with suspected/severe bleeding.
Fluid resuscitation must be clearly separated from simple fuid administration. This is a
strategy in which larger volumes of fuids (e.g. 10–20 ml boluses) are administered for
a limited period of time under close monitoring to evaluate the patient’s response and
to avoid the development of pulmonary oedema. The degree of intravascular volume
defcit in dengue shock varies. Input is typically much greater than output, and the input/
output ratio is of no utility for judging fuid resuscitation needs during this period.
The goals of fuid resuscitation include improving central and peripheral circulation
(decreasing tachycardia, improving blood pressure, pulse volume, warm and pink
extremities, and capillary refll time <2 seconds) and improving end-organ perfusion
– i.e. stable conscious level (more alert or less restless), urine output ≥ 0.5 ml/kg/hour,
decreasing metabolic acidosis.
Treatment of shock
The action plan for treating patients with compensated shock is as follows (Textboxes D
and N, Figure 2.2):
• S|u|| |||uvo|ous |uu |osusc|u|o| v|| so|o|c c|,s|u||ou so|u|o|s u| '–]0
ml/kg/hour over one hour. Then reassess the patient’s condition (vital signs,
capillary refll time, haematocrit, urine output). The next steps depend on the
situation.
• || ||o ou|o||’s co|u|o| uo|ovos |||uvo|ous |uus s|ou|u |o u|uuuu||,
reduced to 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours, then to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4
hours, then to 2–3 ml/kg/hr, and then further depending on haemodynamic
status, which can be maintained for up to 24–48 hours. (See textboxes H
and J for a more appropriate estimate of the normal maintenance requirement
based on ideal body weight).
• || v|u| su|s u|o s||| u|s|u||o |o s|oc| oo|ss|s¦ c|oc| ||o |uouu|oc|| u||o|
||o ||s| |o|us || ||o |uouu|oc|| |c|ousos o| s s||| |u| |>'0´¦ |ooou| u
second bolus of crystalloid solution at 10–20 ml/kg/hr for one hour. After
this second bolus, if there is improvement, reduce the rate to 7–10 ml/
kg/hr for 1–2 hours, and then continue to reduce as above. If haematocrit
decreases compared to the initial reference haematocrit (<40% in children
and adult females, <45% in adult males), this indicates bleeding and the need
to cross-match and transfuse blood as soon as possible (see treatment for
haemorrhagic complications).
• |u|||o| |o|usos o| c|,s|u||ou o| co||ouu| so|u|o|s uu, |oou |o |o uvo|
during the next 24–48 hours.
37
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
Figure 2.2 Algorithm for fuid management in compensated shock
Compensated shock (systolic pressure
maintained but has signs of reduced perfusion)
Fluid resuscitation with isotonic crystalloid
5–10 ml/kg/hr over 1 hour
IV crystalloid 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2
hours, then:
reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours;
reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours.
If patient continues to improve, fuid can be
further reduced.
Monitor HCT 6–8 hourly.
If the patient is not stable, act according
to HCT levels:
if HCT increases, consider bolus fuid
administration or increase fuid administration;
if HCT decreases, consider transfusion with
fresh whole transfusion.
Stop at 48 hours.
NO
YES
HCT or high HCT
Administer 2nd bolus of fuid
10–20 ml/kg/hr for 1 hour
Consider signifcant occult/overt bleed
Initiate transfusion with fresh whole
blood
NO YES
If patient improves, reduce to
7–10 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours
Then reduce further
Improvement
Check HCT
Improvement
HCT = haematocrit
Patients with hypotensive shock should be managed more vigorously. The action plan for
treating patients with hypotensive shock is as follows (Textboxes D and N, Figure 2.3):
• |||u|o |||uvo|ous |uu |osusc|u|o| v|| c|,s|u||ou o| co||ou so|u|o| ||
available) at 20 ml/kg as a bolus given over 15 minutes to bring the patient out
of shock as quickly as possible.
• || ||o ou|o||’s co|u|o| uo|ovos uvo u c|,s|u||ou/co||ou ||uso| o| ]0 u|/
kg/hr for one hour. Then continue with crystalloid infusion and gradually reduce
to 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours, then to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours, and then
38
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
to 2–3 ml/kg/hr or less, which can be maintained for up to 24–48 hours
(textbox H).
• || v|u| su|s u|o s||| u|s|u||o |o s|oc| oo|ss|s¦ |ovov ||o |uouu|oc|| o||u|ou
before the frst bolus. If the haematocrit was low (<40% in children and adult
females, <45% in adult males), this indicates bleeding and the need to cross-
match and transfuse blood as soon as possible (see treatment for haemorrhagic
complications).
• || ||o |uouu|oc|| vus |u| couou|ou |o ||o |uso||o vu|uo || |o| uvu|u||o uso
population baseline), change intravenous fuids to colloid solutions at 10–20
ml/kg as a second bolus over 30 minutes to one hour. After the second bolus,
reassess the patient. If the condition improves, reduce the rate to 7–10 ml/kg/hr
for 1–2 hours, then change back to crystalloid solution and reduce the rate of
infusion as mentioned above. If the condition is still unstable, repeat the
haematocrit after the second bolus.
• || ||o |uouu|oc|| uoc|ousos couou|ou |o ||o o|ovous vu|uo |<^0´ | c||u|o|
and adult females, <45% in adult males), this indicates bleeding and the need
to cross-match and transfuse blood as soon as possible (see treatment for
haemorrhagic complications). If the haematocrit increases compared to the
o|ovous vu|uo o| |ouu|s vo|, |u| |>'0´¦ co|||uo co||ou so|u|o|s u| ]0–20
ml/kg as a third bolus over one hour. After this dose, reduce the rate to 7–10
ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours, then change back to crystalloid solution and reduce the
rate of infusion as mentioned above when the patient’s condition improves.
• |u|||o| |o|usos o| |uus uu, |oou |o |o uvo| uu||u ||o |ox| 2^ |ou|s ¹|o |u|o
and volume of each bolus infusion should be titrated to the clinical response.
Patients with severe dengue should be admitted to the high-dependency or
intensive care area.
Patients with dengue shock should be frequently monitored until the danger period is
over. A detailed fuid balance of all input and output should be maintained.
Parameters that should be monitored include vital signs and peripheral perfusion (every
15–30 minutes until the patient is out of shock, then 1–2 hourly). In general, the higher
the fuid infusion rate, the more frequently the patient should be monitored and reviewed
in order to avoid fuid overload while ensuring adequate volume replacement.
If resources are available, a patient with severe dengue should have an arterial line
placed as soon as practical. The reason for this is that in shock states, estimation of blood
pressure using a cuff is commonly inaccurate. The use of an indwelling arterial catheter
allows for continuous and reproducible blood pressure measurements and frequent
blood sampling on which decisions regarding therapy can be based. Monitoring of
ECG and pulse oximetry should be available in the intensive care unit.
Urine output should be checked regularly (hourly till the patient is out of shock, then
1–2 hourly). A continuous bladder catheter enables close monitoring of urine output.
An acceptable urine output would be about 0.5 ml/kg/hour. Haematocrit should be
monitored (before and after fuid boluses until stable, then 4–6 hourly). In addition,
there should be monitoring of arterial or venous blood gases, lactate, total carbon
dioxide/bicarbonate (every 30 minutes to one hour until stable, then as indicated),
blood glucose (before fuid resuscitation and repeat as indicated), and other organ
Crystalloid/colloid 10 ml/kg/hr for
1 hour, then continue with:
IV crystalloid 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1– 2 hours;
reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours;
reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours.
If patient continues to improve, fuid can be
further reduced.
Monitor HCT 6-hourly.
If the patient is not stable, act according
to HCT levels:
if HCT increases, consider bolus fuid
administration or increase fuid administration;
if HCT decreases, consider transfusion with
fresh whole transfusion.
Stop at 48 hours.
YES
39
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
Figure 2.3 Algorithm for fuid management in hypotensive shock
Hypotensive shock
Fluid resuscitation with 20 ml/kg isotonic crystalloid or
colloid over 15 minutes
Try to obtain a HCT level before fuid resuscitation
Crystalloid/colloid 10 ml/kg/hr for
1 hour, then continue with:
IV crystalloid 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1– 2 hours;
reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours;
reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours.
If patient continues to improve, fuid can be
further reduced.
Monitor HCT 6-hourly.
If the patient is not stable, act according
to HCT levels:
if HCT increases, consider bolus fuid
administration or increase fuid administration;
if HCT decreases, consider transfusion with
fresh whole transfusion.
Stop at 48 hours.
NO YES
HCT or high HCT
Administer 2nd bolus fuid (colloid)
10–20 ml/kg over ½ to 1 hour
Consider signifcant occult/overt bleed
Initiate transfusion with fresh whole
blood
NO YES
Improvement
Review 1st HCT
Improvement
HCT or high HCT
Repeat 2nd HCT
Administer 3rd bolus fuid (colloid)
10–20 ml/kg over 1 hour
Improvement
NO YES
Repeat 3rd HCT
40
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
functions (such as renal profle, liver profle, coagulation profle, before resuscitation
and as indicated).
Changes in the haematocrit are a useful guide to treatment. However, changes must
be interpreted in parallel with the haemodynamic status, the clinical response to fuid
therapy and the acid-base balance. For instance, a rising or persistently high haematocrit
together with unstable vital signs (particularly narrowing of the pulse pressure) indicates
active plasma leakage and the need for a further bolus of fuid replacement. However,
a rising or persistently high haematocrit together with stable haemodynamic status and
adequate urine output does not require extra intravenous fuid. In the latter case, continue
to monitor closely and it is likely that the haematocrit will start to fall within the next 24
hours as the plasma leakage stops.
A decrease in haematocrit together with unstable vital signs (particularly narrowing of
the pulse pressure, tachycardia, metabolic acidosis, poor urine output) indicates major
haemorrhage and the need for urgent blood transfusion. Yet a decrease in haematocrit
together with stable haemodynamic status and adequate urine output indicates
haemodilution and/or reabsorption of extravasated fuids, so in this case intravenous
fuids must be discontinued immediately to avoid pulmonary oedema.
Treatment of haemorrhagic complications
Mucosal bleeding may occur in any patient with dengue but, if the patient remains
stable with fuid resuscitation/replacement, it should be considered as minor. The
bleeding usually improves rapidly during the recovery phase. In patients with profound
thrombocytopaenia, ensure strict bed rest and protect from trauma to reduce the risk
of bleeding. Do not give intramuscular injections to avoid haematoma. It should be
noted that prophylactic platelet transfusions for severe thrombocytopaenia in otherwise
haemodynamically stable patients have not been shown to be effective and are not
necessary (14).
If major bleeding occurs it is usually from the gastrointestinal tract, and/or vagina in
adult females. Internal bleeding may not become apparent for many hours until the frst
black stool is passed.
Patients at risk of major bleeding are those who:
– have prolonged/refractory shock;
– have hypotensive shock and renal or liver failure and/or severe and
persistent metabolic acidosis;
– are given non-steroidal anti-infammatory agents;
– have pre-existing peptic ulcer disease;
– are on anticoagulant therapy;
– have any form of trauma, including intramuscular injection.
Patients with haemolytic conditions are at risk of acute haemolysis with haemoglobinuria
and will require blood transfusion.
41
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
Severe bleeding can be recognized by:
– persistent and/or severe overt bleeding in the presence of unstable
haemodynamic status, regardless of the haematocrit level;
– a decrease in haematocrit after fuid resuscitation together with unstable
haemodynamic status;
– refractory shock that fails to respond to consecutive fuid resuscitation of
40-60 ml/kg;
– hypotensive shock with low/normal haematocrit before fuid resuscitation;
– persistent or worsening metabolic acidosis ± a well-maintained systolic blood
pressure, especially in those with severe abdominal tenderness and
distension.
Blood transfusion is life-saving and should be given as soon as severe bleeding is
suspected or recognized. However, blood transfusion must be given with care because
of the risk of fuid overload. Do not wait for the haematocrit to drop too low before
deciding on blood transfusion. Note that haematocrit of <30% as a trigger for blood
transfusion, as recommended in the Surviving Sepsis Campaign Guideline (15), is not
applicable to severe dengue. The reason for this is that, in dengue, bleeding usually
occurs after a period of prolonged shock that is preceded by plasma leakage. During
the plasma leakage the haematocrit increases to relatively high values before the onset
of severe bleeding. When bleeding occurs, haematocrit will then drop from this high
level. As a result, haematocrit levels may not be as low as in the absence of plasma
leakage.
The action plan for the treatment of haemorrhagic complications is as follows:
• Cvo '–]0u|/|u o| ||os|ouc|ou |ou co||s o| ]0–20 u|/|u o| ||os| v|o|o
blood at an appropriate rate and observe the clinical response. It is important that
fresh whole blood or fresh red cells are given. Oxygen delivery at tissue level
is optimal with high levels of 2,3 di-phosphoglycerate (2,3 DPG). Stored
blood loses 2,3 DPG, low levels of which impede the oxygen-releasing capacity
of haemoglobin, resulting in functional tissue hypoxia. A good clinical response
includes improving haemodynamic status and acid-base balance.
• Co|suo| |ooou||u ||o ||oou ||u|s|uso| | ||o|o s |u|||o| ||oou |oss o| |o
appropriate rise in haematocrit after blood transfusion. There is little evidence to
support the practice of transfusing platelet concentrates and/or fresh-frozen
plasma for severe bleeding. It is being practised when massive bleeding can not
be managed with just fresh whole blood/fresh-packed cells, but it may exacerbate
the fuid overload.
• C|ou| cu|o s|ou|u |o |u|o| v|o| |so|||u u |usouus||c |u|o v|c| uu, cuuso
severe haemorrhage and may block the airway. A lubricated oro-gastric tube
may minimize the trauma during insertion. Insertion of central venous catheters
should be done with ultra-sound guidance or by a very experienced person.
42
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
2.3.3 Treatment of complications and other areas of treatment
2.3.3.1 Fluid overload
Fluid overload with large pleural effusions and ascites is a common cause of acute
respiratory distress and failure in severe dengue. Other causes of respiratory distress
include acute pulmonary oedema, severe metabolic acidosis from severe shock, and
Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome (ARDS) (refer to standard textbook of clinical care
for further guidance on management).
Causes of fuid overload are:
– excessive and/or too rapid intravenous fuids;
– incorrect use of hypotonic rather than isotonic crystalloid solutions;
– inappropriate use of large volumes of intravenous fuids in patients with
unrecognized severe bleeding;
– inappropriate transfusion of fresh-frozen plasma, platelet concentrates and
cryoprecipitates;
– continuation of intravenous fuids after plasma leakage has resolved
(24–48 hours from defervescence);
– co-morbid conditions such as congenital or ischaemic heart disease, chronic
lung and renal diseases.
Early clinical features of fuid overload are:
– respiratory distress, diffculty in breathing;
– rapid breathing;
– chest wall in-drawing;
– wheezing (rather than crepitations);
– large pleural effusions;
– tense ascites;
– increased jugular venous pressure (JVP).
Late clinical features are:
– pulmonary oedema (cough with pink or frothy sputum ± crepitations, cyanosis);
– irreversible shock (heart failure, often in combination with ongoing
hypovolaemia).
Additional investigations are:
– the chest x-ray which shows cardiomegaly, pleural effusion, upward
displacement of the diaphragm by the ascites and varying degrees of
“bat’s wings” appearance ± Kerley B lines suggestive of fuid overload and
pulmonary oedema;
– ECG to exclude ischaemic changes and arrhythmia;
– arterial blood gases;
– echocardiogram for assessment of left ventricular function, dimensions and
regional wall dyskinesia that may suggest underlying ischaemic heart disease;
– cardiac enzymes.
43
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
The action plan for the treatment of fuid overload is as follows:
• Cx,uo| ||o|uo, s|ou|u |o uvo| uuouu|o|,
• S|ooo|u |||uvo|ous |uu ||o|uo, uu||u ||o |ocovo|, o|uso v|| u||ov |uu |
the pleural and peritoneal cavities to return to the intravascular compartment.
This results in diuresis and resolution of pleural effusion and ascites. Recognizing
when to decrease or stop intravenous fuids is key to preventing fuid overload.
When the following signs are present, intravenous fuids should be discontinued
or reduced to the minimum rate necessary to maintain euglycaemia:
– signs of cessation of plasma leakage;
– stable blood pressure, pulse and peripheral perfusion;
– haematocrit decreases in the presence of a good pulse volume;
– afebrile for more than 24–48 days (without the use of antipyretics);
– resolving bowel/abdominal symptoms;
– improving urine output.
• ¹|o uu|uuouo|| o| |uu ovo||ouu vu|os ucco|u|u |o ||o o|uso o| ||o usouso
and the patient’s haemodynamic status. If the patient has stable haemodynamic
status and is out of the critical phase (more than 24–48 hours of defervescence),
stop intravenous fuids but continue close monitoring. If necessary, give oral or
intravenous furosemide 0.1–0.5 mg/kg/dose once or twice daily, or a
continuous infusion of furosemide 0.1 mg/kg/hour. Monitor serum potassium
and correct the ensuing hypokalaemia.
• || ||o ou|o|| |us s|u||o |uouou,|uuc s|u|us |u| s s||| v||| ||o c||cu| o|uso
reduce the intravenous fuid accordingly. Avoid diuretics during the plasma
leakage phase because they may lead to intravascular volume depletion.
• |u|o||s v|o |ouu| | s|oc| v|| |ov o| |o|uu| |uouu|oc|| |ovo|s |u| s|ov
signs of fuid overload may have occult haemorrhage. Further infusion of large
volumes of intravenous fuids will lead only to a poor outcome. Careful fresh
whole blood transfusion should be initiated as soon as possible. If the patient
remains in shock and the haematocrit is elevated, repeated small boluses of a
colloid solution may help.
2.3.3.2 Other complications of dengue
Both hyperglycaemia and hypoglycaemia may occur, even in the absence of diabetes
mellitus and/or hypoglycaemic agents. Electrolyte and acid-base imbalances are also
common observations in severe dengue and are probably related to gastrointestinal
losses through vomiting and diarrhoea or to the use of hypotonic solutions for resuscitation
and correction of dehydration. Hyponatraemia, hypokalaemia, hyperkalaemia, serum
calcium imbalances and metabolic acidosis (sodium bicarbonate for metabolic acidosis
is not recommended for pH ≥ 7.15) can occur. One should also be alert for co-infections
and nosocomial infections.
44
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
2.3.3.3 Supportive care and adjuvant therapy
Supportive care and adjuvant therapy may be necessary in severe dengue. This may
include:
– renal replacement therapy, with a preference to continuous veno-venous
haemodialysis (CVVH), since peritoneal dialysis has a risk of bleeding;
– vasopressor and inotropic therapies as temporary measures to prevent life-
threatening hypotension in dengue shock and during induction for intubation,
while correction of intravascular volume is being vigorously carried out;
– further treatment of organ impairment, such as severe hepatic involvement or
encephalopathy or encephalitis;
– further treatment of cardiac abnormalities, such as conduction abnormalities,
may occur (the latter usually not requiring interventions).
In this context there is little or no evidence in favour of the use of steroids and intravenous
immunoglobulins, or of recombinant Activated Factor VII.
Refer to standard textbooks of clinical care for more detailed information regarding the
treatment of complications and other areas of treatment.
45
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
Textbox A. Good clinical practice and bad clinical practice
Good practice Bad practice
1 Assessment and follow-up of patients with Sending patients with non-severe dengue home
non-severe dengue and careful instruction of with no follow-up and inadequate instructions
warning signs to watch out for
2 Administration of paracetamol for high fever Administration of acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin)
if the patient is uncomfortable or ibuprofen
3 Obtaining a haematocrit level before and Not knowing when haematocrit levels are taken
after fuid boluses with respect to fuid therapy
4 Clinical assessment of the haemodynamic No clinical assessment of patient with respect
status before and after each fuid bolus to fuid therapy
5 Interpretation of haematocrit levels in the Interpretation of haematocrit levels independent
context of fuid administered and haemodynamic of clinical status
assessment
6 Administration of intravenous fuids for repeated Administration of intravenous fuids to any patient
vomiting or a high or rapidly rising haematocrit with non-severe dengue
7 Use of isotonic intravenous fuids for severe Use of hypotonic intravenous fuids for severe
dengue dengue
8 Giving intravenous fuid volume just suffcient Excessive or prolonged intravenous fuid
to maintain effective circulation during the administration for severe dengue
period of plasma leakage for severe dengue
9 Avoiding intramuscular injections in dengue Giving intramuscular injections to dengue patients
patients
10 Intravenous fuid rate and frequency of monitoring Fixed intravenous fuid rate and unchanged
and haematocrit measurement adjusted frequency of monitoring and haematocrit
according to the patient’s condition measurement during entire hospitalization
for severe dengue
11 Close monitoring of blood glucose, i.e. Not monitoring blood glucose, unaware of the
tight glycaemic control hyperglycaemic effect on osmotic diuresis and
confounding hypovolaemia
12 Discontinuation or reducing fuid therapy once Continuation and no review of intravenous
haemodynamic status stabilizes fuid therapy once haemodynamic status stabilizes
ANNEX
46
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Textbox B. Differential diagnosis of dengue fever
Conditions that mimic the febrile phase of dengue infection
Flu-like syndromes Infuenza, measles, Chikungunya, infectious
mononucleosis , HIV seroconversion illness
Illnesses with a rash Rubella, measles, scarlet fever, meningococcal
infection, Chikungunya, drug reactions
Diarrhoeal diseases Rotavirus, other enteric infections
Illnesses with neurological manifestations Meningo/encephalitis
Febrile seizures
Conditions that mimic the critical phase of dengue infection
Infectious Acute gastroenteritis, malaria, leptospirosis,
typhoid, typhus, viral hepatitis, acute HIV
seroconversion illness, bacterial sepsis, septic shock
Malignancies Acute leukaemia and other malignancies
Other clinical pictures Acute abdomen
– acute appendicitis
– acute cholecystitis
– perforated viscus
Diabetic ketoacidosis
Lactic acidosis
Leukopenia and thrombocytopaenia ± bleeding
Platelet disorders
Renal failure
Respiratory distress (Kussmaul’s breathing)
Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
Textbox C. Warning signs
Clinical Abdominal pain or tenderness
Persistent vomiting
Clinical fuid accumulation
Mucosal bleed
Lethargy, restlessness
|vo| o||u|uouo|| >2 cu
Laboratory Increase in HCT concurrent with rapid decrease in platelet count
47
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
Textbox D. Haemodynamic assessment: continuum of haemodynamic changes
Parameters Stable circulation Compensated shock Hypotensive shock
Hypotensive shock Clear and lucid Clear and lucid (shock can be Change of mental state (restless,
missed if you do not touch the combative)
patient)
Capillary refll time E|s| |<2 soc¦ ||o|o|uou |>2 soc¦ \o|, o|o|o|uou uo|||ou s||
Extremities Warm and pink Cool peripheries Cold, clammy extremities
extremities
Peripheral Good volume Weak and thready Feeble or absent
pulse volume
Heart rate Normal for age Tachycardia Severe tachycardia with
bradycardia in late shock

Blood pressure Normal for age Normal systolic pressure but Narrowed pulse pressure
Normal pulse rising diastolic pressure (<20 mmHg)
pressure for age Narrowing pulse pressure Hypotension (see defnition
Postural hypotension below)
Unrecordable blood pressure

Respiratory rate Normal for age Tachypnoea Metabolic acidosis
hyperpnoea/ Kussmaul’s
breathing
Textbox E. Admission criteria
Warning signs Any of the warning signs (Textbox C)
Signs and symptoms related to hypotension Dehydrated patient, unable to tolerate oral fuids
(possible plasma leakage) Giddiness or postural hypotension
Profuse perspiration, fainting, prostration during defervescence
Hypotension or cold extremities
Bleeding Spontaneous bleeding, independent of the platelet count
Organ impairment Renal, hepatic, neurological or cardiac
– enlarged, tender liver, although not yet in shock
– chest pain or respiratory distress, cyanosis
Findings through further investigations Rising haematocrit
Pleural effusion, ascites or asymptomatic gall-bladder thickening

Co-existing conditions Pregnancy
Co-morbid conditions, such as diabetes mellitus, hypertension,
peptic ulcer, haemolitic anemias and others
Overweight or obese (rapid venous access diffcult in emergency)
Infancy or old age

Social circumstances Living alone
Living far from health facility
Without reliable means of transport
Definition of hypotension:
Systolic blood pressure of <90 mm Hg or mean arterial pressure <70 mm Hg in adults or a systolic blood pressure decrease of
>40 mm Hg or <2 SD below normal for age.
In children up to 10 years of age, the 5th centile for systolic blood pressure can be determined by the formula: 70 + (age in years x 2) mm Hg.
48
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Textbox F. Discharge criteria (all of the following conditions must be present)
Clinical No fever for 48 hours.
Improvement in clinical status (general well-being, appetite, haemodynamic
status, urine output, no respiratory distress).
Laboratory Increasing trend of platelet count.
Stable haematocrit without intravenous fuids.
Textbox G. Home care card for dengue
Home care card for dengue (please take this card to your health facility for each visit)
What should be done?
• /uoouu|o |ou |os|
• /uoouu|o |uu ||u|o |>' u|ussos |o| uvo|uuoszou uuu||s o| ucco|u|u|, | c||u|o|¦
- Milk, fruit juice (caution with diabetes patient) and isotonic electrolyte solution (ORS) and
barley/rice water.
- Plain water alone may cause electrolyte imbalance.
• ¹u|o ou|uco|uuo| ||o| uo|o ||u| ^ u|uus oo| uu, |o| uuu||s u|u ucco|u|u|, | c||u|o|¦
• ¹oou soo|u|u
• |oo| |o| uosou|o ||oou|u o|ucos | u|u u|ou|u ||o |ouo u|u o|u|u|o ||ou
What should be avoided?
• Do |o| |u|o uco|,|su|c,|c ucu |uso||¦ uo|o|ouc ucu |oo|s|u|¦ |uo|o|o| o| o||o| |o|s|o|ouu|
anti-infammatory agents (NSAIDs), or steroids. If you are already taking these medications please consult
your doctor.
• /|||o|cs u|o |o| |ocossu|,
If any of following is observed, take the patient immediately to the nearest hospital. These are warning signs
for danger:
• E|oou|u
- red spots or patches on the skin
- bleeding from nose or gums
- vomiting blood
- black-coloured stools
- heavy menstruation/vaginal bleeding
• ||oouo|| vou||u
• Sovo|o u|uou|u| ou|
• D|ovs|oss uo||u| co||uso| o| sozu|os
• |u|o co|u o| c|uuu, |u|us u|u |oo|
• D||cu||, | ||ou|||u
Laboratory results monitoring
1st Visit
Date
Haematocrit
White cell count
Platelet count
49
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
Textbox H. Calculations for normal maintenance of intravenous fuid infusion
Normal maintenance fuid per hour can be calculated on the basis of the following formula*
(equivalent to Holliday-Segar formula):
4 mL/kg/h for frst 10 kg body weight
+ 2 mL/kg/h for next 10 kg body weight
+ 1 mL/kg/h for subsequent kg body weight
*For overweight/obese patients calculate normal maintenance fuid based on ideal body weight (IBW)
(Adapted from reference 16)
IBW for overweight/obese adults can be estimated on the basis of the following formula
Female: 45.5 kg + 0.91(height -152.4) cm
Male: 50.0 kg + 0.91(height -152.4) cm
(17)
Textbox J. Hourly maintenance fuid regime for overweight or obese patients
Estimated ideal body Normal maintenance Fluid regime based on Fluid regime based on
weight, or IBW (kg) fuid (ml/hour) based on 2–3 ml/kg /hour (ml/hour) 1.5 –2 ml/kg/hour (ml/hour)
Holliday-Segar formula
5 10 10–15
10 20 20–30
15 30 30–45
20 60 40–60
25 65 50–75
30 70 60–90
35 75 70–105
40 80 80–120
50 90 100–150
60 100 90–120
70 110 105–140
80 120 120–150
Notes:
For adults with IBW >50 kg, 1.5–2 ml/kg can be used for quick calculation of hourly maintenance fluid regime.
For adults with IBW≤50 kg, 2–3 ml/kg can be used for quick calculation of hourly maintenance fluid regime.
Textbox K. Estimated ideal body weight for overweight or obese adults
Height (cm) Estimated, IBW (kg) for adult males Estimated IBW (kg) for adult females
150 50 45.5
160 57 52
170 66 61.5
180 75 70
50
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Textbox L. Example of a monitoring chart for dengue
Time and date
Parameters
Body temperature
Respiratory rate
Heart rate
Blood pressure
Pulse pressure/volume
Capillary refll time
Temperature of
extremities
Abdominal pain
Vomiting
Bleeding
Textbox M. Choice of intravenous fuids for resuscitation
Based on the three randomized controlled trials comparing the different types of fuid resuscitation regime in
dengue shock in children, there is no clear advantage to the use of colloids over crystalloids in terms of the overall
outcome. However, colloids may be the preferred choice if the blood pressure has to be restored urgently, i.e. in
those with pulse pressure less than 10 mm Hg. Colloids have been shown to restore the cardiac index and reduce
the level of haematocrit faster than crystalloids in patients with intractable shock (18–20).
An ideal physiological fuid is one that resembles the extracellular and intracellular fuids compartments closely.
However, the available fuids have their own limitations when used in large quantities. Therefore it is advisable to
understand the limitations of these solutions to avoid their respective complications.
Crystalloids
0.9% saline (“normal” saline)
Normal plasma chloride ranges from 95 to 105 mmol/L. 0.9% Saline is a suitable option for initial fuid
resuscitation, but repeated large volumes of 0.9% saline may lead to hyperchloraemic acidosis. Hyperchloraemic
acidosis may aggravate or be confused with lactic acidosis from prolonged shock. Monitoring the chloride
and lactate levels will help to identify this problem. When serum chloride level exceeds the normal range, it is
advisable to change to other alternatives such as Ringer’s Lactate.
Ringer’s Lactate
Ringer’s Lactate has lower sodium (131 mmol/L) and chloride (115 mmol/L) contents and an osmolality of
273 mOsm/L. It may not be suitable for resuscitation of patients with severe hyponatremia. However, it is a
suitable solution after 0.9 Saline has been given and the serum chloride level has exceeded the normal range.
Ringer’s Lactate should probably be avoided in liver failure and in patients taking metformin where lactate
metabolism may be impaired.
Colloids
The types of colloids are gelatin-based, dextran-based and starch-based solutions. One of the biggest concerns
regarding their use is their impact on coagulation. Theoretically, dextrans bind to von Willebrand factor/Factor VIII
complex and impair coagulation the most. However, this was not observed to have clinical signifcance in fuid
resuscitation in dengue shock. Of all the colloids, gelatine has the least effect on coagulation but the highest risk
of allergic reactions. Allergic reactions such as fever, chills and rigors have also been observed in Dextran 70.
Dextran 40 can potentially cause an osmotic renal injury in hypovolaemic patients.
51
Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

2
PRESUMPTIVE DIAGNOSIS
Live in/travel to dengue endemic area.
Fever and two of the following criteria:
• /|o|oxu u|u |uusou
• |us|
• /c|os u|u ou|s
• \u|||u su|s
• |ou|ooo|u
• ¹ou||ouo| |os| oos|vo
WARNING SIGNS*
• /|uou|u| ou| o| |o|uo||oss
• |o|ss|o|| vou||u
• C||cu| |uu uccuuu|u|o|
• /ucosu| ||oou
• |o||u|u, |os||oss|oss
• |vo| o||u|uuo|| >2 cu
• |u|o|u|o|, |c|ouso | HC¹ co|cu||o||
with rapid decrease in platelet count
*(requiring strict observation and medical intervention)
DENGUE WITHOUT WARNING SIGNS
A
S
S
E
S
S
M
E
N
T
Laboratory confrmed dengue
(important when no sign of plasma leakage)
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
M
A
N
A
G
E
M
E
N
T
NEGATIVE
DENGUE WITH WARNING SIGNS
Group A
(May be sent home)
Group criteria
Patients who do not have warning signs
AND
who are able:
• |o |o|o|u|o uuoouu|o vo|uuos o| o|u|
fuids
• |o ouss u||o u| |ous| o|co ovo|,
6 hours
Laboratory tests
• |u|| ||oou cou|| ||EC¦
• |uouu|oc|| |HC¹¦
Treatment
Advice for:
• uuoouu|o |ou |os|
• uuoouu|o |uu ||u|o
• |u|uco|uuo| ^ u|uu uuxuuu oo|
day in adults and accordingly in
children.
Patients with stable HCT can be sent home.
Monitoring
Daily review for disease progression:
• uoc|ous|u v||o ||oou co|| cou||
• uo|o|vosco|co
• vu|||u su|s |u||| ou| o| c||cu| oo|ou¦
Advice for immediate return to hospital if
development of any warning signs, and
• v|||o| uuvco |o| uu|uuouo|| |ou
home care card for dengue).
Group criteria
Patients with any of the following features:
• cooxs||u co|u|o|s suc| us
pregnancy, infancy, old age, diabetes
mellitus, renal failure
• socu| c|cuus|u|cos suc| us |v|u
alone, living far from hospital
Laboratory tests
• |u|| ||oou cou|| ||EC¦
• |uouu|oc|| |HC¹¦
Treatment
• ||cou|uuouo|| |o| o|u| |uus || |o|
tolerated, start intravenous fuid
therapy 0,9% saline or Ringer’s Lactate
at maintenance rate.
Monitoring
Monitor:
• |ouoo|u|u|o ou||o||
• vo|uuo o| |uu ||u|o u|u |ossos
• u||o ou|ou| |vo|uuo u|u ||oouo|c,¦
• vu|||u su|s
• HC¹ v||o ||oou co|| u|u o|u|o|o|
counts.
Group C
(Require emergency treatment)
Group criteria
Patients with any of the following features:
• sovo|o o|usuu |ou|uuo v|| s|oc| u|u/o| |uu uccuuu|u|o| v|| |oso|u|o|, us||oss
• sovo|o ||oou|u
• sovo|o o|uu| uou|uo||
Laboratory tests
• |u|| ||oou cou|| ||EC¦
• |uouu|oc|| |HC¹¦
• o||o| o|uu| |u|c|o| |os|s us |ucu|ou
Treatment of compensated shock
Start IV fuid resuscitation with isotonic crystalloid solutions at 5–10 ml/kg/hr over 1 hour. Reassess patients’ condition.
If patient improves:
• |\ |uus s|ou|u |o |ouucou u|uuuu||, |o '–. u|/|u/|| |o| ]–2 |ou|s ||o| |o o–' u|/|u/|| for 2–4 hours,
then to 2-3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours and then reduced further depending on haemodynamic status;
• |\ |uus cu| |o uu||u|ou |o| uo |o 2^–^o |ou|s
If patient is still unstable:
• c|oc| HC¹ u||o| ||s| |o|us
• if HCT increases/s||| |u| |>'0´¦ |ooou| u soco|u |o|us o| c|,s|u||ou so|u|o| u| ]0–20 u|/|u/|| |o| ] |ou|
• | ||o|o s uo|ovouo|| u||o| soco|u |o|us |ouuco |u|o |o .–]0 u|/|u/|| |o| ]–2 |ou|s u|u co|||uo |o |ouuco us u|ovo
• if HCT decreases, this indicates bleeding and need to cross-match and transfuse blood as soon as possible.
Treatment of hypotensive shock
Initiate IV fuid resuscitation with crystalloid or colloid solution at 20 ml/kg as a bolus for 15 minutes.
If patient improves:
• uvo u c|,s|u||ou/co||ou so|u|o| o| ]0 u|/|u/|| |o| ] |ou| ||o| |ouuco u|uuuu||, us u|ovo
If patient is still unstable:
• |ovov ||o HC¹ |u|o| |o|o|o ||o ||s| |o|us
• if HCT was low (<40% in children and adult females, <45% in adult males) this indicates bleeding,
the need to cross-match and transfuse (see above);
• if HCT was high compared to baseline value, change to IV colloids at 10–20 ml/kg as a second bolus over 30 minutes to 1 hour;
reassess after second bolus.
• If patient is improving reduce the rate to 7–10ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours, then back to IV cystalloids and reduce rates as above;
• if patient’s condition is still unstable, repeat HCT after second bolus.
• If HCT decreases, this indicates bleeding (see above);
• if HCT increases/|ouu|s |u| |>'0´¦ co|||uo co||ou ||uso| u| ]0–20 u|/|u us u |||u |o|us ovo| ] |ou|
then reduce to 7–10 ml/kg/h 1–2 hours, then change back to crystalloid solution and reduce rate as above.
Treatment of haemorrhagic complications
Give 5–10 ml/kg of fresh packed red cells or 10–20 ml/kg of fresh whole blood.
Group B
(Referred for in-hospital care)
OR: Existing warning signs

Laboratory tests
• |u|| ||oou cou|| ||EC¦
• |uouu|oc|| |HC¹¦
Treatment
Obtain reference HCT before fuid therapy.
Give isotonic solutions such as 0.9 % saline,
Ringer’s Lactate. Start with 5–7 ml/kg/hr for
1–2 hours, then reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for
2–4 hr, and then reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr
or less according to clinical response.
Reassess clinical status and repeat HCT:
• | HC¹ |ouu|s ||o suuo o| |sos o||,
u|uu||, > co|||uo v|| 2–o u|/|u/
hr for another 2–4 hours;
• | vo|so||u o| v|u| su|s u|u |uou|,
|s|u HC¹ > |c|ouso |u|o |o '–]0
ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours.
Reassess clinical status, repeat HCT and
review fuid infusion rates accordingly:
• |ouuco |||uvo|ous |uus u|uuuu||, v|o|
the rate of plasma leakage decreases
towards the end of the critical phase.
This is indicated by:
• uuoouu|o u||o ou|ou| u|u/o| |uu
intake
• HC¹ uocousos |o|ov ||o |uso||o vu|uo
in a stable patient.
Monitoring
Monitor:
• v|u| su|s u|u oo|o|o|u| oo||uso| |]–^
hourly until patient is out of critical phase
• u||o ou|ou| |^–c |ou||,¦
• HC¹ ||o|o|o u|u u||o| |uu |oo|ucouo||
then 6–12 hourly)
• ||oou u|ucoso
• o||o| o|uu| |u|c|o|s ||o|u| o|o||o |vo|
profle, coagulation profle, as indicated).
POSITIVE
DENGUE CASE MANAGEMENT
Co-existing conditions
Social circumstances
NEGATIVE
WARNING SIGNS*
• /|uou|u| ou| o| |o|uo||oss
• |o|ss|o|| vou||u
• C||cu| |uu uccuuu|u|o|
• /ucosu| ||oou
• |o||u|u, |os||oss|oss
• |vo| o||u|uuo|| >2 cu
• |u|o|u|o|, |c|ouso | HC¹ co|cu||o||
with rapid decrease in platelet count
*(requiring strict observation and medical intervention)
POSITIVE
SEVERE DENGUE
Group C
(Require emergency treatment)
Group criteria
Patients with any of the following features:
• sovo|o o|usuu |ou|uuo v|| s|oc| u|u/o| |uu uccuuu|u|o| v|| |oso|u|o|, us||oss
• sovo|o ||oou|u
• sovo|o o|uu| uou|uo||
Laboratory tests
• |u|| ||oou cou|| ||EC¦
• |uouu|oc|| |HC¹¦
• o||o| o|uu| |u|c|o| |os|s us |ucu|ou
Treatment of compensated shock
Start IV fuid resuscitation with isotonic crystalloid solutions at 5–10 ml/kg/hr over 1 hour. Reassess patients’ condition.
If patient improves:
• |\ |uus s|ou|u |o |ouucou u|uuuu||, |o '–. u|/|u/|| |o| ]–2 |ou|s ||o| |o o–' u|/|u/|| for 2–4 hours,
then to 2-3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours and then reduced further depending on haemodynamic status;
• |\ |uus cu| |o uu||u|ou |o| uo |o 2^–^o |ou|s
If patient is still unstable:
• c|oc| HC¹ u||o| ||s| |o|us
• if HCT increases/s||| |u| |>'0´¦ |ooou| u soco|u |o|us o| c|,s|u||ou so|u|o| u| ]0–20 u|/|u/|| |o| ] |ou|
• | ||o|o s uo|ovouo|| u||o| soco|u |o|us |ouuco |u|o |o .–]0 u|/|u/|| |o| ]–2 |ou|s u|u co|||uo |o |ouuco us u|ovo
• if HCT decreases, this indicates bleeding and need to cross-match and transfuse blood as soon as possible.
Treatment of hypotensive shock
Initiate IV fuid resuscitation with crystalloid or colloid solution at 20 ml/kg as a bolus for 15 minutes.
If patient improves:
• uvo u c|,s|u||ou/co||ou so|u|o| o| ]0 u|/|u/|| |o| ] |ou| ||o| |ouuco u|uuuu||, us u|ovo
If patient is still unstable:
• |ovov ||o HC¹ |u|o| |o|o|o ||o ||s| |o|us
• if HCT was low (<40% in children and adult females, <45% in adult males) this indicates bleeding,
the need to cross-match and transfuse (see above);
• if HCT was high compared to baseline value, change to IV colloids at 10–20 ml/kg as a second bolus over 30 minutes to 1 hour;
reassess after second bolus.
• If patient is improving reduce the rate to 7–10ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours, then back to IV cystalloids and reduce rates as above;
• if patient’s condition is still unstable, repeat HCT after second bolus.
• If HCT decreases, this indicates bleeding (see above);
• if HCT increases/|ouu|s |u| |>'0´¦ co|||uo co||ou ||uso| u| ]0–20 u|/|u us u |||u |o|us ovo| ] |ou|
then reduce to 7–10 ml/kg/h 1–2 hours, then change back to crystalloid solution and reduce rate as above.
Treatment of haemorrhagic complications
Give 5–10 ml/kg of fresh packed red cells or 10–20 ml/kg of fresh whole blood.
Group B
(Referred for in-hospital care)
OR: Existing warning signs

Laboratory tests
• |u|| ||oou cou|| ||EC¦
• |uouu|oc|| |HC¹¦
Treatment
Obtain reference HCT before fuid therapy.
Give isotonic solutions such as 0.9 % saline,
Ringer’s Lactate. Start with 5–7 ml/kg/hr for
1–2 hours, then reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for
2–4 hr, and then reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr
or less according to clinical response.
Reassess clinical status and repeat HCT:
• | HC¹ |ouu|s ||o suuo o| |sos o||,
u|uu||, > co|||uo v|| 2–o u|/|u/
hr for another 2–4 hours;
• | vo|so||u o| v|u| su|s u|u |uou|,
|s|u HC¹ > |c|ouso |u|o |o '–]0
ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours.
Reassess clinical status, repeat HCT and
review fuid infusion rates accordingly:
• |ouuco |||uvo|ous |uus u|uuuu||, v|o|
the rate of plasma leakage decreases
towards the end of the critical phase.
This is indicated by:
• uuoouu|o u||o ou|ou| u|u/o| |uu
intake
• HC¹ uocousos |o|ov ||o |uso||o vu|uo
in a stable patient.
Monitoring
Monitor:
• v|u| su|s u|u oo|o|o|u| oo||uso| |]–^
hourly until patient is out of critical phase
• u||o ou|ou| |^–c |ou||,¦
• HC¹ ||o|o|o u|u u||o| |uu |oo|ucouo||
then 6–12 hourly)
• ||oou u|ucoso
• o||o| o|uu| |u|c|o|s ||o|u| o|o||o |vo|
profle, coagulation profle, as indicated).
Days of illness
Temperature
Potential clinical issues
Laboratory changes
Serology and virology
Dehydration Shock Reabsorption
bleeding Fluid overload
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Organ impairment
Hematocrit
Platelet
Viraemia
IgM/IgG
Febrile Critical Recovery phases Course of dengue illness:
40°
DENGUE CASE MANAGEMENT
54
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
2.4 REFERENCES
1. Rigau-Perez JG et al. Dengue and dengue haemorrhagic fever. Lancet, 1998,
352:971–977.
2. Yip WCL. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: current approaches to management. Medical
Progress, October 1980.
3. Kalayanarooj S et al. Early clinical and laboratory indicators of acute dengue illness.
Journal of Infectious Diseases, 1997, 176:313–321.
4. Phuong CXT et al. Evaluation of the World Health Organization standard tourniquet
test in the diagnosis of dengue infection in Vietnam. Tropical Medicine and International
Health, 2002, 7:125–132.
5. Balmaseda A et al. Assessment of the World Health Organization scheme for
classifcation of dengue severity in Nicaragua. American Journal of Tropical Medicine
and Hygiene, 2005, 73:1059–1062.
6. Srikiatkhachorn A et al. Natural history of plasma leakage in dengue hemorrhagic
fever: a serial ultrasonic study. Pediatric Infectious Disease Journal, 2007, 26(4):283–
290.
7. Nimmannitya S et al. Dengue and chikungunya virus infection in man in Thailand,
1962–64. Observations on hospitalized patients with haemorrhagic fever. American
Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 1969, 18(6):954–971.
8. Martinez-Torres E, Polanco-Anaya AC, Pleites-Sandoval EB. Why and how children
with dengue die? Revista cubana de medicina tropical, 2008, 60(1):40–47.
9. Nimmannitya S. Clinical spectrum and management of dengue haemorrhagic fever.
Southeast Asian Journal of Tropical Medicine and Public Health, 1987, 18(3):392–
397.
10. Martinez E. A Organizacao de Assistencia Medica durante uma epidemia de
FHD-SCD. In: Dengue. Rio de Janeiro, Editorial Fiocruz, 2005 (pp 222–229).
11. Lemus ER, Estevez G, Velazquez JC. Campana por la Esparanza. La Lucha contra
el Dengue (El Salvador, 2000). La Habana, Editors Politica, 2002.
12. Martinez E. Preventing deaths from dengue: a space and challenge for primary
health care. Pan American Journal of Public Health, 2006, 20:60–74.
13. Harris E et al. Fluid intake and decreased risk for hospitalization for dengue fever,
Nicaragua. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 2003, 9:1003–1006.
14. Lum L et al. Preventive transfusion in dengue shock syndrome – is it necessary?
Journal of Pediatrics, 2003, 143:682–684.
55
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
15. Dellinger RP, Levy MM, Carlet JM. Surviving Sepsis Campaign: international
guidelines for management of severe sepsis and septic shock: 2008. Critical Care
Medicine, 2008, 36:296–327.
16. WHO. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control,
2nd edition. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1997.
17. Gilbert DN et al. The Sanford guide to antimicrobial therapy 2007, 37th ed.
Sperryville, VA, Antimicrobial Therapy, Inc., 2007 (p 87).
18. Dung NM, Day NP, Tam DT. Fluid replacement in dengue shock syndrome: a
randomized, double-blind comparison of four intravenous-fuid regimens. Clinical
Infectious Diseases, 1999, 29:787–794.
19. Ngo NT, Cao XT, Kneen R. Acute management of dengue shock syndrome: a
randomized double-blind comparison of 4 intravenous fuid regimens in the frst hour.
Clinical Infectious Diseases, 2001, 32:204–213.
20. Wills BA et al. Comparison of three fuid solutions for resuscitation in dengue shock
syndrome. New England Journal of Medicine, 2005, 353:877–889.


56
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
57
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
CHAPTER 3

VECTOR MANAGEMENT AND
DELIVERY OF VECTOR CONTROL SERVICES
58
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
59
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
CHAPTER 3.VECTOR MANAGEMENT AND DELIVERY OF VECTOR
CONTROL SERVICES
3.1 OVERVIEW
Preventing or reducing dengue virus transmission depends entirely on control of the
mosquito vectors or interruption of human–vector contact.
Activities to control transmission should target Ae. aegypti (the main vector) in the habitats
of its immature and adult stages in the household and immediate vicinity, as well as other
settings where human–vector contact occurs (e.g. schools, hospitals and workplaces),
unless there is sound evidence that Ae. albopictus or other mosquito species are the
local vectors of dengue. Ae. aegypti proliferates in many purposely-flled household
containers such as those used for domestic water storage and for decorative plants,
as well as in a multiplicity of rain-flled habitats – including used tyres, discarded food
and beverage containers, blocked gutters and buildings under construction. Typically,
these mosquitoes do not fy far, the majority remaining within 100 metres of where they
emerged. They feed almost entirely on humans, mainly during daylight hours, and both
indoors and outdoors.
Integrated vector management (IVM) is the strategic approach to vector control
promoted by WHO (1) and includes control of the vectors of dengue. Defned as “a
rational decision-making process for the optimal use of resources for vector control”, IVM
considers fve key elements in the management process, namely:
• advocacy, social mobilization and legislation – the promotion of these
principles in development policies of all relevant agencies, organizations and
civil society; the establishment or strengthening of regulatory and legislative
controls for public health; and the empowerment of communities;
• collaboration within the health sector and with other sectors – the consideration
of all options for collaboration within and between public and private sectors;
planning and decision-making delegated to the lowest possible administrative
level; and strengthening communication among policy-makers, managers of
programmes for the control of vector-borne diseases, and other key partners;
• integrated approach to disease control – ensuring the rational use of available
resources through the application of a multi-disease control approach; integration
of non-chemical and chemical vector control methods; and integration with other
disease control measures;
• evidence-based decision-making – adaptation of strategies and interventions to
local vector ecology, epidemiology and resources, guided by operational
research and subject to routine monitoring and evaluation;
• capacity-building – the development of essential infrastructure, fnancial resources
and adequate human resources at national and local levels to manage IVM
programmes, based on a situation analysis.
Control of Ae. aegypti is mainly achieved by eliminating container habitats that are
favourable oviposition sites and which permit the development of the aquatic stages.
60
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Larval Empty,clean Mosquito- Store Modify design, Use expanded Fill (with sand, Collect, Puncture
habitat and scrub proof under and/or repair polystyrene soil or concrete) recycle and or drain
weekly cover roof and clean beads dispose of
Water-storage + + +
tank or cistern
Drums + + +
(150–200 litres)
Flower vase flled + +
with water
Potted plants + +
with saucers
Roof gutter +
Animal water +
container
Discarded food and +
drink containers
Hollow fence posts + +
Used tyres + + +
Discarded large +
appliances
Discarded buckets + + +
(<20 litres)
Tree holes +
Rock holes +
a
Adapted from Dengue and dengue haemorrhagic fever in the Americas: guidelines for prevention and control (2)
The habitats are eliminated by preventing access by mosquitoes to these containers
or by frequently emptying and cleaning them, by removing the developing stages
using insecticides or biological control agents, by killing the adult mosquitoes using
insecticides, or by combinations of these methods.
Historically, efforts to control dengue vectors in the WHO Region of the Americas resulted
in the elimination of Ae. aegypti populations from much of the neotropics by the 1970s.
However, re-introductions followed, leading to the re-establishment of vector populations.
Today, therefore, the main aim of most programmes is to reduce the densities of vector
populations as much as possible and to maintain them at low levels. Where feasible,
efforts may also be made to reduce the longevity of adult female mosquitoes by the use
of insecticidal methods in order to lessen the risk of virus transmission.

In selecting the most appropriate vector control method, or combination of methods,
consideration should be given to the local ecology and behaviour of the target species, the
resources available for implementation, the cultural context in which control interventions
are carried out, the feasibility of applying them in a timely manner, and the adequacy
of coverage. Methods of vector control include the elimination or management of larval
habitats, larviciding with insecticides, the use of biological agents and the application
of adulticides.
3.2 METHODS OF VECTOR CONTROL
Ae. aegypti uses a wide range of confned larval habitats, both man-made and natural.
However, it may not be feasible or cost-effective to attempt to control the immature stages
in all such habitats in a community. Some man-made container habitats produce large
numbers of adult mosquitoes, whereas others are less productive. Consequently, control
efforts should target the habitats that are most productive and hence epidemiologically
more important rather than all types of container, especially when there are major resource
constraints. Such targeted strategies require a thorough understanding of the local vector
ecology and the attitudes and habits of residents pertaining to the containers.
3.2.1 Environmental management
Environmental management seeks to change the environment in order to prevent or
minimize vector propagation and human contact with the vector-pathogen by destroying,
altering, removing or recycling non-essential containers that provide larval habitats. Such
actions should be the mainstay of dengue vector control. Three types of environmental
management are defned:
• Environmental modifcation – long-lasting physical transformations to reduce vector
larval habitats, such as installation of a reliable piped water supply to communities,
including household connections.
• Environmental manipulation – temporary changes to vector habitats involving
the management of “essential” containers, such as frequent emptying and cleaning
by scrubbing of water-storage vessels, fower vases and desert room coolers;
cleaning of gutters; sheltering stored tyres from rainfall; recycling or proper
disposal of discarded containers and tyres; management or removal from the
61
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
vicinity of homes of plants such as ornamental or wild bromeliads that collect
water in the leaf axils.
• Changes to human habitation or behaviour – actions to reduce human–vector
contact, such as installing mosquito screening on windows, doors and other
entry points, and using mosquito nets while sleeping during daytime.
The choice of approach should be effective, practicable and appropriate to local
circumstances. Actual or potentially important container types that cannot be removed
from the area should be dealt with in situ. Table 3.1 summarizes the main actions used
to control immature Aedes larval habitats.
Table 3.1 Environmental management actions to control immature stages of Aedes aegypti
a
Larval Empty,clean Mosquito- Store Modify design, Use expanded Fill (with sand, Collect, Puncture
habitat and scrub proof under and/or repair polystyrene soil or concrete) recycle and or drain
weekly cover roof and clean beads dispose of
Water-storage + + +
tank or cistern
Drums + + +
(150–200 litres)
Flower vase flled + +
with water
Potted plants + +
with saucers
Roof gutter +
Animal water +
container
Discarded food and +
drink containers
Hollow fence posts + +
Used tyres + + +
Discarded large +
appliances
Discarded buckets + + +
(<20 litres)
Tree holes +
Rock holes +
a
Adapted from Dengue and dengue haemorrhagic fever in the Americas: guidelines for prevention and control (2)
62
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Improvements in, and maintenance of, urban infrastructure and basic services contribute
to the reduction in available larval habitats since large Ae. aegypti populations are
often associated with poor water supply and inadequate sanitation and waste disposal
services.
3.2.1.1 Improvement of water supply and water-storage systems

Improving water supplies is a fundamental method of controlling Aedes vectors,
especially Ae. aegypti. Water piped to households is preferable to water drawn from
wells, communal standpipes, rooftop catchments and other water-storage systems.
However, potable water must be supplied reliably so that water-storage containers that
serve as larval habitats – such as drums, overhead or ground tanks and concrete jars
– are not necessary. In urban areas the use of cost-recovery mechanisms such as the
introduction of metered water may actually encourage household collection and storage
of roof catchment rainwater that can be harvested at no cost, resulting in the continued
use of storage containers. Traditional water storage practices may also persist even
when reliable supplies are available. The installation of reliable piped water supplies in
houses should therefore be accompanied by a communication strategy that discourages
traditional storage practices.
3.2.1.2 Mosquito-proofng of water-storage containers

Water-storage containers can be designed to prevent access by mosquitoes for
oviposition. Containers can be ftted with tight lids or, if rain-flled, tightly-ftted mesh
screens can allow for rainwater to be harvested from roofs while keeping mosquitoes
out. Removable covers should be replaced every time water is removed and should be
well maintained to prevent damage that permits mosquitoes to get in and out.
Expanded polystyrene beads used on the surface of water provide a physical barrier
that inhibits oviposition in storage containers from which water is drawn from below via
a pipe and from which there is no risk of overfow. These beads can also be placed in
septic tanks, which Ae. aegypti sometimes exploits.
3.2.1.3 Solid waste management

In the context of dengue vector control, “solid waste” refers mainly to non-biodegradable
items of household, community and industrial waste. The benefts of reducing the
amount of solid waste in urban environments extend beyond those of vector control,
and applying many of the basic principles can contribute substantially to reducing
the availability of Ae. aegypti larval habitats. Proper storage, collection and disposal
of waste are essential for protecting public health. The basic rule of “reduce, reuse,
recycle” is highly applicable. Efforts to reduce solid waste should be directed against
discarded or non-essential containers, particularly if they have been identifed in the
community as important mosquito-producing containers.
Solid waste should be collected in plastic sacks and disposed of regularly. The frequency
of collection is important: twice per week is recommended for housefy and rodent
control in warm climates. Integration of Ae. aegypti control with waste management
services is possible and should be encouraged.
63
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
It is also important to provide information on these activities to encourage and promote
them. Globally, recycling is on the increase. This practice places value on many items
previously classifed as waste products, leading to growth in the recycling market
and proft for both small and large-scale businesses as a consequence. But although
recycling can contribute to signifcant economic improvements, the recycling market
can potentially impact dengue vector populations. For there to be an impact, however,
containers of importance must have value in the marketplace, be it real (e.g. plastics or
tyres for recycling) or created (e.g. beverage container deposit laws), and advertising
and promotion must be sustained.
Used tyres are common and sometimes highly productive larval habitats that may
warrant special attention in urban areas. Discarded tyres should be collected, recycled
or disposed of by proper incineration in waste transformation facilities (e.g. incinerators,
energy-production plants, or lime kilns ftted with emission control devices). Regulation of
the sale of new tyres mandating the payment of an additional deposit and return charge
may also be an incentive for better management and disposal of old tyres. Tyres can be
recycled in a variety of ways, including for use as shoe soles, fooring, industrial rubber
gaskets or household hardware (e.g. buckets, rubbish bins). Industrially shredded tyres
can be incorporated into road surfacing materials. Sanitary regulations may require
that whole tyres are buried in a separate area of a landfll to avoid their rising upwards
under compaction and disrupting soil cover.
3.2.1.4 Street cleansing
A reliable and regular street cleansing system that removes discarded water-bearing
containers and cleans drains to ensure they do not become stagnant and breed
mosquitoes will both help to reduce larval habitats of Ae. aegypti and remove the origin
of other urban pests.
3.2.1.5 Building structures
During the planning and construction of buildings and other infrastructure, including urban
renewal schemes, and through legislation and regulation, opportunities arise to modify
or reduce potential larval habitats of urban disease vectors, including Ae. aegypti,
Culex quinquefasciatus and An. stephensi. For example, under revised legislation in
Singapore, roof gutters are not permitted on buildings in new developments because they
are diffcult to access and maintain. Moreover, property owners are required to remove
existing gutters on their premises if they are unable to maintain them satisfactorily.
3.2.2 Chemical control: larvicides
Although chemicals are widely used to treat Ae. aegypti larval habitats, larviciding
should be considered as complementary to environmental management and – except
in emergencies – should be restricted to containers that cannot otherwise be eliminated
or managed. Larvicides may be impractical to apply in hard-to-reach natural sites such
as leaf axils and tree holes, which are common habitats of Ae. albopictus, or in deep
wells. The diffculty of accessing indoor larval habitats of Ae. aegypti (e.g. water-
storage containers, plant vases, saucers) to apply larvicides is a major limitation in many
urban contexts.
64
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
As Ae. aegypti often deposits eggs in water-storage containers, the larvicides should
have low toxicity to other species and should not signifcantly change the taste, odour
or colour of the water.
The International Programme on Chemical Safety (IPCS) has assessed the toxicity of
the active ingredients methoprene, pyriproxyfen and temephos and those in Bacillus
thuringiensis serovar israelensis (Bti) to determine their safety for use as mosquito larvicides
in drinking-water at dosages that are effective against Aedes larvae. However, the
safety of the active ingredients in the fnal formulation varies from product to product and
requires further study, as does the possible microbiological contaminants in formulations
of Bti. WHO’s Guidelines for drinking-water quality (3) provide authoritative guidance
on the use of pesticides in drinking-water. Understandably, placing chemicals in
domestic water, particularly drinking-water, is often viewed with suspicion and may be
unacceptable in some communities.
3.2.2.1 Target area
Productive larval habitats should be treated with chemicals only if environmental
management methods or other non-chemical methods cannot be easily applied or
are too costly. Perifocal treatment involves the use of hand-held or power-operated
equipment to spray, for example, wettable powder or emulsifable-concentrate
formulations of insecticide on larval habitats and peripheral surfaces. This will destroy
existing and subsequent larval infestations in containers of non-potable water, and will
kill the adult mosquitoes that frequent these sites. Perifocal treatment can be used to treat
containers, irrespective of whether they hold water or are dry at the time of application.
The internal and external walls of containers are sprayed until they are covered by a
flm of insecticide, and spraying is also extended to cover any wall within 60 cm of
the container. Perifocal treatment thus has both larviciding and residual adulticiding
characteristics. This method is suitable only for collections of non-potable water (such as
in large piles of tyres or discarded food and beverage containers).
3.2.2.2 Insecticides

Table 3.2 lists the mosquito larvicides that are suitable for application to non-potable
water containers. For treatment of drinking-water, temephos and methoprene can
be applied at dosages of up to 1 mg of active ingredient (a.i.) per litre (1 ppm);
pyriproxyfen can be applied at dosages up to 0.01 mg a.i. per litre (0.01 ppm) and
Bti at1–5mg per litre
3.2.2.3 Application procedures
Hand-operated compression sprayers are suitable for applying liquid insecticides to
larger larval habitats. Knapsack sprayers are also suitable, especially for delivering
wettable powder formulations. A syringe or pipette can be used for treating indoor
fower vases and ant traps. Granule and certain other solid formulations are applied
directly by (protected) hand to confned larval habitats or by a convenient standard
measure (e.g. a dessert spoon or teaspoon). When treating containers of drinking-
water, suffcient insecticide should be added for the volume of the container even if the
container is not full of water (e.g. 1 g of 1% temephos granules for 10 litres of container
volume).
65
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
3.2.2.4 Treatment cycle

The treatment cycle will depend on the species of mosquito, seasonality of transmission,
patterns of rainfall, duration of effcacy of the larvicide and types of larval habitat.
Two or three application rounds carried out annually in a timely manner with proper
monitoring of effcacy may suffce, especially in areas where the main transmission
season is short.
3.2.2.5 Precautions

Extreme care must be taken when treating drinking-water to avoid dosages that are toxic
for humans. Label instructions must always be followed when using insecticides.
Table 3.2 WHO-recommended compounds and formulations for control of mosquito larvae in
container habitats
a
Insecticide Formulation
b
Dosage
c
WHO hazard classifcation
of active ingredient
d
Organophosphates
Pirimiphos-methyl EC 1 III
Temephos EC, GR 1 U
Insect growth regulators
Difubenzuron DT, GR, WP 0.02–0.25 U
rs-methoprene
e
EC 1 U
Novaluron EC 0.01–0.05 NA
Pyriproxyfen
e
GR 0.01 U
Biopesticides
Bacillus thuringiensis israelensis
e
WG 1–5 mg/L U
Spinosad DT, GR, SC 0.1-0.5 U
a
WHO recommendations on the use of pesticides in public health are valid only if linked to WHO specifcations for their quality
control. WHO specifcations for public health pesticides are available at http://www.who.int/whopes/quality/en/. Label
instructions must always be followed when using insecticides.
b
DT = tablet for direct application; GR = granule; EC = emulsifable concentrate; WG = water-dispersible granule; WP = wettable
powder; SC = suspension concentrate.
c
mg/L of active ingredient for control of container-breeding mosquitoes.
d
Class II = moderately hazardous; Class III = slightly hazardous; Class U = unlikely to pose an acute hazard in normal use; NA = not
available.
e
Can be used at recommended dosages in potable water.
3.2.3 Chemical control: adulticides
Methods of chemical control that target adult vectors are intended to impact on mosquito
densities, longevity and other transmission parameters. Adulticides are applied either as
residual surface treatments or as space treatments.
66
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
3.2.3.1 Residual treatment
Perifocal treatment, as described above, has both adulticiding and larviciding effects.
Suitable insecticides can be applied with hand-operated compression sprayers. Power
sprayers can be used to treat large accumulations of discarded containers (e.g. tyre
dumps) rapidly. Care must be taken not to treat containers used to store potable water.
3.2.3.2 Space sprays and their application
Space spraying is recommended for control only in emergency situations to suppress
an ongoing epidemic or to prevent an incipient one. The objective of space spraying is
the massive, rapid destruction of the adult vector population. However, there has been
considerable controversy about the effcacy of aerosol insecticide applications during
epidemics of dengue and yellow fever. Any control method that reduces the number
of infective adult mosquitoes, even for a short time, should reduce virus transmission
during that time, but it remains unclear whether the transient impact of space treatments
is epidemiologically signifcant in the long run. There is no well-documented example
of the effectiveness of this approach in interrupting an epidemic. Nevertheless, if space
spraying is used early in an epidemic and on a suffciently large scale, the intensity of
transmission may be reduced, which would give time for the application of other vector
control measures that provide longer-term control, including larviciding and community-
based source reduction. Thus, if disease surveillance is sensitive enough to detect cases
in the early stages of an epidemic, and if the resources are available, emergency space
spraying can be initiated at the same time as source reduction measures and larviciding
are intensifed.
Not only insecticide susceptibility but also droplet size, application rate and indoor
penetration of the insecticide are all crucial to the effcacy of this method for controlling
Ae. aegypti. Indoor penetration of an insecticide depends on the structure of the
building, whether doors and windows are left open during spraying and, when applied
from vehicle-mounted equipment, residential block confguration, the route of the spray
vehicle and meteorological conditions. Where indoor penetration of droplets is likely to
be poor, indoor application with portable equipment will be more effective against Ae.
aegypti. However, rates of coverage are much lower and accessibility may be diffcult,
particularly in large cities.
Vector populations can be suppressed over large areas by the use of space sprays
released from low-fying aircraft, especially where access with ground equipment is
diffcult and extensive areas must be treated rapidly. Indoor penetration of insecticide
droplets is again a critical factor for effcacy. In applying space sprays from the air,
careful consideration must be given to meteorological conditions, especially wind speed
at spray height and at ground level, and to the droplet size spectrum obtained at
the fying speed of the aircraft. For all aerial spraying operations, clearance must be
obtained from the civil aviation authority. For safety reasons, populated areas must
usually be sprayed from twin-engined aircraft. Modern aircraft are ftted with global
positioning systems so the exact position of the aircraft while the insecticide is being
applied can be accurately recorded.
67
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
Target area
Since total coverage can rarely be achieved during ground applications, space spraying
should focus on areas where people congregate (e.g. high-density housing, schools,
hospitals) and where dengue cases have been reported or vectors are abundant.
Selective space treatment up to 400 metres from houses in which dengue cases have
been reported is commonly practised (and is sometimes also referred to as “perifocal
spraying”). However, by the time a case is detected and a response mounted, the
infection is likely to have spread to a wider area. Thorough planning is required to
ensure that adequate resources (equipment, insecticide, human and fnancial resources)
can be deployed in a timely manner to ensure proper coverage. Only if resources permit
should area-wide treatment be considered.
Insecticides
Table 3.3 lists the insecticides that are suitable for space spraying as cold aerosols or
thermal fogs. The choice of insecticide formulation for space spraying in and around
dwellings should be based on its immediate environmental impact and the compliance
of the community. Only insecticide products with high fash-points should be used for
thermal fogging. Space-spraying formulations are usually oil-based, as the oil carrier
inhibits evaporation of small fog droplets. Diesel fuel has been used as a carrier for
thermal fogging agents, but it creates thick smoke, has a strong smell and creates oily
deposits, which may lead the community to reject its use. Water-based formulations are
also available, some of which contain substances that prevent rapid evaporation. Label
instructions should always be followed when using insecticides.
Application procedures
Space sprays can be applied either as thermal fogs at 10–50 l/ha or as ultra-low-
volume applications of undiluted or slightly diluted technical-grade insecticide in the
form of a cold aerosol of droplets of controlled size (15–25 µm) at a rate of 0.5–
2.0 l/ha. Portable or vehicle-mounted thermal or cold-fog generators can be used
for ground application. If the target area exceeds 1000 ha or cannot be covered
by ground equipment within 10 days, aerial cold fog application is sometimes used.
However, several factors must frst be considered – including safety, timeliness, cost,
meteorological conditions, vector behaviour, biological effectiveness and availability of
equipment, operational sites, and highly skilled air and ground crews. The diffculties
of ensuring penetration of insecticide droplets into the resting sites of the target species
are similar to those for aerosols dispensed from road vehicles. For ground applications,
maps of the areas to be sprayed showing all passable roads are helpful in planning
routes. The development of Geographic Information Systems (GIS) may also be helpful.
A communication plan should be prepared to inform the population, encouraging them
to open their doors and windows in order to improve the effectiveness of the spraying
programme.
Application rates vary with the susceptibility of the target species and environmental
considerations. Wind speed has a strong effect on droplet distribution and contact
with insects. In most situations, a wind speed of 1–4 metres per second (approximately
68
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
3.6–15 km/h) is needed to drift droplets downwind from the line of travel. Furthermore,
space sprays should be applied when there are temperature inversions – i.e. colder
air closer to the ground – which occur early in the morning or in the evening when
the ground temperature begins to fall. Space spray applications should correspond to
the activity of the target species. Ae. aegypti and Ae. albopictus are active during the
day, with peak fight activity in the morning and afternoon. For these species, spraying
outdoors is therefore usually carried out in the early morning or late afternoon. Indoor
treatments with portable cold or thermal fog generators are particularly effective against
Ae. aegypti because its resting behaviour is mainly indoors. Indoor treatments are the
only choice where there is no access for vehicles.
For application from vehicle-mounted equipment in areas with narrow roads and houses
close to the roadside, the spray should be directed backwards from the vehicle. In areas
with wide roads and buildings far from the roadside, the vehicle should be driven close
to the side of the road and the spray should be directed at a right angle (downwind) to
the road rather than directly behind the vehicle. More detailed information on operational
guidelines for space spraying is available in the WHO manual on this subject (5).
Cold fog applications from large fxed-wing aircraft are made at approximately 240
km/h and 60 m above the ground, with swath spacing of 180 m. Smaller, fxed-wing
aircraft are fown at slower speeds and usually lower altitudes (approximately 160
km/h, 30 m above the ground, with a swath width of 50–100 m). In emergencies,
agricultural spraying aircraft can be used so long as they are ftted with rotary atomizers
or other suitable nozzles calibrated for the insecticide, its formulation and the desired
application rate.
Treatment cycle
When a rapid reduction in vector density is essential, such as in emergencies, space
treatment should ideally be carried out every 2–3 days for 10 days. Further applications
should then be made once or twice a week to sustain suppression of the adult vector
population. Continuous entomological and epidemiological surveillance should be
conducted, however, to determine the appropriate application schedule and the
effectiveness of the control strategy.
Precautions
Operators who carry out house-to-house space spraying using portable equipment
should wear face masks in addition to normal protective clothing and should operate
the equipment for short periods only. Fogging with vehicle-mounted equipment in urban
areas can be a traffc hazard, and spotting of vehicle paintwork may result, particularly
when large droplets are used. Ultra-low-volume aerial applications should be made only
by highly skilled pilots trained to undertake spraying at the proper speeds and heights.
Clearance from the local civil aviation authority must be sought. Ground reconnaissance
should be made before treatment and the public advised to safeguard non-target animals
and beehives.
69
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
Table 3.3 Selected insecticides for cold aerosol or thermal fog application against mosquitoes
a
Insecticide Chemical Dosage of active ingredient (g/ha) WHO hazard
classifcation
Cold aerosols Thermal fogs
b
of active ingredient
c
Fenitrothion Organophosphate 250–300 250–300 II
Malathion Organophosphate 112–600 500–600 III
Pirimiphos-methyl Organophosphate 230–330 180–200 III
Bioresmethrin Pyrethroid 5 10 U
Cyfuthrin Pyrethroid 1–2 1–2 II
Cypermethrin Pyrethroid 1–3 – II
Cyphenothrin Pyrethroid 2–5 5–10 II
d,d-trans-Cyphenothrin Pyrethroid 1–2 2.5–5 NA
Deltamethrin Pyrethroid 0.5–1.0 0.5 – 1.0 II
D-Phenothrin Pyrethroid 5–20 – U
Etofenprox Pyrethroid 10–20 10–20 U
λ-Cyhalothrin Pyrethroid 1.0 1.0 II
Permethrin Pyrethroid 5 10 II
Resmethrin Pyrethroid 2–4 4 III
a
Adapted from: Pesticides and their application for the control of vectors and pests of public health importance (6). Label instructions
must always be followed when using insecticides.
b
The strength of the fnished formulation when applied depends on the performance of the spraying equipment used.
c
Class II = moderately hazardous; class III = slightly hazardous; class U = unlikely to pose an acute hazard in normal use;
NA = not available.
3.2.4 Safe use of insecticides
All pesticides are toxic to some degree. Safety precautions for their use – including
care in the handling of pesticides, safe work practices for those who apply them,
and appropriate feld application – should be followed. A safety plan for insecticide
application can be organized along the following lines:
• ||s||uc|o|s o| oos|cuo |u|o|s s|ou|u |o |o||ovou cu|o|u||,
• So|u, ooo|u|o|s s|ou|u |o o|ovuou v|| u| |ous| |vo u||o|us |o u||ov |o|
frequent changes.
• Su|o|, u|ovos uouu|os u|u uus|s s|ou|u |o usou |o| |u|oxoosu|o uc|v|os
such as machine calibration.
• C|u|u|u u|u vus||u |uc||os s|ou|u |o uvu|u||o
• /|| vo|| c|o||os s|ou|u |o |ouovou u| ||o o|u o| ouc| uu,’s ooo|u|o|s u|u u
shower or bath taken.
• \o|| c|o||os s|ou|u |o vus|ou |ouu|u||, o|o|o|u||, uu|,
• |u||cu|u| u||o||o| s|ou|u |o uvo| |o vus||u u|ovos us vou||u co||uu|u|ou
gloves can be dangerous.
• So|u, ooo|u|o|s s|ou|u vus| ||o| |u|us u|u |uco |o|o|o ou||u u|u s|ou|u |o|
smoke during work hours.
• So|u, ooo|u|o|s s|ou|u |o| |o oxoosou |o |oxc uu|o|u| |o| oo|ous ||u| u|o
longer than recommended.
• Cu|o uus| |o |u|o| | usoos|u o| usou |soc|cuo co||u|o|s
• /||o| ouc| uu,’s ooo|u|o| u|, u|usou |ouu |u|vcuo s|ou|u |o usoosou o|
safely.
70
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
• E|oou c|o||os|o|uso |ovo|s s|ou|u |o uo||o|ou | o|uu|oo|oso|u|o |soc|cuos
are used.
• Coo|u|o| suoo|vso| |, u vo||||u|ou |uvuuu| s osso||u|
• Du||u u|u uuouu|o|, u||o| |uoo| souco so|u, ooo|u|o|s |ouso|o|uo|s u|u
pets must remain outside the dwelling.
WHO has published specifc guidelines on use of insecticides and safety procedures
(3–7).
3.2.5 Monitoring of insecticide susceptibility
Insecticides have been used widely for dengue vector control since their development.
As a result, insecticide-resistant populations of Ae. aegypti have been detected in a
number of countries. Operationally signifcant levels of resistance to organophosphates,
pyrethroids, carbamates and organochlorines have been documented.
Insecticide resistance must be considered as a potentially serious threat to effective
dengue vector control. Routine monitoring of insecticide susceptibility should be integral
to any programme.
In countries with a history of extensive DDT use, resistance may be widespread. Also,
DDT resistance may predispose to pyrethroid resistance, since both insecticides have
the same target site (the voltage gated sodium channel) and both have been associated
with mutations in the kdr gene in Ae. aegypti. Consequently, in countries such as
Thailand where pyrethroids – including deltamethrin, cypermethrin and permethrin – are
increasingly being used in favour of organophosphates for space spraying, pyrethroid
resistance is likely to occur sooner in mosquito populations that already have this mutation.
This phenomenon reinforces the importance of carrying out routine susceptibility testing
at regular intervals during any control programme.
WHO kits for testing the susceptibility of adult and larval mosquitoes remain the standard
methods for determining the susceptibility status of Aedes populations. Instructions on
testing and for purchasing kits, test papers and solutions are available to order from
WHO
1
.
3.2.6 Individual and household protection
Clothing that minimizes skin exposure during daylight hours when mosquitoes are most
active affords some protection from the bites of dengue vectors and is encouraged
particularly during outbreaks. Repellents may be applied to exposed skin or to clothing.
Repellents should contain DEET (N, N-diethyl- 3-methylbenzamide), IR3535 (3-[N-
acetyl-N-butyl]-aminopropionic acid ethyl ester) or Icaridin (1-piperidinecarboxylic acid,
2-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-methylpropylester). The use of repellents must be in strict accordance
with label instructions. Insecticide-treated mosquito nets afford good protection for those
who sleep during the day (e.g. infants, the bedridden and night-shift workers).
Where indoor biting occurs, household insecticide aerosol products, mosquito coils or
other insecticide vaporizers may also reduce biting activity. Household fxtures such as
window and door screens and air-conditioning can also reduce biting.
Supplies for monitoring insecticide resistance in disease vectors: procedures and conditions. Geneva, World Health
Organization, 2002. Accessible at: http://www.who.int/whopes/resistance/en/WHO_CDS_CPE_PVC_2001.2.pdf
71
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
3.2.7 Biological control
Biological control is based on the introduction of organisms that prey upon, parasitize,
compete with or otherwise reduce populations of the target species. Against Aedes
vectors of dengue, only certain species of larvivorous fsh and predatory copepods
(Copepoda: Cyclopoidea) – small freshwater crustaceans – have proved effective in
operational contexts in specifc container habitats, and even then seldom on a large
scale. While biological control avoids chemical contamination of the environment, there
may be operational limitations – such as the expense and task of rearing the organisms
on a large scale, diffculty in applying them and their limited utility in aquatic sites
where temperature, pH and organic pollution may exceed the narrow requirements of
the organism. Biological control methods are effective only against the immature stages
of vector mosquitoes in the larval habitat where they are introduced. Importantly, the
biological control organisms are not resistant to desiccation, so their utility is mainly
restricted to container habitats that are seldom emptied or cleaned, such as large
concrete or glazed clay water-storage containers or wells. The willingness of local
communities to accept the introduction of organisms into water containers is essential;
community involvement is desirable in distributing the fsh or copepods, and monitoring
and restocking containers when necessary.
3.2.7.1 Fish
A variety of fsh species have been used to eliminate mosquitoes from larger containers
used to store potable water in many countries, and in open freshwater wells, concrete
irrigation ditches and industrial tanks. The viviparous species Poecilia reticulata adapts
well to these types of confned water bodies and has been most commonly used. Only
native larvivorous fsh should be used because exotic species may escape into natural
habitats and threaten the indigenous fauna. WHO has published further information on
the use of fsh for mosquito control (8).
3.2.7.2 Predatory copepods
Various predatory copepod species have also proved effective against dengue vectors
in operational settings. However, although copepod populations can survive for long
periods, as with fsh, reintroductions may be necessary for sustained control. A vector
control programme in northern Viet Nam using copepods in large water-storage tanks,
combined with source reduction, successfully eliminated Ae. aegypti in many communes
and has prevented dengue transmission for a number of years. To date, these successes
have not been replicated in other countries.
3.2.8 Towards improved tools for vector control
Some promising new dengue vector control tools are the subject of operational research
but have not been suffciently well feld-tested under programmatic conditions for
recommendations to be made for their use as public health interventions. In 2006,
a WHO/TDR Scientifc Working Group identifed major streams of recommended
research on dengue, including in the area of vector control (9).
72
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
3.2.8.1 Insecticide-treated materials
Insecticide-treated materials (ITMs), typically deployed as insecticide-treated bednets,
have proved highly effective in preventing diseases transmitted by nocturnally active
mosquitoes. Research on the effcacy of ITMs in controlling diurnally active Ae. aegypti
is being encouraged. There is accumulating evidence that insecticide-treated window
curtains (net curtains hung in windows, over any existing curtains if necessary) and
long-lasting insecticidal fabric covers for domestic water-storage containers can reduce
dengue vector densities to low levels in some communities – with prospects for reducing
dengue transmission risk. Curtains also provide personal protection in the home.
Although more studies are needed to confrm that transmission can be reduced by this
type of intervention, ITMs appear to hold promise for dengue prevention and control. In
studies in Mexico and Venezuela, ITMs (particularly curtains) were well accepted by the
communities as their effcacy was reinforced by the reduction of other biting insects as
well as cockroaches, housefies and other pests (10).
The location or type of ITM need not be limited to those described or tested to date.
Window curtains, screens, and doorway or wardrobe curtains, etc. all appear to
warrant investigation in different settings. If the application of these interventions is
shown to be effcacious and cost-effective, it may offer additional prospects for dengue
vector control in the home, workplace, schools, hospitals and other locations, and allow
for the selection of the most appropriate ITMs by the communities that will use them.
3.2.8.2 Lethal ovitraps
The ovitrap or oviposition trap used for surveillance of Aedes vectors can be modifed
to render it lethal to immature or adult populations of Ae. aegypti. Lethal ovitraps (which
incorporate an insecticide on the oviposition substrate), autocidal ovitraps (which allow
oviposition but prevent adult emergence), and sticky ovitraps (which trap the mosquito
when it lands) have been used on a limited basis. Studies have shown that population
densities can be reduced with suffciently large numbers of frequently-serviced traps. Life
expectancy of the vector may also potentially be shortened, thus reducing the number of
vectors that become infective. In Singapore, ovitraps used as a control device reportedly
eliminated Ae. aegypti from the international airport, but this level of success has not
been repeated elsewhere (11). In Brazil, lethal ovitraps with deltamethrin-treated ovistrips
substantially reduced adult densities of Ae. aegypti and produced almost 100% larval
mortality during a one-month feld trial (12). The potential advantages of lethal ovitraps
for controlling Aedes vectors include their simplicity, their specifcity for and effectiveness
against container breeders such as Ae. aegypti, and the prospect of their integration
with other chemical or biological control methodologies.
3.3 DELIVERY OF VECTOR CONTROL INTERVENTIONS
Whereas section 3.1 describes the main methods used in dengue vector control, section
3.2 focuses on the management approaches to their delivery, including intrasectoral
as well as intersectoral collaboration. Table 3.4 summarizes vector surveillance and
control activities and their purposes. Further details of entomological surveillance and
emergency vector control are described in Chapter 5.
73
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
3.3.1 Links to epidemiological services
Vector control services should be closely linked to epidemiological services that capture
and analyse the occurrence of dengue cases (temporal and spatial information).
The epidemiological surveillance system should be able to differentiate between
transient and seasonal increases in disease incidence and increases observed at the
beginning of a dengue outbreak. One such approach is to track the occurrence of
current (probable) cases and compare them with the average number of cases by week
(or month) of the preceding 5–7 years, with confdence intervals set at two standard
deviations above and below the average (±2 SD). This is sometimes referred to as the
“endemic channel”. If the number of cases reported exceeds 2 SDs above the “endemic
channel” in weekly or monthly reporting, an outbreak alert is triggered. Figure 3.1 is an
example from the surveillance system in Puerto Rico in 2007–2008. Such an approach
is epidemiologically far more meaningful than year-to-year comparisons of cumulative
totals of reported cases.
Figure 3.1 Surveillance data for dengue outbreak alerts, Puerto Rico, 2007–2008
a
a
Reproduced by kind permission of Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), Division of Vector-Borne Infectious Diseases,
San Juan, Puerto Rico.
N
o
t
i
f
e
d

c
a
s
e
s
1 6 11 16 21 26 31 36 41 46 51
Week of frst symptom
0

2
0
0

6
0
0
2007
2008 Historical average
Epidemic threshold
74
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
T
a
b
l
e

3
.
4

V
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
:

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
i
e
s

a
n
d

p
u
r
p
o
s
e

A
r
e
a

o
f

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
y

S
p
e
c
i
f
c

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
y

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

E
n
t
o
m
o
l
o
g
y



E
n
t
o
m
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

1
.

P
r
e
s
e
n
c
e
/
a
b
s
e
n
c
e

o
f

l
a
r
v
a
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

p
u
p
a
e

T
o

d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e

l
e
v
e
l
s

o
f

i
n
f
e
s
t
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

e
c
o
l
o
g
y

o
f

i
m
m
a
t
u
r
e

d
e
v
e
l
o
p
m
e
n
t

s
t
a
g
e
s



T
o

m
o
n
i
t
o
r

i
m
p
a
c
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l



2
.

N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

p
u
p
a
e

T
o

d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e

l
e
v
e
l
s

o
f

i
n
f
e
s
t
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

t
o

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
y

t
h
e

m
o
s
t

a
d
u
l
t
-
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
v
e






c
o
n
t
a
i
n
e
r

c
a
t
e
g
o
r
i
e
s



T
o

f
o
c
u
s

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
i
e
s

o
n

t
h
e

m
o
s
t

e
p
i
d
e
m
i
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l
l
y

i
m
p
o
r
t
a
n
t





c
o
n
t
a
i
n
e
r

c
a
t
e
g
o
r
i
e
s

t
o

c
o
n
t
r
i
b
u
t
e

t
o

t
h
e

e
s
t
i
m
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

r
i
s
k


3
.

R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

a
d
u
l
t

a
b
u
n
d
a
n
c
e

o
v
e
r

t
i
m
e

T
o

m
e
a
s
u
r
e

i
m
p
a
c
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
i
e
s
,

s
e
a
s
o
n
a
l

a
n
d

d
i
e
l

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
y


4
.

I
n
s
e
c
t
i
c
i
d
e

s
u
s
c
e
p
t
i
b
i
l
i
t
y

(
l
a
r
v
a
e

a
n
d

a
d
u
l
t
s
)

T
o

m
o
n
i
t
o
r

f
o
r

i
n
s
e
c
t
i
c
i
d
e

r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

a
n
d

i
t
s

m
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t

R
o
u
t
i
n
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l


1
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

t
h
e

i
m
m
a
t
u
r
e

s
t
a
g
e
s

T
o

r
e
d
u
c
e

t
h
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

p
o
p
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
o

l
e
v
e
l
s

a
t

w
h
i
c
h

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

o
f

v
i
r
u
s

i
s



o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s


l
o
w
e
r
e
d

o
r

p
r
e
v
e
n
t
e
d


2
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

a
d
u
l
t
s

T
o

r
e
d
u
c
e

a
d
u
l
t

s
u
r
v
i
v
a
l

t
o

l
o
w
e
r

v
e
c
t
o
r
i
a
l

c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

(
f
o
r

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

o
f

v
i
r
u
s
)

E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l


1
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

t
h
e

i
m
m
a
t
u
r
e

s
t
a
g
e
s

T
o

r
a
p
i
d
l
y

r
e
d
u
c
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

p
o
p
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
o

s
l
o
w
/
c
o
n
t
a
i
n
/
i
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
,



o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

2
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

a
d
u
l
t
s

o
r

p
r
e
v
e
n
t

i
n
c
i
p
i
e
n
t

o
u
t
b
r
e
a
k



C
o
l
l
a
b
o
r
a
t
i
o
n




C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

s
o
c
i
a
l


D
e
s
i
g
n

c
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

s
t
r
a
t
e
g
i
e
s

a
n
d

t
o
o
l
s

t
o

i
n
f
o
r
m

a
n
d

m
o
b
i
l
i
z
e


T
o

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

a
w
a
r
e
n
e
s
s

a
n
d

c
o
l
l
a
b
o
r
a
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

r
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
e
d

a
c
t
i
o
n
s


m
o
b
i
l
i
z
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
m
m
u
n
i
t
i
e
s

a
n
d

o
t
h
e
r

p
a
r
t
n
e
r
s
/
s
e
c
t
o
r
s

f
o
r

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
,

p
e
r
s
o
n
a
l




p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
,

a
n
d

c
a
s
e

m
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t
.

E
p
i
d
e
m
i
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

1
.

P
a
s
s
i
v
e

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

d
a
t
a

-

d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e

t
r
e
n
d
s

a
n
d

b
u
r
d
e
n

o
f

d
i
s
e
a
s
e


-

c
l
i
n
i
c
a
l

r
e
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

o
f

d
e
n
g
u
e

c
a
s
e
s

(
p
r
o
b
a
b
l
e

o
r

c
o
n
f
r
m
e
d

d
e
n
g
u
e


-

d
e
t
e
c
t

a
r
e
a
s

o
f

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n




a
n
d

s
e
v
e
r
e

d
e
n
g
u
e
)

-

o
u
t
b
r
e
a
k

d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
/
p
r
e
d
i
c
t
i
o
n


-

l
a
b
o
r
a
t
o
r
y

r
e
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

o
n

c
o
n
f
r
m
e
d

d
e
n
g
u
e

c
a
s
e
s
/

s
e
r
o
t
y
p
e
s
.

-

g
u
i
d
e

e
p
i
d
e
m
i
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

s
t
r
a
t
i
f
c
a
t
i
o
n


2
.

A
c
t
i
v
e

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

d
a
t
a


-

c
a
s
e

r
e
p
o
r
t

v
e
r
i
f
c
a
t
i
o
n


-

a
c
t
i
v
e

c
a
s
e
-
f
n
d
i
n
g


-

s
p
e
c
i
f
c

s
t
u
d
i
e
s
.

S
u
p
p
o
r
t




I
n
t
e
r
a
g
e
n
c
y

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

C
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t

n
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

a
n
d

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

a
g
e
n
c
i
e
s



T
o

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t

p
l
a
y
e
r
s



i
n
v
o
l
v
e
d

i
n

d
e
n
g
u
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

T
o

r
e
d
u
c
e

o
v
e
r
l
a
p

o
f

i
n
t
e
r
v
e
n
t
i
o
n
s

a
n
d

w
a
s
t
a
g
e

o
f

r
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s

I
n
n
o
v
a
t
i
o
n

A
s
s
e
s
s
m
e
n
t

o
f

n
o
v
e
l

t
e
c
h
n
i
q
u
e
s

f
o
r

u
s
e

i
n

t
h
e

n
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

c
o
n
t
e
x
t

T
o

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

t
h
e

u
p
t
a
k
e

o
f

n
o
v
e
l

t
e
c
h
n
i
q
u
e
s

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
-
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

R
o
l
l
i
n
g

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e

o
f

t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

i
n

t
e
c
h
n
i
q
u
e
s

f
o
r

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
i
a
t
e

t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

a
n
d

r
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

o
f

p
e
r
s
o
n
n
e
l

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

a
n
d

e
v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

a
n
d

e
v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g


T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

t
h
a
t

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e
s

a
c
h
i
e
v
e

w
h
a
t

t
h
e
y

s
h
o
u
l
d




t
o

e
s
t
a
b
l
i
s
h
e
d

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e

c
r
i
t
e
r
i
a

a
n
d

i
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
s

L
o
g
i
s
t
i
c
s

S
u
p
p
o
r
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s


T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
i
a
t
e

l
o
g
i
s
t
i
c
a
l

s
u
p
p
o
r
t

A
d
m
i
n
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

f
n
a
n
c
e
s

S
u
p
p
o
r
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
i
a
t
e

a
d
m
i
n
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
v
e

a
n
d

f
n
a
n
c
i
a
l

s
u
p
p
o
r
t
75
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
The spatial patterning of health events and disease outcomes has a long history.
The development of GIS has facilitated the inclusion of a spatial component in
epidemiological, entomological and environmental studies. A GIS is a collection of
computer hardware, software and geographical data used for capturing, managing,
analysing and displaying all forms of geographically referenced information. It allows
users to choose different layers of information and to combine them according to what
questions need to be answered or what data need to be analysed. Figure 3.2 describes
the workings of a GIS.
In setting up a GIS to support vector control services, data are organized in different
layers to describe features such as streets, residences, buildings, train stations, schools,
construction sites, shopping centres, medical clinics and electoral divisions. Above these
base layers can be added entomological data, case data, virus serotype, enforcement
data, demographics, weather data and so on.
Figure 3.3 shows a snapshot of a GIS map with eight layers of data used to support
vector control operations in Singapore.
Figure 3.2 Geographical information system (GIS), Singapore
a
a
Reproduced by kind permission of ESRI South Asia Pte Ltd, Singapore.
Points
Polygons
Lines
GIS allows the layering of health, demographic and environmental data sources to be analysed by their
location on earth’s surface.

A
r
e
a

o
f

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
y

S
p
e
c
i
f

c

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
y

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

E
n
t
o
m
o
l
o
g
y



E
n
t
o
m
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

1
.

P
r
e
s
e
n
c
e
/
a
b
s
e
n
c
e

o
f

l
a
r
v
a
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

p
u
p
a
e

T
o

d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e

l
e
v
e
l
s

o
f

i
n
f
e
s
t
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

e
c
o
l
o
g
y

o
f

i
m
m
a
t
u
r
e

d
e
v
e
l
o
p
m
e
n
t

s
t
a
g
e
s



T
o

m
o
n
i
t
o
r

i
m
p
a
c
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l



2
.

N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f

p
u
p
a
e

T
o

d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e

l
e
v
e
l
s

o
f

i
n
f
e
s
t
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

t
o

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
y

t
h
e

m
o
s
t

a
d
u
l
t
-
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
v
e






c
o
n
t
a
i
n
e
r

c
a
t
e
g
o
r
i
e
s



T
o

f
o
c
u
s

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
i
e
s

o
n

t
h
e

m
o
s
t

e
p
i
d
e
m
i
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l
l
y

i
m
p
o
r
t
a
n
t





c
o
n
t
a
i
n
e
r

c
a
t
e
g
o
r
i
e
s

t
o

c
o
n
t
r
i
b
u
t
e

t
o

t
h
e

e
s
t
i
m
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

r
i
s
k


3
.

R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

a
d
u
l
t

a
b
u
n
d
a
n
c
e

o
v
e
r

t
i
m
e

T
o

m
e
a
s
u
r
e

i
m
p
a
c
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
i
e
s
,

s
e
a
s
o
n
a
l

a
n
d

d
i
e
l

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
y


4
.

I
n
s
e
c
t
i
c
i
d
e

s
u
s
c
e
p
t
i
b
i
l
i
t
y

(
l
a
r
v
a
e

a
n
d

a
d
u
l
t
s
)

T
o

m
o
n
i
t
o
r

f
o
r

i
n
s
e
c
t
i
c
i
d
e

r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

a
n
d

i
t
s

m
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t

R
o
u
t
i
n
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l


1
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

t
h
e

i
m
m
a
t
u
r
e

s
t
a
g
e
s

T
o

r
e
d
u
c
e

t
h
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

p
o
p
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
o

l
e
v
e
l
s

a
t

w
h
i
c
h

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

o
f

v
i
r
u
s

i
s



o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s


l
o
w
e
r
e
d

o
r

p
r
e
v
e
n
t
e
d


2
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

a
d
u
l
t
s

T
o

r
e
d
u
c
e

a
d
u
l
t

s
u
r
v
i
v
a
l

t
o

l
o
w
e
r

v
e
c
t
o
r
i
a
l

c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

(
f
o
r

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

o
f

v
i
r
u
s
)

E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l


1
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

t
h
e

i
m
m
a
t
u
r
e

s
t
a
g
e
s

T
o

r
a
p
i
d
l
y

r
e
d
u
c
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

p
o
p
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
o

s
l
o
w
/
c
o
n
t
a
i
n
/
i
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
,



o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

2
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

a
d
u
l
t
s

o
r

p
r
e
v
e
n
t

i
n
c
i
p
i
e
n
t

o
u
t
b
r
e
a
k



C
o
l
l
a
b
o
r
a
t
i
o
n




C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

s
o
c
i
a
l


D
e
s
i
g
n

c
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

s
t
r
a
t
e
g
i
e
s

a
n
d

t
o
o
l
s

t
o

i
n
f
o
r
m

a
n
d

m
o
b
i
l
i
z
e


T
o

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

a
w
a
r
e
n
e
s
s

a
n
d

c
o
l
l
a
b
o
r
a
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

r
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
e
d

a
c
t
i
o
n
s

m
o
b
i
l
i
z
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
m
m
u
n
i
t
i
e
s

a
n
d

o
t
h
e
r

p
a
r
t
n
e
r
s
/
s
e
c
t
o
r
s

f
o
r

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
,

p
e
r
s
o
n
a
l



p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
,

a
n
d

c
a
s
e

m
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t
.

E
p
i
d
e
m
i
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

1
.

P
a
s
s
i
v
e

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

d
a
t
a

-

d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e

t
r
e
n
d
s

a
n
d

b
u
r
d
e
n

o
f

d
i
s
e
a
s
e


-

c
l
i
n
i
c
a
l

r
e
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

o
f

d
e
n
g
u
e

c
a
s
e
s

(
p
r
o
b
a
b
l
e

o
r

c
o
n
f

r
m
e
d

d
e
n
g
u
e


-

d
e
t
e
c
t

a
r
e
a
s

o
f

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n



a
n
d

s
e
v
e
r
e

d
e
n
g
u
e
)

-

o
u
t
b
r
e
a
k

d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
/
p
r
e
d
i
c
t
i
o
n


-

l
a
b
o
r
a
t
o
r
y

r
e
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

o
n

c
o
n
f

r
m
e
d

d
e
n
g
u
e

c
a
s
e
s
/

s
e
r
o
t
y
p
e
s
.

-

g
u
i
d
e

e
p
i
d
e
m
i
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

s
t
r
a
t
i
f

c
a
t
i
o
n


2
.

A
c
t
i
v
e

s
u
r
v
e
i
l
l
a
n
c
e

d
a
t
a


-

c
a
s
e

r
e
p
o
r
t

v
e
r
i
f

c
a
t
i
o
n


-

a
c
t
i
v
e

c
a
s
e
-
f

n
d
i
n
g


-

s
p
e
c
i
f

c

s
t
u
d
i
e
s
.

S
u
p
p
o
r
t




I
n
t
e
r
a
g
e
n
c
y

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

C
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t

n
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

a
n
d

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

a
g
e
n
c
i
e
s



T
o

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t

p
l
a
y
e
r
s


i
n
v
o
l
v
e
d

i
n

d
e
n
g
u
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

T
o

r
e
d
u
c
e

o
v
e
r
l
a
p

o
f

i
n
t
e
r
v
e
n
t
i
o
n
s

a
n
d

w
a
s
t
a
g
e

o
f

r
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s

I
n
n
o
v
a
t
i
o
n

A
s
s
e
s
s
m
e
n
t

o
f

n
o
v
e
l

t
e
c
h
n
i
q
u
e
s

f
o
r

u
s
e

i
n

t
h
e

n
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

c
o
n
t
e
x
t

T
o

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

t
h
e

u
p
t
a
k
e

o
f

n
o
v
e
l

t
e
c
h
n
i
q
u
e
s

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
-
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

R
o
l
l
i
n
g

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e

o
f

t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

i
n

t
e
c
h
n
i
q
u
e
s

f
o
r

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
i
a
t
e

t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

a
n
d

r
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g

o
f

p
e
r
s
o
n
n
e
l

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

a
n
d

e
v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

a
n
d

e
v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g


T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

t
h
a
t

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e
s

a
c
h
i
e
v
e

w
h
a
t

t
h
e
y

s
h
o
u
l
d



t
o

e
s
t
a
b
l
i
s
h
e
d

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e

c
r
i
t
e
r
i
a

a
n
d

i
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
s

L
o
g
i
s
t
i
c
s

S
u
p
p
o
r
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s


T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
i
a
t
e

l
o
g
i
s
t
i
c
a
l

s
u
p
p
o
r
t

A
d
m
i
n
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

f

n
a
n
c
e
s

S
u
p
p
o
r
t

o
f

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

T
o

e
n
s
u
r
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
i
a
t
e

a
d
m
i
n
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
v
e

a
n
d

f

n
a
n
c
i
a
l

s
u
p
p
o
r
t
76
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
GIS are widely used in public health to map diseases with different pathologies, to
analyse the distribution of disease data in space and space-time, to identify risk factors
and to map areas of risk. Typically, each case is located at either the residential or
work address, and these locations are integrated into a GIS for mapping and analysis.
Because a GIS allows epidemiologists to map environmental risk factors associated
with disease vectors – such as construction sites, derelict or uninhabited premises and
areas of congregation – it is especially relevant for the surveillance of vector-borne
diseases such as dengue and malaria. For dengue, such mapping (epidemiological,
entomological and environmental stratifcation) can serve to identify areas where
transmission repeatedly occurs and which may warrant intensifed or targeted control
activities, or to stratify areas based on characteristics of larval habitats. The availability
of such information in a timely manner could determine the outcome of vector control
operations and even help to reduce the intensity of outbreaks. GIS technology has
been found particularly useful for planning vector control operations, for managing and
deploying resources for dengue control, and for presenting the dengue situation of any
locality.
Free-access computer software programs are available; some software packages and
maps can be downloaded from the Internet. Some dengue control programmes use
hand-held global positioning system (GPS) devices and other hand-operated computer
equipment to record data that are uploaded to a central database.
Figure 3.3 Snapshot of geographical information system (GIS) mapping, Singapore
a
a
Reproduced by kind permission of the National Environment Agency, Singapore.
77
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
Where such resources are unavailable, commercial or hand-drawn maps may be used,
with pins or labels indicating reported data.
3.3.2 Advocacy, social mobilization and legislation
Advocacy is a process through which groups of stakeholders can be infuenced to
gain support for and reduce barriers to specifc initiatives or programmes. Multiple
strategies, often used simultaneously, are key to the success of any advocacy effort.
Strategies may include social mobilization and administrative, legislative, regulatory,
legal and media advocacy (13). While there may be different target audiences and
even different objectives for the strategies, it is the coordination of actions that leads to
the achievement of the overarching goal of the strategic advocacy effort. Some actions
may have a longer time frame – such as legislative and regulatory advocacy to address
tyre disposal at national level – while others such as mobilizing local authorities and
residents to carry out specifc actions before the start of the rainy season may be time-
limited.
A strategic advocacy plan usually includes one or more of the following types of
advocacy (Table 3.5 shows examples of advocacy efforts in Asia and Latin America):
• Social mobilization – brings people together to achieve a common goal with a
shared interpretation and direction.
• Administrative advocacy – informs authorities, decision-makers and opinion
leaders of the importance of the programme, the costs and benefts of its activities
and programme needs in order to enlist their support and cooperation.
• Legislative advocacy – uses federal/state/provincial/departmental/local
legislative processes to promote legislation that addresses issues beyond the
responsibility of any one governmental entity (e.g. legislation to address tyre
disposal at national or regional level, the establishment of sanitary landflls, or
the modifcation of housing designs or water catchment and storage systems).
• Regulatory advocacy – creates rules through which legislation is implemented
(e.g. efforts to implement or modernize existing sanitary laws).
• Legal advocacy – uses the judicial system to enforce sanitary legislation and
regulations (e.g. fnes on contractors whose building construction sites persistently
harbour aquatic foci of dengue vectors, or on householders and estates that fail
to prevent mosquito breeding on their premises).
• Media advocacy – systematically engages the media to place issues of community
interest on the social agenda, with a view to infuencing public agendas. One
such example, although not dengue-specifc, is the PAHO Caribbean Media
Awards for Health Journalism, an annual prize-giving event involving all mass
media communication channels in the subregion.
78
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
3.3.3 Social mobilization and communication
Unlike chronic or sexually transmitted infections, vector-borne diseases require more than
individual behaviour change in order to infuence disease transmission. Behavioural
change is required at both individual and community levels in order to reduce vector
larval habitats successfully, and in turn to reduce the number of adult mosquitoes
available to transmit disease. This has led to greater emphasis on social mobilization
and communication activities which are fully integrated into dengue prevention and
control efforts (14).
In order to develop an appropriate communication strategy, it is necessary to understand
that communication is not just the dissemination of messages through various channels
Table 3.5 Examples of advocacy efforts in Asia and Latin America
Type of advocacy Asia Latin America
Social mobilization Malaysia. Large-scale social mobilization Brazil. D-Day, a large-scale, coordinated
started out “locally” in Johor Bahru. social mobilization and media advocacy
Singapore. Social mobilization involves effort started out “locally” in Rio de Janeiro.
the creation of “dengue prevention
volunteer groups” among local grassroots
organizations in the community.
Administrative Malaysia. Through administrative advocacy, Brazil. Through administrative advocacy
advocacy activities have expanded to several D-Day is now nationwide.
other states. Nicaragua. After the elections, programme
personnel initiated administrative advocacy
to engage new personnel and elected
offcials in the COMBI process.
Legislative India. Mumbai implements legislative Brazil. Through the national tyre recycling
advocacy measures to prevent mosquito breeding programme, regional tyre collection and
on premises. Several municipalities of processing centres were created.
Gujarat State have framed by-laws to El Salvador. The frst tyre recycling
implement similar measures. In Goa State, centre was modelled on the Brazil
modifed by-laws require householders to programme.
install mosquito-proof lids on their water
tanks, and building construction site
managers are required to prevent mosquito
breeding.
Singapore. The law requires all construction
sites to have a full-time or part-time
“environmental control offcer” to take care
of sanitation, hygiene and vector control issues
of the site.
Legal India. Fines are imposed on house owners on Cuba. Fines are universally imposed
advocacy detection of mosquito breeding in cities such on house owners and businesses
as Ahmedabad, Delhi, Mumbai and Surat. when Aedes breeding is found.
Singapore. House owners who create
conditions favourable for mosquito breeding
are penalized. Legislation exists to regulate
sanitation.
Media advocacy Malaysia. Media advocacy and social Brazil. Media advocacy and social
mobilization are two key components mobilization are two key components of
of the dengue programme. D-Day.
79
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
such as interpersonal communication or the mass media. Communication is a two-way
interactive process through which two or more participants (individuals or groups) create
and share information in order to reach a common understanding and to identify areas
of mutual agreement. This in turn allows for collective actions such as advocacy and
social mobilization to be implemented. Once collective actions have been identifed,
social mobilization can be used to engage people’s participation in achieving a specifc
goal through their own efforts (15). Social mobilization is not just a single activity; it
involves all relevant segments of society (i.e. decision-makers and policy-makers, opinion
leaders, bureaucrats and technocrats, professional groups, religious groups, commerce
and industry, communities and individuals). It also takes into account the perceived
needs of the people, embraces the critical principle of community involvement, and
seeks to empower individuals and groups for action.
To date, most dengue-related communication (including more traditional information,
education and communication (or IEC) efforts) and social mobilization activities have
targeted individuals and communities generally defned by geographical boundaries
– such as neighbourhoods, schools, and houses that fall within the radius of a confrmed
dengue case. Little attention has been given to creating and sustaining a dialogue
at policy level in order to address the underlying causes of increasing availability of
vector larval habitats, such as ineffective refuse disposal services or an inconsistent
or poor-quality water supply. Policy efforts require different communication strategies
in order to engage the diverse target audience, which may include representatives
from ministries of natural resources and the environment (water and sanitation), urban
planning, fnance and tourism, as well as municipal authorities. While many countries
have a national dengue committee that may be activated during outbreaks or epidemics,
these committees generally do not address the broader issues that lead to the ongoing
propagation of the mosquito vectors of dengue fever.
Communication plans and strategies are often lacking, resulting in short-term information
campaigns and ad hoc activities in reaction to outbreaks. In 2004, WHO published
Planning social mobilization and communication for dengue prevention and control:
a step-by-step guide (16) to assist programme managers in developing effective
mobilization and communication strategies to promote behavioural change as part of
routine vector control programming. The guide uses the COMBI (communication-for-
behavioural-impact) planning methodology to focus communication and mobilization
efforts on promoting and measuring changes in behaviour, and not just changes in
knowledge and attitudes. This focus on behaviour rather than knowledge builds on
many years of IEC efforts to increase community knowledge of dengue, the mosquito
vector(s) and their larval habitats. Understanding the precise steps needed to carry out a
recommended behaviour will help programmes to shift from the use of general messages
that are often ignored by the target audience to messages that promote and encourage
the process of behavioural change (17).
3.3.4 Collaboration within the health sector and with other sectors
Intersectoral collaboration among partners is a key strategy of IVM. Networking
facilitates a more coordinated approach than the individual and independent efforts of
different sectors, and provides a platform for partners to resolve cross-agency issues and
to share best practices while reducing duplication of efforts. Networking for dengue
80
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
control also helps to leverage the strengths of partners and to synergize their efforts,
thereby enhancing the effectiveness and effciency of actions for dengue prevention
and control.
3.3.4.1 Collaboration within the health sector
Control measures can be integrated with strong local health systems by transferring
responsibility, authority, resources and knowledge from central to local level. However,
it is critically important for the transfer of responsibility to be accompanied by the transfer
of fnancial and technical resources. Transfer can be accomplished by offering, for
instance, capacity-strengthening workshops or training courses in vector biology and
control, epidemiology, and communication among other topics at the local level. At
all administrative levels of government (state, provincial, departmental and local),
the dengue control programme is usually part of the local health system, wherein lies
the responsibility for planning, implementing, monitoring and evaluating the local
programme.

Contacts, liaison and cooperative activities should be promoted within the different
divisions of the health sector. This cooperation with the dengue programme is necessary
since the prevention and control of dengue is not the responsibility of a single department.
Regardless of whether the programme is led by the Ministry of Health, collaboration
within this ministry is essential among those departments responsible for vector control
and surveillance, epidemiological surveillance, clinical diagnosis and management,
maternal and child health (e.g. the programme on integrated management of childhood
illnesses), health education, community participation and environmental health. Entities
such as national health institutes and schools of public health and medicine can also
contribute by carrying out activities for which the Ministry of Health may not have
resources, such as training and research projects.
3.3.4.2 Collaboration with other sectors and with the community
Dengue prevention and control necessitates an effective intersectoral approach, requiring
coordination between the lead ministry, usually the Ministry of Health, and other ministries
and government agencies, the private sector (including private health providers),
nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) and local communities. Resource-sharing is an
important aspect of this (Table 3.6). Such cooperation is critical in emergency situations
when scarce or widely dispersed human and material resources must be mobilized
rapidly and their use coordinated to mitigate the effects of an epidemic. The process
can be facilitated by policy adjustment.

Policy adjustment
The Ministry of Health and the programme manager should seek mutual agreement
with other ministries, sectors or municipal governments – and even the adjustment of
existing policies and practices – to place public health centrally among the goals of
those bodies (administrative advocacy). For instance, the public works sector could be
encouraged to give priority to improvements in water supply for those communities at
highest risk of dengue.
81
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
Table 3.6 Selected examples of potential intersectoral actions
Sector Issue Rationale
Public sector
Ministry of the Solid waste management, water supply, Discarded containers and household water-
Environment promotion of healthy public policies storage containers are larval habitats.
Ministry of Incorporation of environmental health Empowerment of children with knowledge
Education issues and activities in school curricula of health risks and skills to carry out actions to
manage the environment. This is often an entry
point for community action.
Municipal Urban infrastructure and planning, Urban development and infrastructure can be
authority including water and sanitation services designed and managed to avoid creation of
larval habitats (e.g. suffcient resources
dedicated to the collection and disposal of
refuse, and to a reliable and good quality
water system).
Ministry of Street stormwater drainage systems, Design of water run-off drainage systems and
Public Works underground service units for telephones, manholes that do not create underground
etc. mosquito larval habitats.
Housing structure and water-storage Design structures that avoid the creation of
containers. mosquito larval habitats (e.g. roofng design,
water run-off and catchment systems).
Ministry of Reduction of economic losses associated Involvement of the hospitality sector in routine
Tourism with dengue outbreaks vector control actions and environmental
management.
Ministry of Legislative framework Provision of the legislative and regulatory
Finance and framework to support environmental
Planning management actions and sound use of
insecticides.
Private sector Stewardship, particularly in industrial and Consumer packaging and petrochemical
manufacturing sectors industries, and manufacturers of tyres and water-
storage tanks are examples of how the private
sector may contribute – indirectly or directly – to
larval habitats and to potential solutions,
especially in the context of “social or
environmental responsibility”. Small-scale tyre
businesses may have limited means to protect
used tyres stored on the premises.
Nongovernmental Mobilization of community action NGOs are able to mobilize resources and
organizations actions at community level on issues of common
interest.
Potential roles of government ministries
Public works. The ministry responsible for public works and its municipal counterparts
are responsible for providing dependable water supply, sanitation and solid waste
management services to all planned communities. The dimensions and quality of those
services have a direct bearing on the availability of larval habitats. Additionally, through
the adoption and enforcement of housing and building codes (legislative and regulatory
advocacy), a municipality may mandate the provision of utilities such as piped water or
82
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
sewerage connections for individual households and rainwater run-off control for new
housing developments, or it may prohibit the construction of open groundwater wells.
Such opportunities are prescient when planning urban redevelopment schemes and
because of the benefts of reduced risk of dengue and of mosquitoes and other pests.
Education. The Ministry of Education should be a key partner as it is responsible not only
for educating children and young people but also for inculcating social norms which
include appropriate hygiene behaviours. Where dengue prevention and control involve
a health communication component targeted at schoolchildren, the Ministry of Health
can work closely with the Ministry of Education to develop, communicate and impart
appropriate messages and skills for behaviour change. Such messages and skills should
ideally be integrated into existing curricula to ensure long-term continuity (18).
Health education models can be jointly developed, tested and evaluated for different
age groups. Research programmes in universities and colleges can be encouraged to
include components that generate information of direct importance (e.g. vector biology
and control, case management) or of indirect importance (e.g. improved water supplies,
promotion of community sanitation, waste characterization studies, analysis of cost and
cost-effectiveness of interventions) to aid evidence-based decision-making.
Tourism. Coordination with the Ministry of Tourism can facilitate the timely communication
of outbreak or epidemic alert messages to tourists and to the hotel industry so that actions
can be taken to reduce the risk of exposure to infection.
Environment. The ministry responsible for the environment can help the Ministry of Health
to gather information on ecosystems and habitats in and around cities and smaller
communities at high risk of dengue so as to aid in programme planning. In at least one
country (Singapore), the Ministry of the Environment has direct responsibility for dengue
vector control and promotes healthy public policies that include sound management of
public health pesticides.
Collaboration with nongovernmental organizations
NGOs can play important roles in promoting and implementing environmental
management for dengue vector control, most often involving health communication on
reduction of sources and improvement of housing. Community NGOs – which may
be informal neighbourhood groups such as private volunteer organizations, religious
groups and environmental and social action groups – should be identifed as potential
partners.
With appropriate orientation and guidance, particularly on source reduction methods,
NGOs can collect discarded containers (e.g. tyres, food and drink containers), or can
clean drains and culverts, remove abandoned vehicles and roadside litter, and fll tree
and rock holes. During outbreaks NGOs may be infuential in mobilizing householders
and other community members to eliminate important larval habitats of the vector or
to manage the containers in ways that do not allow mosquito emergence (e.g. by
emptying and cleaning water-storage containers at weekly intervals). NGOs may
also encourage public cooperation and acceptance of space spraying and larvicide
application measures.
83
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
Communities organize themselves in many ways, so there is no prescribed formula
for interaction. However, social mobilization initiatives must be socially and culturally
sensitive and should be developed between partners in a spirit of mutual respect. There
are many examples of voluntary organizations and women’s associations taking the
lead in providing money, advertising and political support to successful community-
based campaigns for source reduction or in organizing regular household activities to
reduce mosquito populations.
Collaboration with industry and the private sector
Collaboration with industry and the private sector can advance the manufacture and
utilization of mosquito-proof designs of water-storage containers and room-coolers,
and can promote the collection and recycling of used tyres, plastic, aluminium, glass
and other containers. In the construction industry, architects’ associations can help to
promote the design and building of mosquito-proof and otherwise healthy houses and
workplaces.
3.3.5 Integrated approaches to control
Instead of targeting only the vector or vectors of dengue, there may be opportunities to
integrate Aedes control with control of pests or vectors of other diseases. Addressing
two or more public health problems simultaneously may improve cost-effectiveness
and may help promote public acceptance and involvement in the programme. For
example, control of Ae. aegypti in some urban areas can be combined with control
of Culex quinquefasciatus, the latter species usually being a much greater nuisance to
the public and an important vector of lymphatic flariasis in many tropical environments.
Collection of solid waste as an environmental management component of Aedes control
programmes need not be restricted just to the container sources of Aedes production but
can also include items that are associated with flth fies and rodents. Moreover, given
that urban yellow fever and chikungunya viruses are also transmitted by Ae. aegypti,
and chikungunya by Ae. albopictus as well, their control is an effective way of reducing
the risk of outbreaks of these diseases in addition to dengue. In many cities in India, Ae.
aegypti and the malaria vector Anopheles stephensi share common larval habitats and
can be targeted simultaneously.
3.3.6 Strengthening capacity
In vector control, as in other areas of public health, staffng levels and capacity-
strengthening are important. In particular, public health entomologists, vector control
personnel, environmental specialists, social scientists and communication specialists
play pivotal roles.
3.3.6.1 Social scientists and communication specialists
Because social mobilization and communication are often the least planned and most
under-funded elements of the dengue prevention and control programme, it is even
more important to use resources in a targeted and cost-effective manner. This can be
accomplished by working with social scientists who have expertise in using behavioural
change theories in programme development, and with communication specialists who
84
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
have a background preferably in health communication (i.e. the use of communication
strategies to inform and infuence individual and community decisions that enhance
health). This will require that the dengue programme includes in its annual budget an
allocation for social mobilization and communication activities in order to integrate
these specialists into routine programme planning.
Most ministries of health have health promotion or health education departments, and it is
increasingly common to fnd communication included in them. However, communication
is frequently viewed as use of the mass media, and therefore the communication
specialists may be individuals with backgrounds in public relations, journalism or mass
media who have limited knowledge of the principles of health promotion or behavioural
change. In this case it is even more important to involve a health promotion specialist
or a social scientist to ensure that the messages focus on appropriate and feasible
behaviours that target the principal vector larval habitats, and that the impact of the social
mobilization and communication activities are evaluated for changes in behaviour and
not just for changes in knowledge or attitudes. Health promotion and health education
personnel can generally be found at the central and state or provincial levels, while at
the local level this role may be flled by a nurse or social worker if a person qualifed in
communication is not part of the health clinic staffng.
Ongoing training and practice in communication at all levels is critical for ensuring
appropriate and effective interpersonal communication between vector control staff and
householders, between the dengue programme manager and vector control staff, and
between the dengue programme manager and partners within and outside the health
sector. When and how to use the mass media at national, regional and local levels can
be determined in collaboration with the communications specialist. Using the media may
entail training sessions in public speaking for key spokespersons within the programme
as well as for epidemiologists and medical personnel who may also be required to
speak to the media. Training in how to work with the media, particularly during an
outbreak or epidemic, is vital to ensure that accurate and useful information is shared
with the broader community through the media, to avoid sending mixed messages about
what is expected of the community during the outbreak and to reduce the chance of
misinterpretation or sensationalization of information (particularly the number of cases
of dengue).
3.3.6.2 Public health entomologists and vector control and environmental management
personnel
The skills for managing, implementing, monitoring and evaluating the programme must
be determined in accordance with availability of resources, programme objectives and
intervention strategies. Training activities, including in-service training, should be tailored
to the needs of the various groups of personnel. WHO has published guidance on
needs assessment for all components of the dengue control programme (19).
Whether or not vector control activities are aligned with centralized or decentralized
health systems, and whether they are distinct from or integrated with other health sector
85
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
activities, the available skills at any given level of administrative responsibility should
be commensurate with those responsibilities. This is equally important for the purposes
of fnancial and operational planning – including workforce planning and strategic,
technical guidance – as well as for essential physical infrastructure.
3.3.7 Operational research
Operational research should be oriented to the priority needs of the programme in order
to generate the evidence base for adaptation of strategies and interventions. This may
include, for example, studies on the ecology of the vector, the effcacy, effectiveness
and cost-effectiveness of existing and promising new vector control methods, formative
research on relevant cultural practices, and guidance for engaging communities in
programme activities.
3.3.8 Monitoring and evaluation
Regular monitoring of the delivery of dengue prevention and control services and
evaluation of the impact of interventions are important activities for effective programme
management. Suitable indicators should be identifed to measure the progress of
implementation, as well as output and outcome indicators. Table 3.7 gives examples of
good and bad practice in dengue prevention and control.
Table 3.7 Dengue prevention and control: examples of good and bad practice
Activity Good practice Bad practice
Environmental Determining local ecology of immature Investing disproportionately in chemical control
management stages as a basis for choosing the most methods when affordable and more sustainable
appropriate interventions environmental management solutions are
available.
Integrating dengue control with sanitation, Responding primarily to outbreaks and not
solid waste disposal, water supply services, investing in sustained vector control measures.
and other vector and pest control
programmes
Chemical control Using insecticides judiciously Using chemical control methods without
evaluating effcacy and cost-effectiveness, and
without monitoring local vector susceptibility.
Municipal services Intersectoral collaboration on urban Social marketing of larvicides for water-storage
development or renewal to minimize containers, with consequent low coverage
availability of larval habitats of dengue rates.
vectors and vectors of other diseases
Entomological Monitoring of vector populations to target Generating routine entomological surveillance
monitoring and control in time and space, and to provide data that are not analysed or utilized in a timely
surveillance feedback for programme adjustment and effcient manner for management decision-
making.
86
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
3.4 REFERENCES
1. WHO. Global strategic framework for integrated vector management. Geneva, World
Health Organization, 2004 (Document WHO/CDS/CPE/2004.10, available at:
http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2004/WHO_CDS_CPE_PVC_2004_10.pdf; accessed
October 2008).
2. PAHO. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever in the Americas: guidelines for
prevention and control. Washington, DC, Pan American Health Organization, 1994
(Scientifc publication, No. 548).
3. WHO. Guidelines for drinking-water quality, 3rd ed., incorporating frst addendum.
Geneva, World Health Organization, 2006 (available at:
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq3rev/en/index.html;
accessed October 2008).
4. WHO. WHOPES guidelines for insecticide resistance. Available at: http://www.
who.int/whopes/guidelines/en/; accessed October 2008.
5. WHO. Space spray application of insecticides for vector and pest control: a
practitioner’s guide. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2003 (Document WHO/
CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2003.5).
6. WHO. Pesticides and their application for the control of vectors and pests of public
health importance. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2006 (Document WHO/
CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2006.1; available at:
http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2006/WHO_CDS_NTD_WHOPES_GCDPP_
2006.1_eng.pdf).
7. WHO. Safe use of pesticides. Fourteenth report of the WHO Expert Committee
on Vector Biology and Control. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1991 (WHO
Technical Report Series, No. 813).
8. WHO/EMRO. Use of fsh for mosquito control. Cairo, World Health Organization
Regional Offce for the Eastern Mediterranean, 2003 (Document WHO/EM/
MAL/289/E/G).
9. WHO/TDR. Report of the Scientifc Working Group on Dengue (TDR/SWG/08).
Geneva, World Health Organization, Special Programme for Research and Training
in Tropical Diseases, 2006 (available at: http://www.who.int/tdr/publications/
publications/swg_dengue_2.htm; accessed October 2008).
10. Kroeger A et al. Effective control of dengue vectors with curtains and water container
covers treated with insecticide in Mexico and Venezuela: cluster randomized trials.
British Medical Journal, 2006, 332:1247–1252.
87
Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

3
11. The eradication of Aedes aegypti at the Singapore Paya Lebar International Airport.
In: Chan YC, Chan KL, Ho BC, eds. Vector control in South-East Asia. Proceedings of
the First SEAMEO-TROPMED Workshop, Singapore, 1972. Bangkok, SEAMEO, 1973
(pp 85–88).
12. Perich M et al. Field evaluation of a lethal ovitrap against dengue vectors in Brazil.
Medical and Veterinary Entomology, 2003, 17:205–210.
13. Loue S, Lloyd LS, O’Shea DJ. Community health advocacy. New York, NY, Kluwer
Academic/Plenum Press, 2003.
14. Lloyd LS. Best practices for dengue prevention and control in the Americas.
Washington, DC, Environmental Health Project, 2003 (Strategic Report No. 7).
15. UNICEF.Communication handbook for polio eradication and routine EPI. New
York, NY, United Nations Children’s Fund, 2000.
16. Parks W, Lloyd LS. Planning social mobilization and communication for dengue
fever prevention and control: a step-by-step guide. Geneva, World Health Organization,
2004 (available at: http://www.who.int/tdr/publications/publications/pdf/planning_
dengue.pdf; accessed October 2008).
17. Renganathan E et al. Communication-for-Behavioural-Impact (COMBI): a review
of WHO’s experiences with strategic social mobilization and communication in the
prevention and control of communicable diseases. In: Haider M, ed. Global public
health communication: challenges, perspectives, and strategies. Sudbury, MA, Jones
and Bartlett Publishers, Inc., 2005 (pp 305–320).
18. Nathan MB, Lloyd L, Wiltshire A. Community participation in environmental
management for dengue vector control: experiences from the English-speaking
Caribbean. Dengue Bulletin, 2004, 28(Suppl):13–16.
19. WHO. Guidelines for conducting a review of a national dengue prevention and
control programme. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2005 (Document WHO/
CDS/CPE/PVC/2005.13).
88
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
89
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
CHAPTER 4

LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS AND
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
90
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
91
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
CHAPTER 4. LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS AND DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
Effcient and accurate diagnosis of dengue is of primary importance for clinical care (i.e.
early detection of severe cases, case confrmation and differential diagnosis with other
infectious diseases), surveillance activities, outbreak control, pathogenesis, academic
research, vaccine development, and clinical trials.
Laboratory diagnosis methods for confrming dengue virus infection may involve
detection of the virus, viral nucleic acid, antigens or antibodies, or a combination of
these techniques. After the onset of illness, the virus can be detected in serum, plasma,
circulating blood cells and other tissues for 4–5 days. During the early stages of the
disease, virus isolation, nucleic acid or antigen detection can be used to diagnose the
infection. At the end of the acute phase of infection, serology is the method of choice
for diagnosis.
Antibody response to infection differs according to the immune status of the host (1).
When dengue infection occurs in persons who have not previously been infected with
a favivirus or immunized with a favivirus vaccine (e.g. for yellow fever, Japanese
encephalitis, tick-borne encephalitis), the patients develop a primary antibody response
characterized by a slow increase of specifc antibodies. IgM antibodies are the frst
immunoglobulin isotype to appear. These antibodies are detectable in 50% of patients
by days 3-5 after onset of illness, increasing to 80% by day 5 and 99% by day 10
(Figure 4.1). IgM levels peak about two weeks after the onset of symptoms and then
decline generally to undetectable levels over 2–3 months. Anti-dengue serum IgG is
generally detectable at low titres at the end of the frst week of illness, increasing slowly
thereafter, with serum IgG still detectable after several months, and probably even for
life (2–4) .
During a secondary dengue infection (a dengue infection in a host that has previously
been infected by a dengue virus, or sometimes after non-dengue favivirus vaccination
or infection), antibody titres rise rapidly and react broadly against many faviviruses. The
dominant immunoglobulin isotype is IgG which is detectable at high levels, even in the
acute phase, and persists for periods lasting from 10 months to life. Early convalescent
stage IgM levels are signifcantly lower in secondary infections than in primary ones
and may be undetectable in some cases, depending on the test used (5). To distinguish
primary and secondary dengue infections, IgM/IgG antibody ratios are now more
commonly used than the haemagglutination-inhibition test (HI) (6–8).
A range of laboratory diagnostic methods has been developed to support patient
management and disease control. The choice of diagnostic method depends on the
purpose for which the testing is done (e.g. clinical diagnosis, epidemiological survey,
vaccine development), the type of laboratory facilities and technical expertise available,
costs, and the time of sample collection.
92
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Figure 4.1 Approximate time-line of primary and secondary dengue virus infections and the diagnostic
methods that can be used to detect infection
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 90 >90 Days
NS1 detection
Virus isolation
RNA detection

Viraemia
IgM primary
IgM secondary
IgG secondary
IgG secondary infection
O.D
O.D
Onset of symptoms (days)
≥25
60
80
0
In general, tests with high sensitivity and specifcity require more complex technologies
and technical expertise, while rapid tests may compromise sensitivity and specifcity for
the ease of performance and speed. Virus isolation and nucleic acid detection are more
labour-intensive and costly but are also more specifc than antibody detection using
serologic methods. Figure 4.2 shows a general inverse relationship between the ease of
use or accessibility of a diagnostic method and the confdence in the results of the test.
Figure 4.2 Comparison of diagnostic tests according to their accessibility and confdence
NS1
detection
ACCESSIBILITY
Genome
detection
Virus
isolation
Serology
IgM
Serology
IgG
CONFIDENCE
DIRECT METHODS INDIRECT METHODS
Diagnostic Diagnosis Time to Specimen Time of collection Facilities Cost
methods of acute results after onset of
infection symptoms
Viral isolation Confrmed 1–2 weeks Whole blood, 1–5 days Mosquito or cell culture facilities, $$$
and serotype serum, tissues BSL-2/BSL-3
a

laboratory,
identifcation fuorescence microscope or
molecular biology equipment
Nucleic acid Confrmed 1 or 2 days Tissues, whole 1–5 days BSL-2 laboratory, equipment $$$
detection blood, serum, for molecular biology
plasma
Antigen Not yet 1 day Serum 1–6 days ELISA facilities $$
detection determined
Co|||uou >] uu, ¹ssuo |o| |/ |uc||os |o| |s|o|ou, ]]]
immuno-chemistry
IgM ELISA Probable 1–2 days Serum, plasma, After 5 days ELISA facilities
$
IgM rapid test 30 minutes
whole blood
No additional supplies
IgG (paired Confrmed 7 days Serum, plasma, Acute sera, ELISA facilities $
sera) by ELISA, HI or more whole blood 1–5 days; BSL-2 laboratory
or neutralization convalescent for neutralization assay
test after 15 days
93
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
4.2 CONSIDERATIONS IN THE CHOICE OF DIAGNOSTIC METHODS
4.2.1 Clinical management
Dengue virus infection produces a broad spectrum of symptoms, many of which are
non-specifc. Thus, a diagnosis based only on clinical symptoms is unreliable. Early
laboratory confrmation of clinical diagnosis may be valuable because some patients
progress over a short period from mild to severe disease and sometimes to death. Early
intervention may be life-saving.
Before day 5 of illness, during the febrile period, dengue infections may be diagnosed
by virus isolation in cell culture, by detection of viral RNA by nucleic acid amplifcation
tests (NAAT), or by detection of viral antigens by ELISA or rapid tests. Virus isolation in
cell culture is usually performed only in laboratories with the necessary infrastructure
and technical expertise. For virus culture, it is important to keep blood samples cooled
or frozen to preserve the viability of the virus during transport from the patient to the
laboratory. The isolation and identifcation of dengue viruses in cell cultures usually takes
several days. Nucleic acid detection assays with excellent performance characteristics
may identify dengue viral RNA within 24–48 hours. However, these tests require
expensive equipment and reagents and, in order to avoid contamination, tests must
observe quality control procedures and must be performed by experienced technicians.
NS1 antigen detection kits now becoming commercially available can be used in
laboratories with limited equipment and yield results within a few hours. Rapid dengue
antigen detection tests can be used in feld settings and provide results in less than
an hour. Currently, these assays are not type-specifc, are expensive and are under
evaluation for diagnostic accuracy and cost-effectiveness in multiple settings. Table 4.1
summarizes various dengue diagnostic methods and their costs.
Table 4.1 Summary of operating characteristics and comparative costs of dengue diagnostic methods (9)
Diagnostic Diagnosis Time to Specimen Time of collection Facilities Cost
methods of acute results after onset of
infection symptoms
Viral isolation Confrmed 1–2 weeks Whole blood, 1–5 days Mosquito or cell culture facilities, $$$
and serotype serum, tissues BSL-2/BSL-3
a

laboratory,
identifcation fuorescence microscope or
molecular biology equipment
Nucleic acid Confrmed 1 or 2 days Tissues, whole 1–5 days BSL-2 laboratory, equipment $$$
detection blood, serum, for molecular biology
plasma
Antigen Not yet 1 day Serum 1–6 days ELISA facilities $$
detection determined
Co|||uou >] uu, ¹ssuo |o| |/ |uc||os |o| |s|o|ou, ]]]
immuno-chemistry
IgM ELISA Probable 1–2 days Serum, plasma, After 5 days ELISA facilities
$
IgM rapid test 30 minutes
whole blood
No additional supplies
IgG (paired Confrmed 7 days Serum, plasma, Acute sera, ELISA facilities $
sera) by ELISA, HI or more whole blood 1–5 days; BSL-2 laboratory
or neutralization convalescent for neutralization assay
test after 15 days
a
Requirements may vary according to each country’s national policies.
94
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
After day 5, dengue viruses and antigens disappear from the blood coincident with the
appearance of specifc antibodies. NS1 antigen may be detected in some patients for
a few days after defervescence. Dengue serologic tests are more available in dengue-
endemic countries than are virological tests. Specimen transport is not a problem as
immunoglobulins are stable at tropical room temperatures.
For serology, the time of specimen collection is more fexible than that for virus isolation
or RNA detection because an antibody response can be measured by comparing a
sample collected during the acute stage of illness with samples collected weeks or months
later. Low levels of a detectable dengue IgM response – or the absence of it – in some
secondary infections reduces the diagnostic accuracy of IgM ELISA tests. Results of rapid
tests may be available within less than one hour. Reliance on rapid tests to diagnose
dengue infections should be approached with caution, however, since the performance
of all commercial tests has not yet been evaluated by reference laboratories (10).
A four-fold or greater increase in antibody levels measured by IgG ELISA or by
haemagglutination inhibition (HI) test in paired sera indicates an acute or recent favivirus
infection. However, waiting for the convalescent serum collected at the time of patient
discharge is not very useful for diagnosis and clinical management and provides only
a retrospective result.

4.2.1.1 Differential diagnosis
Dengue fever can easily be confused with non-dengue illnesses, particularly in non-
epidemic situations. Depending on the geographical origin of the patient, other
etiologies – including non-dengue favivirus infections – should be ruled out. These
include yellow fever, Japanese encephalitis, St Louis encephalitis, Zika, and West
Nile, alphaviruses (such as Sinbis and chikungunya), and other causes of fever
such as malaria, leptospirosis, typhoid, Rickettsial diseases (Rickettsia prowazeki, R.
mooseri, R. conori, R. rickettsi, Orientia tsutsugamushi, Coxiella burneti, etc.), measles,
enteroviruses, infuenza and infuenza-like illnesses, haemorrhagic fevers (Arenaviridae:
Junin, etc.; Filoviridae: Marburg, Ebola; Bunyaviridae: hantaviruses, Crimean-Congo
haemorrhagic fever, etc.).
Both the identifcation of virus/viral RNA/viral antigen and the detection of an antibody
response are preferable for dengue diagnosis to either approach alone (see Table
4.2).
Table 4.2 Interpretation of dengue diagnostic tests [adapted from Dengue and Control (DENCO) study]
Highly suggestive Confrmed
One of the following: One of the following:
1. IgM + in a single serum sample 1. PCR +
2. IgG + in a single serum sample with a 2. Virus culture +
HI titre of 1280 or greater 3. IgM seroconversion in paired sera
4. IgG seroconversion in paired sera or fourfold
IgG titer increase in paired sera
95
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
Unfortunately, an ideal diagnostic test that permits early and rapid diagnosis, is affordable
for different health systems, is easy to perform, and has a robust performance, is not yet
available.
4.2.2 Outbreak investigations
During outbreaks some patients may be seen presenting with fever with or without rash
during the acute illness stage; some others may present with signs of plasma leakage or
shock, and others with signs of haemorrhages, while still others may be observed during
the convalescent phase.
One of the priorities in a suspected outbreak is to identify the causative agent so that
appropriate public health measures can be taken and physicians can be encouraged to
initiate appropriate acute illness management. In such cases, the rapidity and specifcity
of diagnostic tests is more important than test sensitivity. Samples collected from febrile
patients could be tested by nucleic acid methods in a well-equipped laboratory or a
broader spectrum of laboratories using an ELISA-based dengue antigen detection kit.
If specimens are collected after day 5 of illness, commercial IgM ELISA or sensitive
dengue IgM rapid tests may suggest a dengue outbreak, but results are preferably
confrmed with reliable serological tests performed in a reference laboratory with broad
arbovirus diagnostic capability. Serological assays may be used to determine the extent
of outbreaks.
4.2.3 Surveillance
Dengue surveillance systems aim to detect the circulation of specifc viruses in the human
or mosquito populations. The diagnostic tools used should be sensitive, specifc and
affordable for the country. Laboratories responsible for surveillance are usually national
and/or reference laboratories capable of performing diagnostic tests as described
above for dengue and for a broad range of other etiologies.
4.2.4 Vaccine trials
Vaccine trials are performed in order to measure vaccine safety and effcacy in vaccinated
persons. The plaque reduction and neutralization test (PRNT) and the microneutralization
assays are commonly used to measure protection correlates.
Following primary infections in non-favivirus immunes, neutralizing antibodies as
measured by PRNT may be relatively or completely specifc to the infecting virus type
(11,12). This assay is the most reliable means of measuring the titre of neutralizing
antibodies in the serum of an infected individual as a measure of the level of protection
against an infecting virus. The assay is based on the principle that neutralizing antibodies
inactivate the virus so that it is no longer able to infect and replicate in target cells.
After a second dengue virus infection, high-titre neutralizing antibodies are produced
against at least two, and often all four, dengue viruses as well as against non-dengue
faviviruses. This cross reactivity results from memory B-cells which produce antibodies
directed at virion epitopes shared by dengue viruses. During the early convalescent stage
following sequential dengue infections, the highest neutralizing antibody titre is often
directed against the frst infecting virus and not the most recent one. This phenomenon is
referred to as “original antigenic sin” (13).
96
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
The disadvantages of PRNT are that it is labour-intensive. A number of laboratories
recently developed high through-put neutralization tests that can be used in large-scale
surveillance studies and vaccine trials. Variable results have been observed in PRNTs
performed in different laboratories. Variations can be minimized if tests are performed
on standard cell lines using the same virus strains and the same temperature and time
for incubation of virus with antibody. Input virus should be carefully calculated to avoid
plaque overlap. Cell lines of mammalian origin, such as VERO cells, are recommended
for the production of seed viruses for use in PRNT.
The microneutralization assay is based on the same principle as PRNT. Variable methods
exist. In one, instead of counting the number of plaques per well, viral antigen is stained
using a labelled antibody and the quantity of antigen measured colorimetrically. The
test may measure nucleic acid using PCR. The microneutralization assay was designed
to use smaller amounts of reagents and for testing larger numbers of samples. In viral
antigen detection tests the spread of virus throughout the cells is not limited because,
in PRNTs using semisolid overlays, the time after infection must be standardized to
avoid measuring growth after many cycles of replication. Since not all viruses grow
at the same rate, the incubation periods are virus-specifc. As with standard PRNTs,
antibodies measured by micromethods from individuals with secondary infections may
react broadly with all four dengue viruses.
Table 4.3 Advantages and limitations of dengue diagnostic methods (9)
Indications Diagnostic Tests Advantages Limitations
Duu|oss o| |uc|oc ucu uo|oc|o| •/os| so|s|vo u|u sooc|c •|o|o||u| |u|so oos|vo uuo |o
ucu|o uo|uuo •|oss||o |o uo|||, so|o|,oo co||uu|u|o|
||oc|o| •|u||, uooou|u|co |o|ou|||ou,¦ •|xoo|svo
so oooo||u||, |o uouc| o| ou|o|| •|oous oxoo||so u|u oxoo|svo |u|o|u|o|,
management equipment
•|o| ooss||o |o u||o|o||u|o |o|voo|
primary and secondary infection
|so|u|o| | co|| cu||u|o •Sooc|c •|oou oxoo||so u|u |uc||,
u|u uo|||cu|o| us|u •|oss||o |o uo|||, |o| co|| cu||u|o u|u |uo|osco|| uc|oscoo,
uuu|o|uo|osco|co so|o|,oo |, us|u sooc|c u|||ouos •¹u|os uo|o ||u| ] voo|
•|o| ooss||o |o u||o|o||u|o |o|voo|
primary and secondary infection
/||uo| uo|oc|o| •|us, |o oo||o|u •|o| us so|s|vo us v|us so|u|o| o|
| c||cu| soocuo|s •Cooo||u||, |o| ou||, uuu|oss uu, ||/ uo|oc|o|
impact on patient treatment
So|o|ouc |os|s •Uso|u| |o| co|||uu|o| o| ucu|o ||oc|o| •/u, uss cusos |ocuuso |u/ |ovo|s uu,
|u/ |os|s •|ous| oxoo|svo |o |ov o| u|uo|oc|u||o | souo soco|uu|,
So|oco|vo|so| ^|o|u •|us, |o oo||o|u ||oc|o|s
|so | H| o| |||S/ |uC •Cu| us||uus| |o|voo| o|uu|, •|oou |vo suuo|os
|||os |o|voo| ucu|o u|u soco|uu|, ||oc|o| •Do|u, | co|||u|u uuu|oss
and convalescent samples
Su|vo||u|co |u/ uo|oc|o| •|uo|||, o|o|u||o uo|uuo cusos •/u, uss cusos |ocuuso |u/ |ovo|s uu,
u|u ou|||ou| •|us, |o oo||o|u |o| cuso uo|oc|o| | |o |ov | soco|uu|, ||oc|o|s
identifcation; sentinel laboratories
Monitor
o||oc|vo|oss \|u| so|u|o| u|u •Co|||u cusos •Cu| |o oo||o|uou o||, | |o|o|o|co
o| ||o|vo||o|s ||/ uo|oc|o| •|uo|||, so|o|,oos |u|o|u|o|os
•|oou ucu|o suuo|os
97
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
In drug trials, patients should have confrmed etiological diagnosis (see Table 4.2 for
highly suggestive and confrmed diagnosis).
Table 4.3 summarizes the advantages and limitations of each of the diagnostic methods
for each purpose.
4.3 CURRENT DENGUE DIAGNOSTIC METHODS
4.3.1 Virus isolation
Specimens for virus isolation should be collected early in the course of the infection,
during the period of viraemia (usually before day 5). Virus may be recovered from
serum, plasma and peripheral blood mononuclear cells and attempts may be made
from tissues collected at autopsy (e.g. liver, lung, lymph nodes, thymus, bone marrow).
Because dengue virus is heat-labile, specimens awaiting transport to the laboratory
should be kept in a refrigerator or packed in wet ice. For storage up to 24 hours,
specimens should be kept at between +4 °C and +8 °C. For longer storage, specimens
should be frozen at -70 °C in a deep-freezer or stored in a liquid nitrogen container.
Storage even for short periods at –20 °C is not recommended.
Cell culture is the most widely used method for dengue virus isolation. The mosquito cell
line C6/36 (cloned from Ae. albopictus) or AP61 (cell line from Ae. pseudoscutellaris)
are the host cells of choice for routine isolation of dengue virus. Since not all wild type
dengue viruses induce a cytopathic effect in mosquito cell lines, cell cultures must be
screened for specifc evidence of infection by an antigen detection immunofuorescence
assay using serotype-specifc monoclonal antibodies and favivirus group-reactive or
dengue complex-reactive monoclonal antibodies. Several mammalian cell cultures,
such as Vero, LLCMK2, and BHK21, may also be used but are less effcient. Virus
isolation followed by an immunofuorescence assay for confrmation generally requires
1–2 weeks and is possible only if the specimen is properly transported and stored to
preserve the viability of the virus in it.
When no other methods are available, clinical specimens may also be inoculated by
intracranial route in suckling mice or intrathoracic inoculation of mosquitoes. Newborn
animals can develop encephalitis symptoms but with some dengue strains mice may
exhibit no signs of illness. Virus antigen is detected in mouse brain or mosquito head
squashes by staining with anti-dengue antibodies.
4.3.2 Nucleic acid detection
RNA is heat-labile and therefore specimens for nucleic acid detection must be handled
and stored according to the procedures described for virus isolation.
4.3.2.1 RT-PCR
Since the 1990s, several reverse transcriptase-polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR)
assays have been developed. They offer better sensitivity compared to virus isolation
Indications Diagnostic Tests Advantages Limitations
Duu|oss o| |uc|oc ucu uo|oc|o| •/os| so|s|vo u|u sooc|c •|o|o||u| |u|so oos|vo uuo |o
ucu|o uo|uuo •|oss||o |o uo|||, so|o|,oo co||uu|u|o|
||oc|o| •|u||, uooou|u|co |o|ou|||ou,¦ •|xoo|svo
so oooo||u||, |o uouc| o| ou|o|| •|oous oxoo||so u|u oxoo|svo |u|o|u|o|,
management equipment
•|o| ooss||o |o u||o|o||u|o |o|voo|
primary and secondary infection
|so|u|o| | co|| cu||u|o •Sooc|c •|oou oxoo||so u|u |uc||,
u|u uo|||cu|o| us|u •|oss||o |o uo|||, |o| co|| cu||u|o u|u |uo|osco|| uc|oscoo,
uuu|o|uo|osco|co so|o|,oo |, us|u sooc|c u|||ouos •¹u|os uo|o ||u| ] voo|
•|o| ooss||o |o u||o|o||u|o |o|voo|
primary and secondary infection
/||uo| uo|oc|o| •|us, |o oo||o|u •|o| us so|s|vo us v|us so|u|o| o|
| c||cu| soocuo|s •Cooo||u||, |o| ou||, uuu|oss uu, ||/ uo|oc|o|
impact on patient treatment
So|o|ouc |os|s •Uso|u| |o| co|||uu|o| o| ucu|o ||oc|o| •/u, uss cusos |ocuuso |u/ |ovo|s uu,
|u/ |os|s •|ous| oxoo|svo |o |ov o| u|uo|oc|u||o | souo soco|uu|,
So|oco|vo|so| ^|o|u •|us, |o oo||o|u ||oc|o|s
|so | H| o| |||S/ |uC •Cu| us||uus| |o|voo| o|uu|, •|oou |vo suuo|os
|||os |o|voo| ucu|o u|u soco|uu|, ||oc|o| •Do|u, | co|||u|u uuu|oss
and convalescent samples
Su|vo||u|co |u/ uo|oc|o| •|uo|||, o|o|u||o uo|uuo cusos •/u, uss cusos |ocuuso |u/ |ovo|s uu,
u|u ou|||ou| •|us, |o oo||o|u |o| cuso uo|oc|o| | |o |ov | soco|uu|, ||oc|o|s
identifcation; sentinel laboratories
Monitor
o||oc|vo|oss \|u| so|u|o| u|u •Co|||u cusos •Cu| |o oo||o|uou o||, | |o|o|o|co
o| ||o|vo||o|s ||/ uo|oc|o| •|uo|||, so|o|,oos |u|o|u|o|os
•|oou ucu|o suuo|os
98
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
with a much more rapid turnaround time. In situ RT-PCR offers the ability to detect dengue
RNA in paraffn-embedded tissues.
All nucleic acid detection assays involve three basic steps: nucleic acid extraction and
purifcation, amplifcation of the nucleic acid, and detection and characterization of the
amplifed product. Extraction and purifcation of viral RNA from the specimen can be
done by traditional liquid phase separation methods (e.g. phenol, chloroform) but has
been gradually replaced by silica-based commercial kits (beads or columns) that are
more reproducible and faster, especially since they can be automated using robotics
systems. Many laboratories utilize a nested RT-PCR assay, using universal dengue
primers targeting the C/prM region of the genome for an initial reverse transcription and
amplifcation step, followed by a nested PCR amplifcation that is serotype-specifc (14).
A combination of the four serotype-specifc oligonucleotide primers in a single reaction
tube (one-step multiplex RT-PCR) is an interesting alternative to the nested RT-PCR (15).
The products of these reactions are separated by electrophoresis on an agarose gel,
and the amplifcation products are visualized as bands of different molecular weights in
the agarose gel using ethidium bromide dye, and compared with standard molecular
weight markers. In this assay design, dengue serotypes are identifed by the size of their
bands.
Compared to virus isolation, the sensitivity of the RT-PCR methods varies from 80% to
100% and depends on the region of the genome targeted by the primers, the approach
used to amplify or detect the PCR products (e.g. one-step RT-PCR versus two-step RT-
PCR), and the method employed for subtyping (e.g. nested PCR, blot hybridization with
specifc DNA probes, restriction site-specifc PCR, sequence analysis, etc.). To avoid
false positive results due to non-specifc amplifcation, it is important to target regions of
the genome that are specifc to dengue and not conserved among favi- or other related
viruses. False-positive results may also occur as a result of contamination by amplicons
from previous amplifcations. This can be prevented by physical separation of different
steps of the procedure and by adhering to stringent protocols for decontamination.
4.3.2.2 Real-time RT-PCR
The real-time RT-PCR assay is a one step assay system used to quantitate viral RNA
and using primer pairs and probes that are specifc to each dengue serotype. The use
of a fuorescent probe enables the detection of the reaction products in real time, in a
specialized PCR machine, without the need for electrophoresis. Many real-time RT-PCR
assays have been developed employing TaqMan or SYBR Green technologies. The
TaqMan real-time PCR is highly specifc due to the sequence-specifc hybridization of
the probe. Nevertheless, primers and probes reported in publications may not be able
to detect all dengue virus strains: the sensitivity of the primers and probes depends on
their homology with the targeted gene sequence of the particular virus analyzed. The
SYBR green real-time RT-PCR has the advantage of simplicity in primer design and uses
universal RT-PCR protocols but is theoretically less specifc.
Real-time RT-PCR assays are either “singleplex” (i.e. detecting only one serotype at
a time) or “multiplex” (i.e. able to identify all four serotypes from a single sample).
The multiplex assays have the advantage that a single reaction can determine all four
serotypes without the potential for introduction of contamination during manipulation of
the sample. However the multiplex real-time RT-PCR assays, although faster, are currently
less sensitive than nested RT-PCR assays. An advantage of this method is the ability to
99
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
determine viral titre in a clinical sample, which may be used to study the pathogenesis
of dengue disease (16).
4.3.2.3 Isothermal amplifcation methods
The NASBA (nucleic acid sequence based amplifcation) assay is an isothermal RNA-
specifc amplifcation assay that does not require thermal cycling instrumentation. The
initial stage is a reverse transcription in which the single-stranded RNA target is copied
into a double-stranded DNA molecule that serves as a template for RNA transcription.
Detection of the amplifed RNA is accomplished either by electrochemiluminescence or in
real-time with fuorescent-labelled molecular beacon probes. NASBA has been adapted
to dengue virus detection with sensitivity near that of virus isolation in cell cultures and
may be a useful method for studying dengue infections in feld studies (17).
Loop mediated amplifcation methods have also been described but their performance
compared to other nucleic acid amplifcation methods are not known (18).
4.3.3 Detection of antigens
Until recently, detection of dengue antigens in acute-phase serum was rare in patients
with secondary infections because such patients had pre-existing virus-IgG antibody
immunocomplexes. New developments in ELISA and dot blot assays directed to the
envelop/membrane (E/M) antigen and the non-structural protein 1 (NS1) demonstrated
that high concentrations of these antigens in the form of immune complexes could be
detected in patients with both primary and secondary dengue infections up to nine days
after the onset of illness.
The NS1 glycoprotein is produced by all faviviruses and is secreted from mammalian
cells. NS1 produces a very strong humoral response. Many studies have been directed
at using the detection of NS1 to make an early diagnosis of dengue virus infection.
Commercial kits for the detection of NS1 antigen are now available, though they do
not differentiate between dengue serotypes. Their performance and utility are currently
being evaluated by laboratories worldwide, including the WHO/TDR/PDVI laboratory
network.
Fluorescent antibody, immunoperoxidase and avidin-biotin enzyme assays allow
detection of dengue virus antigen in acetone-fxed leucocytes and in snap-frozen or
formalin-fxed tissues collected at autopsy.
4.3.4 Serological tests
4.3.4.1 MAC-ELISA
For the IgM antibody-capture enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (MAC-ELISA) total IgM
in patients’ sera is captured by anti-µ chain specifc antibodies (specifc to human IgM)
coated onto a microplate. Dengue-specifc antigens, from one to four serotypes (DEN-1,
-2, -3, and -4), are bound to the captured anti-dengue IgM antibodies and are detected
by monoclonal or polyclonal dengue antibodies directly or indirectly conjugated with an
100
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
enzyme that will transform a non-coloured substrate into coloured products. The optical
density is measured by spectrophotometer.
Serum, blood on flter paper and saliva, but not urine, can be used for detection of IgM if
samples are taken within the appropriate time frame (fve days or more after the onset of
fever). Serum specimens may be tested at a single dilution or at multiple dilutions. Most
of the antigens used for this assay are derived from the dengue virus envelope protein
(usually virus-infected cell culture supernatants or suckling mouse brain preparations).
MAC-ELISA has good sensitivity and specifcity but only when used fve or more days
after the onset of fever. Different commercial kits (ELISA or rapid tests) are available but
have variable sensitivity and specifcity. A WHO/TDR/PDVI laboratory network recently
evaluated selected commercial ELISAs and frst-generation rapid diagnostic tests, fnding
that ELISAs generally performed better than rapid tests.
Cross-reactivity with other circulating f aviviruses such as Japanese encephalitis, St Louis
encephalitis and yellow fever, does not seem to be a problem but some false positives
were obtained in sera from patients with malaria, leptospirosis and past dengue infection
(10). These limitations have to be taken into account when using the tests in regions
where these pathogens co-circulate. It is recommended that tests be evaluated against
a panel of sera from relevant diseases in a particular region before being released to
the market. It is not possible to use IgM assays to identify dengue serotypes as these
antibodies are broadly cross-reactive even following primary infections. Recently, some
authors have described MAC-ELISA (Figure 4.3) that could allow serotype determination
but further evaluations are required (19).
4.3.4.2 IgG ELISA
The IgG ELISA is used for the detection of recent or past dengue infections (if paired sera
are collected within the correct time frame). This assay uses the same antigens as the
Figure 4.3 Principle of a MAC-ELISA test
Coloured
substrate
Non-coloured
substrate
Microplate
Anti-µ chain
Patient’s IgM
DEN antigen
Anti-dengue
Ab conjugated
with enzyme
Spectrophotometer
Non dengue-specifc
IgM
101
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
MAC-ELISA. The use of E/M-specifc capture IgG ELISA (GAC) allows detection of IgG
antibodies over a period of 10 months after the infection. IgG antibodies are lifelong as
measured by E/M antigen-coated indirect IgG ELISA, but a fourfold or greater increase
in IgG antibodies in acute and convalescent paired sera can be used to document
recent infections. Test results correlate well with the haemagglutination-inhibition test.
An ELISA inhibition method (EIM) to detect IgG dengue antibodies (20) is also used
for the serological diagnosis and surveillance of dengue cases. This system is based in
the competition for the antigen sites by IgG dengue antibodies in the sample and the
conjugated human IgG anti-dengue.
This method can be used to detect IgG antibodies in serum or plasma and flter-paper
stored blood samples and permits identifcation of a case as a primary or secondary
dengue infection (20,21,22). In general, IgG ELISA lacks specifcity within the favivirus
serocomplex groups. Following viral infections, newly produced antibodies are less
avid than antibodies produced months or years after infection.
Antibody avidity is used in a few laboratories to discriminate primary and secondary
dengue infections. Such tests are not in wide use and are not available commercially.
4.3.4.3 IgM/IgG ratio
A dengue virus E/M protein-specifc IgM/IgG ratio can be used to distinguish primary
from secondary dengue virus infections. IgM capture and IgG capture ELISAs are the
most common assays for this purpose. In some laboratories, dengue infection is defned
as primary if the IgM/IgG OD ratio is greater than 1.2 (using patient’s sera at 1/100
dilution) or 1.4 (using patient’s sera at 1/20 dilutions). The infection is secondary if the
ratio is less than 1.2 or 1.4. This algorithm has also been adopted by some commercial
vendors. However, ratios may vary between laboratories, thus indicating the need for
better standardization of test performance (8).
4.3.4.4 IgA
Positive detection for serum anti-dengue IgA as measured by anti-dengue virus IgA
capture ELISA (AAC-ELISA) often occurs one day after that for IgM. The IgA titre peaks
around day 8 after onset of fever and decreases rapidly until it is undetectable by day
40. No differences in IgA titres were found by authors between patients with primary
or secondary infections. Even though IgA values are generally lower than IgM, both in
serum and saliva, the two methods could be performed together to help in interpreting
dengue serology (22,23). This approach is not used very often and requires additional
evaluation.
4.3.4.5 Haemagglutination-inhibition test
The haemagglutination-inhibition (HI) test (see Figure 4.4) is based on the ability of
dengue antigens to agglutinate red blood cells (RBC) of ganders or trypsinized human
O RBC. Anti-dengue antibodies in sera can inhibit this agglutination and the potency
of this inhibition is measured in an HI test. Serum samples are treated with acetone or
kaolin to remove non-specifc inhibitors of haemagglutination, and then adsorbed with
gander or trypsinized type O human RBC to remove non-specifc agglutinins. Each batch
102
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
of antigens and RBC is optimized. PH optima of each dengue haemagglutinin requires
the use of multiple different pH buffers for each serotype. Optimally the HI test requires
paired sera obtained upon hospital admission (acute) and discharge (convalescent) or
paired sera with an interval of more than seven days. The assay does not discriminate
between infections by closely related f aviviruses (e.g. between dengue virus and
Japanese encephalitis virus or West Nile virus) nor between immunoglobulin isotypes.
The response to a primary infection is characterized by the low level of antibodies in
the acute-phase serum drawn before day 5 and a slow elevation of HI antibody titres
thereafter. During secondary dengue infections HI antibody titres rise rapidly, usually
exceeding 1:1280. Values below this are generally observed in convalescent sera from
patients with primary responses.
4.3.5 Haematological tests
Platelets and haematocrit values are commonly measured during the acute stages of
dengue infection. These should be performed carefully using standardized protocols,
reagents and equipment.
A drop of the platelet count below 100 000 per µL may be observed in dengue fever
but it is a constant feature of dengue haemorrhagic fever. Thrombocytopaenia is usually
observed in the period between day 3 and day 8 following the onset of illness.
Haemoconcentration, as estimated by an increase in haematocrit of 20% or more
compared with convalescent values, is suggestive of hypovolaemia due to vascular
permeability and plasma leakage.
Figure 4.4 Haemagglutination-inhibition assay
Haemagglutination
= negative result
Inhibition of
Haemagglutination
= positive result
Dengue virus
antigens
Red blood
cells
Anti-dengue virus
antibody
103
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
4.4 FUTURE TEST DEVELOPMENTS
Microsphere-based immunoassays (MIAs) are becoming increasingly popular as a
serological option for the laboratory diagnosis of many diseases. This technology is based
on the covalent bonding of antigen or antibody to microspheres or beads. Detection
methods include lasers to elicit fuorescence of varying wavelengths. This technology is
attractive as it is faster than the MAC-ELISA and has potential for multiplexing serological
tests designed to identify antibody responses to several viruses. MIAs can also be used
to detect viruses.
Rapid advances in biosensor technology using mass spectrometry have led to the
development of powerful systems that can provide rapid discrimination of biological
components in complex mixtures. The mass spectra that are produced can be considered
a specifc fngerprint or molecular profle of the bacteria or virus analysed. The software
system built into the instrument identifes and quantifes the pathogen in a given sample
by comparing the resulting mass spectra with those in a database of infectious agents,
and thus allows the rapid identifcation of many thousands of types of bacteria and
viruses. Additionally, these tools can recognize a previously unidentifed organism in the
sample and describe how it is related to those encountered previously. This could be
useful in determining not only dengue serotypes but also dengue genotypes during an
outbreak. Identifcation kits for infectious agents are available in 96-well format and can
be designed to meet specifc requirements. Samples are processed for DNA extraction,
PCR amplifcation, mass spectrometry and computer analysis.
Microarray technology makes it possible to screen a sample for many different nucleic
acid fragments corresponding to different viruses in parallel. The genetic material must
be amplifed before hybridization to the microarray, and amplifcation strategy can
target conserved sequences as well as random-based ones. Short oligonucleotides
attached on the microarray slide give a relatively exact sequence identifcation, while
longer DNA fragments give a higher tolerance for mismatches and thus an improved
ability to detect diverged strains. A laser-based scanner is commonly used as a reader to
detect amplifed fragments labelled with fuorescent dyes. Microarray could be a useful
technology to test, at the same time, dengue virus and other arboviruses circulating in
the region and all the pathogens responsible for dengue-like symptoms.
Other approaches have been tested but are still in the early stages of development and
evaluation. For instance, the luminescence-based techniques are becoming increasingly
popular owing to their high sensitivity, low background, wide dynamic range and
relatively inexpensive instrumentation.
104
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
4.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Many laboratories use in-house assays. The main weakness of these assays is the lack of
standardization of protocols, so results cannot be compared or analysed in aggregate. It
is important for national or reference centres to organize quality assurance programmes
to ensure the profciency of laboratory staff in performing the assays and to produce
reference materials for quality control of test kits and assays.
For nucleic acid amplifcation assays, precautions need to be established to prevent
contamination of patient materials. Controls and profciency-testing are necessary to
ensure a high degree of confdence (24).
4.6 BIOSAFETY ISSUES
The collection and processing of blood and other specimens place health care workers
at risk of exposure to potentially infectious material. To minimize the risk of infection, safe
laboratory techniques (i.e. use of personal protective equipment, appropriate containers
for collecting and transporting samples, etc.) must be practised as described in WHO’s
Laboratory biosafety manual (25).
4.7 ORGANIZATION OF LABORATORY SERVICES
In a disease-endemic country, it is important to organize laboratory services in the
context of patients’ needs and disease control strategies. Appropriate resources should
be allocated and training provided. A model is proposed in Table 4.4. Examples of
good and bad practice can be found in Table 4.5.
Table 4.4 Proposed model for organization of laboratory services
Dengue diagnostic tests Primary health centres District centres Reference centre
- Virus culture +
- Nucleic acid detection +

- Antigen detection + +
• |||S/ + +
• |uou |os|s + + +
- Serology
• |||S/ + +
• |uou |os|s + + +

Functions
- Training and supervision + +
- Quality assurance + + +
- Surveillance activities + +
- Outbreak investigations +
- Referral of problem specimens + + +
- Investigation of problem specimens +
105
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
Table 4.5 Dengue laboratory diagnosis: examples of good and bad practice
Good practice Bad practice
1. When to use a test Consider the purpose of the testing Use of inappropriate test leading to
before making a selection (e.g. for misinterpretation of results
outbreak investigations versus
clinical diagnosis)
2. How to use a test Strictly follow manufacturer’s Not following the manufacturer’s
recommendations or updated Standard recommendations
Operational Procedures with Good Not following the written laboratory
Laboratory Practices procedures for each test, or modifying
the procedures without prior validation
3. Laboratory issues System of quality management instituted Results not reliable or accurate because
in the laboratory no quality control was used in the assay,
or personnel are not profcient, or
equipment not calibrated
Records not properly kept
Use of unvalidated test kits
Mixing reagents from different test kits or
test lots
False positive results due to contamination
Paired serum samples should be tested Over-interpretation and misinterpretation
in the same assay to determine if of test results

there is a four-fold rise in titre
Acute samples not re-tested together with
convalescent samples
106
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
4.8 REFERENCES
1. Vorndam V, Kuno G. Laboratory diagnosis of dengue virus infections. In: Gubler DJ,
Kuno G, eds. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever. New York, CAB International,
1997:313–333.
2. Innis B et al. An enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay to characterize dengue infections
where dengue and Japanese encephalitis co-circulate. American Journal of Tropical
Medicine and Hygiene, 1989, 40:418–427.
3. PAHO. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever in the Americas: guidelines for
prevention and control. Washington, DC, Pan American Health Organization, 1994
(Scientifc Publication No. 548).
4. WHO. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control,
2nd ed. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1997.
5. Chanama S et al. Analysis of specifc IgM responses in secondary dengue virus
infections: levels and positive rates in comparison with primary infections. Journal of
Clinical Virology, 2004, 31:185–189.
6. Kuno G, Gomez I, Gubler DJ. An ELISA procedure for the diagnosis of dengue
infections. Journal of Virological Methods, 1991, 33:101–113.
7. Shu PY et al. Comparison of a capture immunoglobulin M (IgM) and IgG ELISA and
non-structural protein NS1 serotype-specifc IgG ELISA for differentiation of primary and
secondary dengue virus infections. Clinical and Diagnostic Laboratory Immunology,
2003, 10:622–630.
8. Falconar AK, de Plata E, Romero-Vivas CM. Altered enzyme-linked immunosorbent
assay immunoglobulin M (IgM)/IgG optical density ratios can correctly classify all
primary or secondary dengue virus infections 1 day after the onset of symptoms, when
all of the viruses can be isolated. Clinical and Vaccine Immunology, 2006, 13:1044–
1051.
9. Pelegrino JL. Summary of dengue diagnostic methods. World Health Organization,
Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases, 2006 (unpublished
report).
10. Hunsperger EA et al. Evaluation of commercially available anti–dengue virus
immunoglobulin M tests. Emerging Infectious Diseases (serial online), 2009, March
(date cited). Accessible at http://www.cdc.gov/EID/content/15/3/436.htm
11. Morens DM et al. Simplifed plaque reduction neutralization assay for dengue
viruses by semimicro methods in BHK-21 cells: comparison of the BHK suspension test
with standard plaque reduction neutralization. Journal of Clinical Microbiology, 1985,
22(2):250–254.
107
Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

4
12. Alvarez M et al. Improved dengue virus plaque formation on BHK21 and LLCMK2
cells: evaluation of some factors. Dengue Bulletin, 2005, 29:1–9.
13. Halstead SB, Rojanasuphot S, Sangkawibha N. Original antigenic sin in dengue.
American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 1983, 32:154–156.
14. Lanciotti RS et al. Rapid detection and typing of dengue viruses from clinical
samples by using reverse transcriptase-polymerase chain reaction. Journal of Clinical
Microbiology, 1992, 30:545–551.
15. Harris E et al. Typing of dengue viruses in clinical specimens and mosquitoes by
single tube multiplex reverse transcriptase PCR. Journal of Clinical Microbiology, 1998,
36:2634–2639.
16. Vaughn DW et al. Dengue viremia titer, antibody response pattern and virus serotype
correlate with disease severity. Journal of Infectious Diseases, 2000, 181:2–9.
17. Shu PY, Huang JH. Current advances in dengue diagnosis. Clinical and Diagnostic
Laboratory Immunology, 2004, 11(4):642–650.
18. Parida MM et al. Rapid detection and differentiation of dengue virus serotypes by
a real-time reverse transcription-loop-mediated isothermal amplifcation assay. Journal
of Clinical Microbiology, 2005, 43:2895–2903 (doi: 10.1128/JCM.43.6.2895-
2903.2005).
19. Vazquez S et al. Serological markers during dengue 3 primary and secondary
infections. Journal of Clinical Virology, 2005, 33(2):132–137.
20. Fernandez RJ, Vazquez S. Serological diagnosis of dengue by an ELISA inhibition
method (EIM). Memórias do Instituto Oswaldo Cruz, 1990, 85(3):347–351.
21. Vazquez S, Fernandez R, Llorente C. Usefulness of blood specimens on paper strips
for serologic studies with inhibition ELISA. Revista do Instituto de Medicina Tropical de
São Paulo, 1991, 33(4):309–311.
22. Vazquez S et al. Kinetics of antibodies in sera, saliva, and urine samples from adult
patients with primary or secondary dengue 3 virus infections. International Journal of
Infectious Diseases, 2007, 11:256–262.
23. Nawa M. Immunoglobulin A antibody responses in dengue patients: a useful
marker for serodiagnosis of dengue virus infection. Clinical and Vaccine Immunology,
2005, 12:1235–1237.
24. Lemmer K et al. External quality control assessments in PCR diagnostics of dengue
virus infections. Journal of Clinical Virology, 2004, 30:291–296.
25. WHO. Laboratory biosafety manual, 3rd ed. Geneva, World Health Organization,
2004 (ISBN 92 4 154650 6, WHO/CDS/CSR/LYO/2004.11,
http://www.who.int/csr/resources/publications/biosafety/Biosafety7.pdf).
108
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
109
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
CHAPTER 5

SURVEILLANCE, EMERGENCY
PREPAREDNESS AND RESPONSE
110
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
111
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
CHAPTER 5. SURVEILLANCE, EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND
RESPONSE
5. 1 OVERVIEW
The prevention of and response to dengue and other arboviruses involve developing
and implementing preparedness plans. These should include early warning systems,
epidemiological, entomological and environmental surveillance, laboratory support,
clinical case management, vector control, environmental controls, risk communication
and social mobilization. Sustainable solutions to dengue control require political will
and leadership in order to respond effectively to the needs of preparedness planning
and epidemic response (including insight into community responses to dengue, and
applied research to devise, test and evaluate new approaches and technologies).
National partnerships involving government bodies, research institutions and the private
sector, as well as international collaborations, are needed for comprehensive plans and
programmes for dengue epidemic preparedness and response.
This chapter provides an overview of the key areas of preparedness planning, epidemic
detection and emergency response for dengue containment and control in endemic
countries. It gives guidance to countries at risk of dengue introduction through the
movement of infected persons or vectors. Strategies are suggested for preparedness,
alert and response at local, national and international levels. Table 5.2 provides
examples of good and bad practice for dengue surveillance.
5.2 DENGUE SURVEILLANCE
The three major components of dengue surveillance – disease surveillance, vector
surveillance and monitoring of environmental and social risks – are presented below.
5.2.1 Disease (epidemiological) surveillance
Epidemiological surveillance is the ongoing systematic collection, recording, analysis,
interpretation and dissemination of data refecting the current health status of a community
or population so that action may be taken to prevent or control a disease. Surveillance
is a critical component of any dengue prevention and control programme as it provides
the information necessary for risk assessment, epidemic response and programme
evaluation. Surveillance can utilize both passive and active data collection processes.
Depending on the circumstances under investigation, surveillance uses a wide variety of
data sources to enhance and expand the epidemiological picture of transmission risk.
5.2.1.1 Purpose and objectives of the dengue surveillance system
The purpose(s) of the surveillance system should be explicitly and clearly described and
should include the intended uses of the system. Specifc objectives and performance
indicators (expected results) should be set for each administrative level of the health
system and for other agencies involved in dengue response within countries, as well
as for international and global surveillance. The objectives of the surveillance system
will guide the type of surveillance conducted, the timing of surveillance activities, the
112
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
signal(s) and thresholds for investigation and response, the specifc surveillance methods
used and the balance between the desired attributes of the surveillance system.
The overall objectives of public health surveillance (1) which are most applicable to
dengue are as follows:
• uo|oc| oououcs ouc||, |o| ou||, ||o|vo||o|
• uousu|o ||o |u|uo| o| usouso u|u o|ovuo uu|u |o| ||o ussossuo|| o| ||o socu|
and economic impact of dengue on the affected community;
• uo||o| ||o|us | ||o us|||u|o| u|u so|ouu o| uo|uuo ovo| |uo u|u
geographically;
• ovu|uu|o ||o o||oc|vo|oss o| uo|uuo o|ovo||o| u|u co|||o| o|ou|uuuos
• |uc||u|o o|u|||u u|u |osou|co u||ocu|o| o| ||o |uss o| |osso|s |ou||ou ||ou
programme evaluation.
In setting up a surveillance system, consideration should be given to balancing the risk of
an epidemic occurring, the value of early intervention in reducing the medical, social and
economic impact of the disease, and the fnite resources available for investigation and
control. The usefulness of the surveillance system depends on its attributes – the relative
importance given to the timeliness of signal detection, and the system’s sensitivity, positive
predictive value (PPV) and negative predictive value (NPV) for detecting epidemics.
Most importantly, the system must ensure that surveillance is linked to response and to
the ability to control or limit an epidemic by:
• ¹uo||oss s ||o sooou v|| v|c| cusos o| u|o||s u|o uo|oc|ou u|u |ooo||ou
• So|s|v|, s ||o o|ooo||o| o| cusos o| u|o||s occu|||u | ||o uoou|uo|cu| u|ou
or population detected by the system. Sensitivity is measured against a “gold
standard”, often laboratory confrmation, to determine the proportion of dengue
signals detected by the surveillance system against all real or confrmed cases or
alerts.
• ¹|o ||\ s ||o o|o|u|||, o| u uo|uuo su|u| |o|u u co|||uou cuso o| oououc
and is dependent on the background prevalence of the disease in the
population.
• ¹|o ||\ s ||o o|o|u|||, ||u| ||o su|vo||u|co s,s|ou uoos |o| ,o|u u uo|uuo
signal when no epidemic is occurring.
The quality of data is measured by its completeness (accuracy of information, missing
data, etc) and representativeness. Representativeness refects whether the surveillance
system accurately describes the distribution of cases in time (seasonality), place
(geographical distribution), and the population at risk of dengue. Data may not be
representative when case ascertainment is incomplete (e.g. in a sentinel surveillance
system or a statistically-based sample).
The main objective of dengue disease surveillance is usually to detect and forecast
epidemic activity. Surveillance activities should ideally include the surveillance of
human cases of the disease, laboratory-based surveillance, vector surveillance, and the
monitoring of environmental risk factors for dengue epidemics. Effective surveillance of
dengue also requires the appropriate level of investment of fnancial and human resources,
113
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
and training and tools to ensure that increased dengue transmission is detected early
and that the response is appropriate. Dengue activity may require consultation with, or
notifcation to, WHO under the International Health Regulations (2005) (2), depending
on the risk assessment. For instance, dengue activity may warrant communication with
WHO in cases such as the frst confrmation of locally-acquired dengue in a previously
unaffected area, a new serotype, the importation of dengue vectors, atypical clinical
presentations, and excessively high case-fatality rates.
Depending on whether epidemic detection or trend monitoring, or both, are the main
purposes of the surveillance system, different system attributes should be emphasized.
Where the risk of a dengue epidemic or the introduction of dengue is high, the
surveillance system should aim for timeliness, high sensitivity and a low threshold for
investigation, bearing in mind that a higher proportion of signals detected will prove to
be false positives and that follow-up investigations are likely to be resource-intensive.
Monitoring dengue incidence and prevalence over time establishes a baseline
measurement of the background rate of disease so that an unexpected rise in the number
of cases or the proportion of severe cases will trigger an alert and further investigation,
intervention and prevention measures. Early warning of an epidemic enables health
services to allocate human and material resources more effectively, to alert clinicians
to the need to diagnose and properly treat dengue cases, and to better engage the
community in prevention and control activities, thereby reducing transmission and
improving clinical outcomes.
5.2.1.2 Early warning systems
Early warning systems for dengue can include event-based surveillance, case-based
reporting of human disease or aggregated data reporting, and/or the surveillance of
risk factors for human disease.
Event-based surveillance
Event-based surveillance is designed to rapidly detect unusual or unexpected disease
events (signals) such as disease clusters (e.g. of unexplained fever or acute haemorrhagic
fever syndrome) and unexplained deaths, and may include events related to potential
exposure for humans (e.g. climatic conditions favourable to oviposition and subsequent
maturation of mosquitoes) (3,4). Event-based surveillance uses reports generated by
the media and other open sources of information, or via key informants in the affected
community, as well as reports provided through established surveillance systems. Unlike
classical surveillance systems, event-based surveillance uses unstructured and ad hoc
reporting of events rather than the routine collection of data and automated thresholds
for action (5). To be effective, event-based surveillance requires that a public health unit
or team is designated to sort incoming information, confrm each reported event, and
trigger an immediate response, as appropriate.
Case-based surveillance and the surveillance of dengue risk factors
The utility of traditional dengue surveillance in triggering rapid response is strengthened
by the availability and real-time collection, analysis and interpretation of linked clinical,
laboratory and epidemiological data using established case defnitions of infection and
disease. The surveillance case defnitions for dengue and severe dengue are currently
under review.
114
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
The threshold for alert and response will vary according to the operational level affected
(local, national, international) and whether the affected area is endemic for dengue or at
risk of its introduction. For example, at the local level a single dengue case may trigger
action. At state or provincial level, the increase in reported cases above an established
baseline for the same week or month in preceding years, or increasing vector density,
may indicate impending epidemic activity. At national level, the detection of changes in
virus serotype, subtype or genotype distribution, clinical severity or seropositivity rate, or
the introduction of a dengue vector into a new ecological niche, are signals that should
be investigated without delay.
Well-defned triggers (indicators) should be identifed and established before the
emergency occurs in order to intensify surveillance and follow-up, and to initiate the
emergency response. The following indicators for epidemic detection – which use the
deviation of reported dengue cases or laboratory results from the “average” – have
been documented, although these indicators have been tested mostly in one specifc
setting only (6):
• “|xcoss o| uo|uuo cusos” |us |oo| usou succoss|u||, | |uo||o |co |o o|ouc|
every epidemic since 1982, including those involving DEN-4 in 1982, DEN-4
in 1986-87, DEN-2 in 1994, DEN-4 in 1998 and DEN-3 in 2001.
• “\|us so|u|o| |u|o | oxcoss o| |ou||o v|o|oucu| |os||u |u|o” uousu|ou us ||o
increased proportion of blood samples positive for dengue viruses in the low
season for dengue has proved useful in Puerto Rico (7,8,9).
• ¹|o uooou|u|co o| u |ov uo|uuo so|o|,oo cu| |o usou us u| ou||, vu|||u
signal but does not predict the occurrence of an immediate epidemic (10).
• “|ovo| u|o||” – o u| u|oxooc|ou u|u u|usuu| |c|ouso | ||o |uu|o| o| |ovo|
cases – may be a useful signal of increased dengue activity in locations where the
frequency and differential diagnosis of acute febrile illness is limited. A fever
alert is thus useful when used to monitor febrile syndromes such as dengue,
malaria, leptospirosis and West Nile fever (11,12).
• || sooc|c s|os uuu|o|u| |ucu|o|s suc| us ||o “oxcoss o| |o|uu|u|u |ovo|
cases” in malaria-endemic areas may provide complementary information and
should be further evaluated. It has already been tested in French Guiana (13).
The routine reporting of dengue cases or dengue-like syndromes can use passive, active
or enhanced surveillance. “Passive surveillance” is the routine reporting of diseases, by
which notifcation is usually initiated by health care providers (14). A particular challenge
of passive surveillance systems is continuously to motivate health care providers to report
cases in accordance with standardized case defnitions. Unfortunately, in many dengue-
endemic countries, surveillance is only passive and relies on reports by local physicians
who may not consider dengue in their differential diagnosis and/or fail to report cases
quickly and routinely. As a result, an epidemic has often reached or passed its peak
before it is recognized, and opportunities for control are missed. Designating dengue as
a notifable disease that is covered by public health legislation is one way to increase
compliance with reporting.
In “active surveillance”, the disease report is initiated by the health authority which
systematically asks health care providers about the disease of interest. This involves
outreach by public health authorities to stimulate reporting; examples include regular
telephone calls or visits to laboratories and hospitals to collect data in a timely fashion.
115
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
“Sentinel surveillance”, or the study of disease rates in a specifc cohort, geographic
area or population subgroup, is a form of active surveillance that is useful for answering
specifc epidemiological questions. Sentinel surveillance may be very effective at
determining disease trends locally, but because sentinel sites may not represent the
general population or the general incidence of dengue, they may have limited value
in determining national disease patterns and trends. Sentinel surveillance may also be
used to detect a “frst case” (as the word “sentinel” suggests), such as testing for dengue
in a neurology ward to detect cases of dengue-related neurological disease, or post-
mortem testing for dengue-related deaths. A system to monitor the severe end of the
disease spectrum is, therefore, an important component of an early warning system to
detect epidemic activity. Detailed clinical protocols should be developed to ensure that
adequate clinical, haematological and pathological data and samples are obtained.
Depending on laboratory capacity, the type of samples collected and the circumstances
of specimen collection, storage and transport, samples may also be processed for virus
isolation and/or viral RNA by PCR.
“Enhanced surveillance” is a form of active surveillance usually in response to an epidemic
alert. The passive surveillance system is “enhanced” so that it becomes active during
the alert period and/or it is extended to municipalities or jurisdictions that are beyond
the affected area and that would not normally be included in routine surveillance. Table
5.1 presents examples of dengue surveillance systems and the types of specimens and
laboratory tests required.
5.2.1.3 Laboratory support for surveillance
The effective prevention and control of epidemic dengue requires an active laboratory-
based disease surveillance programme that can provide early warning of impending
epidemic transmission. Laboratory methods should include both serological and
virological diagnosis. Quality control for laboratory diagnostics should be provided by a
national dengue reference laboratory and/or an international reference laboratory. At a
minimum, diagnostic laboratories should be capable of performing IgM antibody-capture
ELISA (MAC-ELISA) as a front-line screening test for current or recent dengue infection.
Confrmatory tests are needed to exclude cross-reactivity with other faviviruses, and
because IgM will not be detectable in the frst few days after onset of illness (especially in
primary dengue infections) and may persist for several weeks after infection (Chapter 4)
Sentinel laboratory surveillance systems provide high-quality virological and serological
data and are useful for detecting rare diseases (e.g. introduced dengue), but data
that are not linked to clinical and epidemiological information must be interpreted with
caution. Data that may be provided include: participating laboratory identifer, onset
of illness, specimen collection date, patient identifer, organism, patient’s sex, date of
birth or age, place of residence, specimen source, clinical diagnosis and the method
of diagnosis. There are certain biases inherent in de-linked laboratory surveillance data
(e.g. the number of participating laboratories may vary over time and some jurisdictions
may have a larger number of participating laboratories than others). Also, changes in
diagnostic practices – particularly the introduction of new testing methodologies – may
affect laboratory reports. The ability of laboratory tests to distinguish acute infection from
past infection without a clinical history must also be taken into account when interpreting
the data. Although changes in incidence cannot be determined with precision from such
data, general trends can be observed (e.g. with respect to seasonality and the age-sex
distribution of dengue cases).
116
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Table 5.1 Components of dengue surveillance
a,b

Type of surveillance Samples
b
Approach
Event-based surveillance Blood from all or representative cases of Once the details of the reported event are
dengue-like illness, taken 3–15 days validated, a rapid response team
after onset of illness investigates the event as an outbreak
Cases detected through active case-fnding
for acute febrile illness and/or laboratory
confrmation during outbreak investigations
can also constitute an event.
Fever alert system Blood samples from representative cases Increased febrile illness in the community is
of acute febrile illness investigated immediately; samples are
tested as above.
Routine reporting Blood from clinical cases of dengue-like Highly dependent on clinicians considering
(passive surveillance) illness dengue in the differential diagnosis and on
the availability of diagnostic support
Ideally, clinical, laboratory and
epidemiological data are linked. Reporting
is based on case defnitions and case
classifcation (e.g. laboratory-confrmed,
probable, or suspected cases).
Sentinel clinic and Blood from all or representative cases of Representative samples or purposeful
physician network dengue-like illness, taken 3–15 days after sampling taken year-round or at specifc
onset of illness times of the year are processed weekly for
IgM antibodies, and for virus isolation
and/or PCR if available.
Sentinel hospital Blood and tissue samples taken during According to the outcome of interest, all
surveillance system hospitalization and/or at death severe disease and all viral syndromes with
fatal outcome are investigated immediately
and tested as above.
Sentinel laboratory- Blood and other clinical samples Usually there are no denominator data.
based surveillance Hence changes in incidence cannot be
determined. General trends can be
observed if the same laboratories report
regularly (e.g. with respect to seasonality
and the age and sex distribution of patients).
National notifable Blood from cases of dengue-like illness Mandatory reporting of, for instance,
disease surveillance and/or clinical samples from cases laboratory-confrmed cases by time, place,
system that test positive for dengue person ± risk factor data. May also include
probable and suspected dengue cases,
depending on the sensitivity of the
surveillance system.
a
Source: adapted from Gubler (15)
b
Emphasis should be placed on the inter-epidemic period using a simplifed case defnition. After an epidemic begins and after the
virus serotype(s) is known, the case defnition should be made more specifc and surveillance should be focused on severe disease.
117
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
5.2.2 Entomological surveillance
5.2.2.1 Overview
Entomological surveillance is used for operational (and research) purposes to determine
changes in geographical distribution of vectors, for monitoring and evaluating control
programmes, for obtaining relative measurements of the vector population over time,
and for facilitating appropriate and timely decisions regarding interventions. There are
a number of methods for monitoring dengue vectors (mostly for Ae. aegypti). However,
the selection and use of method requires a clear understanding of the surveillance
objectives, the availability of skills and resources, and in some instances the level of
infestation.
Surveillance may serve to identify areas of high-density infestation or periods of mosquito
population increase. In areas where the vector is no longer present, entomological
surveillance is critical in order to detect new introductions rapidly before they become
widespread and diffcult to eliminate. Monitoring of the vector population’s susceptibility
to insecticide should also be an integral part of any programme that uses insecticides.

This section describes a variety of sampling methods but by no means provides an
exhaustive list of all available methods.
5.2.2.2 Sampling larvae and pupae
For reasons of practicality and reproducibility, the most common survey methodologies
employ larval (active immatures, including pupae) sampling procedures rather than
egg or adult collections. The basic sampling unit is the house or premise, which is
systematically searched for water-holding containers.
Containers are examined for the presence of mosquito larvae, pupae, and larval and
pupal skins. Depending on the objectives of the survey, the search may be terminated
as soon as aedine larvae are found, or it may be continued until all containers have
been examined. Laboratory examination is usually necessary to confrm the species. The
following three indices are commonly used to record Ae. aegypti infestation levels:
• Houso |o|ouso¦ |uox |H|¦ – o oo|co||uuo o| |ousos ||os|ou v|| |u|vuo
and/or pupae.

HI =
Infested houses X 100
houses inspected
• Container index (CI) – i.e. percentage of water-holding containers infested with
larvae or pupae.


CI =
Containers positive X 100
containers inspected
• Breteau index (BI) – i.e. number of positive containers per 100 houses inspected.


BI =
Number of positive containers X 100
houses inspected
118
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
The house index has been used most widely for measuring population levels, but it
does not take into account the number of positive containers or the productivity of those
containers. Similarly, the container index provides information only on the proportion of
water-holding containers that are positive. The Breteau index establishes a relationship
between positive containers and houses, and is considered to be the most informative, but
again there is no accommodation of container productivity. Nevertheless, in the course
of gathering the basic information for calculating the Breteau index, it is possible (and
highly desirable) to obtain a profle of the larval habitat characteristics by simultaneously
recording the relative abundance of the various container types either as potential or
actual sites of mosquito production (e.g. the number of positive drums per 100 houses,
the number of positive tyres per 100 houses). These data are particularly relevant for
focusing larval control efforts on the management or elimination of the most common
habitats and for the orientation of educational messages for community-based initiatives
(see also the section below on pupal/demographic surveys). A problem here is that the
most common container (e.g. the drinks bottle) is often not the most productive (16).
It should be noted that larval indices are a poor indication of adult production. For
instance, the rate of emergence of adult mosquitoes from rainwater drums is likely to
differ markedly from the rate from discarded cans or house plants, yet the larval survey
registers them only as positive or negative. The implication is that for localities with similar
larval indices but different container profles, adult abundance and hence transmission
potentials may be quite different.
5.2.2.3 Pupal/demographic surveys
If the classes of containers with the highest rates of adult mosquito emergence are
known in a community, their selective targeting for source reduction (e.g. elimination)
or other vector control interventions can be the basis for the optimized use of limited
resources (17). The pupal/demographic survey is a method of identifying these most
epidemiologically important types of containers and may therefore be considered an
operational research tool (Chapter 3). Unlike the traditional Stegomyia (Aedes) indices
described above, pupal/demographic surveys measure the total number of pupae in
different classes of containers in a given community. Such surveys are far more labour-
intensive than the above-mentioned larval surveys and are not envisaged for the routine
monitoring of Ae. aegypti populations.
The collection of demographic data enables the calculation of the ratio between the
numbers of pupae (a proxy for adult mosquitoes) and persons in the community. There is
growing evidence that, together with other epidemiological parameters such as dengue
serotype-specifc seroconversion rates and temperature, it is possible to determine how
much vector control is needed in a specifc location to inhibit virus transmission. This
remains an important area for research with potential for public health application.
Similar methods have been used to measure total populations of larvae.
5.2.2.4 Passive collection of larvae and pupae
Funnel traps have been used for sampling Aedes species and other container-breeding
organisms in sites with poor or diffcult access, such as wells (18). The funnel trap
comprises a weighted funnel attached to a bottle that inverts on entry to and exit from
the water surface where it foats. The device collects organisms such as fsh, copepods,
119
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
mosquitoes, ostracods and tadpoles as they return to the surface. Calibration of the
device, using known numbers of Ae. aegypti larvae, enables the size of the larval
population to be estimated (19). In some locations the device has focused attention
on the importance of subterranean habitats and harbourages during winter or in dry
conditions (20). The funnel trap captures a lower proportion of pupae because they are
less active than larvae.

Quantifcation of the funnel trap allows results to be compared with larval counts in other
containers and allows estimates to be made of the relative importance of the various
types of containers. However, there is no way to relate funnel trap captures to the risk of
transmission because there is no direct relationship between larval densities and density-
dependent larval survival.
5.2.2.5 Sampling the adult mosquito population
Adult vector sampling can provide valuable data for studies of seasonal population
trends or evaluation of adulticiding measures. However, results are less reproducible
than those obtained from sampling of immature stages. The methods for collection of
adult mosquitoes also tend to be labour-intensive and depend heavily on the collector’s
profciency and skill.
5.2.2.6 Landing collections
Although landing collections on humans are a sensitive means of detecting low-level
infestations and for studying the biting times and places of host attraction, the method
is both labour-intensive and expensive. Moreover, the method poses safety and ethical
issues in areas endemic for disease. Both male and female Ae. aegypti are attracted
to humans. Because adult mosquitoes, especially males, have low dispersal rates, their
presence can be a reliable indicator of proximity to hidden larval habitats. Rates of
capture, typically using hand nets or aspirators as mosquitoes approach or land on the
collector, are usually expressed in terms of landing rates per man-hour.
5.2.2.7 Resting collections
During periods of inactivity, adult Ae. aegypti typically rests indoors, especially in
bedrooms, and mostly in dark places such as clothes closets and other hidden sites.
Resting collections involve the systematic searching of these sites with the aid of a
fashlight and the capture of adults using mouth- or battery-powered aspirators and
hand-held nets. Backpack aspirators powered by rechargeable 12-volt batteries have
proven to be an effcient and effective alternative means of collecting resting adult
mosquitoes in and around human habitation. Following a standard collection routine,
densities are recorded as the number of adult mosquitoes per house (females, males, or
both) or the number of adults per man-hour of effort. Where infestation levels are low,
the percentage of houses positive for adults is sometimes used.
5.2.2.8 Sticky trap collections
Various sticky trap devices have been used for sampling adult Ae. aegypti. They may
be designed to be visually attractive, odour-baited, or both, or are simply located at
constricted access points through which adult mosquitoes pass (e.g. at points of exit and
entry from subterranean habitats such as keyholes in service manhole covers in roads).
120
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
Age and viral infection have been determined in adult mosquitoes collected with
sticky traps though mainly in a research context.
5.2.2.9 Sampling the ovipositing population
Oviposition traps
These devices, also known as “ovitraps”, constitute a sensitive and economical
method for detecting the presence of Ae. aegypti and Ae. albopictus in situations
where infestations are low and larval surveys are generally unproductive (e.g. when
the Breteau index is <5). They have proved especially useful for the early detection
of new infestations in areas from which the mosquito has been eliminated. For this
reason, oviposition traps are useful for surveillance at international ports of entry
which, in accordance with international sanitary codes, should be kept free of vector
foci.
The standard ovitrap is a wide-mouth 0.5 litre glass jar painted black on the outside
and equipped with a hardboard or wooden paddle that is clipped vertically to the
inside with its rough side facing inwards. The jar is partially flled with clean water
and is appropriately placed in a rain-sheltered site – usually outdoors and close to
habitation.

Ovitraps are usually serviced weekly and the paddles are examined for the presence
of Ae. aegypti eggs. The percentage of positive ovitraps provides the simplest index
of infestation levels. In more detailed studies, all the eggs on each paddle are
counted and the mean number of eggs per ovitrap is calculated. Ovitraps with plant
germination paper as a substrate for egg deposition can also be used. For accurate
interpretation, feld records must indicate the location of each ovitrap and its condition
at the time of servicing. If a trap is fooded, dry, missing, or overturned, the data
should be discarded. Ovitraps are inexpensive and it is possible to install and service
them over large areas relatively quickly. They can also be used by people without
specialized training.
An “enhanced CDC ovitrap” is considerably more attractive to ovipositing females
and yields many more Ae. aegypti eggs than the standard version. In this double
ovitrap method, one jar contains an olfactory attractant made from a “standardized”
7-day-old hay infusion, while the other contains a 10% dilution of the same infusion.
Unlike the original version, with which positivity rates and egg counts are seldom
suffciently high, the enhanced ovitrap has proved suitable for monitoring changes in
the adult female populations daily rather than weekly and has been successfully used
to assess the impact of adulticidal space spraying on adult females. Alternatives to
hay infusions have also been used to improve the attraction of standard ovitraps.
While ovitraps can be used to monitor changes in oviposition activity over time,
comparisons between areas are not reliable because the availability of larval habitats
in which females can choose to lay eggs will differ. Similarly, it can be misleading
to monitor and interpret ovitrap data over time in a given area where vector control
interventions include source reduction measures.
121
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
Tyre section larvitraps
Tyre section larvitraps of various designs have also been used for monitoring oviposition
activity. The simplest of these is a water-flled radial section of a tyre. A prerequisite for
any tyre section larvitrap is that it facilitates either visual inspection of the water in situ
or the ready transfer of the contents to another container for examination. Tyre larvitraps
differ functionally from ovitraps in that water level fuctuations caused by rainfall induce the
hatching of eggs, and it is the larvae that are counted rather than the eggs deposited on
the inner surfaces of the trap. The usefulness of tyre section larvitraps as an alternative to
the ovitrap for early detection of new infestations and for surveillance of low-density vector
populations has been well demonstrated.
Insecticide susceptibility testing
The initial and continued susceptibility of the vector to specifc insecticides is of fundamental
importance for the success of larviciding or adulticiding operations. The development of
resistance may lead to failure of the control programme unless it is carefully monitored and
a timely decision is made to use alternative insecticides or control strategies.
Standard WHO bioassay procedures and kits are available for determining the
susceptibility or resistance of mosquito larvae and adults to insecticides. Biochemical and
immunological techniques are also available for testing individual mosquitoes but are not
widely used by programmes.
Sampling strategies
Only in exceptional conditions are larval surveys of every house (i.e. census) warranted.
Such situations arise when the objective is one of vector eradication and larval infestation
levels have been reduced to very low levels (HI = <1.0%). At this point it is necessary
to locate and control every infested and potentially infested container, or to verify that
eradication has indeed been achieved, or to ensure that re-infestation has not occurred. In
other situations, the number of houses to be inspected should be based on considerations
of available resources, the desired level of precision of the results, and the total number
of houses in the locality. This is contrary to the routine procedures employed in many
vector control programmes in which eradication campaign methodologies have persisted
and entomological data are collected from every house immediately prior to insecticide
treatment – usually by the person who administered the treatment. Such practices, if
used solely for measuring infestation levels, are wasteful and are likely to result in poor-
quality reporting due to conficts of worker interest and the tedious nature of the work.
Whenever possible, it is recommended that a different team or individual should conduct
the entomological evaluation, or that the two tasks should be performed separately. The
sample size for routine surveys can be calculated by statistical methods based on the
expected level of infestation and the desired level of confdence in the results.

Several sampling procedures that eliminate or minimize bias can be applied equally well
to the selection of houses for larval, adult, ovitrap, or knowledge-attitude-practice (KAP)
surveys. These are as follows:
• S,s|ouu|c suuo||u uoo|os |o ovo|, “|”|| |ouso |v|o|o “|” oouu|s u| uu|oou
number) throughout a community or along linear transects through the community.
For example, if a sample of 5% of the houses is to be inspected, every 20th
house (= 100/5) would be inspected. This is a practical option for rapid assessment
of infestation levels, especially in areas where there is no house-numbering system.
All areas of the locality are well represented.
122
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
• Suo|o |u|uou suuo||u uou|s ||u| |ousos |o |o so|oc|ou u|o o||u|ou ||ou u
list of random numbers (either from tables of random numbers in a statistical text
book or from a calculator or a computer-generated list). This is a more laborious
process since detailed house maps or lists of street addresses are a prerequisite
for selecting the houses. Many statistical tests require random sampling.
Unfortunately, although every house has an equal chance of being selected,
some areas of the locality are usually under-represented and others are over-
represented.
• S||u||ou |u|uou suuo||u u|uzos ||o o|o||ou o| u|uo||oo|oso||u|o| u|u
over-representation by subdividing the localities into sectors or “strata”. These
are usually based on identifed risk factors – such as areas with houses without
a piped water supply, areas not served by sanitation services, and densely-
populated areas. A simple random sample is taken from each stratum, with
the number of houses inspected being in proportion to the number of houses in
each stratum.
• C|us|o| suuo||u uu, |o co|uuc|ou | |u|uo c|os o| uoou|uo|cu| u|ous v|o|o
it may be diffcult or impossible to use random or systematic sampling because
of limitations of time, money and personnel, or because of other logistical
constraints. In these circumstances, the sample may be selected in two stages
in order to minimize the resources needed for the survey. The frst stage is
obtained by simple or stratifed random sampling of population groups or clusters
(e.g. city blocks, villages, or administrative districts). Having identifed these
clusters, simple or stratifed random sampling procedures are again applied to
identify the specifc houses within each cluster for inclusion in the survey.
5.2.2.10 Frequency of sampling

The frequency of sampling depends on the frequency and expected duration of the
control measures. For programmes that use larvicides, it is important to monitor the
duration of effcacy to ensure that intervals between cycles of treatment are optimal.
This may vary from weeks to months. For programmes using integrated strategies, such
frequent intervals for routine assessment of the impact of the measures applied may
be unnecessary. This is especially true when the effect of some of the nonchemical
intervention strategies exceed the impact of residual insecticides (e.g. larvivorous fsh
in large storage containers of potable water, source reduction, or mosquito-proofng
of containers). On the other hand, rapid feedback at monthly intervals is desirable
to evaluate and guide community action activities, indicating sectors that need more
attention and activities that need to be reinforced. For specifc research studies, it may
be necessary to sample on a weekly, daily or even on an hourly basis (e.g. to determine
the diel pattern of host-seeking activity).
5.2.3 Monitoring environmental and social risks
In addition to the evaluation of aspects directly pertaining to vector densities and
distribution, community-oriented, integrated vector management strategies require that
other parameters be measured or periodically monitored.
Various factors have been determined to infuence a community’s vulnerability to
dengue epidemics. The distribution and density of the human population, settlement
characteristics, conditions of land tenure, housing styles, education, and socio-economic
123
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
status are all interrelated and fundamentally important for planning and for assessing
dengue risk. Knowledge of changes in the distribution of water supply services and
their quality and reliability over time, as well as knowledge of domestic water storage
practices and solid waste disposal services, are of particular relevance. This type of
information helps in establishing ecological profles that can be of value for planning
targeted source reduction or management activities and for organizing epidemic
intervention measures.
Some of these data sets are generated by the health sector, while others are derived
from external sources. In most cases, annual or even less frequent updates will suffce
for programme management purposes. However, in the case of meteorological data,
especially rainfall patterns, a more frequent analysis (such as weekly or monthly) is
warranted if the data are to be of predictive value in determining seasonal trends and
short-term fuctuations of the vector population.
5.3 DENGUE PREPAREDNESS PLANNING AND RESPONSE
5.3.1 Overview
This section provides an overview of the elements of a comprehensive dengue
prevention and control programme. Emergency preparedness and anticipated response
(contingency) planning must be explicitly included in dengue surveillance and control
policies and should be reviewed regularly. Emergency preparedness and response are
often overlooked by programme managers and policy-makers.
When the dynamics of dengue activity are known, the timing of response activities can
be adjusted to maximize their effectiveness. In dengue-endemic areas, activities can be
grouped into those that should occur continuously, those that should occur during an
epidemic, and those that should be carried out in the post-epidemic period. Different
activities and approaches may be required in areas where dengue occurs sporadically
and in dengue-free areas at risk of transmission. In epidemic-prone areas, a multisectoral
dengue action committee should be convened with the responsibility of coordinating the
response.
The two major components of the emergency response to a dengue outbreak are:
(i) emergency vector control to curtail transmission of the dengue virus as rapidly as
possible and (ii) early diagnosis and the appropriate clinical case management of
severe dengue to minimize the number of dengue-associated deaths. These responses
should occur concurrently.
5.3.2 Dengue emergency response planning
There are three levels of dengue emergency response planning (21), namely:
• C|uo|u o|ovo||o| – v|o|o ||o|o s |o cu||o|| uo|uuo uc|v|, | ||o u|ou
• |osoo|so |o soo|uuc cusos o| o||o| |s| |ucu|o|s – v|o|o ||o|o s |o oououc
dengue activity in the area but either (i) sporadic cases are being reported
through the surveillance system or (ii) there is increased virus activity or the
introduction of serotypes that have not previously or recently been recorded in
the area;
124
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
• Cu|||ou| |osoo|so – v|o|o ||o|o s oououo|oucu| ovuo|co o| oououc
activity. The best response to a dengue epidemic is preparedness to prevent
infections, thereby reducing ongoing transmission, and to minimize its effects on
those who become ill.
The dengue emergency response plan should clearly articulate its aims, objectives and
scope, the lead (coordinating) agency, the organizational links with other agencies
that have direct responsibility for implementing aspects of the plan, and the “support”
agencies (e.g. social welfare) that may be more involved in the recovery phase after
an epidemic. Each agency should be assigned specifc roles and responsibilities
under the plan, and costs and resources should be identifed. Hard copies of the plan
should be distributed to all response and supporting agencies and should be available
electronically if possible. The plan should ideally include a monitoring and evaluation
framework with performance indicators for each of the response and support agencies
as well as overall indicators of the plan’s effectiveness.
Clear triggers for the activation, escalation and deactivation should be written into the
plan and reviewed as required. Wherever possible, the plan should be tested through
exercises.
Some emergency response plans emphasize the temporal aspects of the response (i.e.
the alert phase, declaration of an emergency, and the emergency phase). As mentioned
earlier in this chapter, there may be reluctance on the part of public health offcials to
implement a dengue emergency response plan until the case count and fatality numbers
are elevated. It is recommended that the plan should include objective criteria for
defning an epidemic on the basis of specifc local data and not general concepts.

While plans have frequently been prepared in dengue-endemic countries, they are seldom
validated. Once the dengue emergency response plan has been drafted and approved
by participating groups, it is important to conduct simulations or “table top” exercises.
Since the emergency response is usually multisectoral, exercises provide opportunities
for all partners to participate and better understand their roles, responsibilities, channels
of command and communication, and to ensure the availability of the human resources,
equipment and supplies needed for a rapid emergency response. Formal debriefng
sessions should take place with the partners after exercises and after epidemics. Lessons
learned should be incorporated into a revised emergency response plan.
5.3.2.1 Priority areas for emergency response plans
Rigau-Pérez and Clark (7) have identifed 10 priority areas for dengue emergency
response planning, namely:
1. Establishing a multisectoral dengue action committee.
2. Formalizing an emergency action plan.
3. Enhancing disease surveillance.
4. Diagnostic laboratory testing.
5. Enhancing vector surveillance and control.
6. Protecting special populations.
7. Ensuring appropriate patient care.
125
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
8. Educating the community and relevant professional groups about the current
procedures used for dengue control by the responsible authorities in their jurisdiction
(local, provincial and national governments, as appropriate) as well as their roles
and responsibilities in dengue prevention and control.
9. Investigating the epidemic.
10. Managing the mass media.
For endemic countries, the overall aim of a dengue emergency response plan is to reduce
the risk of dengue epidemics and to strengthen control measures for any future epidemics
– thereby minimizing the clinical, social and economic impact of the disease.
For receptive countries (i.e. dengue vectors present without circulating virus), risk
management plans should focus on strategies for risk reduction. These should include
rapid investigation of sporadic cases (clinically suspected or laboratory confrmed) to
determine whether they are imported or locally-acquired, monitoring of vectors and
their abundance (particularly in regions with recorded or suspected cases), social
mobilization, and environmental management efforts. Once a locally acquired case
is confrmed, the response may be escalated to epidemic response to prevent further
spread and/or interruption of transmission.

In countries at risk of the introduction of dengue vectors, the focus of activities may be on
entomological surveillance at ports of entry and education of the health care community
about the risk of dengue in travellers, and its diagnosis and reporting requirements.
5.3.2.2 Establishment of a multisectoral dengue action committee
If the prevention and control of dengue are to be effective and sustainable, a multisectoral,
multidisciplinary and multilevel approach is required. It is not possible for a single
government agency to control the causes and consequences of dengue epidemics and
to protect population health. For this reason it is recommended that countries establish
a multisectoral dengue action committee. The committee must have solid funding and a
designated national coordinator with the political mandate to make policy and fnancial
decisions and to coordinate the multisectoral preparedness and response strategy at
local, state and national levels.
Depending on the epidemiological situation in each country, membership of the
dengue action committee may include, but need not be limited to, heads of government
agencies (e.g. health, ambulance services, agriculture, emergency services, customs
and immigration, port health authorities, telecommunications, media, education,
environment, water, solid waste disposal) and NGOs, and must also include relevant
private-sector groups (e.g. industrial, commercial, private education, labour unions). For
countries at lower risk of dengue transmission, the dengue action committee may be
constituted within the affected jurisdiction (e.g. local government area, state, province).
A major responsibility of the dengue action committee is to develop the dengue
emergency response plan, review it regularly, and update it as necessary on the basis
of the lessons learned from its implementation or simulation. Members of the committee
should communicate regularly with their stakeholders – including local government, health
care providers in the public and private sectors, vector control personnel, laboratory
scientists, industry groups and community representatives.
126
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
5.3.3 Risk assessment
5.3.3.1 Populations at risk
Because of their rapid expansion and long duration, dengue epidemics reduce the
productive capacity and economic development of many sections of society. Some
groups need special attention because of their dependence on others who take care
of them and their immediate surroundings (e.g. older or incapacitated persons who live
alone or in institutions, travellers, pre-school children in day care programmes, students,
migrant workers and soldiers). If not properly screened or air-conditioned, health care
settings may also be at high risk for dengue transmission.
Migrant workers living in poorly constructed and maintained facilities can be particularly
at risk of the transmission or introduction of dengue.
A study on knowledge of and attitudes towards dengue, conducted in the Caribbean
by the Assessments of Impacts and Adaptations to Climate Change (AIACC) project,
indicated that the most vulnerable to the disease were the poor who lived in informal
or squatter settlements. These typically lacked basic community infrastructure, including
access to piped water and adequate garbage disposal, and lacked both the
organization needed for collective action against the threat of a dengue fever epidemic
and the understanding about how they could contribute to preventive actions to mitigate
the risk (22). Communication for Behavioural Impact (COMBI) for dengue prevention
and control needs to be tailored to the various populations at risk and delivered in a
culturally appropriate way to ensure sustainability (23).
5.3.3.2 Cross-border spread and ports of entry
The rapid spread of dengue since the 1970s has been attributed to increasing
urbanization and the increasing use of (often disposable) man-made containers (24)
that are ideal larval habitats for dengue mosquitoes. In addition, international trade
in, and inadequate disposal of, vehicle tyres similarly provide larval habitats, and
international air travel results in the movement of viraemic individuals and vectors over
long distances. Increased international travel and trade provide ideal means for infected
human transport of dengue viruses and/or vectors, resulting in a frequent exchange of
dengue viruses among endemic countries, the risk of dengue introduction to receptive
areas, and the spread of vectors into new ecological niches. The international movement
of human cases, vectors which carry infection, or goods that are contaminated, may
cause international disease spread and require notifcation to WHO under Article 9 of
the 2005 International Health Regulations (2).
In areas that are highly receptive to dengue, a single imported case can start an
epidemic. Because of the risk of a viraemic traveller initiating an outbreak, surveillance
for clinical cases of dengue is very important since it enables action to be taken promptly
to reduce the risk of local transmission.
Countries should undertake a dengue risk assessment as the basis for preparedness
plans. Dengue-related risks will vary considerably both within and between countries.
Risk assessment is conducted so that each country can match the level of risk (e.g. risk
of epidemics or risk of virus introduction) with appropriate activities and investment and
127
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
thus avoid introducing costly and demanding measures that are not justifed by the
epidemiological situation.
5.3.3.3 Vector ecology
As part of their risk assessment, countries at risk of dengue should conduct entomological
investigations to identify and map the distribution of potentially competent dengue
vectors.
5.3.3.4 Ensuring appropriate patient care
A case of severe dengue requires careful observation and repeated laboratory tests
throughout the illness (Chapters 2 and 4). It is imperative that medical and nursing staff
understand the rationale and priorities for patient care under epidemic conditions.
The principal burden that dengue epidemics create for affected countries is not the
number of deaths but the enormous number of hospitalizations and days of illness.
Providing care for an elevated number of dengue cases requires criteria for triage,
trained physicians and nursing personnel, beds, supplies and equipment, and training
guidelines for treatment and patient isolation. Isolation refers not only to routine precautions
for manipulation of blood and other body fuids but also to the use of (insecticide-
treated) mosquito nets to prevent mosquitoes from biting viraemic (febrile) patients and
subsequently spreading the virus within the community. It is essential to train professionals
in the early detection of cases and to educate the community to seek medical attention
when dengue symptoms appear. Planning for suffcient provisions during a dengue
epidemic can be guided by hospitalization rates in previous outbreaks.

5.3.3.5 Communication for Behavioural Impact and Risk Communication
Primary prevention is the most effective measure in dengue prevention and control since
no vaccine is currently available. An intensive COMBI programme (23) that ensures
accurate and timely information for the public should be implemented concurrently
with vector control activities in order to engage the community in practices that reduce
dengue transmission.
A weakness of some current dengue prevention strategies is that they are reactive rather
than anticipatory. They may often be implemented late, thus reducing the opportunities
for preventing transmission and controlling the epidemic. In general, such reactive
strategies lead only to short-term behavioural change and fail to institutionalize the
idea of community and personal responsibility for dengue prevention and control in
partnership with government efforts.
Public education must continue to reinforce how important it is for people to seek medical
attention if they have dengue symptoms, and should stress the need to reduce larval
habitats and the options for personal protection.
Epidemics are frequently marked by uncertainty, confusion and a sense of urgency.
During an epidemic the aim of public risk communication, generally through the media,
is to build trust. It does this by announcing the epidemic early, providing accurate
information, communicating openly and honestly with the public (transparency), and
128
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
providing specifc information about what people can do to make themselves and their
community safer. This gives people a sense of control over their own health and safety,
which in turn allows them to react to the risk with more reasoned responses (25). In
endemic countries, involving the media before the occurrence of the seasonal increase
in dengue enhances the opportunity to increase public awareness of the disease and of
the personal and community actions that can be taken to mitigate the risk.
5.3.4 Identifying outbreaks and triggers for an epidemic response
As indicated in previous sections, the more sensitive, extensive, responsive and functional
the dengue surveillance system, the better will be the information that is generated.
Information about an impending increase in the incidence of dengue will provide
valuable time to make fnal preparations and implement the contingency plan. The
public health community is increasingly observing the implementation of emergency
responses to diseases such as avian infuenza in preparation for pandemic infuenza.
These can serve as examples for the preparation of dengue contingency plans.
In areas where a comprehensive surveillance system exists, detailed information
about when and where dengue outbreaks/epidemics occurred in the past can be a
useful guide to the potential magnitude and severity of future epidemics. If there is no
surveillance system in place, the “early warning” element of the programme and the
valuable time needed to make preparations for the response are lost. In such a situation,
the emergency may rapidly overwhelm the public health and medical care agencies
without warning.
5.4 PROGRAMME ASSESSMENT
Dengue programme assessment is part of risk assessment. It aims to identify strengths
and weaknesses in programmatic and public health infrastructure that can reduce or
increase vulnerability to respond to dengue. Programme assessment should review areas
such as the dengue emergency response plan, human resource planning (including
training), the effectiveness of the dengue surveillance system in providing early warning,
the effectiveness of the vector control programme, laboratory capacity, stockpiling and
applied research needs (26). In order to develop a meaningful preparedness plan during
the inter-epidemic period, it is important to estimate the population at risk, expected
admission rates, the equipment, supplies and personnel required for vector control and
patient management, and to document the location of resources.
5.4.1 Human resource planning
In addition to human resource planning for surge situations such as epidemics, the
education of health care workers should draw attention to the importance of laboratory
testing and case notifcation. Many health care providers fail to report dengue activity
until they receive a positive laboratory diagnosis because they are unaware that prompt
vector control measures can be initiated as soon as suspected cases are notifed. Some
doctors may not request tests during an outbreak because they may be confdent of their
ability to diagnose dengue clinically. Other doctors may not be aware of the value of
laboratory confrmation or may not be familiar with the tests available, the timing of
investigations, and the problems inherent in interpreting laboratory results when more
129
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
than one favivirus is circulating or the patient has been exposed to dengue or other
faviviruses in the past.
Physicians, nurses and laboratory staff should receive regular clinical training in the
management of dengue patients. This must include specifc training on aspects of
emergency response.
Clinicians’ education in the emergency response to a dengue epidemic relates principally
to raising awareness of the spectrum of disease and the essentials and complexities of
treatment. It is important to emphasize that treatment of dengue consists of appropriate
hydration and the administration of paracetamol/acetaminophen to control pain
and fever (never acetylsalicylic acid [aspirin]). Physicians must be able to distinguish
between typical and atypical dengue syndromes, and access to laboratory diagnosis
is useful. Contact should be made with national and regional reference laboratories for
diagnostic support and verifcation functions prior to the occurrence of an epidemic.
Epidemics also offer unique opportunities to identify risk factors for the disease through
applied research.
Clinicians are often the frst point of contact for community education and social
mobilization. From initial contact with medical and public health personnel, the patients
and their household members should be given orientation in eliminating adult mosquitoes
and water-holding containers in and around their residence to avoid mosquito bites.
5.4.2 Assessment of the surveillance system
Dengue surveillance systems should be adapted to country needs and resources. Priority
should be given to: (i) improving routine reporting using standardized case defnitions,
(ii) improving laboratory support for diagnosis through greater access to laboratory
services, standardized test procedures, access to more sophisticated diagnostics for
virus tracking and quality assurance, and (iii) introducing active surveillance as a
complementary measure. At all times, appropriate and timely data analysis and response
at the lowest operational level possible are crucial, as is data sharing in the system. This
may mean that core capacities in surveillance and response need to be developed in
accordance with the International Health Regulations (2005) (2). Reporting of dengue
should be consistent both within and between countries, and reported cases should
have a defned severity level (Chapter 1). Once a vaccine becomes available, effective
disease surveillance will be critical in determining priority areas for vaccine use and
evaluating vaccine effectiveness in reducing dengue incidence.
5.4.3 Assessment of diagnostic resources
A detailed description of the laboratory diagnosis of dengue is provided in Chapter
4. Resource planning and assessment should include auditing of, for instance: the
availability of diagnostic laboratories and staff trained in dengue diagnosis, verifcation
and reference functions; reagents and laboratory equipment (including stockpiling for
epidemics); quality assurance; and the continuous application of appropriate levels
of biosafety. The capacity to perform dengue virus genotyping, whether locally or
at an international dengue reference laboratory, is particularly important for tracking
genetically the potential origins of outbreaks and the international spread of the virus.
130
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
5.4.4 Assessment of resources for clinical care
Chapter 2 summarizes current international best practice for the clinical case management
of dengue. Hospital emergency response plans for dengue should include a detailed
resource plan that covers anticipated hospital bed occupancy, including high-dependency
care beds, staffng levels and surge capacity needs, and stock management (intravenous
fuids, drug supplies etc). Similar assessments should be conducted for outpatient care in
the public and private sectors in dengue-endemic areas.
5.4.5 Assessment of vector control resources
The adequacy of equipment for insecticide application and the availability of insecticides
should be part of the needs assessment of the vector programme.
5.4.6 Information products
Successful dengue control programmes have integrated vector control with public health
education and community involvement in risk reduction activities. Public education on
dengue is often promoted through posters in a variety of public places, including public
transport facilities, advertisements in newspapers, dengue messages on radio and
other media channels, and through face-to-face communication. Affected communities
are encouraged to eliminate containers of stagnant water that can potentially provide
larval habitats in homes and neighbourhoods. Grassroots groups, community volunteers,
schools and the private sector should be updated regularly for active engagement of the
public in dengue prevention and control.
Personal protective measures include the application of topical repellents for the skin
(personal insect repellents), use of household aerosol insecticides, or use of insecticide-
treated bednets for persons sleeping during the daylight hours. However, personal
protective measures come at a cost, thereby limiting their possible use by the poorest,
who are the most vulnerable.
Public education must also continue to reinforce the importance of people seeking
medical attention if they have dengue symptoms.
131
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
Table 5.2 Dengue surveillance: examples of good and bad practice
Good practice Bad practice
1 Integrating disease surveillance, vector No information exchange on data and analysis
surveillance and monitoring of environmental between agencies involved in disease
and social risks surveillance, vector surveillance and the monitoring
of environmental and social risks
2 Considering surveillance always in the context Data collection in surveillance for academic
of monitoring and a planned response purposes only
3 Combining event-based and case-based Relying on case-based surveillance data only
surveillance data
4 Defning and implementing surveillance No defned indicators for surveillance
indicators with the aim of an early response
to dengue cases and outbreaks
5 Defning, agreeing on and reacting to triggers Reacting to dengue outbreaks only when
for early outbreak response outbreaks are evident
6 Unrestricted and timely information-sharing Not sharing or suppressing information about
about dengue cases and risks nationally and dengue cases and risks
with the international community
7 Development of dengue preparedness plans Relying on ad hoc planning for dengue prevention
with components for emergency situations, and control
including simulation exercises
8 Identifying the membership of an intersectoral Awaiting dengue outbreaks to defne the dengue
dengue action committee at national action committee
or district level
9 Integration of a combination of evidence-based Planning for interventions without considering
interventions for dengue prevention and control effcacy and community effectiveness
in the dengue preparedness plan
10 Linking preparedness planning to surge capacity Not incorporating health care delivery, including
in health care, delivering appropriate triage surge capacity, in preparedness plans
and treatment of severe cases
11 Assessment of dengue surveillance systems Not examining and updating dengue surveillance
including preparedness plans nationally systems and preparedness plans
and internationally
12 Integrating communities in dengue prevention Exclusively top-down approach to dengue
and control using appropriate methodology outbreak response
(e.g. COMBI)
132
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
5.5 REFERENCES
1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Updated guidelines for evaluating public
health surveillance systems. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 2001, 50/RR-13.
2. WHO. Revision of the International Health Regulations. World Health Assembly
Resolution WHA58.3, adopted by the 58th World Health Assembly, 2005 (http://
www.who.int/gb/ebwha/pdf_fles/WHA58/WHA58_3-en.pdf).
3. Koopman JS et al. Determinants and predictors of dengue infection in Mexico.
American Journal of Epidemiology, 1991, 133(11):1168–1178.
4. Jury MR. Climate infuence on dengue epidemics in Puerto Rico. International Journal
of Environmental Health Research, 2008, 18(5):323–334.
5. WHO/WPRO. A guide to establishing event-based surveillance. Manila, World
Health Organization Regional Offce for the Western Pacifc, 2008 (http://www.
wpro.who.int/NR/rdonlyres/92E766DB-DF19-4F4F-90FD-C80597C0F34F/0/
eventbasedsurv.pdf, accessed 19 September 2008).
6. Runge-Ranziger S et al. What does dengue disease surveillance contribute to
predicting and detecting outbreaks and describing trends. Tropical Medicine and
International Health, 2008, 13:1022–1041.
7. Rigau-Pérez JG, Clark GG. Còmo responder a una epidemia de dengue: vision
global y experiencia en Puerto Rico. Pan American Journal of Public Health, 2005,
17:282–293.
8. Rigau-Pérez JG, Vorndam AV, Clark GG. The dengue and dengue hemorrhagic
fever epidemic in Puerto Rico, 1994-1995. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and
Hygiene, 2001, 64:67–74.
9. Tien NTK et al. Predictive indicators for forecasting epidemic of dengue/dengue
haemorrhagic fever through epidemiological, virological and entomological surveillance.
Dengue Bulletin, 1999, 23.
10. De Simone TS et al. Dengue virus surveillance: the co-circulation of DEN-1, DEN-2
and DEN-3 in the State of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. Royal Society of Tropical Medicine
and Hygiene, 2004, 98:553–562.
11. Pirard M et al. Desarrollo de un Sistema de Vigilancia para dengue en Santa Cruz,
Bolivia. Bol. cient. CENETROP, 1997, 16(1):16–23 (in Spanish).
12. Kourí G et al. Reemergence of dengue in Cuba: a 1997 epidemic in Santiago de
Cuba. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 1998, 4:89–92.
13. Carme B et al. Non-specifc alert system for dengue epidemic outbreaks in
areas of endemic malaria. A hospital-based evaluation in Cayenne (French Guiana).
Epidemiology and Infection, 2003, 130:93–100.
133
Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

5
14. Brachman PS. Control of communicable diseases manual, 17th ed. Washington,
DC, American Public Health Association, 2000 (ISBN 0-87553-182-2).
15. Gubler DJ. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever. Clinical Microbiology Reviews,
1998, 11(3):480–496.
16. Focks DA, Alexander N. Multicountry study of Aedes aegypti pupal productivity survey
methodology: fndings and recommendations. Geneva, World Health Organization,
Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases, 2006 (Document
TDR/IRM/Den/06.1).
17. Nathan MB, Focks DA, Kroeger A. Pupal/demographic surveys to inform dengue-vector
control. Annals of Tropical Medicine and Parasitology, 2006, 100(Suppl):1S1–1S3.
18. Kay BH et al. Evaluation of a funnel trap for the collection of copepods and
immature mosquitoes from wells. Journal of the American Mosquito Control Association,
1992, 8:372–375.
19. Russell BM, Kay BH. Calibrated funnel trap for quantifying mosquito (Diptera:
Culicidae) abundance in wells. Journal of Medical Entomology, 1999, 36(6):851–
855(5).
20. Gionar YR et al. Use of a funnel trap for collecting immature Aedes aegypti and
copepods from deep wells in Yogyakarta, Indonesia. Journal of the American Mosquito
Control Association, 1999, 15(4):576–580.
21. Queensland Health. Dengue fever management plan for North Queensland,
2005–2010. http://www.health.qld.gov.au/dengue/managing_outbreaks/default.
asp (site last updated 11 January 2007).
22. Taylor MA et al. Adapting to dengue risk—what to do? Washington, DC,
Assessments of Impacts and Adaptations to Climate Change, 2006 (AIACC Working
Paper No. 33) http://www.aiaccproject.org/working_papers/Working%20Papers/
AIACC_WP33_Taylor.pdf.
23. Parks W, Lloyd LS. Planning social mobilization and communication for dengue
fever prevention and control: a step-by-step guide. Geneva, World Health Organization,
2004 (available at: http://www.who.int/tdr/publications/publications/pdf/
planning_dengue.pdf; accessed October 2008).
24. Barbazan P et al. Assessment of a new strategy, based on Aedes aegypti (L.) pupal
productivity, for the surveillance and control of dengue transmission in Thailand. Annals
of Tropical Medicine and Parasitology, 2008, 102(2):161–171.
25. WHO. WHO outbreak communication guidelines. Geneva, World Health
Organization, 2005 (http://www.who.int/infectious-disease-news/IDdocs/
whocds200528/whocds200528en.pdf).
26. WHO. Guidelines for conducting a review of a national dengue prevention and
control programme. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2005 (Document WHO/
CDS/CPE/PVC/2005.13).
134
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
135
Chapter 6. New avenues
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

6
CHAPTER 6

NEW AVENUES
136
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
137
Chapter 6. New avenues
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

6
CHAPTER 6. NEW AVENUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
Primary prevention of dengue is currently possible only with vector control and personal
protection from the bites of infected mosquitoes. However, the development of vaccines
and drugs has the potential to change this. This chapter describes the current development
of vaccines (section 6.2) and drugs (section 6.3).
6.2 DENGUE VACCINES
6.2.1 Overview
Despite formidable challenges to developing tetravalent dengue vaccines, signifcant
progress has been made in recent years and the pace towards clinical effcacy trials has
accelerated substantially (1,2,3,4). Box 6.1 summarizes the complexity of developing a
dengue vaccine. Triggered by the continued unchecked spread of dengue worldwide,
there has been renewed interest in dengue by researchers, funding agencies, policy-
makers and vaccine manufacturers alike. The creation of public–private partnerships
for product development has facilitated the process. Recent studies of the burden of
disease have quantifed the cost of dengue both to the public sector and to households
and have demonstrated the potential cost-effectiveness of a dengue vaccine (5,6,7,8).
The vaccine pipeline is now suffciently advanced for it to be possible to have a frst-
generation dengue vaccine licensed within the next fve to seven years (3). In addition,
a number of diverse candidates are at earlier stages of evaluation and could become
second-generation vaccines.
6.2.2 Product development
A primary immunological mechanism that confers protection from dengue illness is virus
neutralization through antibodies, and all current dengue vaccine candidates aim to
elicit high levels of neutralizing antibody. The increasing co-circulation of the four dengue
virus types means that a vaccine is needed that protects against all four of them; hence,
the vaccine needs to be tetravalent. Moreover, the induction of protective, neutralizing
antibody responses against all four serotypes of dengue virus simultaneously should
avoid the theoretical concern of vaccine-induced antibody-dependent enhancement in
vaccine recipients. Dengue vaccines in development are of four types: live attenuated
viruses, chimeric live attenuated viruses, inactivated or sub-unit vaccines, and nucleic
acid-based vaccines.
Live attenuated vaccines (LAVs) can induce durable humoral and cellular immune
responses since they most closely mimic a natural infection. Several parameters are
crucial for LAVs:
• ¹|o v|usos uus| |o su||co|||, u||o|uu|ou u|u v|u| |oo|cu|o| |ouucou so ||u|
viraemia is low and symptoms of illness are minimal.
• ¹|u|susso| o| ||o v|usos |, uosou|oos s |ouucou o| o|u|u|ou
138
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
• ¹|o v|usos s|ou|u |oo|cu|o vo|| | co|| cu||u|o u|u |o su||co|||, uuu|ouo|c
to provide long-lasting immunity in humans, so that low doses can be used.
• / |u|u|cou uuu|o |osoo|so |o u|| |ou| uo|uuo v|usos uus| |o o|c|ou
• ¹|o uo|o|c |uss |o| u||o|uu|o| uus| |o ||ov| u|u uus| |o s|u||o |4).
Several live attenuated vaccines are in advanced stages of development. One is a
chimeric tetravalent vaccine in which the structural genes (prM and E) of each of the
four dengue viruses were inserted individually to replace those of yellow fever virus
in the backbone of the yellow fever 17D vaccine. Thus, the nonstructural genes of
yellow fever are provided to allow replication of the chimeric virus, and attenuation is
imparted by the yellow fever portion of the chimera. Monovalent vaccines, as well as
tetravalent mixtures of all four viruses, have been given to human volunteers of varying
ages in phase 1 and phase 2 trials in both non-endemic and endemic regions. At least
two doses were required to achieve high rates of tetravalent neutralizing antibodies,
and somewhat higher seroconversion rates were observed in subjects with pre-existing
immunity to yellow fever (2).
Another comprises strains of the four serotypes of the dengue virus, each attenuated by
passage in primary dog kidney cells and initially prepared as candidate vaccines in
fetal rhesus monkey lung cells (FRhL). Each attenuated dengue virus was rederived by
transfecting cells with purifed viral RNA. Original and rederived attenuated viruses have
been extensively tested both individually and in tetravalent formulation in phase 1 and
phase 2 trials in human volunteers of different ages. Tetravalent anti-DEN neutralizing
antibodies are raised to high rates following the administration of at least two doses
at an interval of six months, especially if volunteers have previously been exposed to
faviviruses.
Other vaccine candidates in phase 1 testing include live attenuated viruses. Here,
vaccine development is being approached in two ways: (i) via direct removal of 30
nucleotides in the 3’ untranslated region of DEN-1 and DEN-4, and (ii) the construction
of chimeric viruses consisting of DEN-2 and DEN-3 structural genes in the non-structural
backbone of the DEN-4 strain with 30 nucleotides deleted from the 3’ untranslated
region. Satisfactory attenuation, immunogenicity and protection have been obtained in
rhesus monkeys for each of the four dengue viruses in this way (4). Phase 1 testing has
taken place with all four monovalent vaccines.
Dengue vaccines in advanced preclinical development include DEN-DEN chimeras. In
this vaccine, the prM and E protein genes of DEN-1, DEN-3 and DEN-4 were each
inserted into the infectious clone of PDK-passaged, attenuated DEN-2 (PDK53). The
three attenuating mutations are located outside the structural protein genes of PDK53
and appear to be quite stable. The tetravalent vaccine produced by combining the four
chimeric dengue viruses is protective when administered to mice. Monkey challenge
experiments have been conducted but preparations for clinical trials are underway.
Several DNA vaccines designed to deliver structural dengue viral genes into cells have
been generated, and a monovalent DEN-1 DNA vaccine is currently undergoing phase
1 testing. In addition, candidate vaccines that have successfully protected monkeys
from viraemic challenge include recombinant 80% envelope protein from the four DEN
serotypes in conjunction with DEN-2 NS1 administered with several new-generation
adjuvants. There is also work in progress on subunit vaccines based on domain III
139
Chapter 6. New avenues
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

6
of the E protein, which is considered to be the principal neutralizing epitope region
of the virus, employing different strategies to increase immunogenicity. A tetravalent
replication-defective-recombinant adenovirus (cAdVaX) has also been prepared, as have
formalin-inactivated vaccines of the four dengue viruses. Finally, prime-boost strategies
combining vaccines of distinct formulations are under investigation.
6.2.3 Challenges
Since dengue is caused by four serologically related viruses, the frst major problem
in developing a dengue vaccine is to develop not just one immunogen but four
immunogens that will induce a protective immune response against all four viruses
simultaneously. Therefore, the vaccine must be tetravalent. Interference between the
four vaccine viruses must be avoided or overcome, and neutralizing titres to all four
viruses need to be achieved regardless of the previous immune status of the vaccinated
individuals. Thus, the tetravalent formulations must balance viral interference with long-
lasting immunogenicity and reactogenicity.
The second issue is the lack of a validated correlate of protection since the mechanism
of protective immunity against DEN infection is not fully understood. A wealth of data
suggests that neutralizing antibodies are the main effector of protection against DEN
virus infection. However, neither the precise antibody titres nor neutralizing epitopes
nor the contributions of other immune mechanisms to protection have been defned.
Further studies are necessary to elucidate the mechanism of protective immunity so that
correlates of protection can be established to demonstrate that the candidate vaccines
induce a protective immune response (9).
The dengue viruses are arboviruses whose normal transmission cycle involves mosquitoes
(most commonly Ae. aegypti and Ae. albopictus) with humans as the vertebrate host,
without relying on other animal reservoirs. Herein lies the third problem. Two animal
models (mice and non-human primates) are used to evaluate candidate vaccines,
but neither of these faithfully recapitulates both the disease outcome and the immune
response in humans. Mice are often used as a small animal model to evaluate initially
the ability of candidate vaccines to induce a protective immune response, and good
progress has been made recently in developing mouse models for DEN virus infection
and disease. However, the results are not always predictive of what will happen in
higher animal species – i.e. a candidate vaccine that protects mice may not be as
effective in other animal models. The second animal model is the non-human primate,
and a variety of species have been used as models to evaluate candidate dengue
vaccines. Unfortunately, non-human primates do not present clinical disease but do
demonstrate viraemia (originally measured as infectivity, now normally measured by
real-time RT-PCR and immunological parameters as proxies). Clearly, the mouse and
non-human primate models must be used to evaluate candidate dengue vaccines before
they are tested in humans. However, unexpected discordance has occasionally been
observed between preclinical and clinical outcomes (10).
The fourth challenge for the development of dengue vaccines is the potential for immune
enhancement, including antibody-dependent enhancement. It is clear that an infection
by one dengue virus leads to lifelong protective immunity against the infecting virus, i.e.
homotypic immunity. However, many studies have shown that some secondary DEN
infections (i.e. infection by one dengue virus followed by infection by a different DEN
serotype) can lead to severe disease (DHF/DSS) and that anti-DEN antibodies passively
140
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
transferred from mothers to infants increase the risk of DHF/DSS in the infants for a
certain period of time. Thus, there is theoretically a danger that a dengue vaccine could
potentially cause severe disease (including DHF or DSS) in vaccine recipients if solid
immunity was not established against all four serotypes. It should be emphasized that,
to date, there is no evidence that a vaccine recipient who has received a candidate
vaccine has subsequently succumbed to severe disease. Rather, vaccine recipients have
shown evidence of immunity for varying lengths of time. This may be infuenced by the
candidate vaccine. Also vaccine recipients may have been exposed to less symptomatic
DEN infections than control groups, although this is based on small numbers thus far
(11). Nonetheless, the risk of immune enhancement by a candidate vaccine must be
evaluated through prolonged follow-up of vaccinated cohorts.
Box 6.1 The complexity of developing a dengue vaccine
Development
• |oou |o| u |o||uvu|o|| vucc|o v|| |o| us| o|o |u| |ou| uuu|ouo|s ||u| v|| uvo u |u|u|cou uuu|o
response whereby a protective long-lasting immunity is induced against all four viruses simultaneously
(balancing viral interference, immunogenicity, and reactogenicity).
• |uc| o| uuu|o co||o|u|o o| o|o|oc|o| s|co ||o uoc|u|su o| o|o|oc|vo uuu||, uuu|s| D|| ||oc|o| s
only partially understood. It is assumed that neutralizing antibodies are the main effector of protection against
DEN infection.
• |uc| o| u su|u||o u|uu| uouo| ||u| |ocuo|u|u|os |uuu| usouso u|u cu| |o usou |o ovu|uu|o cu|uuu|o
vaccines.
• |o|o||u| uuu|oou||ouo|oss |c|uu|u u|||ou,uooo|uo|| o||u|couo||
Implementation
• |oou |o| |o|u|o|u |o||ovuo
• |oou |o| |os||u | |o|| /su u|u ||o /uo|cus
• |uou||, cu| |o |os|ou uuu|s| u|| |ou| D|| so|o|,oos
• ¹|o oxuc| |ocu|o| |u|u u|u so|o|,oo/uo|o|,oo couoos|o| o| uo|uuo oououcs vu|os ||ou ,ou| |o ,ou|
and is somewhat unpredictable.
6.2.4 Implementation
The clinical evaluation of candidate vaccines for dengue has several unique aspects,
some of which are related to the above-mentioned challenges. Dengue illness has
many clinical manifestations and poses diagnostic challenges. Ideally, a vaccine
should be effcacious against all forms of dengue illness, ranging from febrile illnesses
to severe forms such as DHF and DSS. Trials need to be large enough to address a
vaccine’s impact on the different clinical forms of dengue. Phase 4, or post-marketing,
trials will be particularly important for dengue for the same reason. Likewise, long-
term evaluation of volunteers will be required to demonstrate lack of evidence for
immune enhancement/severe disease. Trials need to take place in multiple countries
– particularly in both Asia and the Americas – due to the distinct epidemiological
characteristics and the viruses circulating in each region. The greatest burden of disease
is found in distinct age groups in different countries, and the methodology of capturing
clinical events may differ by age group and between countries. The epidemic peak
varies somewhat in timing and exact location from year to year even in endemic
countries; thus, long-term dengue surveillance data about the potential vaccine testing
141
Chapter 6. New avenues
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

6
site(s) is crucial and, even so, the unpredictability of timing and location adds a level
of complexity to calculations of trial sample size. To facilitate the vaccine development
process, WHO has developed guidelines for the clinical evaluation of dengue vaccines
(12). The Paediatric Dengue Vaccine Initiative (PDVI) supports the establishment of feld
sites for the testing of vaccines.
6.2.5 Vaccine utilization for dengue control
Additional work is required to bring a vaccine from licensing to programmatic use in
dengue-endemic areas. Depending on cost-effectiveness and the outcome of fnancial
and operational analysis, countries may decide to introduce dengue vaccines into the
national immunization programmes for routine administration. If the vaccine is to be used
for infants, the dengue vaccination will need to be carried out on a schedule compatible
with other vaccines. Interference between dengue vaccine and other vaccines likely to
be given in the same time period must be ruled out. If the vaccine is to be delivered to
older age groups, proper contact points will need to be established to deliver the vaccine
effectively and to ensure post-marketing surveillance. In addition, vaccine presentation,
packaging and stability requirements should be compatible with large-scale use. WHO
has produced generic guidelines to guide national authorities in their decision-making
on the introduction of new vaccines (13).
To maximize the effect of vaccination, the potential impact of a vaccine on dengue
transmission needs to be studied (e.g. the role of herd immunity). A number of modelling
approaches are being taken to address this and other similar issues, as well as the
characteristics of the mosquito population transmitting the virus and climatographic
parameters.
Given the complexity of dengue and dengue vaccines, it is imperative to continue
scientifc research that is directed at improving our understanding of the immune response
in both natural DEN infections and vaccinees (e.g. defning neutralizing and potentially
enhancing epitopes, improving animal models) alongside vaccine development and
evaluation.
6.3 DENGUE ANTIVIRAL DRUGS
6.3.1 Overview
The search for dengue antivirals is a new endeavour that is gaining momentum due
to both increased interest in dengue and substantial progress in the structural biology
of dengue virus. Furthermore, extensive drug discovery efforts in HIV and HCV have
taught us important lessons that encourage similar strategies to be adopted for dengue.
Since HCV and dengue virus are members of the Flaviviridae family, the intensive work
on HCV antivirals – especially those that target the RNA-dependent RNA polymerase
– can beneft the search for dengue antivirals (14). The rationale for dengue antivirals
arises from clinical studies that have noted that the quantity of virus circulating in the
blood of patients who develop DHF and DSS is higher by around 1–2 logs compared
with patients suffering from the milder dengue fever. Similar differences in viral load
have been observed in animal models of ADE (15,16,17). This observation suggests
that progress to serious dengue disease and adverse morbidity may be reversed by
administering potent and safe small molecule compounds that target essential steps in
142
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
virus replication early during the disease, thereby lowering the viral load substantially.
This hypothesis requires feld-testing when a suitable anti-dengue agent is discovered.
6.3.2 Product development
The life cycle of dengue virus readily shows that the steps involved in virus entry,
membrane fusion, RNA genome replication, assembly and ultimate release from the
infected cell can be targeted by small molecules (18). The importance of targets such
as the viral protease and polymerase have been studied by reverse genetics using
infectious clones to validate them as targets for drug discovery. On the basis of success
in the HIV and HCV felds in fnding small molecules that target viral enzymes that
are essential for virus replication in infected cells, academic institutions and non-proft
pharmaceutical enterprises and consortia are progressing in their search for antiviral
compounds active against these targets in dengue virus. The feld is also benefting from
new insights afforded by x-ray crystallography and cryo-electron microscopy data. In
the past fve years alone, seven new 3-D structures of dengue proteins have been solved
and nine structures of other favivirus proteins have become available. Based on these,
a number of in silico and high through-put screens have been and are being undertaken,
yielding several lead compounds so far (19). Currently the most advanced targets are
the NS3/NS2B protease and NS5 RNA-dependent RNA polymerase, which have
undergone high through-put screening and lead compound optimization. New targets –
including E, NS3 helicase, and NS5 methyltransferase – are being explored (20), and
others will soon be added to the list. Recent advances in understanding the mechanism
of membrane fusion during DEN infection of target cells has opened up new possibilities
for designing novel antiviral strategies that target the fusion step as well (21).
Screening efforts are continuing and will increase. They include the proprietary libraries
of pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies, focused libraries of compounds
synthesized to specifc targets (e.g. protease inhibitors), designed libraries based on
structural information, natural products and approved drugs. Different approaches have
been taken to screening compounds, such as high through-put screening of both target
protein activity and viral replication in cultured cells, high through-put docking in silico,
and fragment-based screening using NMR and x-ray crystallography. Distinct classes of
inhibitors are being explored, such as substrate- and transition-state-based as well as non-
substrate-based inhibitors. Reporter replicons based on yellow fever or DEN infectious
clones have facilitated screening in cell culture for both primary and secondary screens
(22,23). Early preclinical in vivo testing can be conducted in certain mouse models
of dengue infection. For instance, tissue and cellular tropism of DEN in AG129 mice
(mice of the 129 background lacking interferon a/b and g receptors) is similar to that
in humans (24,25), and AG129 mice are being used as the frst step in preclinical
testing of candidate antivirals (26). Alternative approaches, such as interfering with
viral replication using peptide-conjugated phosphorodiamidate morpholino oligomers
(P-PMOs), have also been proposed and are effective in cell culture (27,28). Initial
studies of such compounds in mice against the related West Nile virus have been
reported (29). Other nucleotide-based approaches, including RNAi methodologies,
have been investigated in the exploratory phase (30). In addition, cellular targets are
under consideration, as is the idea of incorporating multiple targets in one formulation so
as to delay the possible development of resistance. A further approach is to target key
disease manifestations. As more is understood about the mechanism of severe dengue
disease, animal models that reproduce specifc manifestations may be useful for testing
anti-dengue drugs. For instance, the AG129 mouse demonstrates a vascular leak early-
143
Chapter 6. New avenues
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

6
death phenotype when infected with DEN-2 strain D2S10 (31). It can also reproduce
antibody-dependent enhancement of infection and disease (17) and is currently being
used to test compounds that target disease phenotypes such as vascular leak.
6.3.3 Challenges
There are numerous requirements for an anti-dengue drug (Box 6.2). The minimal target
product profle includes oral route of administration, frequency of dosing of once per
day, stability in the face of heat and humidity, a long shelf-life, and low/reasonable
cost of goods and ease of formulation to allow a reasonably priced product (18).
With respect to clinical effcacy, the drug must be active against all serotypes, reduce
symptoms, and reduce the incidence of severe disease. Furthermore, a safe drug may
be evaluated for prophylactic as well as paediatric use after proper trials.
Box 6.2 The challenge of developing dengue antivirals
Development
• Sovo|u| oo|o||u| v|u| |u|uo|s o| v|c| ||o uos| uuvu|cou u|o |So/|S2E o|o|ouso u|u |S' oo|,uo|uso
work in progress on E, NS3 helicase, and NS5 methyltransferase.
• /us| |o uc|vo uuu|s| u|| so|o|,oos
• /us| |o o||oc|vo | |o|| o|uu|, u|u soco|uu|, D|| ||oc|o|s
• /us| |o uc|vo o|u||, s|u||o |o |ou| u|u |uuu|, |uvo u |o|u s|o||||o u|u |uvo |ov/|ouso|u||o
production costs.
• |xo|o|u|o| o| co||u|u| |u|uo|s´
• Coou su|o|, o|o||o |c|uu|u |ov o| |o soco|uu|, o||oc|s
• Uso|u| | ||u||s c||u|o| u|u uuu||s
Implementation
• |oou |o| |uou oo||o|cu|o uuu|os|c |oo| |o uoo|, u||v|u| uos| o||oc|vo|,
• S|o|| v|uov o| v|uouu
• |oss||o uovo|oouo|| o| |oss|u|co uso coc||u|s o| uu||o|o u|uus |o uvou ||s ovo||uu||,
• /us| |o |os|ou | ucu|o D|| ||oc|o| u|u u o|oo|,|uc|c ||u| s |o| u| oo|o|
6.3.4 Implementation
One of the biggest challenges in testing antivirals is that to be effective the drug(s) should
presumably be delivered early after onset of symptoms. However, the vast majority of
dengue patients present late during their illness, perhaps on days 3 or 4 of fever. Even
during clinical studies, patients do not present to study staff much earlier. In this respect,
a trial of dengue antivirals would have to capture patients presenting to primary care
facilities, where it would be possible to enrol patients during the frst two days after the
onset of symptoms, whereas hospital admission is more likely to occur on days 3 or
4 or later. However, the earlier the presentation with fever, the less likely it is that the
diagnosis will be dengue. Although prospective dengue diagnosis before treatment in a
clinical study would be ideal, this would potentially be problematic as it would require
rapid RT-PCR testing at or near the site of the study. The availability of new serological
reagents such as NS1 antigen capture tests may make early point-of-care diagnosis
144
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
possible. It would also be ideal to test reactions between an anti-dengue drug and other
drugs often used to treat dengue patients, such as paracetamol.
It is likely that a multicentre trial of a candidate dengue antiviral drug would be indicated,
which raises a series of issues. For instance, the treatment that dengue cases receive
in hospitals is known to have a dramatic effect on the disease outcome, and the way
clinicians treat dengue cases varies greatly both within and between institutions. In
addition, getting physicians to document parameters and outcomes carefully in busy
clinical situations is often diffcult – though not impossible – and is clearly essential for
any trial. A robust study design with a single protocol followed meticulously at all sites
would solve the problem but would be challenging to achieve.
The greatest burden of dengue in most countries is in children, although in some areas
older age groups are also signifcantly affected. The target population for dengue drugs
would be all age groups but, because of the problematic nature of clinical trials in
c||u|o| u u|uu ||u| uu, |o |o||o| oo||o|uou | ||o ||s| |s|u|co | uuu||s |>]' ,ou|s
of age).
Although vaccines and drugs for dengue pose signifcant challenges during both
product development and feld-testing, tremendous strides have been made recently in
both areas.
6.4 REFERENCES
1. Edelman R. Dengue vaccines approach the fnish line. Clinical Infectious Diseases,
2007, 45(Suppl 1):S56–S60.
2. Guy B, Almond JW. Towards a dengue vaccine: progress to date and remaining
challenges. Comparative Immunology, Microbiology and Infectious Diseases, 2008,
2–3:239–252.
3. Hombach J. Vaccines against dengue: a review of current candidate vaccines at
advanced development stages. Revista Panamericana de Salud Pública, 2007,
21:254–260.
4. Whitehead SS et al. Prospects for a dengue virus vaccine. Nature Reviews.
Microbiology, 2007, 5:518–528.
5. Anderson KB et al. Burden of symptomatic dengue infection in children at primary
school in Thailand: a prospective study. Lancet, 2007, 369:1452–1459.
6. Clark DV. Economic impact of dengue fever/dengue hemorrhagic fever in Thailand
at the family and population levels. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene,
2005, 72:786–791.
7. Halstead SB, Suaya JA, Shepard DS. The burden of dengue infection. Lancet, 2007,
369:1410–1411.
145
Chapter 6. New avenues
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

6
8. Shepard DS et al. Cost-effectiveness of a pediatric dengue vaccine. Vaccine, 2004,
22:1275–1280.
9. Hombach Jet al. Scientifc consultation on immunological correlates of protection
induced by dengue vaccines report from a meeting held at the World Health Organization
17-18 November 2005. Vaccine, 2007, 25:4130–4139.
10. Innis BL et al. Virulence of a live dengue virus vaccine candidate: a possible new
marker of dengue virus attenuation. Journal of Infectious Diseases, 1998, 158:876–
880.
11. Chanthavanich PC et al. Short report: immune response and occurrence of dengue
infection in thai children three to eight years after vaccination with live attenuated
tetravalent dengue vaccine. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 2006,
75:26–28.
12. Edelman R, Hombach J. Guidelines for the clinical evaluation of dengue vaccines
in endemic areas: summary of a World Health Organization technical consultation.
Vaccine, 2008, 26(33):4113–4119.
13. WHO. Vaccine introduction guidelines. Geneva, World Health Organization,
2007 (Document WHO/IVB/05.18).
14. Olsen DB et al. A 7-deaza-adenosine analog is a potent and selective inhibitor
of hepatitis C virus replication with excellent pharmacokinetic properties. Antimicrobial
Agents and Chemotherapy, 2004, 48(10):3944–3953.
15. Goncalvez AP et al. Monoclonal antibody-mediated enhancement of dengue virus
infection in vitro and in vivo and strategies for prevention. Proceedings of the National
Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 2007, 104:9422–9427.
16. Halstead SB. In vivo enhancement of dengue virus infection in rhesus monkeys by
passively transferred antibody. Journal of Infectious Diseases, 1979,140:527–533.
17. Balsitis SJ, Harris E. Animal models of dengue virus infection: applications, insights,
and frontiers. In: Hanley KA, Weaver SC, eds. Frontiers in dengue virus research.
Norwich, Horizon Scientifc Press, 2009 (in press).
18. Keller TH et al. Finding new medicines for faviviral targets. Novartis Foundation
Symposium, 2006, 277:102–114.
19. Johnston PA et al. HTS identifes novel and specifc uncompetitive inhibitors of the
two-component NS2B-NS3 proteinase of West Nile virus. Assay and Drug Development
Technologies, 2007, 5(6):737–750.
20. Luzhkov VB et al. Virtual screening and bioassay study of novel inhibitors for
dengue virus mRNA cap (nucleoside-2’O)-methyltransferase. Bioorganic and Medicinal
Chemistry, 2007, 15:7795–7802.
146
Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control
21. Stiasny K, Kiermayr S, Heinz FX. Entry functions and antigenic structure of favivirus
envelope proteins. Novartis Foundation Symposium, 2006, 277:57–65.
22. Patkar CG, Kuhn RJ. Development of novel antivirals against faviviruses. Novartis
Foundation Symposium, 2006, 277:41–52.
23. Ng CY et al. Construction and characterization of a stable subgenomic dengue
virus type 2 replicon system for antiviral compound and siRNA testing. Antiviral Research,
2007, 76(3):222–231.
24. Kyle JL, Beatty PR, Harris E. Dengue virus infects macrophages and dendritic cells in a
mouse model of infection. Journal of Infectious Diseases, 2007, 195:1808–1817.
25. Balsitis SJ et al. Tropism of dengue virus in mice and humans defned by viral
nonstructural protein 3-specifc immunostaining. American Journal of Tropical Medicine
and Hygiene, 2009, 80(3):416–424.
26. Schul W et al. A dengue fever viremia model in mice shows reduction in viral
replication and suppression of the infammatory response after treatment with antiviral
drugs. Journal of Infectious Diseases, 2007,195:665–674.
27. Holden KL et al. Inhibition of dengue virus translation and RNA synthesis by a
morpholino oligomer to the top of the 3’ stem-loop structure. Virology, 2006, 344:439–
452.
28. Kinney RM et al. Inhibition of dengue virus serotypes 1 to 4 in vero cell cultures with
morpholino oligomers. Journal of Virology, 2005, 79:5116–5128.
29. Deas TS et al. In vitro resistance selection and in vivo effcacy of morpholino
oligomers against West Nile virus. Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy, 2007,
51:2470–2482.
30. Stein DA, Shi PY. Nucleic acid-based inhibition of favivirus infections. Frontiers in
Bioscience, 2008, 13:1385–1395.
31. Shresta S et al. A murine model for dengue lethal disease with increased vascular
permeability. Journal of Virology, 2006, 80:10208–10217.
147
Chapter 6. New avenues
C
H
A
P
T
E
R

6
New edition
2009
DENGUE
GUIDELINES FOR DIAGNOSIS,
TREATMENT, PREVENTION AND CONTROL
D
E
N
G
U
E

G
U
I
D
E
L
I
N
E
S

F
O
R

D
I
A
G
N
O
S
I
S
,

T
R
E
A
T
M
E
N
T
,

P
R
E
V
E
N
T
I
O
N

A
N
D

C
O
N
T
R
O
L




N
e
w

e
d
i
t
i
o
n
Neglected Tropical Diseases (NTD) TDR/World Health Organization
HIV/AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria (HTM) 20, Avenue Appia
World Health Organization 1211 Geneva 27
Avenue Appia 20, 1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland Switzerland
Fax: +41 22 791 48 69 Fax: +41 22 791 48 54
www.who.int/neglected_diseases/en www.who.int/tdr
neglected.diseases@who.int tdr@who.int

DENGUE
GUIDELINES FOR DIAGNOSIS, TREATMENT, PREVENTION AND CONTROL

New edition
2009

A joint publication of the World Health Organization (WHO) and the Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases (TDR)

differential.Dengue . Errors and omissions excepted. Switzerland (tel.therapy. Requests for permission to reproduce or translate WHO publications – whether for sale or for noncommercial distribution – should be addressed to WHO Press. 2. Publications of the World Health Organization can be obtained from WHO Press. 8. 1.Diagnosis.Endemic Diseases prevention and control.int). ISBN 978 92 4 154787 1 (NLM classification: WC 528) WHO/HTM/NTD/DEN/2009.Guidelines. 9. 3. 5. Printed in France Cover and Layout: P. I.Mosquito control. All reasonable precautions have been taken by the World Health Organization to verify the information contained in this publication. either expressed or implied.diagnosis. In no event shall the World Health Organization be liable for damages arising from its use. the published material is being distributed without warranty of any kind.New edition. 4. 1211 Geneva 27. prevention and control -.Dengue .prevention and control. territory. fax: +41 22 791 4857.WHO Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data Dengue: guidelines for diagnosis. the names of proprietary products are distinguished by initial capital letters.Disease outbreaks .prevention and control. at the above address (fax: +41 22 791 4806. World Health Organization. 20 Avenue Appia.: +41 22 791 3264. However. treatment. city or area or of its authorities.int). Tissot WHO/HTM/NTD . e-mail: permissions@who.World Health Organization. 7. e-mail: bookorders@who. or concerning the delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries. Dotted lines on maps represent approximate border lines for which there may not yet be full agreement. The designations employed and the presentation of the material in this publication do not imply the expression of any opinion whatsoever on the part of the World Health Organization concerning the legal status of any country. 6.Dengue . The responsibility for the interpretation and use of the material lies with the reader.1 Expiry date: 2014 © World Health Organization 2009 All rights reserved.Fluid therapy. The mention of specific companies or of certain manufacturers’ products does not imply that they are endorsed or recommended by the World Health Organization in preference to others of a similar nature that are not mentioned.

104 Organization of laboratory services -----------------------------------------------------------------.4 Chapter 3 3.128 References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.vi Acknowledgements -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.137 Dengue antiviral drugs ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.ix Chapter 1 1. Methodology. Acknowledgements.4 5.91 Considerations in the choice of diagnostic methods -------------------------------.1 5. emergency preparedness and response Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.5 Chapter 6 6.2 2.4 4.12 Dengue in international travel -------------------------------------------------------------------------------.132 New avenues Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.123 Programme assessment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.60 Delivery of vector control interventions ------------------------------------------------------------.93 Current dengue diagnostic methods ---------------------------------------------------------------.2 6.54 Vector management and delivery of vector control services Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.1 1.7 4.2 4.104 References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.3 5.4 1.2 1.111 Dengue preparedness planning and response -------------------------------------------.4 Epidemiology.vii Abbreviations -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.3 4.97 Future test developments ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.72 References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.4 Chapter 4 4.1 3. Preface CONTENTS Preface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.106 Surveillance.5 4. Abbreviations.144 iii .8 Chapter 5 5.17 Clinical management and delivery of clinical services Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.111 Dengue surveillance---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.59 Methods of vector control -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.3 Burden of disease -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.103 Quality assurance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.1 6.86 Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.104 Biosafety issues -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.3 2.3 1.2 5.Introduction.3 6.v Methodology --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.137 Dengue vaccines ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.5 Chapter 2 2.6 4. burden of disease and transmission Dengue epidemiology ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.29 Recommendations for treatment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------.3 3.13 Transmission--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.14 References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.141 References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.1 4.2 3.25 Delivery of clinical services and case management --------------------------------.32 References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.1 2.

treatment. prevention and control iv .Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

and the Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases. laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests. and surveillance. some indications of new and promising avenues of research are also described. the magnitude of the dengue problem has increased dramatically and has extended geographically to many previously unaffected areas. the guide is also available on the Internet and will be updated regularly by WHO. and remains today. since many aspects of the prevention and control of dengue are currently being investigated in a variety of studies.17 (adopted by the Fifty-fifth World Health Assembly in 2002) and at the regional level by resolution CE140. emergency preparedness and response. Additional and more detailed specific guidance on the various specialist areas related to dengue are available from other sources in WHO and elsewhere. These guidelines are not intended to replace national guidelines but to assist in the development of national or regional guidelines. many experts both within and outside WHO have facilitated the preparation of this publication through consultative and peer review processes. This new edition has been produced to make widely available to health practitioners. These guidelines are the result of collaboration between the WHO Department of Control Neglected Tropical Diseases.R6 of the WHO Regional Committee for the Western Pacific (2008) and resolution SEA/RC61/R5 of the WHO Regional Committee for South-East Asia (2008). treatment. and review by.R17 of the Pan American Sanitary Conference (2007). All contributors are gratefully acknowledged. a list of whom appears under “Acknowledgements”. Activities undertaken by WHO regarding dengue are most recently guided at the global policy level by World Health Assembly resolution WHA55. However. laboratory personnel. Methodology. The guidelines contain the most up-to-date information at the time of writing. Preface PREFACE Since the second edition of Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis. The guidelines provide updated practical information on the clinical management and delivery of clinical services. The contributions of. some of which are cited in the references. prevention and control was published by the World Health Organization (WHO) in 1997. resolution WPR/RC59. This publication is intended to contribute to prevention and control of the morbidity and mortality associated with dengue and to serve as an authoritative reference source for health workers and researchers.Introduction. Abbreviations. a concise source of information of worldwide relevance on dengue. They are expected to remain valid for five years (until 2014). those involved in vector control and other public health officials. It was then. Looking ahead. Acknowledgements. the WHO Department of Epidemic and Pandemic Alert and Response. the results of studies are being published regularly and should be taken into account. the most important arthropod-borne viral disease of humans. although developments in research could change their validity. v . To address this challenge. vector management and delivery of vector control services.

prevention and control METHODOLOGY These guidelines were written using the following methodology: 1. and references from personal collections of experts were added when appropriate under 4. The writing teams referred to the items under 1--4 in the text. pathogenesis and transmission. and lists of references were added at the end of each chapter. Chapter 5 required extensive discussion. The lead writers were chosen because of their expertise in the field and their willingness to undertake the work. and drug and vaccine development.1 For each chapter. Dr Anne Wilder Smith: principal investigator in dengue vaccine trial starting in 2009. vector control. Use of evidence For each chapter. Declarations of interest were obtained from all lead writers and no conflicting interests were declared. (2) challenge current practice. items are referenced that (1) provide new data. For chapters 1. but consensus was reached without a consensus group meeting. 2. treatment. For those peer reviewers with potential conflicting interests. surveillance and response. (3) describe ongoing research and (4) reflect key developments in knowledge about dengue prevention and control. the process of reaching agreement on disputed issues differed. The peer review groups were determined by the WHO coordinator and the non-WHO lead writers of each chapter. Additional literature searches were conducted by the writing teams when items under 1--3 were identified. the interests are declared below. 3. clinical aspects. laboratory aspects. 1 Declared interests: Chapter 1. Since this guide has the broad scope of all aspects of prevention and control of dengue. Declarations of interest were obtained from all peer reviewers. Writing team Each chapter was allocated to a WHO coordinator and at least one non-WHO lead writer. Dr Robert Edelman: consultant for company involved in dengue vaccine research. Chapter 6. Peer review All the chapters were submitted to peer review. 4 and 6. The non-WHO lead writers received a small fee for their work. vi . the comments of the peer reviewers were discussed electronically within the group. 3. who were not paid for their work. Agreement on the chapter content was reached for all the groups. Priority was given to systematic reviews when available. The groups consisted of five or more peer reviewers. Dr Mary Jane Cardosa: shareholder and director of company developing dengue diagnostic tests. Chapter 4. Chapter 2 had a larger group whose members met for a consensus group discussion. the lead writers were selected for technical expertise in the areas of epidemiology.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

Dr Roberto Barrera. Dr Linda Lloyd. Dr John Ehrenberg. Dr Raman Velayudhan (WHO) coordinated the finalization and publication of the guide and advised on all the chapters. contributed to all chapters and contributed to the finalization of the guide.Introduction. Abbreviations. Dr Ernesto Benjamín Pleites. Dr Chang Moh Seng. Dr Renu Dayal-Drager. Dr Ivo Castelo Branco. contributed their unique experience to all chapters. Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Satish Appoo. Dr Maria Guzman. Dr Robert Bos. Dr Lian Huat Tan. Scott. now retired from the World Health Organization (WHO). vii . Dr Annelies WilderSmith. Dr Mohammadu Kabir Cham. Dr Michael B. Dr Cameron Simmons. Dr Chusak Prasittisuk and Dr Jose Luis San Martin. Dr Lucy Lum. Dr Morteza Zaim. Dr Jose Martinez. Dr Christian Frederickson. Dr Elci Villegas. Dr Thomas Jaenisch. Dr Tom W. Dr Axel Kroeger of the Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases (WHO/TDR) equally contributed to all parts of the guidelines. Dr Bridget Wills. Dr Rivaldo Venancio. Special thanks are due to the editorial team of Mrs Karen Ciceri and Mr Patrick Tissot at WHO. Nathan. as WHO regional advisers on dengue. Dr Olaf Horstick (WHO/TDR) assembled the evidence base. Chapter 2 Lead writers: Dr Jacqueline Deen. Dr Rajpal Yadav. Nathan. practical experience of many years of working in dengue. Dr Scott Halstead. Dr Romeo Montoya. Dr Martin Weber. Dr Vu Sinh Nam. Dr Efren Dimaano. Dr Mary Wilson. Dr Raman Velayudhan. Nathan. advisers or peer reviewers: Chapter 1 Lead writers: Dr Michael B. The following individuals contributed to chapters as lead writers. Dr Eric Martinez. Dr Indra Vithylingam. Dr Nguyen Hung. Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Jeremy Farrar. Dr Gary G. Chapter 3 Lead writers: Dr Philip McCall. Dr Renu Dayal Drager (WHO) and Dr Jeremy Farrar (the Wellcome Trust) contributed technical advice to several chapters. Dr André Yebakima. Dr Anand Joshi. Acknowledgements. and writing contribution of Dr Michael B. Clark. Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Olivia Brathwaite. Preface ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This new edition of the dengue guidelines would not have been possible without the initiative. Dr Ida Safitri Laksono. Dr Eva Harris. Methodology.

Clark. Dr John Roehrig. Dr Robert Edelman. Dr Elizabeth Hunsperger. viii . Dr Eric Martinez. Dr Lucy Lum. Dr Subhash Vasudevan. Dr Maria Guzman. Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Bruno Canard. Dr Susana Vazquez. Dr Renu Dayal-Drager. Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Pierre Formenty. Dr Jane Cardosa. Dr Axel Kroeger. Dr Jose Pelegrino. prevention and control Chapter 4 Lead writers: Dr Philippe Buchy. Chapter 5 Lead writers: Dr Duane Gubler. Dr Maria Guzman. Dr Janis Lazdins-Held.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Dr Angela Merianos. Dr Dana Focks. Chapter 6 Lead writers: Dr Eva Harris. treatment. Dr José Rigau-Pérez. Advisers and peer reviewers: Dr Harvey Artsob. Dr Duane Gubler. Dr Gary G. Dr Renu DayalDrager. Dr Rosanna Peeling. Dr Anne Durbin. Dr Reinhard Junghecker. Dr Dominique Legros. Dr Silvia Runge-Ranzinger. Dr Cathy Roth. Dr Joachim Hombach.

i. education. Preface ABBREVIATIONS a. T cell co-receptor transmembrane glycoprotein case-fatality rate communication for behavioural impact disability-adjusted life years diethyl-meta-toluamide Dengue and Control study (multi-country study) dengue dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane dengue fever dengue haemorrhagic fever deoxyribonucleic acid dengue shock syndrome tablet for direct application emulsifiable concentrate enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay envelop/membrane antigen full blood count fragment. a cell receptor fetal rhesus lung cells E/M-specific capture IgG ELISA Geographical Information System Global Outbreak Alert and Response Network global positioning system granule haemagglutination-inhibition human immunodeficiency virus/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome intensive care unit information. Methodology. T helper cell surface glycoprotein cluster of differentiation 8. crystallisable region. ADE ALT AST BP BSL Bti CD4 CD8 CFR COMBI DALY DEET DENCO DEN DDT DF DHF DNA DSS DT EC ELISA E/M FBC Fc-receptor FRhL GAC GIS GOARN GPS GR HI HIV/AIDS ICU IEC IgA IgG IgM INF gamma ad interim antibody-dependent enhancement alanine amino transferase aspartate amino transferase blood pressure biosafety level Bacillus thuringiensis israelensis cluster of differentiation 4. Acknowledgements.Introduction. Abbreviations. communication immunoglobulin A immunoglobulin G immunoglobulin M interferon gamma ix .

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. prevention and control IPCS IR3535 ITM IV LAV MAC-ELISA MIA MoE MoH NAAT NASBA NGO NS NSAID OD ORS PAHO PCR PDVI pH prM PRNT RNA RT-PCR SC TNF alfa T cells TDR WBC WG WHO WP YF International Programme on Chemical Safety 3-[N-acetyl-N-butyl]-aminopropionic acid ethyl ester insecticide treated material intravenous live attenuated vaccine IgM antibody-capture enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay microsphere-based immunoassays Ministry of Education Ministry of Health nucleic acid amplification test nucleic acid sequence based amplification nongovernmental organization non-structural protein non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs optical density oral rehydration solution Pan American Health Organization polymerase chain reaction Pediatric Dengue Vaccine Initiative measure of the acidity or basicity of a solution a region of the dengue genome plaque reduction and neutralization test ribonucleic acid reverse transcriptase-polymerase chain reaction suspension concentrate tumor necrosis factor alfa A group of lymphocytes important for cell-mediated immunity Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases white blood cells Water-dispersible granule World Health Organizaion wettable powder yellow fever x . treatment.

burden of disease and transmission CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 1 EPIDEMIOLOGY.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. BURDEN OF DISEASE AND TRANSMISSION 1 .

.

or concerning the delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries. Dotted lines or maps represent approximate border lines for which there may not yest be fill agreement. Of particular significance is the 2005 World Health Assembly resolution WHA58.2) and approximately 2. city or area or of its authorities. territory. burden of disease and transmission CHAPTER 1. countries or areas at risk (As of 1 November 2008) The boundaries and names shown and the designations used on this map do not imply the expression of any opinion whatsoever on the part of the World Health Organization concerning the legal status of any country. In the last 50 years. CHAPTER 1 Figure 1. Data Source: World Health Organization Map Production: Public Health Infrmation and Geographic Information Systems (GIS) World Health Organization © World Health Organization 2008 3 .Chapter 1: Epidemiology.C The contour lines of the January and July isotherms indicate the potential geographical limits of the northern and southern hemispheres for year-round survival of Adeas aegypti.17 (2) urged greater commitment to dengue by WHO and its Member States. incidence has increased 30-fold with increasing geographic expansion to new countries and.5 billion people live in dengue endemic countries (1). The 2002 World Health Assembly resolution WHA55. the principal mosquito vector of dengue viruses.1 DENGUE EPIDEMIOLOGY Dengue is the most rapidly spreading mosquito-borne viral disease in the world. in the present decade.3 on the revision of the International Health Regulations (IHR) (3). An estimated 50 million dengue infections occur annually (Figure 1. BURDEN OF DISEASE AND TRANSMISSION 1.1).1 Countries/areas at risk of dengue transmission. EPIDEMIOLOGY. from urban to rural settings (Figure 1. 2008 January isotherm 10.C July isotherm 10. which includes dengue as an example of a disease that may constitute a public health emergency of international concern with implications for health security due to disruption and rapid epidemic spread beyond national borders.

1. All data are from country reports from the WHO regional offices. which is spreading to new geographical areas and causing high mortality during the early phase of outbreaks.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. characterize and contain outbreaks rapidly and to stop the spread to new areas. prevention and control Figure 1. treatment.554 20 122.8 billion (more than 70%) of the population at risk for dengue worldwide live in member states of the WHO South-East Asia Region and Western Pacific Region.174 15. 1955–2007 1 000 000 900 000 800 000 925. 4 Number of countries . unless referenced to a different source. which bear nearly 75% of the current global disease burden due to dengue.1 Dengue in Asia and the Pacific Some 1. 1.2 Average annual number of dengue fever (DF) and dengue haemorrhagic fever (DHF) cases reported to WHO.848 30 295. The strategic plan aims to aid countries to reverse the rising trend of dengue by enhancing their preparedness to detect.896 60 70 Number of cases 700 000 600 000 500 000 400 000 300 000 200 000 100 000 0 908 1955-1959 50 40 479. and of countries reporting dengue.497 1960-1969 1970-1979 1980-1989 1990-1999 2000-2007 10 0 Year The following sections give an overview of the epidemiology and burden of disease in the different WHO regions. The Asia Pacific Dengue Strategic Plan for both regions (2008--2015) has been prepared in consultation with member countries and development partners in response to the increasing threat from dengue.

reported dengue cases. focal outbreaks away from the urban areas have reported case-fatality rates of 3--5%. Myanmar. India. Phetchabun. Nakhon Sawan and Phit Chit. Khamkaeng Phet.2%. Dengue prevention and control will be implemented through the Bi-regional Dengue Strategy (2008--2015) of the WHO South-East Asia and Western Pacific regions. where multiple virus serotypes are circulating. dengue is reported from all four regions: Northern. Indonesia. 5 CHAPTER 1 . From January to September 2007. In Thailand. Over the past four years. In November 2006. (iii) outbreak response. In June 2007. WHO’s Global Outbreak Alert and Response Network (GOARN) responded to an outbreak with a high case-fatality rate (3. (iv) integrated vector management. Chiangrai.1. Myanmar. Epidemic dengue is a major public health problem in Indonesia. In Myanmar in 2007 the states/divisions that reported the highest number of cases were Ayayarwaddy. The countries of the region have been divided into four distinct climatic zones with different dengue transmission potential. The Democratic Peoples’ Republic of Korea is the only country of the South-East Region that has no reports of indigenous dengue. A total of 58 836 cases were reported from January to November 2007. Myanmar reported 9578 cases. (v) social mobilization and communication for dengue and (vi) dengue research (a combination of both formative and operational research). Thailand and Timor-Leste which are in the tropical monsoon and equatorial zone where Aedes aegypti is widespread in both urban and rural areas.countries in the deciduous dry and wet climatic zone with multiple virus serotypes circulating. Mon. (ii) case management. This consists of six elements: (i) dengue surveillance. North-Eastern and Southern. Cyclic epidemics are increasing in frequency and in-country geographic expansion is occurring in Bangladesh. eight countries -.1. where more than 35% of the country’s population lives in urban areas. Bhutan reported the country’s first dengue outbreak. Mandalay. Sri Lanka. In Indonesia. and where dengue is a leading cause of hospitalization and death in children. Nepal reported indigenous dengue cases for the first time. burden of disease and transmission 1. The reported case-fatality rate in Myanmar is slightly above 1%. Reported case fatality rates for the region are approximately 1%. Magway. In 2005. Kayin. Sri Lanka. Phitsanulok. Thailand and Timor-Leste -. epidemic dengue has spread to new areas and has increased in the already affected areas of the region. Tanintharyi and Yangon. Bangkok. outbreaks were reported from Trat province.55%) in Timor-Leste.Bangladesh. In 2003. India and Maldives -. Rakhine. Indonesia and Myanmar. The strategy has been endorsed by resolution SEA/RC61/R5 of the WHO Regional Committee for South-East Asia in 2008 (4). In 2004. epidemic dengue activity has spread to Bhutan and Nepal in the sub-Himalayan foothills. 150 000 cases were reported in 2007 (the highest on record) with over 25 000 cases reported from both Jakarta and West Java.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. but in India. Sagaing. Central. The case-fatality rate was approximately 1%. The case-fatality rate in Thailand is below 0.1 Dengue in the WHO South-East Asia Region Since 2000. Maldives.

1 020 333 cases were reported in Cambodia. the country did experience a dengue outbreak in 2008. Malaysia. the six most affected Pacific island countries and areas were French Polynesia (35 869 cases). The combined death toll for these four countries was 4798 (official country reports). Although no official reports have been submitted to WHO by Kiribati.2 Dengue in the Americas Interruption of dengue transmission in much the WHO Region of the Americas resulted from the Ae.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Dengue fever has since spread with cyclical outbreaks occurring every 3--5 years. mainly during the 1960s and early 1970s. Philippines. vector surveillance and control measures were not sustained and there were subsequent reinfestations of the mosquito. reporting a total of 837 cases and causing great concern among the national authorities and among some of the other countries in the region. and Viet Nam -. The biggest outbreak occurred in 2002 with more than 1 million reported cases. dengue has been reported predominantly among urban and peri-urban populations where high population density facilitates transmission. suggests that they are now occurring in rural areas. Lack of reporting remains one of the most important challenges in dengue prevention and control. American Samoa (1816 cases). 1. Since the last major pandemic in 1998.2 Dengue in the WHO Western Pacific Region Dengue has emerged as a serious public health problem in the Western Pacific Region (5). Overall. leading to a decrease in case fatality rates. followed by outbreaks in the Caribbean. more than 30 countries of the Americas notified a total of 4 332 731 cases of dengue (8). and in Central and South America (7). Historically. From 2001 to 2007.1.the four countries in the Western Pacific Region with the highest numbers of cases and deaths. Dengue has also spread throughout the Pacific Island countries and areas. as seen in Cambodia in 2007. Compared with other countries in the same region. Cook Islands (3735 cases). Implementing the Bi-regional Dengue Strategy for Asia and the Pacific (2008--2015) is a priority following endorsement by the 2008 resolution WPR/RC59. aegypti eradication campaign in the Americas. case management has improved in the Western Pacific Region. treatment.R6 of the WHO Regional Committee for the Western Pacific (6). However. The total number of deaths for the six island countries was 34 (official country reports). Between 2001 and 2008. Between 2001 and 2008. the number of cases and deaths remained highest in Cambodia and the Philippines in 2008.1. New Caledonia (6836 cases). However. The number of cases of dengue haemorrhagic fever (DHF) in the same period was 106 037. prevention and control 1.1. epidemics have recurred in much of the area. evidence from recent outbreaks. Palau (1108 cases) and the Federal States of Micronesia (664 cases). The total number of dengue deaths from 2001 to 6 .

In Barbados. North American countries The majority of the notified cases of dengue in Canada and the United States are persons who had travelled to endemic areas in Asia. Peru.9% (168 819) of the cases of dengue were notified. DEN-1. Some 98. The Dominican Republic reported 77% of deaths (220) during the period 2001--2007. a total of 545 049 cases. or 73%). with 35 746 cases of DHF and 209 deaths. Trinidad and Tobago and French Guiana reported the highest numbers of cases. Martinique. with 2217 DHF cases and 284 deaths. or Central or South America (9). Dominican Republic. which also reports the highest case fatality rate in the subregion. Honduras and Mexico reported the highest number of cases in this period. and 306 deaths. all four serotypes were simultaneously identified in one year during this period. 796 cases of dengue were reported in the United States. Mexico. Colombia and Venezuela have most cases in the subregion (81%).5% of the cases were notified by Brazil. In the period from 2001 to 2007. the Caribbean.11). DEN-3 and DEN-4) circulate in the region. representing 12. but predominantly DEN-1 and -2. 7 CHAPTER 1 . All data are from the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO) (8). and there were outbreaks sporadically with local transmission in Texas at the border with Mexico (10. the majority imported. Central American countries and Mexico During 2001–2007.6% (2 798 601) of all dengue cases in the Americas were notified in this subregion. Puerto Rico and the Dominican Republic. was reported. In the subregion.5% of dengue in the Americas. Guatemala. and in Colombia there were most dengue deaths (225. Colombia. Peru and Venezuela all four dengue serotypes were identified. Caribbean countries In this subregion 3. Ecuador. of which 6733 were DHF with a total of 500 deaths. burden of disease and transmission 2007 was 1299. Chile. From 2001 to 2007. with a DHF case fatality rate of 1. The Southern Cone countries Argentina. 64. Nevertheless. The four serotypes of the dengue virus (DEN-1. Puerto Rico and Venezuela. El Salvador. Paraguay and Uruguay are located in this subregion. By subregion of the Americas. French Guyana. followed by Honduras with 52 (25%) and Mexico with 29 (14%). DEN-2. DEN-1. with 58% of all cases (61 341) in the Americas. -2 and -3 circulate. dengue is characterized as described below. whereas in the English and French Caribbean. and contributed 19% (819 466) of dengue cases in the Americas from 2001 to 2007. outbreaks of dengue in Hawaii have been reported. Brazil. Andean countries This subregion includes Bolivia. Costa Rica. In Colombia. Peru and Venezuela.2%. Nicaragua had 64 deaths (31%). Colombia. -2 and -3 were the serotypes most frequently reported. It is the subregion with the highest number of reported DHF cases.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. All four serotypes circulate in the Caribbean area. Countries with the highest number of dengue cases in the Latin Caribbean were Cuba.

In western Africa in the 1960s. Cases of dengue imported from India were detected in the 1980s (18). Mercosur and the Andean subregion) agreed to use EGI-dengue as a strategy and are in the process of implementation. and dengue cases from countries in Sub-Saharan Africa. Despite poor surveillance for dengue in Africa. implementation. prevention and control The Regional Dengue Programme of PAHO focuses public policies towards a multisectoral and interdisciplinary integration. as for example from Burkina Faso (1982. This allows the formulation. the increasing frequency and severity of dengue epidemics worldwide calls for a better understanding of the epidemiology of dengue infections with regard to the susceptibility of African populations to dengue and the interference between dengue and the other major communicable diseases of the continent. DEN-3) (20). with most epidemics occurring in eastern Africa. DEN-2) (22) and Senegal (1999. and to a smaller extent in western Africa. when the disease caused an epidemic in Durban. Dengue is not officially reported to WHO by countries in the region. DEN-1 and -2) (19) and Mozambique (1984--1985. South Africa. DEN-2) (23). though this situation may be changing in 2008. from its acronym in Spanish). (iii) epidemiology. it is clear that epidemic dengue fever caused by all four dengue serotypes has increased dramatically since 1980. Subsequent dengue outbreaks have been reported from different countries. DEN-1. surveillance data are poor. monitoring and evaluation of national programmes through the Integrated Management Strategy for Prevention and Control of Dengue (EGI-dengue. -2 and -3 appear to be common causes of acute fever. the available evidence so far indicates that DEN-1. (iv) laboratory diagnosis. 1984 and 1993. Outbreak reports exist.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Also DEN-2 and DEN-3 cases were confirmed in Côte d’Ivoire in 2006 and 2008. 8 . Examples of this are outbreaks in the Comoros in various years (1948. Sixteen countries and three subregions (Central America. 1. While dengue may not appear to be a major public health problem in Africa compared to the widespread incidence of malaria and HIV/AIDS.1. -2 and -3 were isolated for the first time from samples taken from humans in Nigeria (21). Dengue has mostly been documented in Africa from published reports of serosurveys or from diagnosis in travellers returning from Africa. This has six key components: (i) social communication (using Communication for Behavioural Impact (COMBI)). A serosurvey (17) suggests that dengue existed in Africa as far back as 1926--1927. treatment.3 Dengue in the WHO African Region Although dengue exists in the WHO African Region. This strategy has been endorsed by PAHO resolutions (12–15). Dengue-like illness has been recorded in Africa though usually without laboratory confirmation and could be due to infection with dengue virus or with viruses such as chikungunya that produce similar clinical symptoms. (ii) entomology. For eastern Africa. (v) case management and (vi) environment. although they are not complete. and there is evidence that dengue outbreaks are increasing in size and frequency (16).

1994–2005 CHAPTER 1 Sudan (No data) Djibouti (1991-1992. 7 suspected cases. A pertinent issue for this region is the need to better understand the epidemiological situation of dengue in areas that are endemic for Crimean-Congo haemorrhagic fever and co-infections of these pathogens. The frequency of reported outbreaks continue to increase. 136 suspected cases. DEN-3. 1993. 45 suspected cases. A DEN-3 epidemic with DHF was first reported in 2005 (27). burden of disease and transmission 1. DEN-2) DEN-2: 1994: 1995: 1996: 1997: 1998: 1999: 2000: 2001: 2005: 673 suspected cases. 2 deaths). with outbreaks for example in Sudan (1985. Al-Hudaydah. a DEN-1 epidemic in 2006 with 1269 cases of dengue. 31 suspected cases. the first confirmed outbreak of DHF occurred in 1994. 80 deaths (CFR = 12%)). DEN-1 and -2) (25) and in Djibouti (1991. DEN-2. DEN-2) (26).4 Dengue in the WHO Eastern Mediterranean Region (Figure 1. 9 . Since the first case of DHF died in Jeddah in 1993. 2005--2006 (24). DEN-2) Somalia (1982. Mukkala (March 2005. Sudan and Yemen. 12 cases of DSS and six Figure 1. Dengue is now a reportable disease in Pakistan. 62 suspected cases. two cases of dengue shock syndrome (DSS) and two deaths. Saudi Arabia. 23 cases of DHF. Al-Hudaydah. and the number of cases has risen since the major DEN-3 epidemic that occurred in the western al-Hudeidah governorate in 2005. 27 cases of DHF. Yemen (September 2000. Al-Hudaydah.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. Saudi Arabia has reported three major epidemics: a DEN-2 epidemic in 1994 with 469 cases of dengue. 653 suspected cases. the expansion of dengue infections with increasing frequency and severity has been reported from large cities in Pakistan as far north as the North-West Frontier Province in 2008. In Pakistan. Yemen (March 2004.3 Outbreaks of dengue fever in the WHO Eastern Mediterranean Region. 57 suspected cases. no data). Mukkala. 17 suspected cases.1. 26 suspected cases. Yemen is also affected by the increasing frequency and geographic spread of epidemic dengue.3) Outbreaks of dengue have been documented in the Eastern Mediterranean Region possibly as early as 1799 in Egypt (24). 32 suspected (confirmed) 289 confirmed cases 6 confirmed cases 2 confirmed cases 15 confirmed cases 0 confirmed cases 3 confirmed cases 0 confirmed cases 0 confirmed cases Al-Hudaydah. Shaabwa (1994. 403 suspected cases. Recent outbreaks of suspected dengue have been recorded in Pakistan. 2 deaths). In 2008 dengue affected the southern province of Shabwa. Since then.

mostly characterized by plasma leakage with or without haemorrhage. and a DEN-3 epidemic in 2008 with 775 cases of dengue.1. and the decision as to where this treatment should be given (in a health care facility or at home) are influenced by the case classification for dengue. Changes in the epidemiology of dengue. four cases of DSS and four deaths. There is.as well as being the largest commercial port in the country.6 Dengue case classification Dengue has a wide spectrum of clinical presentations. This seasonality is determined by peak transmission of the disease. Aedes albopictus) cannot exclude future disease spread. DHF was further classified into four severity grades. together with the increase in clinically 10 . also a seasonality of dengue.who. nine cases of DHF.with large numbers of people coming from high-burden dengue countries such as Indonesia. often with unpredictable clinical evolution and outcome. in the past. reporting on dengue cases shows cyclical variation with high epidemic years and non-epidemic years. with grades III and IV being defined as dengue shock syndrome (DSS) (29). treatment. dengue is now endemic in all WHO regions except the WHO European Region. however. with outbreaks occurring in different periods of the year. [See also a report from the European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control (28)]. lead to problems with the use of the existing WHO classification. Data available for the European region (http://data. but this is an important concern since appropriate treatment may prevent these patients from developing more severe clinical conditions.euro. Difficulties in applying the criteria for DHF in the clinical situation. The group progressing from non-severe to severe disease is difficult to define.1. While most patients recover following a self-limiting non-severe clinical course. a small proportion progress to severe disease. There have been many reports of difficulties in the use of this classification (30–32). 1. Symptomatic dengue virus infections were grouped into three categories: undifferentiated fever.g. Intravenous rehydration is the therapy of choice. this intervention can reduce the case fatality rate to less than 1% of severe cases. prevention and control deaths. and the largest city with the busiest airport in the western region -.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.int/ cisid/) indicate that most cases in the region have been reported by European Union member states. This is even more the case during the frequent dengue outbreaks worldwide. the vector and the agent. A pertinent issue for the IHR is that Jeddah is a Haj entry point -. influenced by characteristics of the host. and imported cases in the presence of known mosquito vectors (e. However.5 Dengue in other regions As described above. appropriate treatment. dengue has been endemic in some Balkan and Mediterranean countries of the region. as described in the previous sections. Globally. which were summarized in a systematic literature review (33). 1. Dengue often presents in the form of large outbreaks. in addition to the dengue-affected countries of the region. either as incidents in overseas territories or importations from endemic countries. Malaysia and Thailand. where health services need to be adapted to cope with the sudden surge in demand. Triage. dengue fever (DF) and dengue haemorrhagic fever (DHF).

restlessness • Liver enlargment >2 cm • Laboratory: increase in HCT concurrent with rapid decrease in platelet count *(requiring strict observation and medical intervention) Severe bleeding as evaluated by clinician Severe organ involvement • Liver: AST or ALT >=1000 • CNS: Impaired consciousness • Heart and other organs Laboratory-confirmed dengue (important when no sign of plasma leakage) 11 . South-East Asia (Kuala Lumpur. one sees a clear-cut difference between patients with severe dengue and those with non-severe dengue. and as an end-point measure in dengue vaccine and drug trials. It must be kept in mind that even dengue patients without warning signs may develop severe dengue. the classification into levels of severity has a high potential for being of practical use in the clinicians’ decision as to where and how intensively the patient should be observed and treated (i. triage. burden of disease and transmission severe dengue cases which did not fulfil the strict criteria of DHF. 2007). led to the request for the classification to be reconsidered. Severe haemorrhage 3.patients with warning signs and those without them. Criteria for diagnosing dengue (with or without warning signs) and severe dengue are presented in Figure 1. 2007). Currently the classification into DF/DHF/DSS continues to be widely used.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. vomiting • Rash • Aches and pains • Tourniquet test positive • Leukopenia • Any warning sign CRITERIA FOR SEVERE DENGUE Severe plasma leakage leading to: • Shock (DSS) • Fluid accumulation with respiratory distress Warning signs* • Abdominal pain or tenderness • Persistent vomiting • Clinical fluid accumulation • Mucosal bleed • Lethargy. Cuba. Switzerland in 2008 agreed that: “dengue is one disease entity with different clinical presentations and often with unpredictable clinical evolution and outcome”. Fever and 2 of the following criteria: • Nausea. The study findings confirmed that.e. Expert consensus groups in Latin America (Havana. (29) A WHO/TDR-supported prospective clinical multicentre study across dengue-endemic regions was set up to collect evidence about criteria for classifying dengue into levels of severity. Malaysia. However.4. for practical reasons it was desirable to split the large group of patients with non-severe dengue into two subgroups -. Severe plasma leakage 2. in more consistent reporting in the national and international surveillance system.4 Suggested dengue case classification and levels of severity DENGUE ± WARNING SIGNS SEVERE DENGUE CHAPTER 1 with warning signs without 1. by using a set of clinical and/or laboratory parameters.Severe organ impairment CRITERIA FOR DENGUE ± WARNING SIGNS Probable dengue live in /travel to dengue endemic area. which is particularly useful in outbreaks). and at WHO headquarters in Geneva. Figure 1.

In Puerto Rico.similar to the cumulative total of DALYs lost to malaria. with non-hospitalized patients with dengue illness contributing 44 -. Combining the ambulatory and hospitalized patients and factoring in the risk of death. 1. 2008) and is currently being tested in 18 countries by comparing its performance in practical settings to the existing WHO case classification. tuberculosis. an average episode represented 14. the overall cost of a dengue case is US$ 828. Available data from South-East Asia is largely derived from hospitalized cases among children but the burden due to uncomplicated dengue fever is also considerable. As dengue also affected other household members who helped care for the dengue patient. Panama. On average. Studies on the cost of dengue were conducted in eight countries in 2005-2006: five in the Americas (Brazil. The process will be finalized in 2010. This very conservative estimate ignores not only the underreporting of cases but also the substantial costs associated with dengue surveillance and vector control programmes. an estimated yearly mean of 580 DALYs per million population were lost to dengue between 1984 and 1994 -. economic and social burden on the populations of endemic areas. treatment. Guatemala. The number of cases reported annually to WHO ranged from 0.2 BURDEN OF DISEASE Dengue inflicts a significant health.73% of the total (37). B. prevention and control This model for classifying dengue has been suggested by an expert group (Geneva. 12 . Additionally the guide uses three categories for case management (A.4 to 1. intestinal helminths and the childhood disease cluster in all of Latin America and the Caribbean (35).8 lost days for ambulatory patients and 18. As an infectious disease. Malaysia.3 DALYs per million. Thailand) (38). El Salvador. Venezuela) and three in Asia (Cambodia. For practical reasons this guide adapts the distinction between dengue and severe dengue. If a vaccine were able to prevent much of this burden. Switzerland. In a prospective study of schoolchildren in northern Thailand the mean annual burden of dengue over a five-year period was 465.3 million in the decade 1996 -. C) (Chapter 2). Underreporting and misdiagnoses are major obstacles to understanding the full burden of dengue (36). the number of cases varies substantially from year to year.9 days for hospitalized patients. The overall cost of a non-fatal ambulatory case averaged US$ 514. while the cost of a non-fatal hospitalized case averaged US$ 1491.2005. Merging this number with the average annual number of officially reported dengue cases from the eight countries studied in the period 2001 -.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.2005 (532 000 cases) gives a cost of officially reported dengue of US$ 440 million. the economic gains would be substantial. a hospitalized case of dengue cost three times what an ambulatory case costs. This study showed that a treated dengue episode imposes substantial costs on both the health sector and the overall economy. Globally the estimated number of disability-adjusted life years (DALYs) lost to dengue in 2001 was 528 (34).

13 . The disadvantage of such sentinel surveillance. Systematic collection of clinical specimens and banking of serum or isolates may have future benefits as new technologies become available. Information about dengue in travellers. Travel-related dengue demonstrated a defined seasonality for multiple regions (South-East Asia. using sentinel surveillance.to be alert for cases of dengue fever in ill returned travellers. when that information would be valuable.geosentinel.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. CHAPTER 1 1. for example. can be shared rapidly to alert the international community to the onset of epidemics in endemic areas where there is no surveillance and reporting of dengue. as well as the geographic spread of virus serotypes and genotypes to new areas which increases the risk of severe dengue. including intravenous fluids. blood or plasma transfusion and medicines. however. South America) (42). Access to research facilities makes it possible to obtain more detailed information about a virus. Ae. The information can also assist clinicians in temperate regions -.most of whom are not trained in clinical tropical diseases -. for instance. Travellers often transport the dengue virus from areas in tropical developing countries. An increase in cases in travellers could be due to increased travel activity to dengue endemic areas. to examine month-bymonth morbidity from a sample of 522 cases of dengue as a proportion of all diagnoses in 24 920 ill returned travellers seen at 33 surveillance sites. including serotype and even sequencing. From the data collected longitudinally over a decade by the GeoSentinel Surveillance Network (www. The clinical manifestations and complications of dengue can also be studied in travellers (most of them adult and non-immune) as dengue may present differently compared with the endemic population (most of them in the paediatric age group and with pre-existing immunity). as viraemic travellers carry various dengue serotypes and strains into areas with mosquitoes that can transmit infection (40). Furthermore. Dengue afflicts all levels of society but the burden may be higher among the poorest who grow up in communities with inadequate water supply and solid waste infrastructure. Caribbean. South Central Asia. to developed countries with laboratories that can identify virus serotypes (41). where limited laboratory facilities exist. and where conditions are most favourable for multiplication of the main vector.org) it was possible.3 DENGUE IN INTERNATIONAL TRAVEL Travellers play an essential role in the global epidemiology of dengue infections. is the lack of a denominator: true risk incidence cannot be determined. aegypti. Intensive care is required for severely ill patients. burden of disease and transmission Children are at a higher risk of severe dengue (39). travellers perform another essential service in providing early alerts to events in other parts of the world.

1 The virus Dengue virus (DEN) is a small single-stranded RNA virus comprising four distinct serotypes (DEN-1 to -4). prM.2 The vectors The various serotypes of the dengue virus are transmitted to humans through the bites of infected Aedes mosquitoes.4 TRANSMISSION 1. aegypti has been found as far north as 45 0N. E) and seven nonstructural proteins (NS). Distinct genotypes or lineages (viruses highly related in nucleotide sequence) have been identified within each serotype. C. Ae. aegypti is relatively uncommon above 1000 metres. These geographical limits correspond approximately to a winter isotherm of 10 0C. “Asian” genotypes of DEN-2 and DEN-3 are frequently associated with severe disease accompanying secondary dengue infections (43–45). rapidly move the virus within and between communities. Intra-host viral diversity (quasispecies) has also been described in human hosts. prevention and control 1. These closely related serotypes of the dengue virus belong to the genus Flavivirus. mostly in artificial containers closely associated with human dwellings and often indoors. however. mostly between latitudes 35 0N and 35 0S. Also. The mature particle of the dengue virus is spherical with a diameter of 50nm containing multiple copies of the three structural proteins. but such invasions have occurred during warmer months and the mosquitoes have not survived the winters. Dengue outbreaks have also been attributed to Aedes albopictus. a host-derived membrane bilayer and a single copy of a positive-sense. This mosquito is a tropical and subtropical species widely distributed around the world. The genome is cleaved by host and viral proteases in three structural proteins (capsid. single-stranded RNA genome.4. aegypti. The eggs can remain viable for many months in the absence of water (Chapter 3). The immature stages are found in water-filled habitats. In recent decades Aedes albopictus has spread from Asia to Africa. Among them. Each of these species has a particular ecology. principally Ae. such that only viruses that are “fit” for both human and vector are maintained. Purifying selection appears to be a dominant theme in dengue viral evolution. Studies suggest that most female Ae.4. This means that people. protein and envelope. aegypti may spend their lifetime in or around the houses where they emerge as adults. behaviour and geographical distribution. 14 . family Flaviviridae. treatment. rather than mosquitoes.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. notably aided by the international trade in used tyres in which eggs are deposited when they contain rainwater. the Americas and Europe. the precursor of membrane. 1. highlighting the extensive genetic variability of the dengue serotypes. Aedes polynesiensis and several species of the Aedes scutellaris complex. Ae. M. because of lower temperatures.

During a secondary infection. Primary infection is thought to induce lifelong protective immunity to the infecting serotype (46).54). Studies in the American region show the rates of severe dengue to be lower in individuals of African ancestry than those in other ethnic groups. Individual risk factors determine the severity of disease and include secondary infection. Plasma leakage. age. infection by any of the four virus serotypes can produce a wide spectrum of illness. Young children in particular may be less able than adults to compensate for capillary leakage and are consequently at greater risk of dengue shock. In this model. 15 CHAPTER 1 . proliferate. though most studies have been unable to adequately address this issue. Individuals suffering an infection are protected from clinical illness with a different serotype within 2--3 months of the primary infection but with no long-term cross-protective immunity.52) as a mechanism to explain severe dengue in the course of a secondary infection and in infants with primary infections. ethnicity and possibly chronic diseases (bronchial asthma. The mechanisms leading to severe illness are not well defined but the immune response. (54) The dengue virus enters via the skin while an infected mosquito is taking a bloodmeal.2 The host After an incubation period of 4--10 days. The time interval between infections and the particular viral sequence of infections may also be of importance. Seroepidemiological studies in Cuba and Thailand consistently support the role of secondary heterotypic infection as a risk factor for severe dengue. a higher case fatality rate was observed in Cuba when DEN2 infection followed a DEN-1 infection after an interval of 20 years compared to an interval of four years. some of which may contribute to capillary leakage.4. bind to epitopes on the surface of a heterologous infecting virus and facilitate virus entry into Fc-receptor-bearing cells. non-neutralizing. although most infections are asymptomatic or subclinical (Chapter 2). For instance. cross-reactive antibodies raised during a primary infection. Humoral and cellular immune responses are considered to contribute to virus clearance via the generation of neutralizing antibodies and the activation of CD4+ and CD8+ T lymphocytes.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. In addition. The increased number of infected cells is predicted to result in a higher viral burden and induction of a robust host immune response that includes inflammatory cytokines and mediators. During the acute phase of illness the virus is present in the blood and its clearance from this compartment generally coincides with defervescence. Host genetic determinants might influence the clinical outcome of infection (53. innate host defence may limit infection by the virus. the genetic background of the individual and the virus characteristics may all contribute to severe dengue. burden of disease and transmission 1. After infection. express cytokines and die by apoptosis in a manner that generally correlates with overall disease severity. sickle cell anaemia and diabetes mellitus). or acquired passively at birth. haemoconcentration and abnormalities in homeostasis characterize severe dengue. Severe dengue is also regularly observed during primary infection of infants born to dengue-immune mothers. serotypespecific and cross-reactive antibodies and CD4+ and CD8+ T cells remain measurable for years. cross-reactive memory T cells are also rapidly activated. Antibody-dependent enhancement (ADE) of infection has been hypothesized (51. although there are a few reports of severe cases associated with primary infection (47–50).

The virus then infects the mosquito mid-gut and subsequently spreads systemically over a period of 8--12 days. and thrives in close proximity to humans.56). Ae.4. resulting in platelet dysfunction (platelet activation and aggregation). hostpathogen interactions and population immunological factors. probably driven by a high early viral burden. 16 . the complement system and the production of mediators. Activation of infected monocytes and T cells. Climate directly influences the biology of the vectors and thereby their abundance and distribution. Haemorrhage may be a consequence of the thrombocytopenia and associated platelet dysfunction or disseminated intravascular coagulation. Plasma leakage is thought to be associated with functional rather than destructive effects on endothelial cells. it is consequently an important determinant of vector-borne disease epidemics. Thrombocytopenia may be associated with alterations in megakaryocytopoieses by the infection of human haematopoietic cells and impaired progenitor cell growth. frequently bites several times before completing oogenesis. monokines. Dengue virus circulating in the blood of viraemic humans is ingested by female mosquitoes during feeding. prevention and control Recent data suggest that endothelial cell activation could mediate plasma leakage (55. shock and bleeding. especially ambient temperature. increased destruction or consumption (peripheral sequestration and consumption). After this extrinsic incubation period.including environmental and climate factors. 1. Thereafter the mosquito remains infective for the rest of its life. The extrinsic incubation period is influenced in part by environmental conditions. a transient and reversible imbalance of inflammatory mediators. The significance of vertical transmission for maintenance of the virus is not well understood. and leading to dysfunction of vascular endothelial cells. cytokines and soluble receptors may also be involved in endothelial cell dysfunction. aegypti is one of the most efficient vectors for arboviruses because it is highly anthropophilic. In summary. causing mild illness. derangement of the haemocoagulation system then to plasma leakage. Sylvatic dengue strains in some parts of Africa and Asia may also lead to human infection. cytokines and chemokines occurs during severe dengue.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.4 Transmission of the dengue virus Humans are the main amplifying host of the virus. Several factors can influence the dynamics of virus transmission -. the virus can be transmitted to other humans during subsequent probing or feeding. Vertical transmission (transovarial transmission) of dengue virus has been demonstrated in the laboratory but rarely in the field. treatment.

R6.searo. 6. Pan American Health Organization. DC. 11. 9.htm).int/gb/ebwha/pdf_files/WHA58/WHA58_3-en. adopted by the 55th World Health Assembly. World Health Assembly Resolution WHA55. WHO. New Delhi. World Health Organization.int/rcm/en/rc59/rc_resolutions/WPR_RC59_R6. Dengue hemorrhagic fever -. 2008 (http://www. 2008.who. Epidemic dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever at the Texas-Mexico border: results of a household-based seroepidemiologic survey. Washington.Mexico border. 2005 (http:// www. Dengue and dengue haemorrhagic fever. DC. 2004. PAHO. 2008 (http://www. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. burden of disease and transmission REFERENCES 1. Denguenet in India. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene.org/english/ad/dpc/cd/dengue. 55(25):700--702. 2005. 2008. World Health Assembly Resolution WHA58.paho. Region of the Americas (by country and subregion). 5. 3. 2007.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. Dengue Serosurvey Working Group.S.pdf).United States. WHO. Concrete measure key in controlling dengue in South East Asia.who.who. 56(31):785-789. 56(32):822. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. Travel-associated dengue -. 7. Ramos MM et al. Caracas. WHO. 4. in Spanish) (http://www.int/mediacentre/ factsheets/fs117/en/). 79(21):201--203 (http://whqlibdoc.int/wer/WHO_WER_2004/79_201-204(no21). Informe de un grupo de trabajo. (http://www. WHO/WPRO.htm). 17 CHAPTER 1 . Factsheet No 117.3. 2005. 8. World Health Organization Regional Office for South-East Asia. Washington. (http://www. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.pdf). Dengue fever and dengue haemorrhagic fever prevention and control.who.pdf). Revision of the International Health Regulations. 2007.who. Dengue fever and dengue haemorrhagic fever prevention and control. 2006. 1997 (Document OPS/HCP/HCT/90/97.int/EN/Section316/Section503/ Section2463_14619.17. 2008. December 2005.who. adopted by the WHO Regional Committee for the Western Pacific. WHO. Number of reported cases of dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever (DHF). 10.pdf).wpro. PAHO.org/Spanish/AD/DPC/CD/doc407.int/gb/ebwha/pdf_files/WHA55/ewha5517. 78(3):364--369. revised May 2008. WHO/SEARO. Venezuela. Press Release SEA/PR/1479. adopted by the 58th World Health Assembly.htm). Abril 1997. Geneva. Regional Committee resolution WPR/RC59. 2.U.paho. Plan continental de ampliación e intensificación del combate al Aedes aegypti. Pan American Health Organization. Erratum in: Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. Weekly Epidemiological Record. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. 2002 (http://www.

1986. Geneva.paho. Amplification of the sylvatic cycle of dengue virus type 2. Pan American Health Organization.ª versión. Diallo M et al.pdf).htm.1 in: Report of the Scientific Working Group meeting on Dengue. Weinbren MP. DC. PAHO. 1–5 October 2006.paho. 35(6):1280--1284. Neutralising antibodies to arthropodborne viruses in human and animals in the Union of South Africa.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. PAHO. 23. 78:7–14. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene.org/english/hcp/hct/vbd/new-generation-resolutions. Lancet. 2. Senegal. Estrategia de Gestión Integrada para la prevención y control del dengue en la Región de las Américas. 1971.R9.07. 2001 (http://www. Dengue 3 Virus Transmission in Africa. Regional Committee resolution CD43. 20. Gonzalez JP et al. 74:217–229. 1993. Dayal-Drager R. March (date cited). Nathan MB. 43rd Directing Council. Rawal R.cdc. 1956.R15. adopted at the 53rd session of the Regional Committee for the Americas.gov/ncidod/EID/vol9no3/02-0219. Annales de la Société Belge de Médecine Tropicale. Santa Cruz de la Sierra. 18 . 1:105–106. 21:386–287. Dengue virus from febrile patients in Nigeria 1964–68. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever. 2007 (pp 29--34) (Document TDR/SWG/07). in Spanish). Recent epidemiological trends. 14. Regional Committee resolution CD44. Prevención y control del dengue en las Américas. R15 (Esp. adopted at the 55th session of the Regional Committee for the Americas. 17.pdf). Gubler DJ et al. treatment. South African Medical Journal. Kokernot RH. Dengue. DC. Blackburn NK. Pan American Health Organization.org/english/gov/cd/cd44-r9-e. Dengue 1 epidemic in the Grand Comoro Island (Federal Islamic Republic of the Comores). 44th Directing Council. Bolivia. Smithburn KC. 27. PAHO.) 1--5 de octubre de 2007 (in Spanish). Dengue in Burkina Faso: seasonal epidemics in the urban area of Ouagadougu. Washington. 2003 (Document OPS/ HDM/CD/440. Bulletin de la Société de pathologie exotique et de ses filiales. 13.R4. 21. Boisier P et al. the global strategy and public health advances in dengue. 1999--2000: entomologic findings and epidemiologic considerations. Grupo de Trabajo sobre Dengue. 77:313–322. 19. a Conferencia Sanitaria Panamericana CSP27. 18. Emerging Infectious Diseases (serial online). Journal of Immunology. 1985. 2003. Washington. Dengue fever imported from India: a report of 3 cases. March-May 1993. World Health Organization. 22. 2003 (http://www. Pan American Health Organization. 15. Geneva. Pan American Health Organization. Resolución CSP27. Carey DE et al. PAHO. 1987. 16. Accessible at http:// www. prevention and control 12. Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases. Working paper 3.

Geneva. treatment. Tropical Medicine and International Health. Dengue worldwide: an overview of the current situation and implications for Europe. Tropical diseases lacking adequate control measures: dengue. WHO/EMRO. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. 25. Emerging Infectious Diseases. 2005 (Open access journal. 90:237–240. Schimmer B. 1996. Deen J et al. Meltzer MI et al. 2007. Cattand P et al. 6:7–8. Sudan: isolation of dengue virus. Dengue burden of disease and costs of illness. 30. prevention and control. 27. 1997. Dengue Virus Serotype 3. European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control. Oxford University Press. 368:170--173. Lancet Infectious Diseases. Dengue fever: new paradigms for a changing epidemiology. 28. 35:860– 865. Transactions of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. 2nd ed. Division of Communicable Disease Control. 32. and African trypanosomiasis. 33. World Health Organization. NY. Geneva. Classifying dengue: a review of the difficulties in using the WHO case classification for dengue haemorrhagic fever. Bandyopadhyay S. Regional Office for the Eastern Mediterranean. Hyams KC et al. Newsletter. Evaluation of febrile patients in Port Sudan. 19 . Pakistan.emro. WHO.eurosurveillance.aspx?PublicationType=W&Vol ume=12&Issue=25&OrderNumber=1). Working paper 3. 36. (http://www. 2nd ed. 2007. 1998. 31.pdf). 1–5 October 2006.int/pdf/dcdnewsletter6. Emerging Themes in Epidemiology. Suaya JA. 29. Severe dengue: the need for new case definitions. CHAPTER 1 26.ete-online. The WHO dengue classification and case definitions: time for a reassessment. Eurosurveillance.who. Beatty ME. Shepard DS. Karachi. http:// www. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. Using disability-adjusted life years to assess the economic impact of dengue in Puerto Rico: 1984–1994. 6:297–302. 34. World Health Organization. burden of disease and transmission 24.com/content/2/1/1). Disease control priorities in developing countries. Epidemic dengue 2 in the city of Djibouti 1991–1992. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis. New York. Lancet. Bushra J. Geneva.2 in: Report of the Scientific Working Group meeting on Dengue. 35. Kroeger A. 2006 (pp 451–466). Guha-Sapir D. 59:265–271. 2007 (pp 35--49) (Document TDR/SWG/07). 2006. 2006. 13(1). leishmaniasis. World Health Organization. Rigau-Perez J. Lum LC. I2005. (http://www. 11(8):1238--1255. Rodier GR et al. Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases. 1986.org/ViewArticle. 12(25). 2006.Chapter 1: Epidemiology.

Schwartz E. Anderson K et al. Lum LCS. Caram M. and characteristics of dengue among ill returned travelers. Montoya R. Lanciotti RS et al. 42. prevention and control 37. Epidemiologic studies on dengue in Santiago de Cuba. Tyo KR. 1997. 41. Wilson ME. 46. 14(7). Garrido F. 1993 (pp 80--103). 2008. Armien B. Martelli CT. 42:311–328. Huy R. 49. 40. 2007. 94:1S--11S. Wilson ME. American Journal of Epidemiology. Guzman MG et al. 20 . 50. 2002. 44. Sangkawibha N et al. Tan LH. 75(Pt 1):65--75. annual trends. Kongsin S. 47. Emerging Infectious Diseases. Wilder-Smith A. Nimmannitya S. Costs of dengue cases in 8 countries in the Americas and Asia: A prospective study. Emergence and global spread of a dengue serotype 3. 369(9571):1452--1459. Journal of Virology. 80:846--855. International Journal of Infectious Diseases. transmitter. Risk factors in dengue shock syndrome: a prospective epidemiologic study in Rayong. 38. American Journal of Epidemiology. Halstead SB. Leitmeyer KC. Pathophysiology and pathogenesis of dengue haemorrhagic fever. Suaya JA. 152(9):793--799. 1997–2006. Molecular evolution and epidemiology of dengue-3 viruses. 1994. Emerging Infectious Diseases. courier. Yale Journal of Biology and Medicine. Seasonality. Siqueira JB. Thailand. Sentinel surveillance for dengue: international travellers (unpublished report). 9(7):800--809. Cohen SN. Halstead SB. ed. Shepard DS. treatment. 45. 6(2):118--124. 2000. 1974. Halstead SB. Lancet.120:653--669. Sughayyar R. Observations related to pathogenesis of dengue hemorrhagic fever. Relation of disease severity to antibody response and virus recovered. IV. Jiamton S. Journal of General Virology. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. The traveler and emerging infections: sentinel. Sah BK. I. 43. Monograph on dengue/dengue haemorrhagic fever. 1999. 48. 1970. 2009. New Delhi. The 1980 outbreak. Castillo L. In: Thongchareon P. subtype III virus. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Journal of Applied Microbiology. Burden of symptomatic dengue infection in children at primary school in Thailand: a prospective study. 73(6):4738--4747. Halstead SB. Effect of age on outcome of secondary dengue 2 infections. Messer WB. Guzman MG. Regional Office for South-East Asia. World Health Organization. 1984. 2003. Etiologies of the experimental dengues of Siler and Simmons. Dengue virus structural differences that correlate with pathogenesis. 2003. 23:974--982. 39.

67(4):375--380. Archives of Virology. 152(3):533--542. macrophages. shock. Dengue haemorrhagic fever/dengue shock syndrome: lessons from the Cuban epidemic. Guzman MG. burden of disease and transmission 51. 2005. 30(6):359--365.Chapter 1: Epidemiology. Avirutnan P et al. Heinz FX. 56. 11(Suppl 4):S830--S839. 53. Kouri GP. 161:6338--6346. complement activation. Sierra B. Vaccine. Halstead SB. Dengue virus infection of human endothelial cells leads to chemokine production. Cytokine. 1981. Antibody. Journal of Immunology. 1989. Vienna. 54. 23(7):849--856. Austria. and apoptosis. Halstead SB. Guzman MG. 55. 52. 1989. Reviews of Infectious Diseases. 25-27 June 2003. and hemorrhage: a pathogenetic cascade. 2005. Dengue virus: molecular basis of cell entry and pathogenesis. Bulletin of the World Health Organization. Kouri G. dengue virus infection. 2007. Race: a risk factor for dengue hemorrhagic fever. Cardier JE et al. Proinflammatory factors present in sera from patients with acute dengue infection induce activation and apoptosis of human microvascular endothelial cells: possible role of TNF-alpha in endothelial cell damage in dengue. 1998. CHAPTER 1 21 .

treatment. prevention and control 22 .Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 2 CLINICAL MANAGEMENT AND DELIVERY OF CLINICAL SERVICES 23 .

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. treatment. prevention and control 24 .

1 The course of dengue illness* Days of illness Temperature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 40° Potential clinical issues Dehydration Shock bleeding Organ impairment Reabsorption fluid overload Laboratory changes Hematocrit Platelet Serology and virology Viraemia IgM/IgG Course of dengue illness: * Source: adapted from Yip (2) by chapter authors. CLINICAL MANAGEMENT AND DELIVERY OF CLINICAL SERVICES 2. Differential diagnosis needs to be considered (Textbox B). Early notification of dengue cases seen in primary and secondary care is crucial for identifying outbreaks and initiating an early response (Chapter 5). After the incubation period. The key is early recognition and understanding of the clinical problems during the different phases of the disease. leading to a rational approach to case management and a good clinical outcome. Figure 2. management is relatively simple. Febrile Critical Recovery phases 25 . CHAPTER 2 For a disease that is complex in its manifestations.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services CHAPTER 2. A well-managed front-line response not only reduces the number of unnecessary hospital admissions but also saves the lives of dengue patients. Activities (triage and management decisions) at the primary and secondary care levels (where patients are first seen and evaluated) are critical in determining the clinical outcome of dengue.febrile.1). inexpensive and very effective in saving lives so long as correct and timely interventions are instituted. An overview of good and bad clinical practices is given in Textbox A. critical and recovery (Figure 2. the illness begins abruptly and is followed by the three phases -.1 OVERVIEW Dengue infection is a systemic and dynamic disease. It has a wide clinical spectrum that includes both severe and non-severe clinical manifestations (1).

This in turn leads to severe haemorrhage causing the haematocrit to decrease in severe shock. Some patients progress to the critical phase of plasma leakage without defervescence and. nausea and vomiting are common.2 Critical phase Around the time of defervescence. Shock occurs when a critical volume of plasma is lost through leakage. the total white cell count may increase in patients with severe bleeding.5). which should alert the physician to a high probability of dengue. In addition. Some patients may have sore throat. usually on days 3–7 of illness. The body temperature may be subnormal when shock occurs. The degree of increase above the baseline haematocrit often reflects the severity of plasma leakage. nose and gums) may be seen (3. 26 Those who improve after defervescence are said to have non-severe dengue. myalgia. generalized body ache.1. Therefore monitoring for warning signs and other clinical parameters (Textbox C) is crucial to recognizing progression to the critical phase. Mild haemorrhagic manifestations like petechiae and mucosal membrane bleeding (e.1. when the temperature drops to 37. Massive vaginal bleeding (in women of childbearing age) and gastrointestinal bleeding may occur during this phase but is not common (5). In addition. A positive tourniquet test in this phase increases the probability of dengue (3. severe organ impairment such as severe hepatitis. arthralgia and headache (1). in . these clinical features are indistinguishable between severe and non-severe dengue cases. Progressive leukopenia (3) followed by a rapid decrease in platelet count usually precedes plasma leakage. an increase in capillary permeability in parallel with increasing haematocrit levels may occur (6.7). injected pharynx and conjunctival injection. This acute febrile phase usually lasts 2–7 days and is often accompanied by facial flushing.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. The liver is often enlarged and tender after a few days of fever (3).1 Febrile phase Patients typically develop high-grade fever suddenly. The earliest abnormality in the full blood count is a progressive decrease in total white cell count. The degree of plasma leakage varies. treatment. encephalitis or myocarditis and/or severe bleeding may also develop without obvious plasma leakage or shock (8). This marks the beginning of the critical phase. It is often preceded by warning signs. With prolonged shock. It can be difficult to distinguish dengue clinically from non-dengue febrile diseases in the early febrile phase. Hence chest x-ray and abdominal ultrasound can be useful tools for diagnosis. while those with increased capillary permeability may become worse as a result of lost plasma volume. The period of clinically significant plasma leakage usually lasts 24–48 hours.5–38oC or less and remains below this level.4). 2. At this point patients without an increase in capillary permeability will improve. prevention and control 2.g. metabolic acidosis and disseminated intravascular coagulation. the consequent organ hypoperfusion results in progressive organ impairment. Anorexia. skin erythema. Instead of the leukopenia usually seen during this phase of dengue. Pleural effusion and ascites may be clinically detectable depending on the degree of plasma leakage and the volume of fluid therapy.

haemodynamic status stabilizes and diuresis ensues. organ impairment Hypervolaemia (only if intravenous fluid therapy has been excessive and/or has extended into this period) 2.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services these patients. The various clinical problems during the different phases of dengue can be summarized as in Table 2. gastrointestinal symptoms abate. It usually takes place around defervescence. the compensatory mechanism which maintains a normal systolic blood pressure also produces tachycardia and peripheral vasoconstriction with reduced skin perfusion.1. excessive fluid therapy is associated with pulmonary oedema or congestive heart failure. Respiratory distress from massive pleural effusion and ascites will occur at any time if excessive intravenous fluids have been administered. 2. During the initial stage of shock. changes in the full blood count should be used to guide the onset of the critical phase and plasma leakage. preceded by the warning signs. Table 2. During the critical and/or recovery phases. As dengue vascular permeability progresses. Cases of dengue with warning signs will probably recover with early intravenous rehydration.4 Severe dengue Severe dengue is defined by one or more of the following: (i) plasma leakage that may lead to shock (dengue shock) and/or fluid accumulation. Bradycardia and electrocardiographic changes are common during this stage. high fever may cause neurological disturbances and febrile seizures in young children Shock from plasma leakage. appetite returns. Some patients may have a rash of “isles of white in the sea of red” (9). a gradual reabsorption of extravascular compartment fluid takes place in the following 48–72 hours. critical and recovery phases in dengue 1 2 3 Febrile phase Critical phase Recovery phase Dehydration. with or without respiratory distress.1. severe haemorrhage.3 Recovery phase CHAPTER 2 If the patient survives the 24–48 hour critical phase. and/or (ii) severe bleeding. This is called dengue with warning signs (Textbox C). Some cases will deteriorate to severe dengue (see below). Those who deteriorate will manifest with warning signs.1 Febrile. and/or (iii) severe organ impairment. 27 . General well-being improves. Some may experience generalized pruritus. usually on day 4 or 5 (range days 3–7) of illness. White blood cell count usually starts to rise soon after defervescence but the recovery of platelet count is typically later than that of white blood cell count. hypovolaemia worsens and results in shock.1. The haematocrit stabilizes or may be lower due to the dilutional effect of reabsorbed fluid.

acute renal failure. including acute liver failure and encephalopathy. weak or undetectable pulse. coma. • There is significant bleeding. most deaths from dengue occur in patients with profound shock. Cardiomyopathy and encephalitis are also reported in a few dengue cases. 28 . Severe dengue should be considered if the patient is from an area of dengue risk presenting with fever of 2–7 days plus any of the following features: • There is evidence of plasma leakage. but these are usually not sufficient to cause major bleeding. Unusual manifestations. or other unusual manifestations. • There is severe organ impairment (acute liver failure. Massive bleeding may occur without prolonged shock in instances when acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin). ibuprofen or corticosteroids have been taken. Uniquely. Patients in dengue shock often remain conscious and lucid. narrow pulse pressure or. such as: – high or progressively rising haematocrit. in combination with thrombocytopaenia. Finally. or rapid pulse rate). delayed capillary refill. convulsions). can lead to multiple organ failure and advanced disseminated intravascular coagulation. jaundice). unrecordable blood pressure). • There is an altered level of consciousness (lethargy or restlessness. The patient is considered to have shock if the pulse pressure (i. When major bleeding does occur. capillary refill time greater than three seconds. cardiomyopathy) or other unusual manifestations. • There is severe gastrointestinal involvement (persistent vomiting. the difference between the systolic and diastolic pressures) is ≤ 20 mm Hg in children or he/she has signs of poor capillary perfusion (cold extremities. it is almost always associated with profound shock since this. – circulatory compromise or shock (tachycardia. – pleural effusions or ascites. the pulse pressure of ≤ 20 mm Hg may indicate a more severe shock. Hypotension is usually associated with prolonged shock which is often complicated by major bleeding. in late shock. Prolonged hypotensive shock and hypoxia may lead to multi-organ failure and an extremely difficult clinical course (Textbox D).e. However. may be present. encephalopathy or encephalitis. hypoxia and acidosis. cold and clammy extremities. even in the absence of severe plasma leakage or shock. there is decompensation and both pressures disappear abruptly. treatment. In adults. the diastolic pressure rises towards the systolic pressure and the pulse pressure narrows as the peripheral vascular resistance increases. The inexperienced physician may measure a normal systolic pressure and misjudge the critical state of the patient. Patients with severe dengue may have coagulation abnormalities.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. increasing or intense abdominal pain. particularly if the situation is complicated by fluid overload. prevention and control resulting in cold extremities and delayed capillary refill time.

1 Introduction Reducing dengue mortality requires an organized process that guarantees early recognition of the disease.2 DELIVERY OF CLINICAL SERVICES AND CASE MANAGEMENT 2. the patient should have daily outpatient health care assessments for disease progression with careful checking for manifestations of severe dengue and warning signs.2. but the warning signs are good indicators of a higher risk of developing severe dengue. CHAPTER 2 2. – notifying early to the public health authorities that the patient is a suspected case of dengue. 29 . from primary to tertiary levels. This should be complemented by prompt and appropriate management of severe dengue in referral centres. – managing patients in the early febrile phase of dengue. Primary and secondary health care centres At primary and secondary levels. Various forms of severe manifestations may unfold only as the disease progresses through the critical phase.2. and its management and referral when necessary. During the early febrile phase. – recognizing patients with warning signs who need to be referred for admission and/or intravenous fluid therapy to a secondary health care facility. can help in identifying those at risk of developing severe disease and needing hospital care. Most dengue patients recover without requiring hospital admission while some may progress to severe disease. The key component of the process is the delivery of good clinical services at all levels of health care. Health care workers at the first levels of care should apply a stepwise approach. health care facilities are responsible for emergency/ ambulatory triage assessment and treatment. as suggested in Table 2. Activities at the first level of care should focus on: – recognizing that the febrile patient could have dengue.2. Triage is the process of rapidly screening patients soon after their arrival in the hospital or health facility in order to identify those with severe dengue (who require immediate emergency treatment to avert death).2. – recognizing and managing severe plasma leakage and shock. and non-urgent cases (who have neither severe dengue nor warning signs). those with warning signs (who should be given priority while waiting in the queue so that they can be assessed and treated without delay). Therefore. where patients are first seen and evaluated. severe bleeding and severe organ impairment promptly and adequately. – recognizing the early stage of plasma leakage or critical phase and initiating fluid therapy. it is often not possible to predict clinically whether a patient with dengue will progress to severe disease. Simple but effective triage principles and management decisions applied at the primary and secondary care levels.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services 2.

Section 2.2 Management decisions. – severe plasma leakage and/or shock. Diagnosis. A number of criteria may be used to decide when to transfer a patient to a highdependency unit.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. – fluid overload. assessment of disease phase and severity Step III. even if elective cases have to be deferred.3 History. These units should be staffed by doctors and nurses who are trained to recognize high-risk patients and to institute appropriate treatment and monitoring. 2. Depending on the clinical manifestations and other circumstances. Resources include (10): 30 • Human resources: The most important resource is trained doctors and nurses. dengue units staffed by . encephalopathy. there should be a designated area to cohort dengue patients. If possible.2. including full physical and mental assessment Investigation. prevention and control Table 2. – severe bleeding. require emergency treatment and urgent referral (Group C). and a high-dependency unit for closer monitoring of those with shock. cardiomyopathy. Adequate health personnel should be allocated to the first level of care to help in triage and emergency management. Management III.2 A stepwise approach to the management of dengue Step I.2. a range of resources is needed to deliver good clinical services at all levels.2 I. patients may: – – – be sent home (Group A). 2. Overall assessment I. be referred for in-hospital management (Group B). including routine laboratory and dengue-specific laboratory Step II. – undetectable pulse and blood pressure. past medical and family history Physical examination.3 Referral centres Referral centres receiving severely ill dengue patients must be able to give prompt attention to referred cases. including information on symptoms. These include: – early presentation with shock (on days 2 or 3 of illness). If possible.1 I. – organ impairment (such as hepatic damage.3 gives treatment recommendations for the groups A–C.1 Disease notification III. encephalitis and other unusual complications). Beds should be made available to those patients who meet the admission criteria. treatment.4 Resources needed In the detection and management of dengue.

additional drugs are necessary (vitamin K1. and provide feedback to doctors on how to improve care. colloids and intravenous giving sets should be available. NaHCO3. • Blood bank: Blood and blood products will be required by only a small percentage of patients but should be made readily available to those who need them. particularly during dengue outbreaks. In severe cases. vasopressor. state. when the number of personnel main need to be increased. The population should also be educated about dengue in order to empower patients and their families in their own care – so that they are prepared to seek medical care at the right time. if possible. CHAPTER 2 2. and. • Drugs: There should be adequate stocks of antipyretics and oral rehydration salts. Review committees at different levels (e.2. editors. Workshops and other meetings with journalists. glucose. including consultation by telephone. These investigations should be easily accessible from the health centre.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services experienced personnel could be set up at referral centres to receive referred cases. the knowledge of dengue. • Laboratory resources: The most important laboratory investigation is that of serial haematocrit levels and full blood counts. National committees should monitor and evaluate clinical management and outcomes. auxiliary health care workers and laboratory staff are priorities. and look for warning signs such as intense and continuous abdominal pain and frequent vomiting. district. • Communication: Facilities should be provided for easy communication. avoid selfmedication. the minimum standard is the point-of-care testing of haematocrit by capillary (finger prick) blood sample with the use of a microcentrifuge.g. Educational programmes that are customized for different levels of health care and that reflect local capacity should be supported and implemented widely. In dengue-endemic countries. national. all cases of severe dengue. Results should be available within two hours in severe cases of dengue. KCl solution. • Consumables: Intravenous fluids such as crystalloids. artists and executives can 31 . identify skin bleedings. and inotropes). The educational programmes should develop capacities for effective triage and should improve recognition. nurses. especially between secondary and tertiary levels of care and laboratories. The mass media can give an important contribution if they are correctly briefed. the education and training of doctors. consider the day of defervescence (and during 48 hours) as the time when complications usually occur. If no proper laboratory services are available. evaluate the health care delivery system. hospital) should review all dengue deaths. • Special area: A well equipped and well staffed area should be designated for giving immediate and transitory medical care to patients who require intravenous fluid therapy until they can be transferred to a ward or referral health facility.5 Education and training To ensure the presence of adequate staffing at all levels. clinical management and laboratory diagnosis of dengue. Ca gluconate. the vectors and transmission of disease should be incorporated into the school curriculum. furosemide.

g. – examination for rash and bleeding manifestations. During dengue epidemics.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.3 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR TREATMENT 2. diabetes mellitus. – tourniquet test (repeat if previously negative or if there is no bleeding manifestation). A haematocrit test in the early febrile phase establishes the patient’s own baseline haematocrit. travel to dengue endemic areas. malaria). This has been shown to be feasible. It is useful to have printed information about dengue illness and the warning signs for distribution to members of the community. – change in mental state/seizure/dizziness. hypertension). – assessment for warning signs (Textbox C).1 Step I—Overall assessment History The history should include: – date of onset of fever/illness. nursing and medical students together with community activists can visit homes with the double purpose of providing health education and actively tracing dengue cases. – assessment of haemodynamic status (Textbox D). – diarrhoea. – checking for abdominal tenderness/hepatomegaly/ascites. – urine output (frequency. obesity.2) 2. inexpensive and effective (11) and must be coordinated with the primary health care units. A decreasing white blood cell count makes dengue very likely. Investigation A full blood count should be done at the first visit.1. infancy.3. – other important relevant histories. volume and time of last voiding). 2. co-existing conditions (e. pregnancy. prevention and control contribute to drawing up the best strategy for health education and communication without alarming the public. – checking for tachypnoea/acidotic breathing/pleural effusion. such as family or neighbourhood dengue. jungle trekking and swimming in waterfall (consider leptospirosis. – quantity of oral intake. Medical care providers must include health education activities such as disease prevention in their daily work. typhus.1 A stepwise approach to the management of dengue (see Table 2. Physical examination The physical examination should include: – assessment of mental state. recent unprotected sex or drug abuse (consider acute HIV seroconversion illness). treatment. – assessment of hydration status.3. A rapid decrease in platelet count in parallel with a rising haematocrit compared to the baseline is suggestive of progress to the plasma 32 .

except in cases with unusual manifestations (Chapter 4). and whether the patient requires admission (Textboxes E and F). CHAPTER 2 2. In dengue-endemic countries. cardiac enzymes. and do not have any of the warning signs.1.2 Step II—Diagnosis. age-specific population haematocrit levels could be used as a surrogate during the critical phase.3 Step III—Management Disease notification In dengue-endemic countries. which phase it is in (febrile. ECG and urine specific gravity.3. In the absence of the patient’s baseline. 33 . However. whether there are warning signs.2. bicarbonate or lactate.3. be referred for in-hospital management (Group B).2 Treatment according to groups A–C 2. Suggested criteria for early notification of suspected cases are that the patient lives in or has travelled to a dengue-endemic area. the later the notification. 2. Management decisions Depending on the clinical manifestations and other circumstances. has fever for three days or more. Additional tests should be considered as indicated (and if available).1. These should include tests of liver function. Laboratory tests should be performed to confirm the diagnosis. but should be obtained. In non-endemic countries. and/or has thrombocytopaenia ± positive tourniquet test. serum electrolytes. physical examination and/or full blood count and haematocrit. the hydration and haemodynamic status of the patient. 2. critical or recovery). cases of suspected. has low or decreasing white cell counts.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services leakage/critical phase of the disease. glucose. patients may (12) be sent home (Group A). urea and creatinine. probable and confirmed dengue should be notified as soon as possible so that appropriate public health measures can be initiated (Chapter 5).1 Group A – patients who may be sent home (see the home care card for dengue in Textbox G) These are patients who are able to tolerate adequate volumes of oral fluids and pass urine at least once every six hours. the more difficult it is to prevent dengue transmission. usually only confirmed cases will be notified.3.3. it is not necessary for the acute management of patients. or require emergency treatment and urgent referral (Group C). assessment of disease phase and severity On the basis of evaluations of the history. particularly when fever subsides. clinicians should be able to determine whether the disease is dengue. Laboratory confirmation is not necessary before notification.

the action plan should be as follows: • Obtain a reference haematocrit before fluid therapy. These include patients with warning signs. persistent vomiting. Patients who are sent home should be monitored daily by health care providers for temperature pattern. cold and clammy extremities. black stools or coffee-ground vomiting).Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. ibuprofen or other non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents (NSAIDs) as these drugs may aggravate gastritis or bleeding. bleeding (e. • Instruct the care-givers that the patient should be brought to hospital immediately if any of the following occur: no clinical improvement. Ringer’s lactate.] • Give paracetamol for high fever if the patient is uncomfortable. Reassess the clinical status. lethargy or irritability/restlessness. old age. If the vital signs are worsening and haematocrit is rising rapidly. Those with stable haematocrit can be sent home after being advised to return to the hospital immediately if they develop any of the warning signs and to adhere to the following action plan: • Encourage oral intake of oral rehydration solution (ORS). fruit juice and other fluids containing electrolytes and sugar to replace losses from fever and vomiting. increase the rate to 5–10 ml/kg/hour for 1–2 hours.2. particularly as they approach the critical phase. obesity. J and K). warning signs. and then reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr or less according to the clinical response (Textboxes H. volume of fluid intake and losses. Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) may be associated with Reye’s Syndrome. and white blood cell and platelet counts (see group B). defervescence and warning signs) until they are out of the critical period. Tepid sponge if the patient still has high fever. Give only isotonic solutions such as 0.g. If the haematocrit remains the same or rises only minimally. urine output (volume and frequency). prevention and control Ambulatory patients should be reviewed daily for disease progression (decreasing white blood cell count. severe abdominal pain. treatment.3. signs of plasma leakage and bleeding. The interval of paracetamol dosing should not be less than six hours. those with co-existing conditions that may make dengue or its management more complicated (such as pregnancy. • Reassess the clinical status and repeat the haematocrit. Adequate oral fluid intake may be able to reduce the number of hospitalizations (13). infancy. chronic haemolytic diseases). If the patient has dengue with warning signs. Do not give acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin). or living far from a health facility without reliable means of transport). not passing urine for more than 4–6 hours. renal failure. deterioration around the time of defervescence. Start with 5–7 ml/ kg/hour for 1–2 hours. then reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours. [Caution: fluids containing sugar/glucose may exacerbate hyperglycaemia of physiological stress from dengue and diabetes mellitus. continue with the same rate (2–3 ml/kg/hr) for another 2–4 hours. and those with certain social circumstances (such as living alone. or Hartmann’s solution. 2. haematocrit. 34 .9% saline. repeat the haematocrit and review fluid infusion rates accordingly.2 Group B – patients who should be referred for in-hospital management Patients may need to be admitted to a secondary health care centre for close observation. diabetes mellitus.

The crystalloid solution should be isotonic and the volume just sufficient to maintain an effective circulation during the period of plasma leakage. colloid solutions (Textbox M). start intravenous fluid therapy of 0.5 ml/kg/hr. CHAPTER 2 If the patient has dengue without warning signs.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services • Give the minimum intravenous fluid volume required to maintain good perfusion and urine output of about 0. Intravenous fluids are usually needed only for 24–48 hours. then 6–12 hourly). haematocrit (before and after fluid replacement. • Patients should be monitored by health care providers for temperature pattern.2. blood glucose. • Patients with warning signs should be monitored by health care providers until the period of risk is over. in the case of hypotensive shock. This is indicated by urine output and/or oral fluid intake that is/are adequate. coagulation profile. as indicated). All patients with severe dengue should be admitted to a hospital with access to intensive care facilities and blood transfusion.e. Give the minimum volume required to maintain good perfusion and urine output.3 Group C – patients who require emergency treatment and urgent referral when they have severe dengue Patients require emergency treatment and urgent referral when they are in the critical phase of disease. – severe organ impairment (hepatic damage. i. Thus. Judicious intravenous fluid resuscitation is the essential and usually sole intervention required. and other organ functions (such as renal profile. Intravenous fluids are usually needed for only 24–48 hours. haematocrit. renal impairment. If not tolerated. 2. use the ideal body weight for calculation of fluid infusion (Textboxes J and K). Parameters that should be monitored include vital signs and peripheral perfusion (1–4 hourly until the patient is out of the critical phase). 35 . obtain haematocrit levels before and after fluid resuscitation. the action plan should be as follows: • Encourage oral fluids. cardiomyopathy.9% saline or Ringer’s lactate with or without dextrose at maintenance rate (Textbox H). and white blood cell and platelet counts (Textbox L). Plasma losses should be replaced immediately and rapidly with isotonic crystalloid solution or. it is necessary to revise the fluid infusion frequently. A detailed fluid balance should be maintained. warning signs. liver profile. depending on the clinical picture and the facilities of the hospital or health centre. urine output (volume and frequency). or haematocrit decreasing below the baseline value in a stable patient. Other laboratory tests (such as liver and renal functions tests) can be done. urine output (4–6 hourly). If possible. volume of fluid intake and losses. For obese and overweight patients. encephalopathy or encephalitis).3. Patients may be able to take oral fluids after a few hours of intravenous fluid therapy. when they have: – severe plasma leakage leading to dengue shock and/or fluid accumulation with respiratory distress. – severe haemorrhages. Reduce intravenous fluids gradually when the rate of plasma leakage decreases towards the end of the critical phase.

and then further depending on haemodynamic status. and then continue to reduce as above. then to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours. • If vital signs are still unstable (i. Then reassess the patient’s condition (vital signs. Blood transfusion should be given only in cases with suspected/severe bleeding.e. • Further boluses of crystalloid or colloidal solutions may need to be given during the next 24–48 hours. Figure 2. • If the patient’s condition improves. repeat a second bolus of crystalloid solution at 10–20 ml/kg/hr for one hour. the ideal body weight should be used for calculating fluid infusion rates (textboxes J and K).g. intravenous fluids should be gradually reduced to 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. prevention and control There should be continued replacement of further plasma losses to maintain effective circulation for 24–48 hours. Treatment of shock The action plan for treating patients with compensated shock is as follows (Textboxes D and N. decreasing metabolic acidosis. and capillary refill time <2 seconds) and improving end-organ perfusion – i. This is a strategy in which larger volumes of fluids (e. Input is typically much greater than output. The degree of intravascular volume deficit in dengue shock varies. improving blood pressure. this indicates bleeding and the need to cross-match and transfuse blood as soon as possible (see treatment for haemorrhagic complications). After this second bolus. <45% in adult males). stable conscious level (more alert or less restless). The goals of fluid resuscitation include improving central and peripheral circulation (decreasing tachycardia. urine output). then to 2–3 ml/kg/hr.2): • Start intravenous fluid resuscitation with isotonic crystalloid solutions at 5–10 ml/kg/hour over one hour. haematocrit. If haematocrit decreases compared to the initial reference haematocrit (<40% in children and adult females. warm and pink extremities. For overweight or obese patients. if there is improvement. capillary refill time. The next steps depend on the situation. treatment. Fluid resuscitation must be clearly separated from simple fluid administration. If the haematocrit increases or is still high (>50%). urine output ≥ 0.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.5 ml/kg/hour. which can be maintained for up to 24–48 hours. check the haematocrit after the first bolus. 36 . (See textboxes H and J for a more appropriate estimate of the normal maintenance requirement based on ideal body weight).e. pulse volume. reduce the rate to 7–10 ml/ kg/hr for 1–2 hours. 10–20 ml boluses) are administered for a limited period of time under close monitoring to evaluate the patient’s response and to avoid the development of pulmonary oedema. and the input/ output ratio is of no utility for judging fluid resuscitation needs during this period. shock persists). A group and crossmatch should be done for all shock patients.

2 Algorithm for fluid management in compensated shock Compensated shock (systolic pressure maintained but has signs of reduced perfusion) Fluid resuscitation with isotonic crystalloid 5–10 ml/kg/hr over 1 hour Improvement YES IV crystalloid 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. consider transfusion with fresh whole transfusion. The action plan for treating patients with hypotensive shock is as follows (Textboxes D and N. Figure 2. then to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours. fluid can be further reduced. reduce to 7–10 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours Then reduce further HCT = haematocrit Patients with hypotensive shock should be managed more vigorously. if HCT decreases. Then continue with crystalloid infusion and gradually reduce to 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services Figure 2. act according to HCT levels: if HCT increases. reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours. and then 37 . Stop at 48 hours. Monitor HCT 6–8 hourly. If the patient is not stable. YES NO Administer 2nd bolus of fluid 10–20 ml/kg/hr for 1 hour Consider significant occult/overt bleed Initiate transfusion with fresh whole blood Check HCT NO CHAPTER 2 HCT or high HCT Improvement If patient improves. • If the patient’s condition improves. give a crystalloid/colloid infusion of 10 ml/ kg/hr for one hour. consider bolus fluid administration or increase fluid administration. then: reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours. If patient continues to improve.3): • Initiate intravenous fluid resuscitation with crystalloid or colloid solution (if available) at 20 ml/kg as a bolus given over 15 minutes to bring the patient out of shock as quickly as possible.

• Further boluses of fluids may need to be given during the next 24 hours. In general. If the condition is still unstable. If the haematocrit increases compared to the previous value or remains very high (>50%). Patients with dengue shock should be frequently monitored until the danger period is over.5 ml/kg/hour. Patients with severe dengue should be admitted to the high-dependency or intensive care area. there should be monitoring of arterial or venous blood gases. Urine output should be checked regularly (hourly till the patient is out of shock. An acceptable urine output would be about 0. this indicates bleeding and the need to crossmatch and transfuse blood as soon as possible (see treatment for haemorrhagic complications). lactate. reassess the patient. reduce the rate to 7–10 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. In addition. Monitoring of ECG and pulse oximetry should be available in the intensive care unit. prevention and control to 2–3 ml/kg/hr or less. the more frequently the patient should be monitored and reviewed in order to avoid fluid overload while ensuring adequate volume replacement. • If the haematocrit was high compared to the baseline value (if not available. a patient with severe dengue should have an arterial line placed as soon as practical. then as indicated). If resources are available. <45% in adult males). then 4–6 hourly). After the second bolus. • If the haematocrit decreases compared to the previous value (<40% in children and adult females. If the condition improves. treatment. the higher the fluid infusion rate. then change back to crystalloid solution and reduce the rate of infusion as mentioned above. The reason for this is that in shock states. and other organ 38 . repeat the haematocrit after the second bolus. Parameters that should be monitored include vital signs and peripheral perfusion (every 15–30 minutes until the patient is out of shock. continue colloid solutions at 10–20 ml/kg as a third bolus over one hour. shock persists). reduce the rate to 7–10 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. change intravenous fluids to colloid solutions at 10–20 ml/kg as a second bolus over 30 minutes to one hour. estimation of blood pressure using a cuff is commonly inaccurate. The use of an indwelling arterial catheter allows for continuous and reproducible blood pressure measurements and frequent blood sampling on which decisions regarding therapy can be based. The rate and volume of each bolus infusion should be titrated to the clinical response. If the haematocrit was low (<40% in children and adult females. then 1–2 hourly). Haematocrit should be monitored (before and after fluid boluses until stable. A continuous bladder catheter enables close monitoring of urine output. which can be maintained for up to 24–48 hours (textbox H). blood glucose (before fluid resuscitation and repeat as indicated). this indicates bleeding and the need to cross-match and transfuse blood as soon as possible (see treatment for haemorrhagic complications). then 1–2 hourly).e. A detailed fluid balance of all input and output should be maintained. total carbon dioxide/bicarbonate (every 30 minutes to one hour until stable. then change back to crystalloid solution and reduce the rate of infusion as mentioned above when the patient’s condition improves. review the haematocrit obtained before the first bolus. • If vital signs are still unstable (i. use population baseline). <45% in adult males). After this dose.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours. YES NO Review 1st HCT HCT or high HCT Administer 2nd bolus fluid (colloid) 10–20 ml/kg over ½ to 1 hour Consider significant occult/overt bleed Initiate transfusion with fresh whole blood Improvement NO Repeat 2nd HCT HCT or high HCT Administer 3rd bolus fluid (colloid) 10–20 ml/kg over 1 hour Improvement YES NO Repeat 3rd HCT 39 . fluid can be further reduced. consider transfusion with fresh whole transfusion. If the patient is not stable. Stop at 48 hours. consider bolus fluid administration or increase fluid administration. reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services Figure 2. act according to HCT levels: if HCT increases.3 Algorithm for fluid management in hypotensive shock Hypotensive shock Fluid resuscitation with 20 ml/kg isotonic crystalloid or colloid over 15 minutes Try to obtain a HCT level before fluid resuscitation Improvement CHAPTER 2 YES Crystalloid/colloid 10 ml/kg/hr for 1 hour. if HCT decreases. Monitor HCT 6-hourly. If patient continues to improve. then continue with: IV crystalloid 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1– 2 hours.

Do not give intramuscular injections to avoid haematoma. tachycardia. However. 40 . Patients with haemolytic conditions are at risk of acute haemolysis with haemoglobinuria and will require blood transfusion. In patients with profound thrombocytopaenia. poor urine output) indicates major haemorrhage and the need for urgent blood transfusion. Patients at risk of major bleeding are those who: – have prolonged/refractory shock. If major bleeding occurs it is usually from the gastrointestinal tract. treatment. prevention and control functions (such as renal profile. – are given non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents. For instance. – have any form of trauma. – have pre-existing peptic ulcer disease. – are on anticoagulant therapy. a rising or persistently high haematocrit together with unstable vital signs (particularly narrowing of the pulse pressure) indicates active plasma leakage and the need for a further bolus of fluid replacement. so in this case intravenous fluids must be discontinued immediately to avoid pulmonary oedema. – have hypotensive shock and renal or liver failure and/or severe and persistent metabolic acidosis. It should be noted that prophylactic platelet transfusions for severe thrombocytopaenia in otherwise haemodynamically stable patients have not been shown to be effective and are not necessary (14). Treatment of haemorrhagic complications Mucosal bleeding may occur in any patient with dengue but. before resuscitation and as indicated). including intramuscular injection.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. the clinical response to fluid therapy and the acid-base balance. coagulation profile. Changes in the haematocrit are a useful guide to treatment. liver profile. changes must be interpreted in parallel with the haemodynamic status. However. Yet a decrease in haematocrit together with stable haemodynamic status and adequate urine output indicates haemodilution and/or reabsorption of extravasated fluids. ensure strict bed rest and protect from trauma to reduce the risk of bleeding. Internal bleeding may not become apparent for many hours until the first black stool is passed. In the latter case. and/or vagina in adult females. it should be considered as minor. continue to monitor closely and it is likely that the haematocrit will start to fall within the next 24 hours as the plasma leakage stops. a rising or persistently high haematocrit together with stable haemodynamic status and adequate urine output does not require extra intravenous fluid. The bleeding usually improves rapidly during the recovery phase. A decrease in haematocrit together with unstable vital signs (particularly narrowing of the pulse pressure. if the patient remains stable with fluid resuscitation/replacement. metabolic acidosis.

blood transfusion must be given with care because of the risk of fluid overload. When bleeding occurs. There is little evidence to support the practice of transfusing platelet concentrates and/or fresh-frozen plasma for severe bleeding. Note that haematocrit of <30% as a trigger for blood transfusion. – refractory shock that fails to respond to consecutive fluid resuscitation of 40-60 ml/kg. – a decrease in haematocrit after fluid resuscitation together with unstable haemodynamic status. bleeding usually occurs after a period of prolonged shock that is preceded by plasma leakage. It is being practised when massive bleeding can not be managed with just fresh whole blood/fresh-packed cells. CHAPTER 2 41 . It is important that fresh whole blood or fresh red cells are given. low levels of which impede the oxygen-releasing capacity of haemoglobin. Do not wait for the haematocrit to drop too low before deciding on blood transfusion. regardless of the haematocrit level. A good clinical response includes improving haemodynamic status and acid-base balance.3 DPG). The action plan for the treatment of haemorrhagic complications is as follows: • Give 5–10ml/kg of fresh-packed red cells or 10–20 ml/kg of fresh whole blood at an appropriate rate and observe the clinical response. especially in those with severe abdominal tenderness and distension. haematocrit levels may not be as low as in the absence of plasma leakage. • Consider repeating the blood transfusion if there is further blood loss or no appropriate rise in haematocrit after blood transfusion. • Great care should be taken when inserting a naso-gastric tube which may cause severe haemorrhage and may block the airway. A lubricated oro-gastric tube may minimize the trauma during insertion. Oxygen delivery at tissue level is optimal with high levels of 2. in dengue. – persistent or worsening metabolic acidosis ± a well-maintained systolic blood pressure. Blood transfusion is life-saving and should be given as soon as severe bleeding is suspected or recognized.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services Severe bleeding can be recognized by: – persistent and/or severe overt bleeding in the presence of unstable haemodynamic status. As a result. but it may exacerbate the fluid overload. as recommended in the Surviving Sepsis Campaign Guideline (15). haematocrit will then drop from this high level. resulting in functional tissue hypoxia. Insertion of central venous catheters should be done with ultra-sound guidance or by a very experienced person. – hypotensive shock with low/normal haematocrit before fluid resuscitation. is not applicable to severe dengue.3 DPG.3 di-phosphoglycerate (2. The reason for this is that. However. Stored blood loses 2. During the plasma leakage the haematocrit increases to relatively high values before the onset of severe bleeding.

Other causes of respiratory distress include acute pulmonary oedema. – rapid breathing.3 Treatment of complications and other areas of treatment 2. treatment.3. – irreversible shock (heart failure. upward displacement of the diaphragm by the ascites and varying degrees of “bat’s wings” appearance ± Kerley B lines suggestive of fluid overload and pulmonary oedema. severe metabolic acidosis from severe shock. chronic lung and renal diseases. Early clinical features of fluid overload are: – respiratory distress. prevention and control 2. often in combination with ongoing hypovolaemia). – increased jugular venous pressure (JVP). – incorrect use of hypotonic rather than isotonic crystalloid solutions. . – ECG to exclude ischaemic changes and arrhythmia. 42 – echocardiogram for assessment of left ventricular function. pleural effusion. Late clinical features are: – pulmonary oedema (cough with pink or frothy sputum ± crepitations. – arterial blood gases.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. – large pleural effusions. – chest wall in-drawing. – co-morbid conditions such as congenital or ischaemic heart disease. – wheezing (rather than crepitations). and Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome (ARDS) (refer to standard textbook of clinical care for further guidance on management). Additional investigations are: – the chest x-ray which shows cardiomegaly. – continuation of intravenous fluids after plasma leakage has resolved (24–48 hours from defervescence).3.1 Fluid overload Fluid overload with large pleural effusions and ascites is a common cause of acute respiratory distress and failure in severe dengue. cyanosis). difficulty in breathing. Causes of fluid overload are: – excessive and/or too rapid intravenous fluids. – inappropriate use of large volumes of intravenous fluids in patients with unrecognized severe bleeding. dimensions and regional wall dyskinesia that may suggest underlying ischaemic heart disease. – inappropriate transfusion of fresh-frozen plasma. – cardiac enzymes.3. – tense ascites. platelet concentrates and cryoprecipitates.

Hyponatraemia.3. If necessary. or a continuous infusion of furosemide 0. 2. Recognizing when to decrease or stop intravenous fluids is key to preventing fluid overload.3. If the patient remains in shock and the haematocrit is elevated. – afebrile for more than 24–48 days (without the use of antipyretics). – resolving bowel/abdominal symptoms.15) can occur. hypokalaemia. – improving urine output. serum calcium imbalances and metabolic acidosis (sodium bicarbonate for metabolic acidosis is not recommended for pH ≥ 7. repeated small boluses of a colloid solution may help. – haematocrit decreases in the presence of a good pulse volume. hyperkalaemia.5 mg/kg/dose once or twice daily. When the following signs are present. Careful fresh whole blood transfusion should be initiated as soon as possible.1–0. stop intravenous fluids but continue close monitoring. • Patients who remain in shock with low or normal haematocrit levels but show signs of fluid overload may have occult haemorrhage. 43 . CHAPTER 2 – stable blood pressure.2 Other complications of dengue Both hyperglycaemia and hypoglycaemia may occur. Avoid diuretics during the plasma leakage phase because they may lead to intravascular volume depletion.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services The action plan for the treatment of fluid overload is as follows: • Oxygen therapy should be given immediately. • The management of fluid overload varies according to the phase of the disease and the patient’s haemodynamic status. One should also be alert for co-infections and nosocomial infections. If the patient has stable haemodynamic status and is out of the critical phase (more than 24–48 hours of defervescence). Further infusion of large volumes of intravenous fluids will lead only to a poor outcome. even in the absence of diabetes mellitus and/or hypoglycaemic agents. pulse and peripheral perfusion. • If the patient has stable haemodynamic status but is still within the critical phase.1 mg/kg/hour. intravenous fluids should be discontinued or reduced to the minimum rate necessary to maintain euglycaemia: – signs of cessation of plasma leakage. This results in diuresis and resolution of pleural effusion and ascites. Electrolyte and acid-base imbalances are also common observations in severe dengue and are probably related to gastrointestinal losses through vomiting and diarrhoea or to the use of hypotonic solutions for resuscitation and correction of dehydration. • Stopping intravenous fluid therapy during the recovery phase will allow fluid in the pleural and peritoneal cavities to return to the intravascular compartment. reduce the intravenous fluid accordingly. Monitor serum potassium and correct the ensuing hypokalaemia. give oral or intravenous furosemide 0.

– vasopressor and inotropic therapies as temporary measures to prevent lifethreatening hypotension in dengue shock and during induction for intubation. Refer to standard textbooks of clinical care for more detailed information regarding the treatment of complications and other areas of treatment. – further treatment of cardiac abnormalities. 44 .Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.3 Supportive care and adjuvant therapy Supportive care and adjuvant therapy may be necessary in severe dengue. with a preference to continuous veno-venous haemodialysis (CVVH). or of recombinant Activated Factor VII. This may include: – renal replacement therapy. such as conduction abnormalities. prevention and control 2. In this context there is little or no evidence in favour of the use of steroids and intravenous immunoglobulins. such as severe hepatic involvement or encephalopathy or encephalitis.3. treatment. since peritoneal dialysis has a risk of bleeding. while correction of intravascular volume is being vigorously carried out. – further treatment of organ impairment.3. may occur (the latter usually not requiring interventions).

Good clinical practice and bad clinical practice Good practice 1 Assessment and follow-up of patients with non-severe dengue and careful instruction of warning signs to watch out for Administration of paracetamol for high fever if the patient is uncomfortable Obtaining a haematocrit level before and after fluid boluses Clinical assessment of the haemodynamic status before and after each fluid bolus Interpretation of haematocrit levels in the context of fluid administered and haemodynamic assessment Administration of intravenous fluids for repeated vomiting or a high or rapidly rising haematocrit Use of isotonic intravenous fluids for severe dengue Giving intravenous fluid volume just sufficient to maintain effective circulation during the period of plasma leakage for severe dengue Avoiding intramuscular injections in dengue patients Intravenous fluid rate and frequency of monitoring and haematocrit measurement adjusted according to the patient’s condition Close monitoring of blood glucose.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services ANNEX Textbox A.e. unaware of the hyperglycaemic effect on osmotic diuresis and confounding hypovolaemia Continuation and no review of intravenous fluid therapy once haemodynamic status stabilizes 2 3 4 5 CHAPTER 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 45 . i. tight glycaemic control Discontinuation or reducing fluid therapy once haemodynamic status stabilizes Bad practice Sending patients with non-severe dengue home with no follow-up and inadequate instructions Administration of acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) or ibuprofen Not knowing when haematocrit levels are taken with respect to fluid therapy No clinical assessment of patient with respect to fluid therapy Interpretation of haematocrit levels independent of clinical status Administration of intravenous fluids to any patient with non-severe dengue Use of hypotonic intravenous fluids for severe dengue Excessive or prolonged intravenous fluid administration for severe dengue Giving intramuscular injections to dengue patients Fixed intravenous fluid rate and unchanged frequency of monitoring and haematocrit measurement during entire hospitalization for severe dengue Not monitoring blood glucose.

malaria. meningococcal infection. typhoid.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. infectious mononucleosis . restlessness Liver enlargement >2 cm Increase in HCT concurrent with rapid decrease in platelet count Laboratory 46 . drug reactions Rotavirus. Chikungunya. leptospirosis. other enteric infections Meningo/encephalitis Febrile seizures Illnesses with a rash Diarrhoeal diseases Illnesses with neurological manifestations Conditions that mimic the critical phase of dengue infection Infectious Acute gastroenteritis. septic shock Acute leukaemia and other malignancies Acute – – – abdomen acute appendicitis acute cholecystitis perforated viscus Malignancies Other clinical pictures Diabetic ketoacidosis Lactic acidosis Leukopenia and thrombocytopaenia ± bleeding Platelet disorders Renal failure Respiratory distress (Kussmaul’s breathing) Systemic Lupus Erythematosus Textbox C. Warning signs Clinical Abdominal pain or tenderness Persistent vomiting Clinical fluid accumulation Mucosal bleed Lethargy. HIV seroconversion illness Rubella. prevention and control Textbox B. measles. measles. treatment. bacterial sepsis. Differential diagnosis of dengue fever Conditions that mimic the febrile phase of dengue infection Flu-like syndromes Influenza. acute HIV seroconversion illness. viral hepatitis. typhus. Chikungunya. scarlet fever.

unable to tolerate oral fluids Giddiness or postural hypotension Profuse perspiration.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services Textbox D. independent of the platelet count Renal. haemolitic anemias and others Overweight or obese (rapid venous access difficult in emergency) Infancy or old age Living alone Living far from health facility Without reliable means of transport 47 Bleeding Organ impairment Findings through further investigations Co-existing conditions Social circumstances . ascites or asymptomatic gall-bladder thickening Pregnancy Co-morbid conditions. clammy extremities CHAPTER 2 Peripheral pulse volume Heart rate Weak and thready Feeble or absent Normal for age Tachycardia Severe tachycardia with bradycardia in late shock Narrowed pulse pressure (<20 mmHg) Hypotension (see definition below) Unrecordable blood pressure Metabolic acidosis hyperpnoea/ Kussmaul’s breathing Blood pressure Normal for age Normal pulse pressure for age Normal systolic pressure but rising diastolic pressure Narrowing pulse pressure Postural hypotension Respiratory rate Normal for age Tachypnoea Definition of hypotension: Systolic blood pressure of <90 mm Hg or mean arterial pressure <70 mm Hg in adults or a systolic blood pressure decrease of >40 mm Hg or <2 SD below normal for age. neurological or cardiac – enlarged. tender liver. hepatic. prostration during defervescence Hypotension or cold extremities Spontaneous bleeding. hypertension. In children up to 10 years of age. Haemodynamic assessment: continuum of haemodynamic changes Parameters Hypotensive shock Stable circulation Clear and lucid Compensated shock Clear and lucid (shock can be missed if you do not touch the patient) Prolonged (>2 sec) Cool peripheries Hypotensive shock Change of mental state (restless. cyanosis Rising haematocrit Pleural effusion. mottled skin Cold. the 5th centile for systolic blood pressure can be determined by the formula: 70 + (age in years x 2) mm Hg. Textbox E. although not yet in shock – chest pain or respiratory distress. combative) Capillary refill time Extremities Brisk (<2 sec) Warm and pink extremities Good volume Very prolonged. Admission criteria Warning signs Signs and symptoms related to hypotension (possible plasma leakage) Any of the warning signs (Textbox C) Dehydrated patient. fainting. peptic ulcer. such as diabetes mellitus.

ibuprofen or other non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents (NSAIDs). • Antibiotics are not necessary. cold or clammy hands and feet • Difficulty in breathing Laboratory results monitoring 1st Visit Date Haematocrit White cell count 48 Platelet count . appetite. Home care card for dengue Home care card for dengue (please take this card to your health facility for each visit) What should be done? • Adequate bed rest • Adequate fluid intake (>5 glasses for average-sized adults or accordingly in children) Milk. These are warning signs for danger: • Bleeding: red spots or patches on the skin bleeding from nose or gums vomiting blood black-coloured stools heavy menstruation/vaginal bleeding • Frequent vomiting • Severe abdominal pain • Drowsiness. take the patient immediately to the nearest hospital. Stable haematocrit without intravenous fluids. Increasing trend of platelet count. or steroids. mefenemic acid (ponstan). fruit juice (caution with diabetes patient) and isotonic electrolyte solution (ORS) and barley/rice water. no respiratory distress). haemodynamic status. If you are already taking these medications please consult your doctor. treatment. Laboratory Textbox G. prevention and control Textbox F. urine output. If any of following is observed. Improvement in clinical status (general well-being.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Plain water alone may cause electrolyte imbalance. Discharge criteria (all of the following conditions must be present) Clinical No fever for 48 hours. • Take paracetamol (not more than 4 grams per day for adults and accordingly in children) • Tepid sponging • Look for mosquito breeding places in and around the home and eliminate them What should be avoided? • Do not take acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin). mental confusion or seizures • Pale.

91(height -152. IBW (kg) for adult males 50 57 66 75 Estimated IBW (kg) for adult females 45.91(height -152.4) cm Male: 50.4) cm (17) CHAPTER 2 Textbox J.Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services Textbox H. Textbox K. or IBW (kg) Normal maintenance fluid (ml/hour) based on Holliday-Segar formula 10 20 30 60 65 70 75 80 90 100 110 120 Fluid regime based on Fluid regime based on 2–3 ml/kg /hour (ml/hour) 1.5 70 49 .5 –2 ml/kg/hour (ml/hour) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 10–15 20–30 30–45 40–60 50–75 60–90 70–105 80–120 100–150 90–120 105–140 120–150 Notes: For adults with IBW >50 kg.5–2 ml/kg can be used for quick calculation of hourly maintenance fluid regime. Estimated ideal body weight for overweight or obese adults Height (cm) 150 160 170 180 Estimated. For adults with IBW≤50 kg.5 kg + 0. Hourly maintenance fluid regime for overweight or obese patients Estimated ideal body weight.5 52 61. 1. Calculations for normal maintenance of intravenous fluid infusion Normal maintenance fluid per hour can be calculated on the basis of the following formula* (equivalent to Holliday-Segar formula): 4 mL/kg/h for first 10 kg body weight + 2 mL/kg/h for next 10 kg body weight + 1 mL/kg/h for subsequent kg body weight *For overweight/obese patients calculate normal maintenance fluid based on ideal body weight (IBW) (Adapted from reference 16) IBW for overweight/obese adults can be estimated on the basis of the following formula Female: 45.0 kg + 0. 2–3 ml/kg can be used for quick calculation of hourly maintenance fluid regime.

Theoretically. It may not be suitable for resuscitation of patients with severe hyponatremia. One of the biggest concerns regarding their use is their impact on coagulation. colloids may be the preferred choice if the blood pressure has to be restored urgently. dextrans bind to von Willebrand factor/Factor VIII complex and impair coagulation the most. but repeated large volumes of 0. However. it is advisable to change to other alternatives such as Ringer’s Lactate. 50 . Monitoring the chloride and lactate levels will help to identify this problem. Hyperchloraemic acidosis may aggravate or be confused with lactic acidosis from prolonged shock. Choice of intravenous fluids for resuscitation Based on the three randomized controlled trials comparing the different types of fluid resuscitation regime in dengue shock in children. Example of a monitoring chart for dengue Time and date Parameters Body temperature Respiratory rate Heart rate Blood pressure Pulse pressure/volume Capillary refill time Temperature of extremities Abdominal pain Vomiting Bleeding Textbox M. chills and rigors have also been observed in Dextran 70. treatment. When serum chloride level exceeds the normal range. there is no clear advantage to the use of colloids over crystalloids in terms of the overall outcome. However. However. in those with pulse pressure less than 10 mm Hg. dextran-based and starch-based solutions. it is a suitable solution after 0. Allergic reactions such as fever. However. Therefore it is advisable to understand the limitations of these solutions to avoid their respective complications. prevention and control Textbox L. Colloids have been shown to restore the cardiac index and reduce the level of haematocrit faster than crystalloids in patients with intractable shock (18–20). An ideal physiological fluid is one that resembles the extracellular and intracellular fluids compartments closely. Of all the colloids. Dextran 40 can potentially cause an osmotic renal injury in hypovolaemic patients. gelatine has the least effect on coagulation but the highest risk of allergic reactions. Ringer’s Lactate Ringer’s Lactate has lower sodium (131 mmol/L) and chloride (115 mmol/L) contents and an osmolality of 273 mOsm/L. Colloids The types of colloids are gelatin-based.9 Saline has been given and the serum chloride level has exceeded the normal range. Crystalloids 0. the available fluids have their own limitations when used in large quantities.e. Ringer’s Lactate should probably be avoided in liver failure and in patients taking metformin where lactate metabolism may be impaired.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. 0.9% saline (“normal” saline) Normal plasma chloride ranges from 95 to 105 mmol/L.9% saline may lead to hyperchloraemic acidosis. this was not observed to have clinical significance in fluid resuscitation in dengue shock.9% Saline is a suitable option for initial fluid resuscitation. i.

Chapter 2: Clinical management and delivery of clinical services 51 CHAPTER 2 .

Ringer’s Lactate. home care card for dengue). Fever and two of the following criteria: • Anorexia and nausea • Rash • Aches and pains • Warning signs • Leukopenia • Tourniquet test positive Laboratory confirmed dengue (important when no sign of plasma leakage) DENGUE CASE ASSESSMENT WARNING SIGNS* • Abdominal pain or tenderness • Persistent vomiting • Clinical fluid accumulation • Mucosal bleed • Lethargy. Give isotonic solutions such as 0. Start with 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. white blood cell and platelet counts. OR: Existing warning signs Laboratory tests • full blood count (FBC) • haematocrit (HCT) Treatment Obtain reference HCT before fluid therapy. Monitoring Monitor: • vital signs and peripheral perfusion (1–4 hourly until patient is out of critical phase • urine output (4–6 hourly) • HCT (before and after fluid replacement. restlessness • Liver enlargment >2 cm • Laboratory: increase in HCT concurrent with rapid decrease in platelet count *(requiring strict observation and medical intervention) CLASSIFICATION NEGATIVE Co-existing conditions Social circumstances POSITIVE NEGATIVE DENGUE WITHOUT WARNING SIGNS DENGUE WITH WARNING SIGNS Group A (May be sent home) Group criteria Patients who do not have warning signs AND who are able: • to tolerate adequate volumes of oral fluids • to pass urine at least once every 6 hours Laboratory tests • full blood count (FBC) • haematocrit (HCT) Treatment Advice for: • adequate bed rest • adequate fluid intake • Paracetamol. Patients with stable HCT can be sent home.9 % saline. and • written advice for management (e. Group B (Referred for in-hospital care) Group criteria Patients with any of the following features: • co-existing conditions such as pregnancy. coagulation profile. liver profile. Reassess clinical status. MANAGEMENT . repeat HCT and review fluid infusion rates accordingly: • reduce intravenous fluids gradually when the rate of plasma leakage decreases towards the end of the critical phase. Advice for immediate return to hospital if development of any warning signs.PRESUMPTIVE DIAGNOSIS Live in/travel to dengue endemic area. Monitoring Daily review for disease progression: • decreasing white blood cell count • defervescence • warning signs (until out of critical period). renal failure • social circumstances such as living alone. start intravenous fluid therapy 0. living far from hospital Laboratory tests • full blood count (FBC) • haematocrit (HCT) Treatment • Encouragement for oral fluids. and then reduce to 2–3 ml/kg/hr or less according to clinical response. old age. If not tolerated.g. Monitoring Monitor: • temperature pattern • volume of fluid intake and losses • urine output (volume and frequency) • warning signs • HCT. • if worsening of vital signs and rapidly rising HCT -> increase rate to 5–10 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. 4 gram maximum per day in adults and accordingly in children. Reassess clinical status and repeat HCT: • if HCT remains the same or rises only minimally -> continue with 2–3 ml/kg/ hr for another 2–4 hours. diabetes mellitus. then 6–12 hourly) • blood glucose • other organ functions (renal profile. infancy. This is indicated by: • adequate urine output and/or fluid intake • HCT deceases below the baseline value in a stable patient. as indicated). then reduce to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hr.9% saline or Ringer’s Lactate at maintenance rate.

• IV fluids can be maintained for up to 24–48 hours. • if HCT was high compared to baseline value. Treatment of hypotensive shock Initiate IV fluid resuscitation with crystalloid or colloid solution at 20 ml/kg as a bolus for 15 minutes. • if there is improvement after second bolus. . reduce rate to 7–10 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours and continue to reduce as above. this indicates bleeding and need to cross-match and transfuse blood as soon as possible. then reduce to 7–10 ml/kg/h 1–2 hours. • if patient’s condition is still unstable. repeat HCT after second bolus. If patient improves: • give a crystalloid/colloid solution of 10 ml/kg/hr for 1 hour. then back to IV cystalloids and reduce rates as above. change to IV colloids at 10–20 ml/kg as a second bolus over 30 minutes to 1 hour. repeat a second bolus of crystalloid solution at 10–20 ml/kg/hr for 1 hour. Reassess patients’ condition. <45% in adult males) this indicates bleeding. • if HCT increases/still high (>50%). If patient improves: • IV fluids should be reduced gradually to 5–7 ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. Treatment of haemorrhagic complications Give 5–10 ml/kg of fresh packed red cells or 10–20 ml/kg of fresh whole blood. continue colloid infusion at 10–20 ml/kg as a third bolus over 1 hour. this indicates bleeding (see above). then reduce gradually as above. then to 3–5 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours. If patient is still unstable: • review the HCT taken before the first bolus. the need to cross-match and transfuse (see above). • if HCT decreases. then to 2-3 ml/kg/hr for 2–4 hours and then reduced further depending on haemodynamic status. • if HCT was low (<40% in children and adult females. If patient is still unstable: • check HCT after first bolus. • if HCT increases/remains high (>50%). • If patient is improving reduce the rate to 7–10ml/kg/hr for 1–2 hours. then change back to crystalloid solution and reduce rate as above. reassess after second bolus. • If HCT decreases.MANAGEMENT Days of illness 1 40° 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Temperature Potential clinical issues Dehydration Shock bleeding Organ impairment Reabsorption Fluid overload Laboratory changes Hematocrit Platelet IgM/IgG Serology and virology Viraemia Course of dengue illness: Febrile Critical Recovery phases POSITIVE SEVERE DENGUE Group C (Require emergency treatment) Group criteria Patients with any of the following features: • severe plasma leakage with shock and/or fluid accumulation with respiratory distress • severe bleeding • severe organ impairment Laboratory tests • full blood count (FBC) • haematocrit (HCT) • other organ function tests as indicated Treatment of compensated shock Start IV fluid resuscitation with isotonic crystalloid solutions at 5–10 ml/kg/hr over 1 hour.

Campana por la Esparanza. Estevez G. 9:1003–1006. Preventing deaths from dengue: a space and challenge for primary health care. Lancet. Emerging Infectious Diseases. 2002. 2008. Martinez-Torres E. 18(6):954–971. 60(1):40–47. 7. Editorial Fiocruz. Srikiatkhachorn A et al. Nimmannitya S et al. 26(4):283– 290.4 REFERENCES 1. 2005. 2003. Why and how children with dengue die? Revista cubana de medicina tropical. 1987. 1998. 6. La Lucha contra el Dengue (El Salvador. Clinical spectrum and management of dengue haemorrhagic fever. Yip WCL. 2007. 176:313–321. 2003. Rio de Janeiro. 2000). Fluid intake and decreased risk for hospitalization for dengue fever. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: current approaches to management. 5. 352:971–977. Nicaragua. October 1980. Harris E et al. Natural history of plasma leakage in dengue hemorrhagic fever: a serial ultrasonic study. 4. Martinez E. 20:60–74. Pan American Journal of Public Health. Editors Politica. Southeast Asian Journal of Tropical Medicine and Public Health. 2002. Preventive transfusion in dengue shock syndrome – is it necessary? Journal of Pediatrics. Observations on hospitalized patients with haemorrhagic fever. 9. 1997. 2006. Dengue and dengue haemorrhagic fever. 7:125–132. 1969. Medical Progress. Phuong CXT et al. 143:682–684. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. 54 . Tropical Medicine and International Health. 11. Pleites-Sandoval EB. 14. 8. 13. Balmaseda A et al. Lemus ER. 3. 10. Early clinical and laboratory indicators of acute dengue illness. Martinez E. A Organizacao de Assistencia Medica durante uma epidemia de FHD-SCD. Kalayanarooj S et al. Lum L et al. La Habana. 1962–64. 18(3):392– 397. Journal of Infectious Diseases. Rigau-Perez JG et al. treatment. 2. Velazquez JC.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Polanco-Anaya AC. Assessment of the World Health Organization scheme for classification of dengue severity in Nicaragua. Pediatric Infectious Disease Journal. Nimmannitya S. 73:1059–1062. Dengue and chikungunya virus infection in man in Thailand. In: Dengue. prevention and control 2. Evaluation of the World Health Organization standard tourniquet test in the diagnosis of dengue infection in Vietnam. 2005 (pp 222–229). American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. 12.

Clinical Infectious Diseases. 353:877–889. 2001. Surviving Sepsis Campaign: international guidelines for management of severe sepsis and septic shock: 2008. 16. New England Journal of Medicine. Wills BA et al. Geneva. 18. Acute management of dengue shock syndrome: a randomized double-blind comparison of 4 intravenous fluid regimens in the first hour. 2008. Carlet JM. Dellinger RP. Levy MM. 36:296–327.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services 15. prevention and control. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis. Tam DT. 20. 37th ed. 29:787–794. Cao XT. Comparison of three fluid solutions for resuscitation in dengue shock syndrome. Clinical Infectious Diseases. Critical Care Medicine. 32:204–213.. VA. Antimicrobial Therapy. Sperryville. 19. Dung NM. treatment. Gilbert DN et al. CHAPTER 3 55 . Ngo NT. double-blind comparison of four intravenous-fluid regimens. The Sanford guide to antimicrobial therapy 2007. Day NP. Fluid replacement in dengue shock syndrome: a randomized. 2nd edition. 1999. World Health Organization. 2007 (p 87). 1997. 2005. 17. WHO. Inc. Kneen R.

treatment.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. prevention and control 56 .

Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 3 VECTOR MANAGEMENT AND DELIVERY OF VECTOR CONTROL SERVICES 57 .

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. treatment. prevention and control 58 .

the majority remaining within 100 metres of where they emerged. • capacity-building – the development of essential infrastructure. planning and decision-making delegated to the lowest possible administrative level. guided by operational research and subject to routine monitoring and evaluation. hospitals and workplaces). schools. • collaboration within the health sector and with other sectors – the consideration of all options for collaboration within and between public and private sectors. unless there is sound evidence that Ae. managers of programmes for the control of vector-borne diseases.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services CHAPTER 3. albopictus or other mosquito species are the local vectors of dengue. Ae. as well as in a multiplicity of rain-filled habitats – including used tyres. They feed almost entirely on humans. Defined as “a rational decision-making process for the optimal use of resources for vector control”. and other key partners. blocked gutters and buildings under construction. and the empowerment of communities. the establishment or strengthening of regulatory and legislative controls for public health. mainly during daylight hours. and both indoors and outdoors. financial resources and adequate human resources at national and local levels to manage IVM programmes. aegypti proliferates in many purposely-filled household containers such as those used for domestic water storage and for decorative plants. Integrated vector management (IVM) is the strategic approach to vector control promoted by WHO (1) and includes control of the vectors of dengue. organizations and civil society. • evidence-based decision-making – adaptation of strategies and interventions to local vector ecology. social mobilization and legislation – the promotion of these principles in development policies of all relevant agencies. integration of non-chemical and chemical vector control methods.VECTOR MANAGEMENT AND DELIVERY OF VECTOR CONTROL SERVICES 3. discarded food and beverage containers. these mosquitoes do not fly far. • integrated approach to disease control – ensuring the rational use of available resources through the application of a multi-disease control approach. aegypti (the main vector) in the habitats of its immature and adult stages in the household and immediate vicinity. based on a situation analysis. Activities to control transmission should target Ae. aegypti is mainly achieved by eliminating container habitats that are favourable oviposition sites and which permit the development of the aquatic stages. as well as other settings where human–vector contact occurs (e. and strengthening communication among policy-makers. IVM considers five key elements in the management process. epidemiology and resources.g.1 OVERVIEW Preventing or reducing dengue virus transmission depends entirely on control of the mosquito vectors or interruption of human–vector contact. namely: • advocacy. CHAPTER 3 Control of Ae. 59 . Typically. and integration with other disease control measures.

by killing the adult mosquitoes using insecticides. • Environmental manipulation – temporary changes to vector habitats involving the management of “essential” containers. both man-made and natural. altering. re-introductions followed. However. removing or recycling non-essential containers that provide larval habitats. efforts may also be made to reduce the longevity of adult female mosquitoes by the use of insecticidal methods in order to lessen the risk of virus transmission. aegypti uses a wide range of confined larval habitats. Today. larviciding with insecticides. the cultural context in which control interventions are carried out. prevention and control The habitats are eliminated by preventing access by mosquitoes to these containers or by frequently emptying and cleaning them. cleaning of gutters.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. the resources available for implementation. such as frequent emptying and cleaning by scrubbing of water-storage vessels. or combination of methods. flower vases and desert room coolers. Consequently. control efforts should target the habitats that are most productive and hence epidemiologically more important rather than all types of container. especially when there are major resource constraints. 3. However. Where feasible. leading to the re-establishment of vector populations. by removing the developing stages using insecticides or biological control agents. treatment. In selecting the most appropriate vector control method. sheltering stored tyres from rainfall. Methods of vector control include the elimination or management of larval habitats. the main aim of most programmes is to reduce the densities of vector populations as much as possible and to maintain them at low levels. Three types of environmental management are defined: • Environmental modification – long-lasting physical transformations to reduce vector larval habitats. it may not be feasible or cost-effective to attempt to control the immature stages in all such habitats in a community. aegypti populations from much of the neotropics by the 1970s. whereas others are less productive. Such actions should be the mainstay of dengue vector control. Such targeted strategies require a thorough understanding of the local vector ecology and the attitudes and habits of residents pertaining to the containers. and the adequacy of coverage. consideration should be given to the local ecology and behaviour of the target species.1 Environmental management Environmental management seeks to change the environment in order to prevent or minimize vector propagation and human contact with the vector-pathogen by destroying. management or removal from the 60 . 3.2. such as installation of a reliable piped water supply to communities. Historically. the use of biological agents and the application of adulticides. the feasibility of applying them in a timely manner. Some man-made container habitats produce large numbers of adult mosquitoes. or by combinations of these methods. efforts to control dengue vectors in the WHO Region of the Americas resulted in the elimination of Ae. including household connections. therefore. recycling or proper disposal of discarded containers and tyres.2 METHODS OF VECTOR CONTROL Ae.

Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services vicinity of homes of plants such as ornamental or wild bromeliads that collect water in the leaf axils.Store proof under cover roof + Modify design. The choice of approach should be effective.1 Environmental management actions to control immature stages of Aedes aegyptia Larval habitat Empty. Table 3. practicable and appropriate to local circumstances.clean and scrub weekly Mosquito. such as installing mosquito screening on windows. and/or repair and clean + Use expanded Fill (with sand. recycle and dispose of Puncture or drain CHAPTER 3 Water-storage tank or cistern Drums (150–200 litres) Flower vase filled with water Potted plants with saucers Roof gutter Animal water container Discarded food and drink containers Hollow fence posts Used tyres Discarded large appliances Discarded buckets (<20 litres) Tree holes Rock holes a + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Adapted from Dengue and dengue haemorrhagic fever in the Americas: guidelines for prevention and control (2) 61 . polystyrene soil or concrete) beads + Collect. Table 3. • Changes to human habitation or behaviour – actions to reduce human–vector contact. Actual or potentially important container types that cannot be removed from the area should be dealt with in situ. doors and other entry points. and using mosquito nets while sleeping during daytime.1 summarizes the main actions used to control immature Aedes larval habitats.

Proper storage. aegypti. collection and disposal of waste are essential for protecting public health. Expanded polystyrene beads used on the surface of water provide a physical barrier that inhibits oviposition in storage containers from which water is drawn from below via a pipe and from which there is no risk of overflow.2. Solid waste should be collected in plastic sacks and disposed of regularly. 3. aegypti larval habitats. treatment. especially Ae. aegypti sometimes exploits. aegypti populations are often associated with poor water supply and inadequate sanitation and waste disposal services.3 Solid waste management In the context of dengue vector control. 62 . resulting in the continued use of storage containers. particularly if they have been identified in the community as important mosquito-producing containers. Efforts to reduce solid waste should be directed against discarded or non-essential containers. recycle” is highly applicable. In urban areas the use of cost-recovery mechanisms such as the introduction of metered water may actually encourage household collection and storage of roof catchment rainwater that can be harvested at no cost. 3.2 Mosquito-proofing of water-storage containers Water-storage containers can be designed to prevent access by mosquitoes for oviposition. and maintenance of. However. overhead or ground tanks and concrete jars – are not necessary.2. The benefits of reducing the amount of solid waste in urban environments extend beyond those of vector control. Containers can be fitted with tight lids or. prevention and control Improvements in. which Ae.2.1. and applying many of the basic principles can contribute substantially to reducing the availability of Ae. The basic rule of “reduce. 3. The installation of reliable piped water supplies in houses should therefore be accompanied by a communication strategy that discourages traditional storage practices. Water piped to households is preferable to water drawn from wells. Removable covers should be replaced every time water is removed and should be well maintained to prevent damage that permits mosquitoes to get in and out. urban infrastructure and basic services contribute to the reduction in available larval habitats since large Ae. Traditional water storage practices may also persist even when reliable supplies are available. rooftop catchments and other water-storage systems. The frequency of collection is important: twice per week is recommended for housefly and rodent control in warm climates. if rain-filled. community and industrial waste. Integration of Ae.1.1.1 Improvement of water supply and water-storage systems Improving water supplies is a fundamental method of controlling Aedes vectors. aegypti control with waste management services is possible and should be encouraged.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. These beads can also be placed in septic tanks. communal standpipes. tightly-fitted mesh screens can allow for rainwater to be harvested from roofs while keeping mosquitoes out. reuse. potable water must be supplied reliably so that water-storage containers that serve as larval habitats – such as drums. “solid waste” refers mainly to non-biodegradable items of household.

opportunities arise to modify or reduce potential larval habitats of urban disease vectors.2. including urban renewal schemes. Tyres can be recycled in a variety of ways. For there to be an impact. Used tyres are common and sometimes highly productive larval habitats that may warrant special attention in urban areas. Sanitary regulations may require that whole tyres are buried in a separate area of a landfill to avoid their rising upwards under compaction and disrupting soil cover.1. Culex quinquefasciatus and An. plastics or tyres for recycling) or created (e. property owners are required to remove existing gutters on their premises if they are unable to maintain them satisfactorily. plant vases. incinerators. aegypti larval habitats. But although recycling can contribute to significant economic improvements. the recycling market can potentially impact dengue vector populations. including Ae. energy-production plants. 3. and through legislation and regulation. be it real (e. waterstorage containers. albopictus. under revised legislation in Singapore.5 Building structures During the planning and construction of buildings and other infrastructure. rubbish bins).2. saucers) to apply larvicides is a major limitation in many urban contexts. larviciding should be considered as complementary to environmental management and – except in emergencies – should be restricted to containers that cannot otherwise be eliminated or managed. recycled or disposed of by proper incineration in waste transformation facilities (e.g.g.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services It is also important to provide information on these activities to encourage and promote them. 3. aegypti (e.g. roof gutters are not permitted on buildings in new developments because they are difficult to access and maintain. beverage container deposit laws). Industrially shredded tyres can be incorporated into road surfacing materials. Moreover.g. however.g. or lime kilns fitted with emission control devices). leading to growth in the recycling market and profit for both small and large-scale businesses as a consequence.2. or in deep wells. aegypti. and advertising and promotion must be sustained.4 Street cleansing A reliable and regular street cleansing system that removes discarded water-bearing containers and cleans drains to ensure they do not become stagnant and breed mosquitoes will both help to reduce larval habitats of Ae. Globally. including for use as shoe soles.1. aegypti and remove the origin of other urban pests. flooring. industrial rubber gaskets or household hardware (e. This practice places value on many items previously classified as waste products. stephensi. buckets.2 Chemical control: larvicides Although chemicals are widely used to treat Ae. Discarded tyres should be collected. CHAPTER 3 3. containers of importance must have value in the marketplace. which are common habitats of Ae. Regulation of the sale of new tyres mandating the payment of an additional deposit and return charge may also be an incentive for better management and disposal of old tyres. Larvicides may be impractical to apply in hard-to-reach natural sites such as leaf axils and tree holes. The difficulty of accessing indoor larval habitats of Ae. For example. recycling is on the increase. 63 .

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control

As Ae. aegypti often deposits eggs in water-storage containers, the larvicides should have low toxicity to other species and should not significantly change the taste, odour or colour of the water. The International Programme on Chemical Safety (IPCS) has assessed the toxicity of the active ingredients methoprene, pyriproxyfen and temephos and those in Bacillus thuringiensis serovar israelensis (Bti) to determine their safety for use as mosquito larvicides in drinking-water at dosages that are effective against Aedes larvae. However, the safety of the active ingredients in the final formulation varies from product to product and requires further study, as does the possible microbiological contaminants in formulations of Bti. WHO’s Guidelines for drinking-water quality (3) provide authoritative guidance on the use of pesticides in drinking-water. Understandably, placing chemicals in domestic water, particularly drinking-water, is often viewed with suspicion and may be unacceptable in some communities. 3.2.2.1 Target area Productive larval habitats should be treated with chemicals only if environmental management methods or other non-chemical methods cannot be easily applied or are too costly. Perifocal treatment involves the use of hand-held or power-operated equipment to spray, for example, wettable powder or emulsifiable-concentrate formulations of insecticide on larval habitats and peripheral surfaces. This will destroy existing and subsequent larval infestations in containers of non-potable water, and will kill the adult mosquitoes that frequent these sites. Perifocal treatment can be used to treat containers, irrespective of whether they hold water or are dry at the time of application. The internal and external walls of containers are sprayed until they are covered by a film of insecticide, and spraying is also extended to cover any wall within 60 cm of the container. Perifocal treatment thus has both larviciding and residual adulticiding characteristics. This method is suitable only for collections of non-potable water (such as in large piles of tyres or discarded food and beverage containers). 3.2.2.2 Insecticides Table 3.2 lists the mosquito larvicides that are suitable for application to non-potable water containers. For treatment of drinking-water, temephos and methoprene can be applied at dosages of up to 1 mg of active ingredient (a.i.) per litre (1 ppm); pyriproxyfen can be applied at dosages up to 0.01 mg a.i. per litre (0.01 ppm) and Bti at1–5mg per litre 3.2.2.3 Application procedures Hand-operated compression sprayers are suitable for applying liquid insecticides to larger larval habitats. Knapsack sprayers are also suitable, especially for delivering wettable powder formulations. A syringe or pipette can be used for treating indoor flower vases and ant traps. Granule and certain other solid formulations are applied directly by (protected) hand to confined larval habitats or by a convenient standard measure (e.g. a dessert spoon or teaspoon). When treating containers of drinkingwater, sufficient insecticide should be added for the volume of the container even if the container is not full of water (e.g. 1 g of 1% temephos granules for 10 litres of container volume).

64

Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services

3.2.2.4 Treatment cycle The treatment cycle will depend on the species of mosquito, seasonality of transmission, patterns of rainfall, duration of efficacy of the larvicide and types of larval habitat. Two or three application rounds carried out annually in a timely manner with proper monitoring of efficacy may suffice, especially in areas where the main transmission season is short. 3.2.2.5 Precautions Extreme care must be taken when treating drinking-water to avoid dosages that are toxic for humans. Label instructions must always be followed when using insecticides.

Table 3.2 WHO-recommended compounds and formulations for control of mosquito larvae in container habitatsa
Insecticide Organophosphates Pirimiphos-methyl Temephos Insect growth regulators Diflubenzuron rs-methoprenee Novaluron Pyriproxyfene Biopesticides Bacillus thuringiensis israelensise Spinosad
a

CHAPTER 3

Formulationb

Dosagec

WHO hazard classification of active ingredientd

EC EC, GR

1 1

III U

DT, GR, WP EC EC GR

0.02–0.25 1 0.01–0.05 0.01

U U NA U

WG DT, GR, SC

1–5 mg/L 0.1-0.5

U U

b

c d

e

WHO recommendations on the use of pesticides in public health are valid only if linked to WHO specifications for their quality control. WHO specifications for public health pesticides are available at http://www.who.int/whopes/quality/en/. Label instructions must always be followed when using insecticides. DT = tablet for direct application; GR = granule; EC = emulsifiable concentrate; WG = water-dispersible granule; WP = wettable powder; SC = suspension concentrate. mg/L of active ingredient for control of container-breeding mosquitoes. Class II = moderately hazardous; Class III = slightly hazardous; Class U = unlikely to pose an acute hazard in normal use; NA = not available. Can be used at recommended dosages in potable water.

3.2.3 Chemical control: adulticides
Methods of chemical control that target adult vectors are intended to impact on mosquito densities, longevity and other transmission parameters. Adulticides are applied either as residual surface treatments or as space treatments.

65

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control

3.2.3.1 Residual treatment Perifocal treatment, as described above, has both adulticiding and larviciding effects. Suitable insecticides can be applied with hand-operated compression sprayers. Power sprayers can be used to treat large accumulations of discarded containers (e.g. tyre dumps) rapidly. Care must be taken not to treat containers used to store potable water. 3.2.3.2 Space sprays and their application Space spraying is recommended for control only in emergency situations to suppress an ongoing epidemic or to prevent an incipient one. The objective of space spraying is the massive, rapid destruction of the adult vector population. However, there has been considerable controversy about the efficacy of aerosol insecticide applications during epidemics of dengue and yellow fever. Any control method that reduces the number of infective adult mosquitoes, even for a short time, should reduce virus transmission during that time, but it remains unclear whether the transient impact of space treatments is epidemiologically significant in the long run. There is no well-documented example of the effectiveness of this approach in interrupting an epidemic. Nevertheless, if space spraying is used early in an epidemic and on a sufficiently large scale, the intensity of transmission may be reduced, which would give time for the application of other vector control measures that provide longer-term control, including larviciding and communitybased source reduction. Thus, if disease surveillance is sensitive enough to detect cases in the early stages of an epidemic, and if the resources are available, emergency space spraying can be initiated at the same time as source reduction measures and larviciding are intensified. Not only insecticide susceptibility but also droplet size, application rate and indoor penetration of the insecticide are all crucial to the efficacy of this method for controlling Ae. aegypti. Indoor penetration of an insecticide depends on the structure of the building, whether doors and windows are left open during spraying and, when applied from vehicle-mounted equipment, residential block configuration, the route of the spray vehicle and meteorological conditions. Where indoor penetration of droplets is likely to be poor, indoor application with portable equipment will be more effective against Ae. aegypti. However, rates of coverage are much lower and accessibility may be difficult, particularly in large cities. Vector populations can be suppressed over large areas by the use of space sprays released from low-flying aircraft, especially where access with ground equipment is difficult and extensive areas must be treated rapidly. Indoor penetration of insecticide droplets is again a critical factor for efficacy. In applying space sprays from the air, careful consideration must be given to meteorological conditions, especially wind speed at spray height and at ground level, and to the droplet size spectrum obtained at the flying speed of the aircraft. For all aerial spraying operations, clearance must be obtained from the civil aviation authority. For safety reasons, populated areas must usually be sprayed from twin-engined aircraft. Modern aircraft are fitted with global positioning systems so the exact position of the aircraft while the insecticide is being applied can be accurately recorded.

66

The difficulties of ensuring penetration of insecticide droplets into the resting sites of the target species are similar to those for aerosols dispensed from road vehicles. space spraying should focus on areas where people congregate (e. vector behaviour. human and financial resources) can be deployed in a timely manner to ensure proper coverage.3 lists the insecticides that are suitable for space spraying as cold aerosols or thermal fogs. several factors must first be considered – including safety. as the oil carrier inhibits evaporation of small fog droplets. encouraging them to open their doors and windows in order to improve the effectiveness of the spraying programme.0 l/ha.g.5– 2. The development of Geographic Information Systems (GIS) may also be helpful. by the time a case is detected and a response mounted. Insecticides CHAPTER 3 Table 3. Label instructions should always be followed when using insecticides. Diesel fuel has been used as a carrier for thermal fogging agents. timeliness. insecticide. Thorough planning is required to ensure that adequate resources (equipment. Selective space treatment up to 400 metres from houses in which dengue cases have been reported is commonly practised (and is sometimes also referred to as “perifocal spraying”). and highly skilled air and ground crews. However. Space-spraying formulations are usually oil-based. maps of the areas to be sprayed showing all passable roads are helpful in planning routes. hospitals) and where dengue cases have been reported or vectors are abundant. but it creates thick smoke.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services Target area Since total coverage can rarely be achieved during ground applications. Water-based formulations are also available. high-density housing. meteorological conditions. some of which contain substances that prevent rapid evaporation. If the target area exceeds 1000 ha or cannot be covered by ground equipment within 10 days. Application procedures Space sprays can be applied either as thermal fogs at 10–50 l/ha or as ultra-lowvolume applications of undiluted or slightly diluted technical-grade insecticide in the form of a cold aerosol of droplets of controlled size (15–25 µm) at a rate of 0. cost. In most situations. a wind speed of 1–4 metres per second (approximately 67 . which may lead the community to reject its use. schools. For ground applications. operational sites. Portable or vehicle-mounted thermal or cold-fog generators can be used for ground application. The choice of insecticide formulation for space spraying in and around dwellings should be based on its immediate environmental impact and the compliance of the community. Wind speed has a strong effect on droplet distribution and contact with insects. Only if resources permit should area-wide treatment be considered. However. aerial cold fog application is sometimes used. the infection is likely to have spread to a wider area. Only insecticide products with high flash-points should be used for thermal fogging. has a strong smell and creates oily deposits. A communication plan should be prepared to inform the population. biological effectiveness and availability of equipment. Application rates vary with the susceptibility of the target species and environmental considerations.

e. Continuous entomological and epidemiological surveillance should be conducted. For application from vehicle-mounted equipment in areas with narrow roads and houses close to the roadside. Ground reconnaissance should be made before treatment and the public advised to safeguard non-target animals and beehives. Indoor treatments are the only choice where there is no access for vehicles. however. Treatment cycle When a rapid reduction in vector density is essential. Furthermore. and spotting of vehicle paintwork may result.6–15 km/h) is needed to drift droplets downwind from the line of travel. with peak flight activity in the morning and afternoon. the spray should be directed backwards from the vehicle. Indoor treatments with portable cold or thermal fog generators are particularly effective against Ae. In emergencies. to determine the appropriate application schedule and the effectiveness of the control strategy. fixed-wing aircraft are flown at slower speeds and usually lower altitudes (approximately 160 km/h. treatment. albopictus are active during the day. Ultra-low-volume aerial applications should be made only by highly skilled pilots trained to undertake spraying at the proper speeds and heights. prevention and control 3. 68 . Cold fog applications from large fixed-wing aircraft are made at approximately 240 km/h and 60 m above the ground. spraying outdoors is therefore usually carried out in the early morning or late afternoon. space treatment should ideally be carried out every 2–3 days for 10 days. Precautions Operators who carry out house-to-house space spraying using portable equipment should wear face masks in addition to normal protective clothing and should operate the equipment for short periods only. More detailed information on operational guidelines for space spraying is available in the WHO manual on this subject (5). Space spray applications should correspond to the activity of the target species. its formulation and the desired application rate. with swath spacing of 180 m. Further applications should then be made once or twice a week to sustain suppression of the adult vector population. For these species. particularly when large droplets are used. colder air closer to the ground – which occur early in the morning or in the evening when the ground temperature begins to fall. such as in emergencies. Ae. space sprays should be applied when there are temperature inversions – i. In areas with wide roads and buildings far from the roadside. Clearance from the local civil aviation authority must be sought.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Smaller. aegypti because its resting behaviour is mainly indoors. the vehicle should be driven close to the side of the road and the spray should be directed at a right angle (downwind) to the road rather than directly behind the vehicle. aegypti and Ae. Fogging with vehicle-mounted equipment in urban areas can be a traffic hazard. with a swath width of 50–100 m). 30 m above the ground. agricultural spraying aircraft can be used so long as they are fitted with rotary atomizers or other suitable nozzles calibrated for the insecticide.

as wearing contaminated gloves can be dangerous. NA = not available. • After each day’s operation.4 Safe use of insecticides All pesticides are toxic to some degree. class U = unlikely to pose an acute hazard in normal use. • All work clothes should be removed at the end of each day’s operations and a shower or bath taken.0 10 4 WHO hazard classification of active ingredientc II III III U II II II NA II U U II II III Organophosphate Organophosphate Organophosphate Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid Pyrethroid 250–300 112–600 230–330 5 1–2 1–3 2–5 1–2 0. • Safety gloves. • Work clothes should be washed regularly. The strength of the finished formulation when applied depends on the performance of the spraying equipment used. Label instructions must always be followed when using insecticides.3 Selected insecticides for cold aerosol or thermal fog application against mosquitoesa Insecticide Chemical Dosage of active ingredient (g/ha) Cold aerosols Fenitrothion Malathion Pirimiphos-methyl Bioresmethrin Cyfluthrin Cypermethrin Cyphenothrin d.5–5 0. • Particular attention should be given to washing gloves. A safety plan for insecticide application can be organized along the following lines: • Instructions on pesticide labels should be followed carefully. goggles and masks should be used for high-exposure activities such as machine calibration. safe work practices for those who apply them. 69 . • Spray operators should be provided with at least two uniforms to allow for frequent changes. • Spray operators should not be exposed to toxic material for periods that are longer than recommended.0 5–20 10–20 1.5 – 1.0 – 10–20 1. Safety precautions for their use – including care in the handling of pesticides. • Changing and washing facilities should be available.5–1. • Spray operators should wash their hands and face before eating and should not smoke during work hours.d-trans-Cyphenothrin Deltamethrin D-Phenothrin Etofenprox λ-Cyhalothrin Permethrin Resmethrin a Thermal fogsb 250–300 500–600 180–200 10 1–2 – 5–10 2. and appropriate field application – should be followed. any unused liquid larvicide should be disposed of safely. 3.0 5 2–4 CHAPTER 3 b c Adapted from: Pesticides and their application for the control of vectors and pests of public health importance (6).2. preferably daily. Class II = moderately hazardous. class III = slightly hazardous.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services Table 3. • Care must be taken in disposing of used insecticide containers.

infants. carbamates and organochlorines have been documented. Supplies for monitoring insecticide resistance in disease vectors: procedures and conditions. mosquito coils or other insecticide vaporizers may also reduce biting activity.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Accessible at: http://www. DDT resistance may predispose to pyrethroid resistance. Repellents may be applied to exposed skin or to clothing. 3. pyrethroid resistance is likely to occur sooner in mosquito populations that already have this mutation. Also. • Operator supervision by a well-trained individual is essential. • During and immediately after indoor space spray operations. In countries with a history of extensive DDT use. householders and pets must remain outside the dwelling. household insecticide aerosol products. Geneva.pdf 70 . Insecticide-treated mosquito nets afford good protection for those who sleep during the day (e. 2002. Insecticide resistance must be considered as a potentially serious threat to effective dengue vector control.g. Operationally significant levels of resistance to organophosphates. Routine monitoring of insecticide susceptibility should be integral to any programme.2. resistance may be widespread.3-methylbenzamide). the bedridden and night-shift workers). WHO has published specific guidelines on use of insecticides and safety procedures (3–7). pyrethroids. test papers and solutions are available to order from WHO1. since both insecticides have the same target site (the voltage gated sodium channel) and both have been associated with mutations in the kdr gene in Ae. cypermethrin and permethrin – are increasingly being used in favour of organophosphates for space spraying. IR3535 (3-[Nacetyl-N-butyl]-aminopropionic acid ethyl ester) or Icaridin (1-piperidinecarboxylic acid. Household fixtures such as window and door screens and air-conditioning can also reduce biting. aegypti. treatment. Where indoor biting occurs.int/whopes/resistance/en/WHO_CDS_CPE_PVC_2001.6 Individual and household protection Clothing that minimizes skin exposure during daylight hours when mosquitoes are most active affords some protection from the bites of dengue vectors and is encouraged particularly during outbreaks. N-diethyl. Repellents should contain DEET (N. aegypti have been detected in a number of countries. As a result. WHO kits for testing the susceptibility of adult and larval mosquitoes remain the standard methods for determining the susceptibility status of Aedes populations. 3. prevention and control • Blood cholinesterase levels should be monitored if organophosphate insecticides are used. World Health Organization. The use of repellents must be in strict accordance with label instructions. 2-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-methylpropylester).5 Monitoring of insecticide susceptibility Insecticides have been used widely for dengue vector control since their development. insecticide-resistant populations of Ae. Instructions on testing and for purchasing kits. Consequently.who.2. in countries such as Thailand where pyrethroids – including deltamethrin. This phenomenon reinforces the importance of carrying out routine susceptibility testing at regular intervals during any control programme.2.

difficulty in applying them and their limited utility in aquatic sites where temperature. The willingness of local communities to accept the introduction of organisms into water containers is essential. A vector control programme in northern Viet Nam using copepods in large water-storage tanks. successfully eliminated Ae. including in the area of vector control (9). so their utility is mainly restricted to container habitats that are seldom emptied or cleaned. 3. Biological control methods are effective only against the immature stages of vector mosquitoes in the larval habitat where they are introduced. In 2006.1 Fish A variety of fish species have been used to eliminate mosquitoes from larger containers used to store potable water in many countries. these successes have not been replicated in other countries.7. a WHO/TDR Scientific Working Group identified major streams of recommended research on dengue. CHAPTER 3 3. Only native larvivorous fish should be used because exotic species may escape into natural habitats and threaten the indigenous fauna.7 Biological control Biological control is based on the introduction of organisms that prey upon. although copepod populations can survive for long periods. and monitoring and restocking containers when necessary. combined with source reduction. such as large concrete or glazed clay water-storage containers or wells. The viviparous species Poecilia reticulata adapts well to these types of confined water bodies and has been most commonly used. community involvement is desirable in distributing the fish or copepods. While biological control avoids chemical contamination of the environment.2. parasitize.2. To date. Against Aedes vectors of dengue. Importantly. pH and organic pollution may exceed the narrow requirements of the organism. only certain species of larvivorous fish and predatory copepods (Copepoda: Cyclopoidea) – small freshwater crustaceans – have proved effective in operational contexts in specific container habitats.7.2 Predatory copepods Various predatory copepod species have also proved effective against dengue vectors in operational settings. as with fish. WHO has published further information on the use of fish for mosquito control (8). and even then seldom on a large scale. and in open freshwater wells. 3.2. there may be operational limitations – such as the expense and task of rearing the organisms on a large scale. concrete irrigation ditches and industrial tanks.8 Towards improved tools for vector control Some promising new dengue vector control tools are the subject of operational research but have not been sufficiently well field-tested under programmatic conditions for recommendations to be made for their use as public health interventions.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services 3. the biological control organisms are not resistant to desiccation.2. aegypti in many communes and has prevented dengue transmission for a number of years. compete with or otherwise reduce populations of the target species. 71 . However. reintroductions may be necessary for sustained control.

ITMs appear to hold promise for dengue prevention and control. autocidal ovitraps (which allow oviposition but prevent adult emergence). aegypti from the international airport. treatment. section 3. The potential advantages of lethal ovitraps for controlling Aedes vectors include their simplicity. Curtains also provide personal protection in the home. 3. aegypti is being encouraged.1 describes the main methods used in dengue vector control.2 focuses on the management approaches to their delivery. over any existing curtains if necessary) and long-lasting insecticidal fabric covers for domestic water-storage containers can reduce dengue vector densities to low levels in some communities – with prospects for reducing dengue transmission risk. lethal ovitraps with deltamethrin-treated ovistrips substantially reduced adult densities of Ae.2 Lethal ovitraps The ovitrap or oviposition trap used for surveillance of Aedes vectors can be modified to render it lethal to immature or adult populations of Ae. houseflies and other pests (10). including intrasectoral as well as intersectoral collaboration. their specificity for and effectiveness against container breeders such as Ae.2. it may offer additional prospects for dengue vector control in the home. aegypti and produced almost 100% larval mortality during a one-month field trial (12). thus reducing the number of vectors that become infective. ITMs (particularly curtains) were well accepted by the communities as their efficacy was reinforced by the reduction of other biting insects as well as cockroaches. screens. 3.8. If the application of these interventions is shown to be efficacious and cost-effective. Although more studies are needed to confirm that transmission can be reduced by this type of intervention. Life expectancy of the vector may also potentially be shortened. Window curtains. aegypti. etc. typically deployed as insecticide-treated bednets.8. schools. aegypti. all appear to warrant investigation in different settings. and the prospect of their integration with other chemical or biological control methodologies. In Singapore. and sticky ovitraps (which trap the mosquito when it lands) have been used on a limited basis. Research on the efficacy of ITMs in controlling diurnally active Ae. Further details of entomological surveillance and emergency vector control are described in Chapter 5. There is accumulating evidence that insecticide-treated window curtains (net curtains hung in windows. 72 . but this level of success has not been repeated elsewhere (11). workplace. and allow for the selection of the most appropriate ITMs by the communities that will use them. In studies in Mexico and Venezuela. In Brazil. The location or type of ITM need not be limited to those described or tested to date. prevention and control 3.4 summarizes vector surveillance and control activities and their purposes. have proved highly effective in preventing diseases transmitted by nocturnally active mosquitoes. Table 3. ovitraps used as a control device reportedly eliminated Ae.1 Insecticide-treated materials Insecticide-treated materials (ITMs).3 DELIVERY OF VECTOR CONTROL INTERVENTIONS Whereas section 3. Studies have shown that population densities can be reduced with sufficiently large numbers of frequently-serviced traps.2. Lethal ovitraps (which incorporate an insecticide on the oviposition substrate). hospitals and other locations.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. and doorway or wardrobe curtains.

Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services 3.1 Surveillance data for dengue outbreak alerts. Puerto Rico. Figure 3. Division of Vector-Borne Infectious Diseases. 73 .3. If the number of cases reported exceeds 2 SDs above the “endemic channel” in weekly or monthly reporting. This is sometimes referred to as the “endemic channel”. with confidence intervals set at two standard deviations above and below the average (±2 SD).1 Links to epidemiological services Vector control services should be closely linked to epidemiological services that capture and analyse the occurrence of dengue cases (temporal and spatial information). One such approach is to track the occurrence of current (probable) cases and compare them with the average number of cases by week (or month) of the preceding 5–7 years. The epidemiological surveillance system should be able to differentiate between transient and seasonal increases in disease incidence and increases observed at the beginning of a dengue outbreak. CHAPTER 3 Figure 3. Such an approach is epidemiologically far more meaningful than year-to-year comparisons of cumulative totals of reported cases.1 is an example from the surveillance system in Puerto Rico in 2007–2008. Puerto Rico. an outbreak alert is triggered. San Juan. 2007–2008a Notified cases 0 200 600 1 6 11 16 21 26 31 36 41 46 51 Week of first symptom 2008 2007 Historical average Epidemic threshold a Reproduced by kind permission of Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).

case report verification . Controlling the immature stages 2.active case-finding . seasonal and diel activity To monitor for insecticide resistance and its management To reduce the vector population to levels at which transmission of virus is lowered or prevented To reduce adult survival to lower vectorial capacity (for transmission of virus) To rapidly reduce vector population to slow/contain/interrupt transmission. Number of pupae 3. Relative adult abundance over time 4. Active surveillance data . Controlling adults Emergency vector control operations 1. Controlling adults Collaboration Communication and social mobilization Design communication strategies and tools to inform and mobilize communities and other partners/sectors for vector control. Insecticide susceptibility (larvae and adults) Routine vector control operations 1. Epidemiological surveillance 1. 2.specific studies. or prevent incipient outbreak Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Passive surveillance data . and case management. treatment.clinical reporting of dengue cases (probable or confirmed dengue and severe dengue) .laboratory reporting on confirmed dengue cases/ serotypes.4 Vector control services: activities and purpose Purpose 74 To describe levels of infestation and ecology of immature development stages To monitor impact of vector control To describe levels of infestation and to identify the most adult-productive container categories To focus vector control activities on the most epidemiologically important container categories to contribute to the estimation of transmission risk To measure impact of vector control activities.Table 3. Controlling the immature stages 2. prevention and control To increase awareness and collaboration with recommended actions describe trends and burden of disease detect areas of transmission outbreak detection/prediction guide epidemiological stratification To increase coordination between different players To reduce overlap of interventions and wastage of resources To increase the uptake of novel techniques To ensure appropriate training and retraining of personnel To ensure that programmes achieve what they should To ensure appropriate logistical support To ensure appropriate administrative and financial support Area of activity Specific activity Entomology Entomological surveillance 1. Presence/absence of larvae and/or pupae 2. personal protection. Support Interagency coordination Coordination between different national and international agencies involved in dengue control Innovation Assessment of novel techniques for use in the national context Capacity-training Rolling programme of training in techniques for vector control services Monitoring and evaluation Continuous monitoring and evaluation of vector control services according to established programme criteria and indicators Logistics Support of vector control services Administration and finances Support of vector control services .

weather data and so on. case data. entomological and environmental studies. managing. enforcement data. virus serotype. Figure 3. demographic and environmental data sources to be analysed by their location on earth’s surface. data are organized in different layers to describe features such as streets. train stations. Singaporea GIS allows the layering of health. analysing and displaying all forms of geographically referenced information. It allows users to choose different layers of information and to combine them according to what questions need to be answered or what data need to be analysed.2 describes the workings of a GIS. construction sites. A GIS is a collection of computer hardware. medical clinics and electoral divisions. CHAPTER 3 Points Polygons Lines a Reproduced by kind permission of ESRI South Asia Pte Ltd. demographics. schools.2 Geographical information system (GIS). buildings. In setting up a GIS to support vector control services.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services The spatial patterning of health events and disease outcomes has a long history. Above these base layers can be added entomological data. Figure 3.3 shows a snapshot of a GIS map with eight layers of data used to support vector control operations in Singapore. The development of GIS has facilitated the inclusion of a spatial component in epidemiological. shopping centres. Figure 3. Singapore. residences. 75 . software and geographical data used for capturing.

to analyse the distribution of disease data in space and space-time. 76 . Free-access computer software programs are available. some software packages and maps can be downloaded from the Internet. The availability of such information in a timely manner could determine the outcome of vector control operations and even help to reduce the intensity of outbreaks. GIS are widely used in public health to map diseases with different pathologies. Because a GIS allows epidemiologists to map environmental risk factors associated with disease vectors – such as construction sites. such mapping (epidemiological. Singapore. or to stratify areas based on characteristics of larval habitats. Singaporea a Reproduced by kind permission of the National Environment Agency. GIS technology has been found particularly useful for planning vector control operations. prevention and control Figure 3. and these locations are integrated into a GIS for mapping and analysis. Some dengue control programmes use hand-held global positioning system (GPS) devices and other hand-operated computer equipment to record data that are uploaded to a central database. for managing and deploying resources for dengue control. to identify risk factors and to map areas of risk. derelict or uninhabited premises and areas of congregation – it is especially relevant for the surveillance of vector-borne diseases such as dengue and malaria. entomological and environmental stratification) can serve to identify areas where transmission repeatedly occurs and which may warrant intensified or targeted control activities. For dengue. and for presenting the dengue situation of any locality. each case is located at either the residential or work address. treatment.3 Snapshot of geographical information system (GIS) mapping. Typically.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

• Legislative advocacy – uses federal/state/provincial/departmental/local legislative processes to promote legislation that addresses issues beyond the responsibility of any one governmental entity (e. Some actions may have a longer time frame – such as legislative and regulatory advocacy to address tyre disposal at national level – while others such as mobilizing local authorities and residents to carry out specific actions before the start of the rainy season may be timelimited. often used simultaneously.g. the establishment of sanitary landfills. While there may be different target audiences and even different objectives for the strategies. legislation to address tyre disposal at national or regional level.3. it is the coordination of actions that leads to the achievement of the overarching goal of the strategic advocacy effort. the costs and benefits of its activities and programme needs in order to enlist their support and cooperation. or the modification of housing designs or water catchment and storage systems). regulatory. or on householders and estates that fail to prevent mosquito breeding on their premises). • Administrative advocacy – informs authorities.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services Where such resources are unavailable. Strategies may include social mobilization and administrative. • Legal advocacy – uses the judicial system to enforce sanitary legislation and regulations (e. efforts to implement or modernize existing sanitary laws). One such example. • Media advocacy – systematically engages the media to place issues of community interest on the social agenda.5 shows examples of advocacy efforts in Asia and Latin America): • Social mobilization – brings people together to achieve a common goal with a shared interpretation and direction. A strategic advocacy plan usually includes one or more of the following types of advocacy (Table 3. fines on contractors whose building construction sites persistently harbour aquatic foci of dengue vectors. an annual prize-giving event involving all mass media communication channels in the subregion. legal and media advocacy (13). • Regulatory advocacy – creates rules through which legislation is implemented (e. although not dengue-specific.2 Advocacy. is the PAHO Caribbean Media Awards for Health Journalism. with a view to influencing public agendas. legislative. Multiple strategies. commercial or hand-drawn maps may be used.g. with pins or labels indicating reported data. social mobilization and legislation Advocacy is a process through which groups of stakeholders can be influenced to gain support for and reduce barriers to specific initiatives or programmes.g. 3. CHAPTER 3 77 . decision-makers and opinion leaders of the importance of the programme. are key to the success of any advocacy effort.

Legal advocacy Cuba. Brazil.5 Examples of advocacy efforts in Asia and Latin America Type of advocacy Asia Latin America Brazil.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Through administrative advocacy. modified by-laws require householders to install mosquito-proof lids on their water tanks. Media advocacy Brazil. El Salvador. Delhi. In Goa State. Fines are imposed on house owners on detection of mosquito breeding in cities such as Ahmedabad. treatment. Behavioural change is required at both individual and community levels in order to reduce vector larval habitats successfully. Singapore. Media advocacy and social mobilization are two key components of D-Day. a large-scale. regional tyre collection and processing centres were created. 78 In order to develop an appropriate communication strategy. it is necessary to understand that communication is not just the dissemination of messages through various channels . and building construction site managers are required to prevent mosquito breeding. Fines are universally imposed on house owners and businesses when Aedes breeding is found. The law requires all construction sites to have a full-time or part-time “environmental control officer” to take care of sanitation. Social mobilization Malaysia. Several municipalities of Gujarat State have framed by-laws to implement similar measures. D-Day. Through the national tyre recycling programme. After the elections. 3. Mumbai implements legislative measures to prevent mosquito breeding on premises. hygiene and vector control issues of the site. and in turn to reduce the number of adult mosquitoes available to transmit disease. Through administrative advocacy D-Day is now nationwide. Social mobilization involves the creation of “dengue prevention volunteer groups” among local grassroots organizations in the community. prevention and control Table 3.3. Singapore. Mumbai and Surat. Media advocacy and social mobilization are two key components of the dengue programme. coordinated social mobilization and media advocacy effort started out “locally” in Rio de Janeiro. activities have expanded to several other states. Administrative advocacy Malaysia. This has led to greater emphasis on social mobilization and communication activities which are fully integrated into dengue prevention and control efforts (14). House owners who create conditions favourable for mosquito breeding are penalized. The first tyre recycling centre was modelled on the Brazil programme. Large-scale social mobilization started out “locally” in Johor Bahru. Nicaragua. Brazil. Legislation exists to regulate sanitation. programme personnel initiated administrative advocacy to engage new personnel and elected officials in the COMBI process. vector-borne diseases require more than individual behaviour change in order to influence disease transmission. India.3 Social mobilization and communication Unlike chronic or sexually transmitted infections. Legislative advocacy India. Singapore. Malaysia.

To date. WHO published Planning social mobilization and communication for dengue prevention and control: a step-by-step guide (16) to assist programme managers in developing effective mobilization and communication strategies to promote behavioural change as part of routine vector control programming. religious groups. embraces the critical principle of community involvement. Understanding the precise steps needed to carry out a recommended behaviour will help programmes to shift from the use of general messages that are often ignored by the target audience to messages that promote and encourage the process of behavioural change (17). commerce and industry. and provides a platform for partners to resolve cross-agency issues and to share best practices while reducing duplication of efforts. opinion leaders.e. While many countries have a national dengue committee that may be activated during outbreaks or epidemics. urban planning. Social mobilization is not just a single activity. such as ineffective refuse disposal services or an inconsistent or poor-quality water supply. as well as municipal authorities. Networking for dengue 79 . CHAPTER 3 3. it involves all relevant segments of society (i. education and communication (or IEC) efforts) and social mobilization activities have targeted individuals and communities generally defined by geographical boundaries – such as neighbourhoods. It also takes into account the perceived needs of the people. Policy efforts require different communication strategies in order to engage the diverse target audience. and seeks to empower individuals and groups for action. Once collective actions have been identified. schools. Communication plans and strategies are often lacking.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services such as interpersonal communication or the mass media. most dengue-related communication (including more traditional information. This focus on behaviour rather than knowledge builds on many years of IEC efforts to increase community knowledge of dengue. these committees generally do not address the broader issues that lead to the ongoing propagation of the mosquito vectors of dengue fever. resulting in short-term information campaigns and ad hoc activities in reaction to outbreaks. which may include representatives from ministries of natural resources and the environment (water and sanitation). finance and tourism. communities and individuals).3. the mosquito vector(s) and their larval habitats. The guide uses the COMBI (communication-forbehavioural-impact) planning methodology to focus communication and mobilization efforts on promoting and measuring changes in behaviour. In 2004. bureaucrats and technocrats. professional groups. social mobilization can be used to engage people’s participation in achieving a specific goal through their own efforts (15).4 Collaboration within the health sector and with other sectors Intersectoral collaboration among partners is a key strategy of IVM. and houses that fall within the radius of a confirmed dengue case. Networking facilitates a more coordinated approach than the individual and independent efforts of different sectors. Communication is a two-way interactive process through which two or more participants (individuals or groups) create and share information in order to reach a common understanding and to identify areas of mutual agreement. This in turn allows for collective actions such as advocacy and social mobilization to be implemented. Little attention has been given to creating and sustaining a dialogue at policy level in order to address the underlying causes of increasing availability of vector larval habitats. and not just changes in knowledge and attitudes. decision-makers and policy-makers.

1 Collaboration within the health sector Control measures can be integrated with strong local health systems by transferring responsibility. wherein lies the responsibility for planning. prevention and control control also helps to leverage the strengths of partners and to synergize their efforts. Entities such as national health institutes and schools of public health and medicine can also contribute by carrying out activities for which the Ministry of Health may not have resources. it is critically important for the transfer of responsibility to be accompanied by the transfer of financial and technical resources. capacity-strengthening workshops or training courses in vector biology and control.4.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. for instance. sectors or municipal governments – and even the adjustment of existing policies and practices – to place public health centrally among the goals of those bodies (administrative advocacy). epidemiology. nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) and local communities. community participation and environmental health. health education. collaboration within this ministry is essential among those departments responsible for vector control and surveillance. usually the Ministry of Health. However. such as training and research projects. departmental and local). thereby enhancing the effectiveness and efficiency of actions for dengue prevention and control.g. Such cooperation is critical in emergency situations when scarce or widely dispersed human and material resources must be mobilized rapidly and their use coordinated to mitigate the effects of an epidemic. Resource-sharing is an important aspect of this (Table 3. For instance.6). the public works sector could be encouraged to give priority to improvements in water supply for those communities at highest risk of dengue. 3. treatment. Contacts.4. and other ministries and government agencies. liaison and cooperative activities should be promoted within the different divisions of the health sector. the private sector (including private health providers). the dengue control programme is usually part of the local health system. At all administrative levels of government (state. The process can be facilitated by policy adjustment. Policy adjustment The Ministry of Health and the programme manager should seek mutual agreement with other ministries. implementing. authority. Transfer can be accomplished by offering. maternal and child health (e. monitoring and evaluating the local programme. clinical diagnosis and management. requiring coordination between the lead ministry.3. 80 . 3. This cooperation with the dengue programme is necessary since the prevention and control of dengue is not the responsibility of a single department. resources and knowledge from central to local level. and communication among other topics at the local level. epidemiological surveillance. the programme on integrated management of childhood illnesses).2 Collaboration with other sectors and with the community Dengue prevention and control necessitates an effective intersectoral approach.3. Regardless of whether the programme is led by the Ministry of Health. provincial.

Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services Table 3. water run-off and catchment systems). including water and sanitation services CHAPTER 3 Ministry of Public Works Street stormwater drainage systems. The dimensions and quality of those services have a direct bearing on the availability of larval habitats. sanitation and solid waste management services to all planned communities.g. through the adoption and enforcement of housing and building codes (legislative and regulatory advocacy). sufficient resources dedicated to the collection and disposal of refuse. water supply. The ministry responsible for public works and its municipal counterparts are responsible for providing dependable water supply. Housing structure and water-storage containers. Urban development and infrastructure can be designed and managed to avoid creation of larval habitats (e. NGOs are able to mobilize resources and actions at community level on issues of common interest. and to a reliable and good quality water system). Empowerment of children with knowledge of health risks and skills to carry out actions to manage the environment. Provision of the legislative and regulatory framework to support environmental management actions and sound use of insecticides. Municipal authority Urban infrastructure and planning. Additionally. etc. Small-scale tyre businesses may have limited means to protect used tyres stored on the premises.g. This is often an entry point for community action. underground service units for telephones. and manufacturers of tyres and waterstorage tanks are examples of how the private sector may contribute – indirectly or directly – to larval habitats and to potential solutions. particularly in industrial and manufacturing sectors Nongovernmental organizations Mobilization of community action Potential roles of government ministries Public works. especially in the context of “social or environmental responsibility”. Design of water run-off drainage systems and manholes that do not create underground mosquito larval habitats. a municipality may mandate the provision of utilities such as piped water or 81 . roofing design. Ministry of Tourism Reduction of economic losses associated with dengue outbreaks Ministry of Finance and Planning Legislative framework Private sector Stewardship. Consumer packaging and petrochemical industries.6 Selected examples of potential intersectoral actions Sector Public sector Ministry of the Environment Ministry of Education Issue Solid waste management. Involvement of the hospitality sector in routine vector control actions and environmental management. promotion of healthy public policies Incorporation of environmental health issues and activities in school curricula Rationale Discarded containers and household waterstorage containers are larval habitats. Design structures that avoid the creation of mosquito larval habitats (e.

treatment. improved water supplies.g. analysis of cost and cost-effectiveness of interventions) to aid evidence-based decision-making. Education. Such opportunities are prescient when planning urban redevelopment schemes and because of the benefits of reduced risk of dengue and of mosquitoes and other pests.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. 82 . Collaboration with nongovernmental organizations NGOs can play important roles in promoting and implementing environmental management for dengue vector control. The ministry responsible for the environment can help the Ministry of Health to gather information on ecosystems and habitats in and around cities and smaller communities at high risk of dengue so as to aid in programme planning. vector biology and control. and fill tree and rock holes.g. most often involving health communication on reduction of sources and improvement of housing. Environment. food and drink containers). Such messages and skills should ideally be integrated into existing curricula to ensure long-term continuity (18). Where dengue prevention and control involve a health communication component targeted at schoolchildren. With appropriate orientation and guidance. Research programmes in universities and colleges can be encouraged to include components that generate information of direct importance (e. tyres.g. case management) or of indirect importance (e. The Ministry of Education should be a key partner as it is responsible not only for educating children and young people but also for inculcating social norms which include appropriate hygiene behaviours. During outbreaks NGOs may be influential in mobilizing householders and other community members to eliminate important larval habitats of the vector or to manage the containers in ways that do not allow mosquito emergence (e. or it may prohibit the construction of open groundwater wells. tested and evaluated for different age groups. prevention and control sewerage connections for individual households and rainwater run-off control for new housing developments. Coordination with the Ministry of Tourism can facilitate the timely communication of outbreak or epidemic alert messages to tourists and to the hotel industry so that actions can be taken to reduce the risk of exposure to infection. Health education models can be jointly developed. or can clean drains and culverts. waste characterization studies. NGOs may also encourage public cooperation and acceptance of space spraying and larvicide application measures. by emptying and cleaning water-storage containers at weekly intervals). religious groups and environmental and social action groups – should be identified as potential partners. NGOs can collect discarded containers (e. In at least one country (Singapore). the Ministry of the Environment has direct responsibility for dengue vector control and promotes healthy public policies that include sound management of public health pesticides. promotion of community sanitation. Community NGOs – which may be informal neighbourhood groups such as private volunteer organizations. Tourism.g. communicate and impart appropriate messages and skills for behaviour change. the Ministry of Health can work closely with the Ministry of Education to develop. particularly on source reduction methods. remove abandoned vehicles and roadside litter.

it is even more important to use resources in a targeted and cost-effective manner. environmental specialists. 3. CHAPTER 3 3. and with communication specialists who 83 . as in other areas of public health. plastic.6. Addressing two or more public health problems simultaneously may improve cost-effectiveness and may help promote public acceptance and involvement in the programme.Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services Communities organize themselves in many ways. aegypti. Collection of solid waste as an environmental management component of Aedes control programmes need not be restricted just to the container sources of Aedes production but can also include items that are associated with filth flies and rodents. staffing levels and capacitystrengthening are important. In particular. For example. social scientists and communication specialists play pivotal roles. their control is an effective way of reducing the risk of outbreaks of these diseases in addition to dengue. public health entomologists. so there is no prescribed formula for interaction. and can promote the collection and recycling of used tyres.3.6 Strengthening capacity In vector control. albopictus as well. control of Ae. Moreover. the latter species usually being a much greater nuisance to the public and an important vector of lymphatic filariasis in many tropical environments. aegypti in some urban areas can be combined with control of Culex quinquefasciatus. Ae. However. Collaboration with industry and the private sector Collaboration with industry and the private sector can advance the manufacture and utilization of mosquito-proof designs of water-storage containers and room-coolers. In the construction industry. In many cities in India. aegypti and the malaria vector Anopheles stephensi share common larval habitats and can be targeted simultaneously. There are many examples of voluntary organizations and women’s associations taking the lead in providing money.3. social mobilization initiatives must be socially and culturally sensitive and should be developed between partners in a spirit of mutual respect. 3. This can be accomplished by working with social scientists who have expertise in using behavioural change theories in programme development.3. and chikungunya by Ae. glass and other containers. vector control personnel.5 Integrated approaches to control Instead of targeting only the vector or vectors of dengue. architects’ associations can help to promote the design and building of mosquito-proof and otherwise healthy houses and workplaces. there may be opportunities to integrate Aedes control with control of pests or vectors of other diseases. advertising and political support to successful communitybased campaigns for source reduction or in organizing regular household activities to reduce mosquito populations.1 Social scientists and communication specialists Because social mobilization and communication are often the least planned and most under-funded elements of the dengue prevention and control programme. aluminium. given that urban yellow fever and chikungunya viruses are also transmitted by Ae.

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control

have a background preferably in health communication (i.e. the use of communication strategies to inform and influence individual and community decisions that enhance health). This will require that the dengue programme includes in its annual budget an allocation for social mobilization and communication activities in order to integrate these specialists into routine programme planning. Most ministries of health have health promotion or health education departments, and it is increasingly common to find communication included in them. However, communication is frequently viewed as use of the mass media, and therefore the communication specialists may be individuals with backgrounds in public relations, journalism or mass media who have limited knowledge of the principles of health promotion or behavioural change. In this case it is even more important to involve a health promotion specialist or a social scientist to ensure that the messages focus on appropriate and feasible behaviours that target the principal vector larval habitats, and that the impact of the social mobilization and communication activities are evaluated for changes in behaviour and not just for changes in knowledge or attitudes. Health promotion and health education personnel can generally be found at the central and state or provincial levels, while at the local level this role may be filled by a nurse or social worker if a person qualified in communication is not part of the health clinic staffing. Ongoing training and practice in communication at all levels is critical for ensuring appropriate and effective interpersonal communication between vector control staff and householders, between the dengue programme manager and vector control staff, and between the dengue programme manager and partners within and outside the health sector. When and how to use the mass media at national, regional and local levels can be determined in collaboration with the communications specialist. Using the media may entail training sessions in public speaking for key spokespersons within the programme as well as for epidemiologists and medical personnel who may also be required to speak to the media. Training in how to work with the media, particularly during an outbreak or epidemic, is vital to ensure that accurate and useful information is shared with the broader community through the media, to avoid sending mixed messages about what is expected of the community during the outbreak and to reduce the chance of misinterpretation or sensationalization of information (particularly the number of cases of dengue). 3.3.6.2 Public health entomologists and vector control and environmental management personnel The skills for managing, implementing, monitoring and evaluating the programme must be determined in accordance with availability of resources, programme objectives and intervention strategies. Training activities, including in-service training, should be tailored to the needs of the various groups of personnel. WHO has published guidance on needs assessment for all components of the dengue control programme (19). Whether or not vector control activities are aligned with centralized or decentralized health systems, and whether they are distinct from or integrated with other health sector

84

Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services

activities, the available skills at any given level of administrative responsibility should be commensurate with those responsibilities. This is equally important for the purposes of financial and operational planning – including workforce planning and strategic, technical guidance – as well as for essential physical infrastructure.

3.3.7 Operational research
Operational research should be oriented to the priority needs of the programme in order to generate the evidence base for adaptation of strategies and interventions. This may include, for example, studies on the ecology of the vector, the efficacy, effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of existing and promising new vector control methods, formative research on relevant cultural practices, and guidance for engaging communities in programme activities.
CHAPTER 3

3.3.8 Monitoring and evaluation
Regular monitoring of the delivery of dengue prevention and control services and evaluation of the impact of interventions are important activities for effective programme management. Suitable indicators should be identified to measure the progress of implementation, as well as output and outcome indicators. Table 3.7 gives examples of good and bad practice in dengue prevention and control.

Table 3.7 Dengue prevention and control: examples of good and bad practice
Activity Environmental management Good practice Determining local ecology of immature stages as a basis for choosing the most appropriate interventions Bad practice

Investing disproportionately in chemical control methods when affordable and more sustainable environmental management solutions are available. Integrating dengue control with sanitation, Responding primarily to outbreaks and not solid waste disposal, water supply services, investing in sustained vector control measures. and other vector and pest control programmes Using insecticides judiciously Using chemical control methods without evaluating efficacy and cost-effectiveness, and without monitoring local vector susceptibility. Social marketing of larvicides for water-storage containers, with consequent low coverage rates.

Chemical control

Municipal services

Intersectoral collaboration on urban development or renewal to minimize availability of larval habitats of dengue vectors and vectors of other diseases Monitoring of vector populations to target control in time and space, and to provide feedback for programme adjustment

Entomological monitoring and surveillance

Generating routine entomological surveillance data that are not analysed or utilized in a timely and efficient manner for management decisionmaking.

85

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control

3.4 REFERENCES
1. WHO. Global strategic framework for integrated vector management. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2004 (Document WHO/CDS/CPE/2004.10, available at: http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2004/WHO_CDS_CPE_PVC_2004_10.pdf; accessed October 2008). 2. PAHO. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever in the Americas: guidelines for prevention and control. Washington, DC, Pan American Health Organization, 1994 (Scientific publication, No. 548). 3. WHO. Guidelines for drinking-water quality, 3rd ed., incorporating first addendum. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2006 (available at: http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq3rev/en/index.html; accessed October 2008). 4. WHO. WHOPES guidelines for insecticide resistance. Available at: http://www. who.int/whopes/guidelines/en/; accessed October 2008. 5. WHO. Space spray application of insecticides for vector and pest control: a practitioner’s guide. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2003 (Document WHO/ CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2003.5). 6. WHO. Pesticides and their application for the control of vectors and pests of public health importance. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2006 (Document WHO/ CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2006.1; available at: http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2006/WHO_CDS_NTD_WHOPES_GCDPP_ 2006.1_eng.pdf). 7. WHO. Safe use of pesticides. Fourteenth report of the WHO Expert Committee on Vector Biology and Control. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1991 (WHO Technical Report Series, No. 813). 8. WHO/EMRO. Use of fish for mosquito control. Cairo, World Health Organization Regional Office for the Eastern Mediterranean, 2003 (Document WHO/EM/ MAL/289/E/G). 9. WHO/TDR. Report of the Scientific Working Group on Dengue (TDR/SWG/08). Geneva, World Health Organization, Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases, 2006 (available at: http://www.who.int/tdr/publications/ publications/swg_dengue_2.htm; accessed October 2008). 10. Kroeger A et al. Effective control of dengue vectors with curtains and water container covers treated with insecticide in Mexico and Venezuela: cluster randomized trials. British Medical Journal, 2006, 332:1247–1252.

86

14. 2003. 16. Community health advocacy. Proceedings of the First SEAMEO-TROPMED Workshop. New York. Geneva. Planning social mobilization and communication for dengue fever prevention and control: a step-by-step guide. 2004. Environmental Health Project. 18.who. Inc.pdf. United Nations Children’s Fund. Guidelines for conducting a review of a national dengue prevention and control programme. 2005 (Document WHO/ CDS/CPE/PVC/2005. accessed October 2008). World Health Organization. Lloyd L. WHO.13).Chapter 3: Vector management and delivery of vector control services 11. 2000. MA. 2003 (Strategic Report No. and strategies. UNICEF. Kluwer Academic/Plenum Press.Communication handbook for polio eradication and routine EPI. 15. Geneva.int/tdr/publications/publications/pdf/planning_ dengue. 2005 (pp 305–320). Jones and Bartlett Publishers. CHAPTER 3 87 . Loue S. Communication-for-Behavioural-Impact (COMBI): a review of WHO’s experiences with strategic social mobilization and communication in the prevention and control of communicable diseases. In: Haider M. The eradication of Aedes aegypti at the Singapore Paya Lebar International Airport. Best practices for dengue prevention and control in the Americas. 7). 12. NY. Bangkok. Lloyd LS. Renganathan E et al. Global public health communication: challenges. Parks W. 17:205–210.. Washington. New York. DC. NY. Community participation in environmental management for dengue vector control: experiences from the English-speaking Caribbean. Chan KL. 2004 (available at: http://www. ed. 28(Suppl):13–16. Wiltshire A. Sudbury. Dengue Bulletin. Vector control in South-East Asia. 1973 (pp 85–88). Lloyd LS. In: Chan YC. SEAMEO. eds. Lloyd LS. Medical and Veterinary Entomology. 2003. Nathan MB. 1972. 13. O’Shea DJ. Field evaluation of a lethal ovitrap against dengue vectors in Brazil. Perich M et al. perspectives. 19. World Health Organization. 17. Ho BC. Singapore.

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. treatment. prevention and control 88 .

Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 4 LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS AND DIAGNOSTIC TESTS 89 .

treatment. prevention and control 90 .Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

During a secondary dengue infection (a dengue infection in a host that has previously been infected by a dengue virus. early detection of severe cases. virus isolation.g. Japanese encephalitis. During the early stages of the disease. IgM/IgG antibody ratios are now more commonly used than the haemagglutination-inhibition test (HI) (6–8). the patients develop a primary antibody response characterized by a slow increase of specific antibodies. When dengue infection occurs in persons who have not previously been infected with a flavivirus or immunized with a flavivirus vaccine (e. increasing slowly thereafter. 91 . even in the acute phase. academic research. with serum IgG still detectable after several months. antigens or antibodies. pathogenesis. surveillance activities. viral nucleic acid. Early convalescent stage IgM levels are significantly lower in secondary infections than in primary ones and may be undetectable in some cases. outbreak control. antibody titres rise rapidly and react broadly against many flaviviruses. plasma.1 OVERVIEW Efficient and accurate diagnosis of dengue is of primary importance for clinical care (i. tick-borne encephalitis). the type of laboratory facilities and technical expertise available. IgM antibodies are the first immunoglobulin isotype to appear. serology is the method of choice for diagnosis. At the end of the acute phase of infection. A range of laboratory diagnostic methods has been developed to support patient management and disease control. clinical diagnosis. epidemiological survey. The choice of diagnostic method depends on the purpose for which the testing is done (e. costs. depending on the test used (5). To distinguish primary and secondary dengue infections. vaccine development. These antibodies are detectable in 50% of patients by days 3-5 after onset of illness. or a combination of these techniques. Anti-dengue serum IgG is generally detectable at low titres at the end of the first week of illness. the virus can be detected in serum. and clinical trials. for yellow fever. case confirmation and differential diagnosis with other infectious diseases). IgM levels peak about two weeks after the onset of symptoms and then decline generally to undetectable levels over 2–3 months. Laboratory diagnosis methods for confirming dengue virus infection may involve detection of the virus.g. or sometimes after non-dengue flavivirus vaccination or infection). nucleic acid or antigen detection can be used to diagnose the infection.e. After the onset of illness. and the time of sample collection.1).Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests CHAPTER 4. vaccine development). circulating blood cells and other tissues for 4–5 days. and persists for periods lasting from 10 months to life. and probably even for life (2–4) . LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS AND DIAGNOSTIC TESTS 4. increasing to 80% by day 5 and 99% by day 10 (Figure 4. CHAPTER 4 Antibody response to infection differs according to the immune status of the host (1). The dominant immunoglobulin isotype is IgG which is detectable at high levels.

Figure 4.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.2 shows a general inverse relationship between the ease of use or accessibility of a diagnostic method and the confidence in the results of the test. while rapid tests may compromise sensitivity and specificity for the ease of performance and speed.D IgG secondary infection ≥25 60 80 0 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 90 >90 Days Onset of symptoms (days) In general. tests with high sensitivity and specificity require more complex technologies and technical expertise. Figure 4. prevention and control Figure 4. Virus isolation and nucleic acid detection are more labour-intensive and costly but are also more specific than antibody detection using serologic methods. treatment.D IgM primary IgM secondary IgG secondary O.1 Approximate time-line of primary and secondary dengue virus infections and the diagnostic methods that can be used to detect infection NS1 detection Virus isolation RNA detection Viraemia O.2 Comparison of diagnostic tests according to their accessibility and confidence ACCESSIBILITY DIRECT METHODS INDIRECT METHODS Virus isolation Genome detection NS1 detection Serology IgM Serology IgG CONFIDENCE 92 .

by detection of viral RNA by nucleic acid amplification tests (NAAT). However. a diagnosis based only on clinical symptoms is unreliable. are expensive and are under evaluation for diagnostic accuracy and cost-effectiveness in multiple settings.1 Clinical management Dengue virus infection produces a broad spectrum of symptoms. $$$ BSL-2/BSL-3a laboratory. Early laboratory confirmation of clinical diagnosis may be valuable because some patients progress over a short period from mild to severe disease and sometimes to death. . whole blood 1–5 days Antigen detection Not yet determined Confirmed 1 day >1 day 1–6 days NA ELISA facilities Facilities for histology $$ $$$ IgM ELISA IgM rapid test IgG (paired sera) by ELISA.2 CONSIDERATIONS IN THE CHOICE OF DIAGNOSTIC METHODS 4. it is important to keep blood samples cooled or frozen to preserve the viability of the virus during transport from the patient to the laboratory. Currently. plasma. The isolation and identification of dengue viruses in cell cultures usually takes several days. whole blood Serum. HI or neutralization test a Probable 1–2 days 30 minutes After 5 days ELISA facilities No additional supplies $ $ 93 Confirmed 7 days or more Acute sera. many of which are non-specific.1 summarizes various dengue diagnostic methods and their costs. Thus. Rapid dengue antigen detection tests can be used in field settings and provide results in less than an hour. in order to avoid contamination.2.Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests 4. plasma. tests must observe quality control procedures and must be performed by experienced technicians. Table 4. equipment for molecular biology $$$ Nucleic acid detection Confirmed 1 or 2 days Tissues. plasma Serum Tissue for immuno-chemistry Serum.1 Summary of operating characteristics and comparative costs of dengue diagnostic methods (9) Diagnostic methods Diagnosis of acute infection Confirmed Time to results Specimen Time of collection after onset of symptoms 1–5 days Facilities Cost CHAPTER 4 Viral isolation and serotype identification 1–2 weeks Whole blood. tissues Mosquito or cell culture facilities. Early intervention may be life-saving. during the febrile period. these assays are not type-specific. serum. dengue infections may be diagnosed by virus isolation in cell culture. serum. fluorescence microscope or molecular biology equipment BSL-2 laboratory. these tests require expensive equipment and reagents and. NS1 antigen detection kits now becoming commercially available can be used in laboratories with limited equipment and yield results within a few hours. 1–5 days. For virus culture. convalescent after 15 days ELISA facilities BSL-2 laboratory for neutralization assay Requirements may vary according to each country’s national policies. Before day 5 of illness. Table 4. Nucleic acid detection assays with excellent performance characteristics may identify dengue viral RNA within 24–48 hours. whole blood. or by detection of viral antigens by ELISA or rapid tests. Virus isolation in cell culture is usually performed only in laboratories with the necessary infrastructure and technical expertise.

leptospirosis. however. Reliance on rapid tests to diagnose dengue infections should be approached with caution. Depending on the geographical origin of the patient. Rickettsial diseases (Rickettsia prowazeki. since the performance of all commercial tests has not yet been evaluated by reference laboratories (10). However. treatment. Specimen transport is not a problem as immunoglobulins are stable at tropical room temperatures. Crimean-Congo haemorrhagic fever.). Orientia tsutsugamushi. typhoid. Bunyaviridae: hantaviruses. R. Dengue serologic tests are more available in dengueendemic countries than are virological tests. 4. R. Coxiella burneti. R. mooseri. and other causes of fever such as malaria. Zika. and West Nile.1.. Results of rapid tests may be available within less than one hour. prevention and control After day 5. other etiologies – including non-dengue flavivirus infections – should be ruled out. etc.2 Interpretation of dengue diagnostic tests [adapted from Dengue and Control (DENCO) study] Highly suggestive One of the following: 1. NS1 antigen may be detected in some patients for a few days after defervescence. etc. dengue viruses and antigens disappear from the blood coincident with the appearance of specific antibodies. Japanese encephalitis. IgG seroconversion in paired sera or fourfold IgG titer increase in paired sera 94 . St Louis encephalitis. For serology.1 Differential diagnosis Dengue fever can easily be confused with non-dengue illnesses. haemorrhagic fevers (Arenaviridae: Junin. IgM seroconversion in paired sera 4. Virus culture + 3. Low levels of a detectable dengue IgM response – or the absence of it – in some secondary infections reduces the diagnostic accuracy of IgM ELISA tests.2). measles. etc. Filoviridae: Marburg. Both the identification of virus/viral RNA/viral antigen and the detection of an antibody response are preferable for dengue diagnosis to either approach alone (see Table 4. These include yellow fever. IgM + in a single serum sample 2. enteroviruses. IgG + in a single serum sample with a HI titre of 1280 or greater Confirmed One of the following: 1. A four-fold or greater increase in antibody levels measured by IgG ELISA or by haemagglutination inhibition (HI) test in paired sera indicates an acute or recent flavivirus infection.).2. rickettsi. particularly in nonepidemic situations. Table 4. Ebola. the time of specimen collection is more flexible than that for virus isolation or RNA detection because an antibody response can be measured by comparing a sample collected during the acute stage of illness with samples collected weeks or months later.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. waiting for the convalescent serum collected at the time of patient discharge is not very useful for diagnosis and clinical management and provides only a retrospective result. influenza and influenza-like illnesses. PCR + 2. alphaviruses (such as Sinbis and chikungunya). conori.

One of the priorities in a suspected outbreak is to identify the causative agent so that appropriate public health measures can be taken and physicians can be encouraged to initiate appropriate acute illness management. and others with signs of haemorrhages. dengue viruses as well as against non-dengue flaviviruses.3 Surveillance Dengue surveillance systems aim to detect the circulation of specific viruses in the human or mosquito populations. but results are preferably confirmed with reliable serological tests performed in a reference laboratory with broad arbovirus diagnostic capability.2. After a second dengue virus infection. Serological assays may be used to determine the extent of outbreaks. specific and affordable for the country.2. This cross reactivity results from memory B-cells which produce antibodies directed at virion epitopes shared by dengue viruses. 4. The plaque reduction and neutralization test (PRNT) and the microneutralization assays are commonly used to measure protection correlates. Following primary infections in non-flavivirus immunes. and has a robust performance. is easy to perform.12).Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests Unfortunately. 4. while still others may be observed during the convalescent phase. the highest neutralizing antibody titre is often directed against the first infecting virus and not the most recent one. This phenomenon is referred to as “original antigenic sin” (13). 95 CHAPTER 4 . commercial IgM ELISA or sensitive dengue IgM rapid tests may suggest a dengue outbreak. is affordable for different health systems. is not yet available.2. The diagnostic tools used should be sensitive. The assay is based on the principle that neutralizing antibodies inactivate the virus so that it is no longer able to infect and replicate in target cells. 4.2 Outbreak investigations During outbreaks some patients may be seen presenting with fever with or without rash during the acute illness stage. high-titre neutralizing antibodies are produced against at least two. an ideal diagnostic test that permits early and rapid diagnosis. This assay is the most reliable means of measuring the titre of neutralizing antibodies in the serum of an infected individual as a measure of the level of protection against an infecting virus. the rapidity and specificity of diagnostic tests is more important than test sensitivity. neutralizing antibodies as measured by PRNT may be relatively or completely specific to the infecting virus type (11. some others may present with signs of plasma leakage or shock.4 Vaccine trials Vaccine trials are performed in order to measure vaccine safety and efficacy in vaccinated persons. If specimens are collected after day 5 of illness. Laboratories responsible for surveillance are usually national and/or reference laboratories capable of performing diagnostic tests as described above for dengue and for a broad range of other etiologies. Samples collected from febrile patients could be tested by nucleic acid methods in a well-equipped laboratory or a broader spectrum of laboratories using an ELISA-based dengue antigen detection kit. In such cases. and often all four. During the early convalescent stage following sequential dengue infections.

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control

The disadvantages of PRNT are that it is labour-intensive. A number of laboratories recently developed high through-put neutralization tests that can be used in large-scale surveillance studies and vaccine trials. Variable results have been observed in PRNTs performed in different laboratories. Variations can be minimized if tests are performed on standard cell lines using the same virus strains and the same temperature and time for incubation of virus with antibody. Input virus should be carefully calculated to avoid plaque overlap. Cell lines of mammalian origin, such as VERO cells, are recommended for the production of seed viruses for use in PRNT. The microneutralization assay is based on the same principle as PRNT. Variable methods exist. In one, instead of counting the number of plaques per well, viral antigen is stained using a labelled antibody and the quantity of antigen measured colorimetrically. The test may measure nucleic acid using PCR. The microneutralization assay was designed to use smaller amounts of reagents and for testing larger numbers of samples. In viral antigen detection tests the spread of virus throughout the cells is not limited because, in PRNTs using semisolid overlays, the time after infection must be standardized to avoid measuring growth after many cycles of replication. Since not all viruses grow at the same rate, the incubation periods are virus-specific. As with standard PRNTs, antibodies measured by micromethods from individuals with secondary infections may react broadly with all four dengue viruses.
Table 4.3 Advantages and limitations of dengue diagnostic methods (9)
Indications Diagnosis of acute dengue infection Diagnostic Tests Nucleic acid detection Isolation in cell culture and identification using immuno-fluorescence Antigen detection in clinical specimens Serologic tests: IgM tests Seroconversion: 4-fold rise in HI or ELISA IgG titres between acute and convalescent samples Advantages •Most sensitive and specific •Possible to identify serotype •Early appearance (pre-antibody), so opportunity to impact on patient management •Specific •Possible to identify serotype by using specific antibodies •Easy to perform •Opportunity for early diagnosis may impact on patient treatment •Useful for confirmation of acute infection •Least expensive •Easy to perform •Can distinguish between primary and secondary infection Limitations •Potential false positive due to contamination •Expensive •Needs expertise and expensive laboratory equipment •Not possible to differentiate between primary and secondary infection •Need expertise and facility for cell culture and fluorescent microscopy •Takes more than 1 week •Not possible to differentiate between primary and secondary infection •Not as sensitive as virus isolation or RNA detection •May miss cases because IgM levels may be low or undetectable in some secondary infections •Need two samples •Delay in confirming diagnosis

Surveillance IgM detection and outbreak identification; Monitor effectiveness Viral isolation and of interventions RNA detection 96

•Identify probable dengue cases •Easy to perform for case detection in sentinel laboratories •Confirm cases •Identify serotypes

•May miss cases because IgM levels may be low in secondary infections

•Can be performed only in reference laboratories •Need acute samples

Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests

In drug trials, patients should have confirmed etiological diagnosis (see Table 4.2 for highly suggestive and confirmed diagnosis). Table 4.3 summarizes the advantages and limitations of each of the diagnostic methods for each purpose.

4.3

CURRENT DENGUE DIAGNOSTIC METHODS

4.3.1 Virus isolation
Specimens for virus isolation should be collected early in the course of the infection, during the period of viraemia (usually before day 5). Virus may be recovered from serum, plasma and peripheral blood mononuclear cells and attempts may be made from tissues collected at autopsy (e.g. liver, lung, lymph nodes, thymus, bone marrow). Because dengue virus is heat-labile, specimens awaiting transport to the laboratory should be kept in a refrigerator or packed in wet ice. For storage up to 24 hours, specimens should be kept at between +4 °C and +8 °C. For longer storage, specimens should be frozen at -70 °C in a deep-freezer or stored in a liquid nitrogen container. Storage even for short periods at –20 °C is not recommended. Cell culture is the most widely used method for dengue virus isolation. The mosquito cell line C6/36 (cloned from Ae. albopictus) or AP61 (cell line from Ae. pseudoscutellaris) are the host cells of choice for routine isolation of dengue virus. Since not all wild type dengue viruses induce a cytopathic effect in mosquito cell lines, cell cultures must be screened for specific evidence of infection by an antigen detection immunofluorescence assay using serotype-specific monoclonal antibodies and flavivirus group-reactive or dengue complex-reactive monoclonal antibodies. Several mammalian cell cultures, such as Vero, LLCMK2, and BHK21, may also be used but are less efficient. Virus isolation followed by an immunofluorescence assay for confirmation generally requires 1–2 weeks and is possible only if the specimen is properly transported and stored to preserve the viability of the virus in it. When no other methods are available, clinical specimens may also be inoculated by intracranial route in suckling mice or intrathoracic inoculation of mosquitoes. Newborn animals can develop encephalitis symptoms but with some dengue strains mice may exhibit no signs of illness. Virus antigen is detected in mouse brain or mosquito head squashes by staining with anti-dengue antibodies.

CHAPTER 4

4.3.2 Nucleic acid detection
RNA is heat-labile and therefore specimens for nucleic acid detection must be handled and stored according to the procedures described for virus isolation. 4.3.2.1 RT-PCR Since the 1990s, several reverse transcriptase-polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) assays have been developed. They offer better sensitivity compared to virus isolation
97

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control

with a much more rapid turnaround time. In situ RT-PCR offers the ability to detect dengue RNA in paraffin-embedded tissues. All nucleic acid detection assays involve three basic steps: nucleic acid extraction and purification, amplification of the nucleic acid, and detection and characterization of the amplified product. Extraction and purification of viral RNA from the specimen can be done by traditional liquid phase separation methods (e.g. phenol, chloroform) but has been gradually replaced by silica-based commercial kits (beads or columns) that are more reproducible and faster, especially since they can be automated using robotics systems. Many laboratories utilize a nested RT-PCR assay, using universal dengue primers targeting the C/prM region of the genome for an initial reverse transcription and amplification step, followed by a nested PCR amplification that is serotype-specific (14). A combination of the four serotype-specific oligonucleotide primers in a single reaction tube (one-step multiplex RT-PCR) is an interesting alternative to the nested RT-PCR (15). The products of these reactions are separated by electrophoresis on an agarose gel, and the amplification products are visualized as bands of different molecular weights in the agarose gel using ethidium bromide dye, and compared with standard molecular weight markers. In this assay design, dengue serotypes are identified by the size of their bands. Compared to virus isolation, the sensitivity of the RT-PCR methods varies from 80% to 100% and depends on the region of the genome targeted by the primers, the approach used to amplify or detect the PCR products (e.g. one-step RT-PCR versus two-step RTPCR), and the method employed for subtyping (e.g. nested PCR, blot hybridization with specific DNA probes, restriction site-specific PCR, sequence analysis, etc.). To avoid false positive results due to non-specific amplification, it is important to target regions of the genome that are specific to dengue and not conserved among flavi- or other related viruses. False-positive results may also occur as a result of contamination by amplicons from previous amplifications. This can be prevented by physical separation of different steps of the procedure and by adhering to stringent protocols for decontamination. 4.3.2.2 Real-time RT-PCR The real-time RT-PCR assay is a one step assay system used to quantitate viral RNA and using primer pairs and probes that are specific to each dengue serotype. The use of a fluorescent probe enables the detection of the reaction products in real time, in a specialized PCR machine, without the need for electrophoresis. Many real-time RT-PCR assays have been developed employing TaqMan or SYBR Green technologies. The TaqMan real-time PCR is highly specific due to the sequence-specific hybridization of the probe. Nevertheless, primers and probes reported in publications may not be able to detect all dengue virus strains: the sensitivity of the primers and probes depends on their homology with the targeted gene sequence of the particular virus analyzed. The SYBR green real-time RT-PCR has the advantage of simplicity in primer design and uses universal RT-PCR protocols but is theoretically less specific. Real-time RT-PCR assays are either “singleplex” (i.e. detecting only one serotype at a time) or “multiplex” (i.e. able to identify all four serotypes from a single sample). The multiplex assays have the advantage that a single reaction can determine all four serotypes without the potential for introduction of contamination during manipulation of the sample. However the multiplex real-time RT-PCR assays, although faster, are currently less sensitive than nested RT-PCR assays. An advantage of this method is the ability to

98

1 MAC-ELISA For the IgM antibody-capture enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (MAC-ELISA) total IgM in patients’ sera is captured by anti-µ chain specific antibodies (specific to human IgM) coated onto a microplate. Loop mediated amplification methods have also been described but their performance compared to other nucleic acid amplification methods are not known (18).3. immunoperoxidase and avidin-biotin enzyme assays allow detection of dengue virus antigen in acetone-fixed leucocytes and in snap-frozen or formalin-fixed tissues collected at autopsy. Their performance and utility are currently being evaluated by laboratories worldwide. CHAPTER 4 4. from one to four serotypes (DEN-1. -3. including the WHO/TDR/PDVI laboratory network.4. detection of dengue antigens in acute-phase serum was rare in patients with secondary infections because such patients had pre-existing virus-IgG antibody immunocomplexes. though they do not differentiate between dengue serotypes. Fluorescent antibody. Many studies have been directed at using the detection of NS1 to make an early diagnosis of dengue virus infection. -2.3.3. The NS1 glycoprotein is produced by all flaviviruses and is secreted from mammalian cells. and -4). New developments in ELISA and dot blot assays directed to the envelop/membrane (E/M) antigen and the non-structural protein 1 (NS1) demonstrated that high concentrations of these antigens in the form of immune complexes could be detected in patients with both primary and secondary dengue infections up to nine days after the onset of illness. 4. which may be used to study the pathogenesis of dengue disease (16). NASBA has been adapted to dengue virus detection with sensitivity near that of virus isolation in cell cultures and may be a useful method for studying dengue infections in field studies (17).Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests determine viral titre in a clinical sample. NS1 produces a very strong humoral response. Dengue-specific antigens.3 Detection of antigens Until recently. Detection of the amplified RNA is accomplished either by electrochemiluminescence or in real-time with fluorescent-labelled molecular beacon probes.2. 4.3 Isothermal amplification methods The NASBA (nucleic acid sequence based amplification) assay is an isothermal RNAspecific amplification assay that does not require thermal cycling instrumentation. are bound to the captured anti-dengue IgM antibodies and are detected by monoclonal or polyclonal dengue antibodies directly or indirectly conjugated with an 99 .3.4 Serological tests 4. The initial stage is a reverse transcription in which the single-stranded RNA target is copied into a double-stranded DNA molecule that serves as a template for RNA transcription. Commercial kits for the detection of NS1 antigen are now available.

It is not possible to use IgM assays to identify dengue serotypes as these antibodies are broadly cross-reactive even following primary infections. blood on filter paper and saliva. some authors have described MAC-ELISA (Figure 4.3. Different commercial kits (ELISA or rapid tests) are available but have variable sensitivity and specificity.4.2 IgG ELISA The IgG ELISA is used for the detection of recent or past dengue infections (if paired sera are collected within the correct time frame).3) that could allow serotype determination but further evaluations are required (19). MAC-ELISA has good sensitivity and specificity but only when used five or more days after the onset of fever. leptospirosis and past dengue infection (10).Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. does not seem to be a problem but some false positives were obtained in sera from patients with malaria. Serum. can be used for detection of IgM if samples are taken within the appropriate time frame (five days or more after the onset of fever). Recently. These limitations have to be taken into account when using the tests in regions where these pathogens co-circulate. Serum specimens may be tested at a single dilution or at multiple dilutions. Most of the antigens used for this assay are derived from the dengue virus envelope protein (usually virus-infected cell culture supernatants or suckling mouse brain preparations). Figure 4. but not urine. finding that ELISAs generally performed better than rapid tests. A WHO/TDR/PDVI laboratory network recently evaluated selected commercial ELISAs and first-generation rapid diagnostic tests. Cross-reactivity with other circulating flaviviruses such as Japanese encephalitis. St Louis encephalitis and yellow fever. prevention and control enzyme that will transform a non-coloured substrate into coloured products. The optical density is measured by spectrophotometer. This assay uses the same antigens as the 100 .3 Principle of a MAC-ELISA test Spectrophotometer Non-coloured substrate Coloured substrate Anti-dengue Ab conjugated with enzyme DEN antigen Non dengue-specific IgM Patient’s IgM Anti-µ chain Microplate 4. It is recommended that tests be evaluated against a panel of sera from relevant diseases in a particular region before being released to the market. treatment.

5 Haemagglutination-inhibition test The haemagglutination-inhibition (HI) test (see Figure 4. Anti-dengue antibodies in sera can inhibit this agglutination and the potency of this inhibition is measured in an HI test.2 or 1. newly produced antibodies are less avid than antibodies produced months or years after infection. 4. and then adsorbed with gander or trypsinized type O human RBC to remove non-specific agglutinins.3 IgM/IgG ratio A dengue virus E/M protein-specific IgM/IgG ratio can be used to distinguish primary from secondary dengue virus infections. The IgA titre peaks around day 8 after onset of fever and decreases rapidly until it is undetectable by day 40. This system is based in the competition for the antigen sites by IgG dengue antibodies in the sample and the conjugated human IgG anti-dengue. Serum samples are treated with acetone or kaolin to remove non-specific inhibitors of haemagglutination. No differences in IgA titres were found by authors between patients with primary or secondary infections. dengue infection is defined as primary if the IgM/IgG OD ratio is greater than 1. IgM capture and IgG capture ELISAs are the most common assays for this purpose. the two methods could be performed together to help in interpreting dengue serology (22. Such tests are not in wide use and are not available commercially.4 IgA Positive detection for serum anti-dengue IgA as measured by anti-dengue virus IgA capture ELISA (AAC-ELISA) often occurs one day after that for IgM. IgG ELISA lacks specificity within the flavivirus serocomplex groups.23).4 (using patient’s sera at 1/20 dilutions).Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests MAC-ELISA. thus indicating the need for better standardization of test performance (8).22). This algorithm has also been adopted by some commercial vendors.4. An ELISA inhibition method (EIM) to detect IgG dengue antibodies (20) is also used for the serological diagnosis and surveillance of dengue cases.4) is based on the ability of dengue antigens to agglutinate red blood cells (RBC) of ganders or trypsinized human O RBC. IgG antibodies are lifelong as measured by E/M antigen-coated indirect IgG ELISA. Each batch 101 .4. This method can be used to detect IgG antibodies in serum or plasma and filter-paper stored blood samples and permits identification of a case as a primary or secondary dengue infection (20. ratios may vary between laboratories. Even though IgA values are generally lower than IgM. This approach is not used very often and requires additional evaluation.4. CHAPTER 4 4. However.21.2 (using patient’s sera at 1/100 dilution) or 1. both in serum and saliva. 4. Antibody avidity is used in a few laboratories to discriminate primary and secondary dengue infections.3. In general. Test results correlate well with the haemagglutination-inhibition test.3. Following viral infections.3. In some laboratories. but a fourfold or greater increase in IgG antibodies in acute and convalescent paired sera can be used to document recent infections. The infection is secondary if the ratio is less than 1. The use of E/M-specific capture IgG ELISA (GAC) allows detection of IgG antibodies over a period of 10 months after the infection.4.

Optimally the HI test requires paired sera obtained upon hospital admission (acute) and discharge (convalescent) or paired sera with an interval of more than seven days. is suggestive of hypovolaemia due to vascular permeability and plasma leakage. prevention and control of antigens and RBC is optimized. PH optima of each dengue haemagglutinin requires the use of multiple different pH buffers for each serotype. A drop of the platelet count below 100 000 per µL may be observed in dengue fever but it is a constant feature of dengue haemorrhagic fever.g. reagents and equipment. The assay does not discriminate between infections by closely related flaviviruses (e. Thrombocytopaenia is usually observed in the period between day 3 and day 8 following the onset of illness. Figure 4. Haemoconcentration. Values below this are generally observed in convalescent sera from patients with primary responses.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. as estimated by an increase in haematocrit of 20% or more compared with convalescent values. between dengue virus and Japanese encephalitis virus or West Nile virus) nor between immunoglobulin isotypes. These should be performed carefully using standardized protocols.4 Haemagglutination-inhibition assay Inhibition of Haemagglutination = positive result Haemagglutination = negative result Red blood cells Dengue virus antigens Anti-dengue virus antibody 4.5 Haematological tests Platelets and haematocrit values are commonly measured during the acute stages of dengue infection. treatment.3. During secondary dengue infections HI antibody titres rise rapidly. usually exceeding 1:1280. 102 . The response to a primary infection is characterized by the low level of antibodies in the acute-phase serum drawn before day 5 and a slow elevation of HI antibody titres thereafter.

while longer DNA fragments give a higher tolerance for mismatches and thus an improved ability to detect diverged strains. and amplification strategy can target conserved sequences as well as random-based ones. at the same time. 103 CHAPTER 4 . Additionally. For instance. Short oligonucleotides attached on the microarray slide give a relatively exact sequence identification. wide dynamic range and relatively inexpensive instrumentation. Identification kits for infectious agents are available in 96-well format and can be designed to meet specific requirements. This technology is attractive as it is faster than the MAC-ELISA and has potential for multiplexing serological tests designed to identify antibody responses to several viruses. A laser-based scanner is commonly used as a reader to detect amplified fragments labelled with fluorescent dyes.Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests 4. Rapid advances in biosensor technology using mass spectrometry have led to the development of powerful systems that can provide rapid discrimination of biological components in complex mixtures. dengue virus and other arboviruses circulating in the region and all the pathogens responsible for dengue-like symptoms. and thus allows the rapid identification of many thousands of types of bacteria and viruses. This could be useful in determining not only dengue serotypes but also dengue genotypes during an outbreak. Samples are processed for DNA extraction. This technology is based on the covalent bonding of antigen or antibody to microspheres or beads. Microarray could be a useful technology to test. MIAs can also be used to detect viruses. low background. PCR amplification. mass spectrometry and computer analysis. The genetic material must be amplified before hybridization to the microarray. these tools can recognize a previously unidentified organism in the sample and describe how it is related to those encountered previously. the luminescence-based techniques are becoming increasingly popular owing to their high sensitivity.4 FUTURE TEST DEVELOPMENTS Microsphere-based immunoassays (MIAs) are becoming increasingly popular as a serological option for the laboratory diagnosis of many diseases. The software system built into the instrument identifies and quantifies the pathogen in a given sample by comparing the resulting mass spectra with those in a database of infectious agents. The mass spectra that are produced can be considered a specific fingerprint or molecular profile of the bacteria or virus analysed. Detection methods include lasers to elicit fluorescence of varying wavelengths. Microarray technology makes it possible to screen a sample for many different nucleic acid fragments corresponding to different viruses in parallel. Other approaches have been tested but are still in the early stages of development and evaluation.

Table 4. precautions need to be established to prevent contamination of patient materials.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Many laboratories use in-house assays. Examples of good and bad practice can be found in Table 4. To minimize the risk of infection.Antigen detection • ELISA • Rapid tests • ELISA • Rapid tests + + + + + + + Primary health centres District centres Reference centre + + + + + + + . A model is proposed in Table 4.Referral of problem specimens 104 . It is important for national or reference centres to organize quality assurance programmes to ensure the proficiency of laboratory staff in performing the assays and to produce reference materials for quality control of test kits and assays. it is important to organize laboratory services in the context of patients’ needs and disease control strategies. so results cannot be compared or analysed in aggregate. etc.Outbreak investigations . prevention and control 4.Serology Functions .e. Controls and proficiency-testing are necessary to ensure a high degree of confidence (24). For nucleic acid amplification assays.Investigation of problem specimens + + + + + + + + + + + + . appropriate containers for collecting and transporting samples.7 ORGANIZATION OF LABORATORY SERVICES In a disease-endemic country. treatment.Quality assurance .) must be practised as described in WHO’s Laboratory biosafety manual (25). The main weakness of these assays is the lack of standardization of protocols.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.6 BIOSAFETY ISSUES The collection and processing of blood and other specimens place health care workers at risk of exposure to potentially infectious material. use of personal protective equipment.4.5.Nucleic acid detection .Surveillance activities . 4.4 Proposed model for organization of laboratory services Dengue diagnostic tests . 4. Appropriate resources should be allocated and training provided.Virus culture .Training and supervision . safe laboratory techniques (i.

5 Dengue laboratory diagnosis: examples of good and bad practice Good practice 1.Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests Table 4. When to use a test Consider the purpose of the testing before making a selection (e. or personnel are not proficient. for outbreak investigations versus clinical diagnosis) Strictly follow manufacturer’s recommendations or updated Standard Operational Procedures with Good Laboratory Practices Bad practice Use of inappropriate test leading to misinterpretation of results 2. or equipment not calibrated Records not properly kept Use of unvalidated test kits 3. or modifying the procedures without prior validation Results not reliable or accurate because no quality control was used in the assay. Laboratory issues System of quality management instituted in the laboratory CHAPTER 4 Mixing reagents from different test kits or test lots False positive results due to contamination Paired serum samples should be tested in the same assay to determine if there is a four-fold rise in titre Over-interpretation and misinterpretation of test results Acute samples not re-tested together with convalescent samples 105 . How to use a test Not following the manufacturer’s recommendations Not following the written laboratory procedures for each test.g.

Romero-Vivas CM. 1991. 2009.cdc. Summary of dengue diagnostic methods. WHO. Morens DM et al. Geneva.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Vorndam V. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. Clinical and Vaccine Immunology. 4. 7. Altered enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay immunoglobulin M (IgM)/IgG optical density ratios can correctly classify all primary or secondary dengue virus infections 1 day after the onset of symptoms. Washington. DC. 1997:313–333. 40:418–427.htm 11. Gubler DJ. de Plata E. Pelegrino JL. 1994 (Scientific Publication No. Clinical and Diagnostic Laboratory Immunology. Pan American Health Organization. 2004. Falconar AK. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever in the Americas: guidelines for prevention and control. World Health Organization. Emerging Infectious Diseases (serial online). prevention and control 4. treatment. Dengue haemorrhagic fever: diagnosis. Journal of Virological Methods. 5. 1985. 33:101–113. Laboratory diagnosis of dengue virus infections. 3. treatment. Hunsperger EA et al. Journal of Clinical Microbiology. Journal of Clinical Virology. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever. 2006. 2nd ed. Comparison of a capture immunoglobulin M (IgM) and IgG ELISA and non-structural protein NS1 serotype-specific IgG ELISA for differentiation of primary and secondary dengue virus infections. Kuno G. Analysis of specific IgM responses in secondary dengue virus infections: levels and positive rates in comparison with primary infections. Innis B et al. An enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay to characterize dengue infections where dengue and Japanese encephalitis co-circulate. 22(2):250–254. 2006 (unpublished report).8 REFERENCES 1. Kuno G. 8. 548). World Health Organization. Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases. 2. March (date cited). 10. 1997. Gomez I. New York. Simplified plaque reduction neutralization assay for dengue viruses by semimicro methods in BHK-21 cells: comparison of the BHK suspension test with standard plaque reduction neutralization.gov/EID/content/15/3/436. Chanama S et al. An ELISA procedure for the diagnosis of dengue infections. 31:185–189. Shu PY et al. Evaluation of commercially available anti–dengue virus immunoglobulin M tests. Accessible at http://www. prevention and control. 2003. 6. when all of the viruses can be isolated. Kuno G. 106 . 10:622–630. PAHO. eds. 1989. 13:1044– 1051. 9. CAB International. In: Gubler DJ.

1983. 2005. Improved dengue virus plaque formation on BHK21 and LLCMK2 cells: evaluation of some factors. 2005. Dengue viremia titer. 17. Clinical and Diagnostic Laboratory Immunology. Revista do Instituto de Medicina Tropical de São Paulo. 2004. Geneva. 15. 22. Sangkawibha N. International Journal of Infectious Diseases. Journal of Clinical Microbiology. 16.6. Vazquez S. 29:1–9. and urine samples from adult patients with primary or secondary dengue 3 virus infections. Halstead SB. Lemmer K et al. 25. 30:545–551. 12:1235–1237. 2000. External quality control assessments in PCR diagnostics of dengue virus infections. Shu PY. Serological markers during dengue 3 primary and secondary infections. Huang JH. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. 14.pdf). 2007. 23. Clinical and Vaccine Immunology. WHO. Current advances in dengue diagnosis. WHO/CDS/CSR/LYO/2004. Vazquez S. Fernandez RJ. Rapid detection and differentiation of dengue virus serotypes by a real-time reverse transcription-loop-mediated isothermal amplification assay.int/csr/resources/publications/biosafety/Biosafety7. 1998. 21. 3rd ed. Usefulness of blood specimens on paper strips for serologic studies with inhibition ELISA. World Health Organization. Alvarez M et al. Vaughn DW et al. 32:154–156.2005). 11(4):642–650. 2005. 33(2):132–137. 30:291–296.28952903. 1992. saliva. antibody response pattern and virus serotype correlate with disease severity. Fernandez R. Journal of Clinical Microbiology. 2004 (ISBN 92 4 154650 6. 1990. Typing of dengue viruses in clinical specimens and mosquitoes by single tube multiplex reverse transcriptase PCR. Kinetics of antibodies in sera. 18. Llorente C.who. 2005. Journal of Infectious Diseases. Memórias do Instituto Oswaldo Cruz. 36:2634–2639. Vazquez S et al. Parida MM et al.11. 43:2895–2903 (doi: 10.Chapter 4: Laboratory diagnosis and diagnostic tests 12. Immunoglobulin A antibody responses in dengue patients: a useful marker for serodiagnosis of dengue virus infection. Lanciotti RS et al. Rapid detection and typing of dengue viruses from clinical samples by using reverse transcriptase-polymerase chain reaction. Harris E et al. 11:256–262. Journal of Clinical Virology. 1991. Dengue Bulletin.1128/JCM. Laboratory biosafety manual. 85(3):347–351.43. 24. 20. Serological diagnosis of dengue by an ELISA inhibition method (EIM). 19. 107 CHAPTER 4 . 2004. Original antigenic sin in dengue. Rojanasuphot S. 33(4):309–311. Vazquez S et al. Journal of Clinical Microbiology. Journal of Clinical Virology. 181:2–9. http://www. 13. Nawa M.

treatment. prevention and control 108 .Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

Surveillance. EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND RESPONSE CHAPTER 5 109 . emergency preparedness and response CHAPTER 5 SURVEILLANCE.Chapter 5.

prevention and control 110 . treatment.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

5. epidemiological. EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND RESPONSE 5. recording. Surveillance. epidemic response and programme evaluation.1. analysis. 1 OVERVIEW The prevention of and response to dengue and other arboviruses involve developing and implementing preparedness plans. and applied research to devise. environmental controls. 5. as well as international collaborations. CHAPTER 5 5. interpretation and dissemination of data reflecting the current health status of a community or population so that action may be taken to prevent or control a disease. laboratory support. surveillance uses a wide variety of data sources to enhance and expand the epidemiological picture of transmission risk. vector surveillance and monitoring of environmental and social risks – are presented below.2 DENGUE SURVEILLANCE The three major components of dengue surveillance – disease surveillance. This chapter provides an overview of the key areas of preparedness planning. epidemic detection and emergency response for dengue containment and control in endemic countries. risk communication and social mobilization.2. emergency preparedness and response CHAPTER 5. the 111 . National partnerships involving government bodies. national and international levels.1 Disease (epidemiological) surveillance Epidemiological surveillance is the ongoing systematic collection. Surveillance can utilize both passive and active data collection processes. clinical case management.2 provides examples of good and bad practice for dengue surveillance. as well as for international and global surveillance. are needed for comprehensive plans and programmes for dengue epidemic preparedness and response. These should include early warning systems. Strategies are suggested for preparedness. vector control. test and evaluate new approaches and technologies). Surveillance is a critical component of any dengue prevention and control programme as it provides the information necessary for risk assessment.2. The objectives of the surveillance system will guide the type of surveillance conducted.1 Purpose and objectives of the dengue surveillance system The purpose(s) of the surveillance system should be explicitly and clearly described and should include the intended uses of the system.Chapter 5. Table 5. It gives guidance to countries at risk of dengue introduction through the movement of infected persons or vectors. Specific objectives and performance indicators (expected results) should be set for each administrative level of the health system and for other agencies involved in dengue response within countries. research institutions and the private sector. alert and response at local. Depending on the circumstances under investigation. the timing of surveillance activities. SURVEILLANCE. Sustainable solutions to dengue control require political will and leadership in order to respond effectively to the needs of preparedness planning and epidemic response (including insight into community responses to dengue. entomological and environmental surveillance.

in a sentinel surveillance system or a statistically-based sample).Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. often laboratory confirmation. the system must ensure that surveillance is linked to response and to the ability to control or limit an epidemic by: • Timeliness is the speed with which cases or alerts are detected and reported. vector surveillance. Data may not be representative when case ascertainment is incomplete (e. Surveillance activities should ideally include the surveillance of human cases of the disease. etc) and representativeness. • The NPV is the probability that the surveillance system does not yield a dengue signal when no epidemic is occurring. and the system’s sensitivity. the specific surveillance methods used and the balance between the desired attributes of the surveillance system. positive predictive value (PPV) and negative predictive value (NPV) for detecting epidemics. place (geographical distribution). The usefulness of the surveillance system depends on its attributes – the relative importance given to the timeliness of signal detection. and the finite resources available for investigation and control. Representativeness reflects whether the surveillance system accurately describes the distribution of cases in time (seasonality). consideration should be given to balancing the risk of an epidemic occurring. and the population at risk of dengue. and the monitoring of environmental risk factors for dengue epidemics. The overall objectives of public health surveillance (1) which are most applicable to dengue are as follows: • detect epidemics quickly for early intervention. In setting up a surveillance system. • The PPV is the probability of a dengue signal being a confirmed case or epidemic and is dependent on the background prevalence of the disease in the population. 112 . to determine the proportion of dengue signals detected by the surveillance system against all real or confirmed cases or alerts. • monitor trends in the distribution and spread of dengue over time and geographically.g. treatment. • facilitate planning and resource allocation on the basis of lessons learned from programme evaluation. • measure the burden of disease and provide data for the assessment of the social and economic impact of dengue on the affected community. prevention and control signal(s) and thresholds for investigation and response. missing data. • evaluate the effectiveness of dengue prevention and control programmes. Effective surveillance of dengue also requires the appropriate level of investment of financial and human resources. The quality of data is measured by its completeness (accuracy of information. Most importantly. The main objective of dengue disease surveillance is usually to detect and forecast epidemic activity. laboratory-based surveillance. social and economic impact of the disease. Sensitivity is measured against a “gold standard”. the value of early intervention in reducing the medical. • Sensitivity is the proportion of cases or alerts occurring in the geographical area or population detected by the system.

thereby reducing transmission and improving clinical outcomes. Dengue activity may require consultation with. and/or the surveillance of risk factors for human disease. or notification to.g. Surveillance. as well as reports provided through established surveillance systems.1.2 Early warning systems Early warning systems for dengue can include event-based surveillance. the surveillance system should aim for timeliness. high sensitivity and a low threshold for investigation. event-based surveillance requires that a public health unit or team is designated to sort incoming information.g. and may include events related to potential exposure for humans (e. or both. laboratory and epidemiological data using established case definitions of infection and disease. For instance. to alert clinicians to the need to diagnose and properly treat dengue cases. Early warning of an epidemic enables health services to allocate human and material resources more effectively. Case-based surveillance and the surveillance of dengue risk factors The utility of traditional dengue surveillance in triggering rapid response is strengthened by the availability and real-time collection. a new serotype.Chapter 5. analysis and interpretation of linked clinical. Depending on whether epidemic detection or trend monitoring. the importation of dengue vectors. event-based surveillance uses unstructured and ad hoc reporting of events rather than the routine collection of data and automated thresholds for action (5). confirm each reported event. Monitoring dengue incidence and prevalence over time establishes a baseline measurement of the background rate of disease so that an unexpected rise in the number of cases or the proportion of severe cases will trigger an alert and further investigation.4). 5. atypical clinical presentations. as appropriate. Where the risk of a dengue epidemic or the introduction of dengue is high. dengue activity may warrant communication with WHO in cases such as the first confirmation of locally-acquired dengue in a previously unaffected area. climatic conditions favourable to oviposition and subsequent maturation of mosquitoes) (3. depending on the risk assessment. The surveillance case definitions for dengue and severe dengue are currently under review. 113 CHAPTER 5 . emergency preparedness and response and training and tools to ensure that increased dengue transmission is detected early and that the response is appropriate. and excessively high case-fatality rates. of unexplained fever or acute haemorrhagic fever syndrome) and unexplained deaths. and trigger an immediate response. different system attributes should be emphasized. case-based reporting of human disease or aggregated data reporting. are the main purposes of the surveillance system.2. Unlike classical surveillance systems. and to better engage the community in prevention and control activities. WHO under the International Health Regulations (2005) (2). bearing in mind that a higher proportion of signals detected will prove to be false positives and that follow-up investigations are likely to be resource-intensive. intervention and prevention measures. To be effective. Event-based surveillance uses reports generated by the media and other open sources of information. or via key informants in the affected community. Event-based surveillance Event-based surveillance is designed to rapidly detect unusual or unexpected disease events (signals) such as disease clusters (e.

examples include regular telephone calls or visits to laboratories and hospitals to collect data in a timely fashion. Well-defined triggers (indicators) should be identified and established before the emergency occurs in order to intensify surveillance and follow-up. prevention and control The threshold for alert and response will vary according to the operational level affected (local. • In specific sites. in many dengueendemic countries.8. are signals that should be investigated without delay. national. international) and whether the affected area is endemic for dengue or at risk of its introduction. A fever alert is thus useful when used to monitor febrile syndromes such as dengue. The routine reporting of dengue cases or dengue-like syndromes can use passive. leptospirosis and West Nile fever (11. an unexpected and unusual increase in the number of fever cases – may be a useful signal of increased dengue activity in locations where the frequency and differential diagnosis of acute febrile illness is limited. the disease report is initiated by the health authority which systematically asks health care providers about the disease of interest. an epidemic has often reached or passed its peak before it is recognized. • “Virus isolation rate in excess of routine virological testing rate” measured as the increased proportion of blood samples positive for dengue viruses in the low season for dengue has proved useful in Puerto Rico (7. malaria. by which notification is usually initiated by health care providers (14).e. and to initiate the emergency response.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Designating dengue as a notifiable disease that is covered by public health legislation is one way to increase compliance with reporting.9). A particular challenge of passive surveillance systems is continuously to motivate health care providers to report cases in accordance with standardized case definitions. This involves outreach by public health authorities to stimulate reporting. DEN-4 in 1998 and DEN-3 in 2001. The following indicators for epidemic detection – which use the deviation of reported dengue cases or laboratory results from the “average” – have been documented. Unfortunately. It has already been tested in French Guiana (13). 114 . In “active surveillance”. At state or provincial level. additional indicators such as the “excess of non-malaria fever cases” in malaria-endemic areas may provide complementary information and should be further evaluated. At national level. DEN-4 in 1986-87. DEN-2 in 1994. surveillance is only passive and relies on reports by local physicians who may not consider dengue in their differential diagnosis and/or fail to report cases quickly and routinely. at the local level a single dengue case may trigger action. although these indicators have been tested mostly in one specific setting only (6): • “Excess of dengue cases” has been used successfully in Puerto Rico to predict every epidemic since 1982. active or enhanced surveillance.12). • The appearance of a new dengue serotype can be used as an early warning signal but does not predict the occurrence of an immediate epidemic (10). “Passive surveillance” is the routine reporting of diseases. • “Fever alert” – i. may indicate impending epidemic activity. treatment. the detection of changes in virus serotype. For example. subtype or genotype distribution. As a result. or the introduction of a dengue vector into a new ecological niche. including those involving DEN-4 in 1982. the increase in reported cases above an established baseline for the same week or month in preceding years. or increasing vector density. clinical severity or seropositivity rate. and opportunities for control are missed.

patient’s sex. Confirmatory tests are needed to exclude cross-reactivity with other flaviviruses. patient identifier. Sentinel surveillance may also be used to detect a “first case” (as the word “sentinel” suggests). geographic area or population subgroup. Data that may be provided include: participating laboratory identifier. with respect to seasonality and the age-sex distribution of dengue cases). storage and transport. The passive surveillance system is “enhanced” so that it becomes active during the alert period and/or it is extended to municipalities or jurisdictions that are beyond the affected area and that would not normally be included in routine surveillance.2. and because IgM will not be detectable in the first few days after onset of illness (especially in primary dengue infections) and may persist for several weeks after infection (Chapter 4) Sentinel laboratory surveillance systems provide high-quality virological and serological data and are useful for detecting rare diseases (e. specimen source. is a form of active surveillance that is useful for answering specific epidemiological questions.3 Laboratory support for surveillance The effective prevention and control of epidemic dengue requires an active laboratorybased disease surveillance programme that can provide early warning of impending epidemic transmission. place of residence. haematological and pathological data and samples are obtained. date of birth or age. Surveillance. the number of participating laboratories may vary over time and some jurisdictions may have a larger number of participating laboratories than others). The ability of laboratory tests to distinguish acute infection from past infection without a clinical history must also be taken into account when interpreting the data. Sentinel surveillance may be very effective at determining disease trends locally. emergency preparedness and response “Sentinel surveillance”. samples may also be processed for virus isolation and/or viral RNA by PCR. introduced dengue). but data that are not linked to clinical and epidemiological information must be interpreted with caution. or the study of disease rates in a specific cohort. 115 . such as testing for dengue in a neurology ward to detect cases of dengue-related neurological disease. changes in diagnostic practices – particularly the introduction of new testing methodologies – may affect laboratory reports. Also. There are certain biases inherent in de-linked laboratory surveillance data (e. an important component of an early warning system to detect epidemic activity. therefore. the type of samples collected and the circumstances of specimen collection. A system to monitor the severe end of the disease spectrum is. or postmortem testing for dengue-related deaths.Chapter 5. general trends can be observed (e. “Enhanced surveillance” is a form of active surveillance usually in response to an epidemic alert. CHAPTER 5 5. clinical diagnosis and the method of diagnosis.g. Table 5. Quality control for laboratory diagnostics should be provided by a national dengue reference laboratory and/or an international reference laboratory. onset of illness.1 presents examples of dengue surveillance systems and the types of specimens and laboratory tests required. diagnostic laboratories should be capable of performing IgM antibody-capture ELISA (MAC-ELISA) as a front-line screening test for current or recent dengue infection. but because sentinel sites may not represent the general population or the general incidence of dengue. specimen collection date. At a minimum. Although changes in incidence cannot be determined with precision from such data. Depending on laboratory capacity.g.1. Detailed clinical protocols should be developed to ensure that adequate clinical. they may have limited value in determining national disease patterns and trends.g. organism. Laboratory methods should include both serological and virological diagnosis.

Event-based surveillance Blood from all or representative cases of dengue-like illness. treatment. taken 3–15 days after onset of illness Sentinel hospital surveillance system Blood and tissue samples taken during hospitalization and/or at death Sentinel laboratorybased surveillance Blood and other clinical samples National notifiable disease surveillance system Blood from cases of dengue-like illness and/or clinical samples from cases that test positive for dengue a b Source: adapted from Gubler (15) Emphasis should be placed on the inter-epidemic period using a simplified case definition.g. laboratory-confirmed. laboratory-confirmed cases by time. Reporting is based on case definitions and case classification (e. Hence changes in incidence cannot be determined. Fever alert system Blood samples from representative cases of acute febrile illness Increased febrile illness in the community is investigated immediately. prevention and control Table 5.1 Components of dengue surveillancea. place. Usually there are no denominator data. probable. all severe disease and all viral syndromes with fatal outcome are investigated immediately and tested as above. Highly dependent on clinicians considering dengue in the differential diagnosis and on the availability of diagnostic support Ideally. May also include probable and suspected dengue cases.g. taken 3–15 days after onset of illness Routine reporting (passive surveillance) Blood from clinical cases of dengue-like illness Sentinel clinic and physician network Blood from all or representative cases of dengue-like illness. and for virus isolation and/or PCR if available. depending on the sensitivity of the surveillance system. person ± risk factor data. or suspected cases). Representative samples or purposeful sampling taken year-round or at specific times of the year are processed weekly for IgM antibodies. 116 . with respect to seasonality and the age and sex distribution of patients). laboratory and epidemiological data are linked.b Type of surveillance Samplesb Approach Once the details of the reported event are validated. Mandatory reporting of. According to the outcome of interest. for instance. the case definition should be made more specific and surveillance should be focused on severe disease. After an epidemic begins and after the virus serotype(s) is known. samples are tested as above. a rapid response team investigates the event as an outbreak Cases detected through active case-finding for acute febrile illness and/or laboratory confirmation during outbreak investigations can also constitute an event.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. General trends can be observed if the same laboratories report regularly (e. clinical.

or it may be continued until all containers have been examined. for obtaining relative measurements of the vector population over time.2. However. and larval and pupal skins.2 Sampling larvae and pupae For reasons of practicality and reproducibility. The following three indices are commonly used to record Ae.e. Monitoring of the vector population’s susceptibility to insecticide should also be an integral part of any programme that uses insecticides.2. including pupae) sampling procedures rather than egg or adult collections. Laboratory examination is usually necessary to confirm the species. the availability of skills and resources.1 Overview Entomological surveillance is used for operational (and research) purposes to determine changes in geographical distribution of vectors.e. Depending on the objectives of the survey. Containers are examined for the presence of mosquito larvae. the search may be terminated as soon as aedine larvae are found. which is systematically searched for water-holding containers.2 Entomological surveillance 5. and in some instances the level of infestation. for monitoring and evaluating control programmes.2. 5. There are a number of methods for monitoring dengue vectors (mostly for Ae. HI = Infested houses X 100 houses inspected • Container index (CI) – i. the most common survey methodologies employ larval (active immatures.2.e. number of positive containers per 100 houses inspected. the selection and use of method requires a clear understanding of the surveillance objectives. aegypti infestation levels: • House (premise) index (HI) – i. percentage of water-holding containers infested with larvae or pupae. and for facilitating appropriate and timely decisions regarding interventions. CI = Containers positive X 100 containers inspected • Breteau index (BI) – i. BI = Number of positive containers X 100 houses inspected 117 CHAPTER 5 . entomological surveillance is critical in order to detect new introductions rapidly before they become widespread and difficult to eliminate.2. In areas where the vector is no longer present. emergency preparedness and response 5. Surveillance.Chapter 5. pupae. The basic sampling unit is the house or premise. This section describes a variety of sampling methods but by no means provides an exhaustive list of all available methods. Surveillance may serve to identify areas of high-density infestation or periods of mosquito population increase. percentage of houses infested with larvae and/or pupae. aegypti).

2. This remains an important area for research with potential for public health application. aegypti populations. prevention and control The house index has been used most widely for measuring population levels. the number of positive tyres per 100 houses). 118 . 5. There is growing evidence that. elimination) or other vector control interventions can be the basis for the optimized use of limited resources (17). the container index provides information only on the proportion of water-holding containers that are positive. pupal/demographic surveys measure the total number of pupae in different classes of containers in a given community. 5.2. such as wells (18). the number of positive drums per 100 houses. copepods.3 Pupal/demographic surveys If the classes of containers with the highest rates of adult mosquito emergence are known in a community.4 Passive collection of larvae and pupae Funnel traps have been used for sampling Aedes species and other container-breeding organisms in sites with poor or difficult access. in the course of gathering the basic information for calculating the Breteau index. it is possible to determine how much vector control is needed in a specific location to inhibit virus transmission.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. The collection of demographic data enables the calculation of the ratio between the numbers of pupae (a proxy for adult mosquitoes) and persons in the community. but again there is no accommodation of container productivity. together with other epidemiological parameters such as dengue serotype-specific seroconversion rates and temperature. the drinks bottle) is often not the most productive (16). The Breteau index establishes a relationship between positive containers and houses. Similar methods have been used to measure total populations of larvae. adult abundance and hence transmission potentials may be quite different.2. A problem here is that the most common container (e. The pupal/demographic survey is a method of identifying these most epidemiologically important types of containers and may therefore be considered an operational research tool (Chapter 3). For instance.g. but it does not take into account the number of positive containers or the productivity of those containers. The implication is that for localities with similar larval indices but different container profiles.2. Nevertheless.g.g. Such surveys are far more labourintensive than the above-mentioned larval surveys and are not envisaged for the routine monitoring of Ae. These data are particularly relevant for focusing larval control efforts on the management or elimination of the most common habitats and for the orientation of educational messages for community-based initiatives (see also the section below on pupal/demographic surveys). Similarly. It should be noted that larval indices are a poor indication of adult production. it is possible (and highly desirable) to obtain a profile of the larval habitat characteristics by simultaneously recording the relative abundance of the various container types either as potential or actual sites of mosquito production (e. the rate of emergence of adult mosquitoes from rainwater drums is likely to differ markedly from the rate from discarded cans or house plants. The device collects organisms such as fish. The funnel trap comprises a weighted funnel attached to a bottle that inverts on entry to and exit from the water surface where it floats. Unlike the traditional Stegomyia (Aedes) indices described above. their selective targeting for source reduction (e. yet the larval survey registers them only as positive or negative. treatment. and is considered to be the most informative.

adult Ae.6 Landing collections CHAPTER 5 Although landing collections on humans are a sensitive means of detecting low-level infestations and for studying the biting times and places of host attraction.2.5 Sampling the adult mosquito population Adult vector sampling can provide valuable data for studies of seasonal population trends or evaluation of adulticiding measures.Chapter 5. 5.2. odour-baited. or are simply located at constricted access points through which adult mosquitoes pass (e.2. Resting collections involve the systematic searching of these sites with the aid of a flashlight and the capture of adults using mouth. Because adult mosquitoes.8 Sticky trap collections Various sticky trap devices have been used for sampling adult Ae. However. 5. there is no way to relate funnel trap captures to the risk of transmission because there is no direct relationship between larval densities and densitydependent larval survival. are usually expressed in terms of landing rates per man-hour. emergency preparedness and response mosquitoes. results are less reproducible than those obtained from sampling of immature stages. aegypti typically rests indoors.2. Backpack aspirators powered by rechargeable 12-volt batteries have proven to be an efficient and effective alternative means of collecting resting adult mosquitoes in and around human habitation.2. Both male and female Ae. especially males. The funnel trap captures a lower proportion of pupae because they are less active than larvae. the method poses safety and ethical issues in areas endemic for disease. the method is both labour-intensive and expensive.g. at points of exit and entry from subterranean habitats such as keyholes in service manhole covers in roads).2. Following a standard collection routine.2. aegypti. especially in bedrooms. using known numbers of Ae. However. 119 . or both. enables the size of the larval population to be estimated (19). aegypti are attracted to humans. their presence can be a reliable indicator of proximity to hidden larval habitats. have low dispersal rates. Calibration of the device. The methods for collection of adult mosquitoes also tend to be labour-intensive and depend heavily on the collector’s proficiency and skill. Where infestation levels are low. Rates of capture. 5. Surveillance. In some locations the device has focused attention on the importance of subterranean habitats and harbourages during winter or in dry conditions (20). the percentage of houses positive for adults is sometimes used. typically using hand nets or aspirators as mosquitoes approach or land on the collector.2. aegypti larvae. 5. ostracods and tadpoles as they return to the surface. and mostly in dark places such as clothes closets and other hidden sites.7 Resting collections During periods of inactivity.or battery-powered aspirators and hand-held nets. Moreover. or both) or the number of adults per man-hour of effort. Quantification of the funnel trap allows results to be compared with larval counts in other containers and allows estimates to be made of the relative importance of the various types of containers. densities are recorded as the number of adult mosquitoes per house (females. They may be designed to be visually attractive. males.

aegypti eggs. Ovitraps with plant germination paper as a substrate for egg deposition can also be used. also known as “ovitraps”. all the eggs on each paddle are counted and the mean number of eggs per ovitrap is calculated.5 litre glass jar painted black on the outside and equipped with a hardboard or wooden paddle that is clipped vertically to the inside with its rough side facing inwards. While ovitraps can be used to monitor changes in oviposition activity over time. They can also be used by people without specialized training.9 Sampling the ovipositing population Oviposition traps These devices. In more detailed studies. The percentage of positive ovitraps provides the simplest index of infestation levels. or overturned. An “enhanced CDC ovitrap” is considerably more attractive to ovipositing females and yields many more Ae.g. field records must indicate the location of each ovitrap and its condition at the time of servicing.2. For accurate interpretation. one jar contains an olfactory attractant made from a “standardized” 7-day-old hay infusion. For this reason. oviposition traps are useful for surveillance at international ports of entry which. comparisons between areas are not reliable because the availability of larval habitats in which females can choose to lay eggs will differ. missing. should be kept free of vector foci. dry. the enhanced ovitrap has proved suitable for monitoring changes in the adult female populations daily rather than weekly and has been successfully used to assess the impact of adulticidal space spraying on adult females. prevention and control Age and viral infection have been determined in adult mosquitoes collected with sticky traps though mainly in a research context. albopictus in situations where infestations are low and larval surveys are generally unproductive (e. aegypti and Ae. with which positivity rates and egg counts are seldom sufficiently high. aegypti eggs than the standard version. The standard ovitrap is a wide-mouth 0. 5. If a trap is flooded. it can be misleading to monitor and interpret ovitrap data over time in a given area where vector control interventions include source reduction measures. constitute a sensitive and economical method for detecting the presence of Ae. The jar is partially filled with clean water and is appropriately placed in a rain-sheltered site – usually outdoors and close to habitation. when the Breteau index is <5). the data should be discarded. Ovitraps are usually serviced weekly and the paddles are examined for the presence of Ae. In this double ovitrap method. treatment.2. while the other contains a 10% dilution of the same infusion. 120 . Alternatives to hay infusions have also been used to improve the attraction of standard ovitraps.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. They have proved especially useful for the early detection of new infestations in areas from which the mosquito has been eliminated. Similarly. in accordance with international sanitary codes. Ovitraps are inexpensive and it is possible to install and service them over large areas relatively quickly. Unlike the original version.

Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response

Tyre section larvitraps Tyre section larvitraps of various designs have also been used for monitoring oviposition activity. The simplest of these is a water-filled radial section of a tyre. A prerequisite for any tyre section larvitrap is that it facilitates either visual inspection of the water in situ or the ready transfer of the contents to another container for examination. Tyre larvitraps differ functionally from ovitraps in that water level fluctuations caused by rainfall induce the hatching of eggs, and it is the larvae that are counted rather than the eggs deposited on the inner surfaces of the trap. The usefulness of tyre section larvitraps as an alternative to the ovitrap for early detection of new infestations and for surveillance of low-density vector populations has been well demonstrated. Insecticide susceptibility testing The initial and continued susceptibility of the vector to specific insecticides is of fundamental importance for the success of larviciding or adulticiding operations. The development of resistance may lead to failure of the control programme unless it is carefully monitored and a timely decision is made to use alternative insecticides or control strategies. Standard WHO bioassay procedures and kits are available for determining the susceptibility or resistance of mosquito larvae and adults to insecticides. Biochemical and immunological techniques are also available for testing individual mosquitoes but are not widely used by programmes. Sampling strategies Only in exceptional conditions are larval surveys of every house (i.e. census) warranted. Such situations arise when the objective is one of vector eradication and larval infestation levels have been reduced to very low levels (HI = <1.0%). At this point it is necessary to locate and control every infested and potentially infested container, or to verify that eradication has indeed been achieved, or to ensure that re-infestation has not occurred. In other situations, the number of houses to be inspected should be based on considerations of available resources, the desired level of precision of the results, and the total number of houses in the locality. This is contrary to the routine procedures employed in many vector control programmes in which eradication campaign methodologies have persisted and entomological data are collected from every house immediately prior to insecticide treatment – usually by the person who administered the treatment. Such practices, if used solely for measuring infestation levels, are wasteful and are likely to result in poorquality reporting due to conflicts of worker interest and the tedious nature of the work. Whenever possible, it is recommended that a different team or individual should conduct the entomological evaluation, or that the two tasks should be performed separately. The sample size for routine surveys can be calculated by statistical methods based on the expected level of infestation and the desired level of confidence in the results. Several sampling procedures that eliminate or minimize bias can be applied equally well to the selection of houses for larval, adult, ovitrap, or knowledge-attitude-practice (KAP) surveys. These are as follows: • Systematic sampling applies to every “n”th house (where “n” equals an agreed number) throughout a community or along linear transects through the community. For example, if a sample of 5% of the houses is to be inspected, every 20th house (= 100/5) would be inspected. This is a practical option for rapid assessment of infestation levels, especially in areas where there is no house-numbering system. All areas of the locality are well represented.
CHAPTER 5
121

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis, treatment, prevention and control

• Simple random sampling means that houses to be selected are obtained from a list of random numbers (either from tables of random numbers in a statistical text book or from a calculator or a computer-generated list). This is a more laborious process since detailed house maps or lists of street addresses are a prerequisite for selecting the houses. Many statistical tests require random sampling. Unfortunately, although every house has an equal chance of being selected, some areas of the locality are usually under-represented and others are overrepresented. • Stratified random sampling minimizes the problem of under-representation and over-representation by subdividing the localities into sectors or “strata”. These are usually based on identified risk factors – such as areas with houses without a piped water supply, areas not served by sanitation services, and denselypopulated areas. A simple random sample is taken from each stratum, with the number of houses inspected being in proportion to the number of houses in each stratum. • Cluster sampling may be conducted in large cities or geographical areas where it may be difficult or impossible to use random or systematic sampling because of limitations of time, money and personnel, or because of other logistical constraints. In these circumstances, the sample may be selected in two stages in order to minimize the resources needed for the survey. The first stage is obtained by simple or stratified random sampling of population groups or clusters (e.g. city blocks, villages, or administrative districts). Having identified these clusters, simple or stratified random sampling procedures are again applied to identify the specific houses within each cluster for inclusion in the survey.

5.2.2.10 Frequency of sampling The frequency of sampling depends on the frequency and expected duration of the control measures. For programmes that use larvicides, it is important to monitor the duration of efficacy to ensure that intervals between cycles of treatment are optimal. This may vary from weeks to months. For programmes using integrated strategies, such frequent intervals for routine assessment of the impact of the measures applied may be unnecessary. This is especially true when the effect of some of the nonchemical intervention strategies exceed the impact of residual insecticides (e.g. larvivorous fish in large storage containers of potable water, source reduction, or mosquito-proofing of containers). On the other hand, rapid feedback at monthly intervals is desirable to evaluate and guide community action activities, indicating sectors that need more attention and activities that need to be reinforced. For specific research studies, it may be necessary to sample on a weekly, daily or even on an hourly basis (e.g. to determine the diel pattern of host-seeking activity).

5.2.3 Monitoring environmental and social risks
In addition to the evaluation of aspects directly pertaining to vector densities and distribution, community-oriented, integrated vector management strategies require that other parameters be measured or periodically monitored. Various factors have been determined to influence a community’s vulnerability to dengue epidemics. The distribution and density of the human population, settlement characteristics, conditions of land tenure, housing styles, education, and socio-economic

122

Chapter 5. Surveillance, emergency preparedness and response

status are all interrelated and fundamentally important for planning and for assessing dengue risk. Knowledge of changes in the distribution of water supply services and their quality and reliability over time, as well as knowledge of domestic water storage practices and solid waste disposal services, are of particular relevance. This type of information helps in establishing ecological profiles that can be of value for planning targeted source reduction or management activities and for organizing epidemic intervention measures. Some of these data sets are generated by the health sector, while others are derived from external sources. In most cases, annual or even less frequent updates will suffice for programme management purposes. However, in the case of meteorological data, especially rainfall patterns, a more frequent analysis (such as weekly or monthly) is warranted if the data are to be of predictive value in determining seasonal trends and short-term fluctuations of the vector population.

5.3 DENGUE PREPAREDNESS PLANNING AND RESPONSE 5.3.1 Overview
This section provides an overview of the elements of a comprehensive dengue prevention and control programme. Emergency preparedness and anticipated response (contingency) planning must be explicitly included in dengue surveillance and control policies and should be reviewed regularly. Emergency preparedness and response are often overlooked by programme managers and policy-makers. When the dynamics of dengue activity are known, the timing of response activities can be adjusted to maximize their effectiveness. In dengue-endemic areas, activities can be grouped into those that should occur continuously, those that should occur during an epidemic, and those that should be carried out in the post-epidemic period. Different activities and approaches may be required in areas where dengue occurs sporadically and in dengue-free areas at risk of transmission. In epidemic-prone areas, a multisectoral dengue action committee should be convened with the responsibility of coordinating the response. The two major components of the emergency response to a dengue outbreak are: (i) emergency vector control to curtail transmission of the dengue virus as rapidly as possible and (ii) early diagnosis and the appropriate clinical case management of severe dengue to minimize the number of dengue-associated deaths. These responses should occur concurrently.

CHAPTER 5

5.3.2 Dengue emergency response planning
There are three levels of dengue emergency response planning (21), namely: • Ongoing prevention – where there is no current dengue activity in the area; • Response to sporadic cases or other risk indicators – where there is no epidemic dengue activity in the area but either (i) sporadic cases are being reported through the surveillance system or (ii) there is increased virus activity or the introduction of serotypes that have not previously or recently been recorded in the area;

123

the alert phase. Enhancing disease surveillance. Hard copies of the plan should be distributed to all response and supporting agencies and should be available electronically if possible. 5. Each agency should be assigned specific roles and responsibilities under the plan.1 Priority areas for emergency response plans Rigau-Pérez and Clark (7) have identified 10 priority areas for dengue emergency response planning. Ensuring appropriate patient care. The dengue emergency response plan should clearly articulate its aims. they are seldom validated. prevention and control • Outbreak response – where there is epidemiological evidence of epidemic activity. and the “support” agencies (e. and to ensure the availability of the human resources. 5. As mentioned earlier in this chapter. there may be reluctance on the part of public health officials to implement a dengue emergency response plan until the case count and fatality numbers are elevated. Enhancing vector surveillance and control. Wherever possible. The best response to a dengue epidemic is preparedness to prevent infections. channels of command and communication. Diagnostic laboratory testing. exercises provide opportunities for all partners to participate and better understand their roles.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.g. 2. 124 6. Since the emergency response is usually multisectoral. social welfare) that may be more involved in the recovery phase after an epidemic. the plan should be tested through exercises. and the emergency phase). Some emergency response plans emphasize the temporal aspects of the response (i. Lessons learned should be incorporated into a revised emergency response plan.e. Formalizing an emergency action plan. It is recommended that the plan should include objective criteria for defining an epidemic on the basis of specific local data and not general concepts. objectives and scope. Once the dengue emergency response plan has been drafted and approved by participating groups. responsibilities. Clear triggers for the activation. the lead (coordinating) agency. 4. and costs and resources should be identified. 3. Establishing a multisectoral dengue action committee. Protecting special populations. it is important to conduct simulations or “table top” exercises.2. The plan should ideally include a monitoring and evaluation framework with performance indicators for each of the response and support agencies as well as overall indicators of the plan’s effectiveness. Formal debriefing sessions should take place with the partners after exercises and after epidemics. the organizational links with other agencies that have direct responsibility for implementing aspects of the plan. namely: 1. and to minimize its effects on those who become ill.3. 7. equipment and supplies needed for a rapid emergency response. declaration of an emergency. thereby reducing ongoing transmission. escalation and deactivation should be written into the plan and reviewed as required. treatment. While plans have frequently been prepared in dengue-endemic countries. .

For receptive countries (i. It is not possible for a single government agency to control the causes and consequences of dengue epidemics and to protect population health. For countries at lower risk of dengue transmission. dengue vectors present without circulating virus). water. Depending on the epidemiological situation in each country.g. health care providers in the public and private sectors. as appropriate) as well as their roles and responsibilities in dengue prevention and control. port health authorities. state and national levels.3. Surveillance. and must also include relevant private-sector groups (e. agriculture. Managing the mass media. media. local government area. industrial. commercial. laboratory scientists. the response may be escalated to epidemic response to prevent further spread and/or interruption of transmission. A major responsibility of the dengue action committee is to develop the dengue emergency response plan. Members of the committee should communicate regularly with their stakeholders – including local government. the focus of activities may be on entomological surveillance at ports of entry and education of the health care community about the risk of dengue in travellers. risk management plans should focus on strategies for risk reduction. ambulance services. labour unions).g. In countries at risk of the introduction of dengue vectors. private education. and update it as necessary on the basis of the lessons learned from its implementation or simulation. These should include rapid investigation of sporadic cases (clinically suspected or laboratory confirmed) to determine whether they are imported or locally-acquired.2 Establishment of a multisectoral dengue action committee If the prevention and control of dengue are to be effective and sustainable. Educating the community and relevant professional groups about the current procedures used for dengue control by the responsible authorities in their jurisdiction (local. review it regularly. Investigating the epidemic. and environmental management efforts. vector control personnel. but need not be limited to. health. 9. provincial and national governments. social mobilization. The committee must have solid funding and a designated national coordinator with the political mandate to make policy and financial decisions and to coordinate the multisectoral preparedness and response strategy at local. membership of the dengue action committee may include. and its diagnosis and reporting requirements. state.g. For endemic countries. emergency preparedness and response 8. industry groups and community representatives. multidisciplinary and multilevel approach is required.Chapter 5. 10. education.e. the dengue action committee may be constituted within the affected jurisdiction (e. Once a locally acquired case is confirmed. environment. social and economic impact of the disease. For this reason it is recommended that countries establish a multisectoral dengue action committee. the overall aim of a dengue emergency response plan is to reduce the risk of dengue epidemics and to strengthen control measures for any future epidemics – thereby minimizing the clinical. solid waste disposal) and NGOs. telecommunications. 5. customs and immigration. heads of government agencies (e. emergency services. a multisectoral. monitoring of vectors and their abundance (particularly in regions with recorded or suspected cases). province). 125 CHAPTER 5 .2.

Because of the risk of a viraemic traveller initiating an outbreak. migrant workers and soldiers). 5. international trade in. These typically lacked basic community infrastructure.1 Populations at risk Because of their rapid expansion and long duration. If not properly screened or air-conditioned. Migrant workers living in poorly constructed and maintained facilities can be particularly at risk of the transmission or introduction of dengue. pre-school children in day care programmes. indicated that the most vulnerable to the disease were the poor who lived in informal or squatter settlements. health care settings may also be at high risk for dengue transmission. and inadequate disposal of. In addition.3. The international movement of human cases. dengue epidemics reduce the productive capacity and economic development of many sections of society. older or incapacitated persons who live alone or in institutions. prevention and control 5. Some groups need special attention because of their dependence on others who take care of them and their immediate surroundings (e. treatment. and the spread of vectors into new ecological niches.g.3 Risk assessment 5. Increased international travel and trade provide ideal means for infected human transport of dengue viruses and/or vectors. students. vehicle tyres similarly provide larval habitats.3. surveillance for clinical cases of dengue is very important since it enables action to be taken promptly to reduce the risk of local transmission.g.3.3. Communication for Behavioural Impact (COMBI) for dengue prevention and control needs to be tailored to the various populations at risk and delivered in a culturally appropriate way to ensure sustainability (23). the risk of dengue introduction to receptive areas. and lacked both the organization needed for collective action against the threat of a dengue fever epidemic and the understanding about how they could contribute to preventive actions to mitigate the risk (22). Dengue-related risks will vary considerably both within and between countries.3. Risk assessment is conducted so that each country can match the level of risk (e. may cause international disease spread and require notification to WHO under Article 9 of the 2005 International Health Regulations (2). or goods that are contaminated. a single imported case can start an epidemic. travellers. vectors which carry infection. A study on knowledge of and attitudes towards dengue. including access to piped water and adequate garbage disposal.2 Cross-border spread and ports of entry The rapid spread of dengue since the 1970s has been attributed to increasing urbanization and the increasing use of (often disposable) man-made containers (24) that are ideal larval habitats for dengue mosquitoes. and international air travel results in the movement of viraemic individuals and vectors over long distances. conducted in the Caribbean by the Assessments of Impacts and Adaptations to Climate Change (AIACC) project. resulting in a frequent exchange of dengue viruses among endemic countries. In areas that are highly receptive to dengue. risk of epidemics or risk of virus introduction) with appropriate activities and investment and 126 . Countries should undertake a dengue risk assessment as the basis for preparedness plans.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis.

Planning for sufficient provisions during a dengue epidemic can be guided by hospitalization rates in previous outbreaks.3. It is essential to train professionals in the early detection of cases and to educate the community to seek medical attention when dengue symptoms appear. communicating openly and honestly with the public (transparency).3. It does this by announcing the epidemic early. beds. and training guidelines for treatment and patient isolation.3. and 127 CHAPTER 5 . In general. 5. The principal burden that dengue epidemics create for affected countries is not the number of deaths but the enormous number of hospitalizations and days of illness.5 Communication for Behavioural Impact and Risk Communication Primary prevention is the most effective measure in dengue prevention and control since no vaccine is currently available. thus reducing the opportunities for preventing transmission and controlling the epidemic. It is imperative that medical and nursing staff understand the rationale and priorities for patient care under epidemic conditions. During an epidemic the aim of public risk communication. They may often be implemented late. such reactive strategies lead only to short-term behavioural change and fail to institutionalize the idea of community and personal responsibility for dengue prevention and control in partnership with government efforts. 5. 5. An intensive COMBI programme (23) that ensures accurate and timely information for the public should be implemented concurrently with vector control activities in order to engage the community in practices that reduce dengue transmission.4 Ensuring appropriate patient care A case of severe dengue requires careful observation and repeated laboratory tests throughout the illness (Chapters 2 and 4).3 Vector ecology As part of their risk assessment. Public education must continue to reinforce how important it is for people to seek medical attention if they have dengue symptoms. Surveillance. Providing care for an elevated number of dengue cases requires criteria for triage. is to build trust.3. confusion and a sense of urgency. providing accurate information.3. supplies and equipment. Epidemics are frequently marked by uncertainty. and should stress the need to reduce larval habitats and the options for personal protection. Isolation refers not only to routine precautions for manipulation of blood and other body fluids but also to the use of (insecticidetreated) mosquito nets to prevent mosquitoes from biting viraemic (febrile) patients and subsequently spreading the virus within the community.Chapter 5. countries at risk of dengue should conduct entomological investigations to identify and map the distribution of potentially competent dengue vectors. generally through the media.3. trained physicians and nursing personnel. A weakness of some current dengue prevention strategies is that they are reactive rather than anticipatory. emergency preparedness and response thus avoid introducing costly and demanding measures that are not justified by the epidemiological situation.

4 Identifying outbreaks and triggers for an epidemic response As indicated in previous sections.4 PROGRAMME ASSESSMENT Dengue programme assessment is part of risk assessment. human resource planning (including training). the “early warning” element of the programme and the valuable time needed to make preparations for the response are lost. it is important to estimate the population at risk. 5. The public health community is increasingly observing the implementation of emergency responses to diseases such as avian influenza in preparation for pandemic influenza. the timing of investigations. the effectiveness of the vector control programme. detailed information about when and where dengue outbreaks/epidemics occurred in the past can be a useful guide to the potential magnitude and severity of future epidemics. 5. Many health care providers fail to report dengue activity until they receive a positive laboratory diagnosis because they are unaware that prompt vector control measures can be initiated as soon as suspected cases are notified. This gives people a sense of control over their own health and safety. These can serve as examples for the preparation of dengue contingency plans. which in turn allows them to react to the risk with more reasoned responses (25). expected admission rates. the better will be the information that is generated. and to document the location of resources. stockpiling and applied research needs (26). Some doctors may not request tests during an outbreak because they may be confident of their ability to diagnose dengue clinically. treatment. involving the media before the occurrence of the seasonal increase in dengue enhances the opportunity to increase public awareness of the disease and of the personal and community actions that can be taken to mitigate the risk. supplies and personnel required for vector control and patient management.3. the more sensitive. prevention and control providing specific information about what people can do to make themselves and their community safer. the equipment. extensive. In endemic countries. the emergency may rapidly overwhelm the public health and medical care agencies without warning.4. Information about an impending increase in the incidence of dengue will provide valuable time to make final preparations and implement the contingency plan. laboratory capacity. In areas where a comprehensive surveillance system exists.1 Human resource planning In addition to human resource planning for surge situations such as epidemics. 5. In such a situation. It aims to identify strengths and weaknesses in programmatic and public health infrastructure that can reduce or increase vulnerability to respond to dengue. If there is no surveillance system in place.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. responsive and functional the dengue surveillance system. the effectiveness of the dengue surveillance system in providing early warning. the education of health care workers should draw attention to the importance of laboratory testing and case notification. and the problems inherent in interpreting laboratory results when more 128 . In order to develop a meaningful preparedness plan during the inter-epidemic period. Other doctors may not be aware of the value of laboratory confirmation or may not be familiar with the tests available. Programme assessment should review areas such as the dengue emergency response plan.

This may mean that core capacities in surveillance and response need to be developed in accordance with the International Health Regulations (2005) (2).3 Assessment of diagnostic resources A detailed description of the laboratory diagnosis of dengue is provided in Chapter 4.2 Assessment of the surveillance system Dengue surveillance systems should be adapted to country needs and resources. Epidemics also offer unique opportunities to identify risk factors for the disease through applied research. The capacity to perform dengue virus genotyping.Chapter 5. From initial contact with medical and public health personnel. for instance: the availability of diagnostic laboratories and staff trained in dengue diagnosis. Physicians. Clinicians’ education in the emergency response to a dengue epidemic relates principally to raising awareness of the spectrum of disease and the essentials and complexities of treatment.4. Reporting of dengue should be consistent both within and between countries. Physicians must be able to distinguish between typical and atypical dengue syndromes. standardized test procedures.4. 129 . Surveillance. whether locally or at an international dengue reference laboratory. 5. appropriate and timely data analysis and response at the lowest operational level possible are crucial. the patients and their household members should be given orientation in eliminating adult mosquitoes and water-holding containers in and around their residence to avoid mosquito bites. It is important to emphasize that treatment of dengue consists of appropriate hydration and the administration of paracetamol/acetaminophen to control pain and fever (never acetylsalicylic acid [aspirin]). nurses and laboratory staff should receive regular clinical training in the management of dengue patients. access to more sophisticated diagnostics for virus tracking and quality assurance. Once a vaccine becomes available. as is data sharing in the system. emergency preparedness and response than one flavivirus is circulating or the patient has been exposed to dengue or other flaviviruses in the past. reagents and laboratory equipment (including stockpiling for epidemics). and reported cases should have a defined severity level (Chapter 1). At all times. CHAPTER 5 5. Contact should be made with national and regional reference laboratories for diagnostic support and verification functions prior to the occurrence of an epidemic. effective disease surveillance will be critical in determining priority areas for vaccine use and evaluating vaccine effectiveness in reducing dengue incidence. Priority should be given to: (i) improving routine reporting using standardized case definitions. This must include specific training on aspects of emergency response. is particularly important for tracking genetically the potential origins of outbreaks and the international spread of the virus. Resource planning and assessment should include auditing of. and access to laboratory diagnosis is useful. and the continuous application of appropriate levels of biosafety. verification and reference functions. and (iii) introducing active surveillance as a complementary measure. Clinicians are often the first point of contact for community education and social mobilization. quality assurance. (ii) improving laboratory support for diagnosis through greater access to laboratory services.

including public transport facilities.5 Assessment of vector control resources The adequacy of equipment for insecticide application and the availability of insecticides should be part of the needs assessment of the vector programme. However. dengue messages on radio and other media channels. use of household aerosol insecticides. 5. prevention and control 5. personal protective measures come at a cost.4. or use of insecticidetreated bednets for persons sleeping during the daylight hours. Public education must also continue to reinforce the importance of people seeking medical attention if they have dengue symptoms. Personal protective measures include the application of topical repellents for the skin (personal insect repellents). Public education on dengue is often promoted through posters in a variety of public places. and stock management (intravenous fluids. 5. Hospital emergency response plans for dengue should include a detailed resource plan that covers anticipated hospital bed occupancy. staffing levels and surge capacity needs.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. including high-dependency care beds.6 Information products Successful dengue control programmes have integrated vector control with public health education and community involvement in risk reduction activities. drug supplies etc).4 Assessment of resources for clinical care Chapter 2 summarizes current international best practice for the clinical case management of dengue.4. Grassroots groups. 130 . community volunteers. Similar assessments should be conducted for outpatient care in the public and private sectors in dengue-endemic areas. schools and the private sector should be updated regularly for active engagement of the public in dengue prevention and control. and through face-to-face communication. advertisements in newspapers.4. thereby limiting their possible use by the poorest. Affected communities are encouraged to eliminate containers of stagnant water that can potentially provide larval habitats in homes and neighbourhoods. treatment. who are the most vulnerable.

including surge capacity. vector surveillance and monitoring of environmental and social risks Considering surveillance always in the context of monitoring and a planned response Combining event-based and case-based surveillance data Defining and implementing surveillance indicators with the aim of an early response to dengue cases and outbreaks Defining.2 Dengue surveillance: examples of good and bad practice Good practice 1 Integrating disease surveillance. in preparedness plans Not examining and updating dengue surveillance systems and preparedness plans Exclusively top-down approach to dengue outbreak response 10 11 12 131 . vector surveillance and the monitoring of environmental and social risks Data collection in surveillance for academic purposes only Relying on case-based surveillance data only No defined indicators for surveillance 2 3 4 5 6 Reacting to dengue outbreaks only when outbreaks are evident Not sharing or suppressing information about dengue cases and risks Relying on ad hoc planning for dengue prevention and control Awaiting dengue outbreaks to define the dengue action committee 7 8 CHAPTER 5 9 Planning for interventions without considering efficacy and community effectiveness Not incorporating health care delivery. COMBI) Bad practice No information exchange on data and analysis between agencies involved in disease surveillance.g. agreeing on and reacting to triggers for early outbreak response Unrestricted and timely information-sharing about dengue cases and risks nationally and with the international community Development of dengue preparedness plans with components for emergency situations. delivering appropriate triage and treatment of severe cases Assessment of dengue surveillance systems including preparedness plans nationally and internationally Integrating communities in dengue prevention and control using appropriate methodology (e. including simulation exercises Identifying the membership of an intersectoral dengue action committee at national or district level Integration of a combination of evidence-based interventions for dengue prevention and control in the dengue preparedness plan Linking preparedness planning to surge capacity in health care. emergency preparedness and response Table 5. Surveillance.Chapter 5.

Reemergence of dengue in Cuba: a 1997 epidemic in Santiago de Cuba. Dengue virus surveillance: the co-circulation of DEN-1. Còmo responder a una epidemia de dengue: vision global y experiencia en Puerto Rico. 2003. 1991. 2005. 1999. virological and entomological surveillance. adopted by the 58th World Health Assembly. Non-specific alert system for dengue epidemic outbreaks in areas of endemic malaria. 9. 8. Bol.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Bolivia. 6. 130:93–100. Rigau-Pérez JG. 17:282–293. 4:89–92. Tien NTK et al. 2005 (http:// www.who. De Simone TS et al. Rigau-Pérez JG.pdf). Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. 2008. cient. Predictive indicators for forecasting epidemic of dengue/dengue haemorrhagic fever through epidemiological. 64:67–74. wpro. 11. World Health Assembly Resolution WHA58. 10. 18(5):323–334. 2008 (http://www. Kourí G et al. Clark GG. 50/RR-13. Determinants and predictors of dengue infection in Mexico. Updated guidelines for evaluating public health surveillance systems. 7. What does dengue disease surveillance contribute to predicting and detecting outbreaks and describing trends. Koopman JS et al. Brazil. 2008. accessed 19 September 2008). WHO. 2001.3. Tropical Medicine and International Health. Emerging Infectious Diseases. American Journal of Epidemiology. 16(1):16–23 (in Spanish). treatment. Revision of the International Health Regulations. prevention and control 5. International Journal of Environmental Health Research. 4. 1997. 12. CENETROP. World Health Organization Regional Office for the Western Pacific. 2004. Manila. 5. Pirard M et al. Pan American Journal of Public Health.pdf. DEN-2 and DEN-3 in the State of Rio de Janeiro. Jury MR. A hospital-based evaluation in Cayenne (French Guiana). Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.who. 2. 98:553–562. Dengue Bulletin. 1994-1995. 13:1022–1041. Clark GG.5 REFERENCES 1. 3. The dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever epidemic in Puerto Rico. A guide to establishing event-based surveillance. Desarrollo de un Sistema de Vigilancia para dengue en Santa Cruz. Runge-Ranziger S et al. Climate influence on dengue epidemics in Puerto Rico. 23. 133(11):1168–1178.int/NR/rdonlyres/92E766DB-DF19-4F4F-90FD-C80597C0F34F/0/ eventbasedsurv. 13. 132 . Epidemiology and Infection. WHO/WPRO. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene.int/gb/ebwha/pdf_files/WHA58/WHA58_3-en. Carme B et al. 1998. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. Vorndam AV. 2001.

17. 2008.gov. Journal of Medical Entomology.who. asp (site last updated 11 January 2007).1). Use of a funnel trap for collecting immature Aedes aegypti and copepods from deep wells in Yogyakarta. 2006. 23. 26. Adapting to dengue risk—what to do? Washington. Kay BH et al. Indonesia. 11(3):480–496.Chapter 5. Dengue fever management plan for North Queensland. 19. http://www. Queensland Health. Geneva. Focks DA.aiaccproject. DC.int/infectious-disease-news/IDdocs/ whocds200528/whocds200528en. 2005 (Document WHO/ CDS/CPE/PVC/2005. 8:372–375. Barbazan P et al. Planning social mobilization and communication for dengue fever prevention and control: a step-by-step guide. Multicountry study of Aedes aegypti pupal productivity survey methodology: findings and recommendations.au/dengue/managing_outbreaks/default. 1999. 22. WHO. Journal of the American Mosquito Control Association. World Health Organization. 2005–2010. Gubler DJ. 36(6):851– 855(5). based on Aedes aegypti (L. Clinical Microbiology Reviews. 2005 (http://www. 1992. emergency preparedness and response 14. Special Programme for Research and Training in Tropical Diseases. Kroeger A. Alexander N. World Health Organization. American Public Health Association. 20. Washington. WHO. 2000 (ISBN 0-87553-182-2). 21. Geneva. Evaluation of a funnel trap for the collection of copepods and immature mosquitoes from wells. Surveillance. Annals of Tropical Medicine and Parasitology. 1998. Taylor MA et al.13). 102(2):161–171. Assessments of Impacts and Adaptations to Climate Change. 2004 (available at: http://www. Geneva. WHO outbreak communication guidelines. Nathan MB.pdf). Guidelines for conducting a review of a national dengue prevention and control programme.who. for the surveillance and control of dengue transmission in Thailand. accessed October 2008). Journal of the American Mosquito Control Association. DC. Annals of Tropical Medicine and Parasitology. 100(Suppl):1S1–1S3. 2006 (Document TDR/IRM/Den/06. 15. 25. 17th ed. 18. Geneva.org/working_papers/Working%20Papers/ AIACC_WP33_Taylor.pdf. World Health Organization. Dengue and dengue hemorrhagic fever. Kay BH. Assessment of a new strategy. 2006 (AIACC Working Paper No. Pupal/demographic surveys to inform dengue-vector control. Parks W. World Health Organization.int/tdr/publications/publications/pdf/ planning_dengue. Lloyd LS.health. Brachman PS. 15(4):576–580.pdf.) pupal productivity.qld. Calibrated funnel trap for quantifying mosquito (Diptera: Culicidae) abundance in wells. Russell BM. 16. 24. CHAPTER 5 133 . 33) http://www. 1999. Focks DA. Gionar YR et al. Control of communicable diseases manual.

prevention and control 134 .Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. treatment.

New avenues CHAPTER 6 NEW AVENUES CHAPTER 6 135 .Chapter 6.

Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. prevention and control 136 . treatment.

and all current dengue vaccine candidates aim to elicit high levels of neutralizing antibody. the vaccine needs to be tetravalent. significant progress has been made in recent years and the pace towards clinical efficacy trials has accelerated substantially (1. CHAPTER 6 6. However. hence. Several parameters are crucial for LAVs: • The viruses must be sufficiently attenuated and viral replication reduced so that viraemia is low and symptoms of illness are minimal. the development of vaccines and drugs has the potential to change this.7. NEW AVENUES 6.2. policymakers and vaccine manufacturers alike.2 Product development A primary immunological mechanism that confers protection from dengue illness is virus neutralization through antibodies. Dengue vaccines in development are of four types: live attenuated viruses.2 DENGUE VACCINES 6. inactivated or sub-unit vaccines.2) and drugs (section 6.3.3). This chapter describes the current development of vaccines (section 6.8). The vaccine pipeline is now sufficiently advanced for it to be possible to have a firstgeneration dengue vaccine licensed within the next five to seven years (3). Recent studies of the burden of disease have quantified the cost of dengue both to the public sector and to households and have demonstrated the potential cost-effectiveness of a dengue vaccine (5. funding agencies. • Transmission of the viruses by mosquitoes is reduced or eliminated. Box 6.Chapter 6. 6. and nucleic acid-based vaccines.1 Overview Despite formidable challenges to developing tetravalent dengue vaccines.1 OVERVIEW Primary prevention of dengue is currently possible only with vector control and personal protection from the bites of infected mosquitoes.2. the induction of protective. Live attenuated vaccines (LAVs) can induce durable humoral and cellular immune responses since they most closely mimic a natural infection.2. New avenues CHAPTER 6. Triggered by the continued unchecked spread of dengue worldwide. Moreover.1 summarizes the complexity of developing a dengue vaccine. The creation of public–private partnerships for product development has facilitated the process.6. The increasing co-circulation of the four dengue virus types means that a vaccine is needed that protects against all four of them. 137 . chimeric live attenuated viruses. there has been renewed interest in dengue by researchers.4). a number of diverse candidates are at earlier stages of evaluation and could become second-generation vaccines. neutralizing antibody responses against all four serotypes of dengue virus simultaneously should avoid the theoretical concern of vaccine-induced antibody-dependent enhancement in vaccine recipients. In addition.

each attenuated by passage in primary dog kidney cells and initially prepared as candidate vaccines in fetal rhesus monkey lung cells (FRhL). so that low doses can be used. and somewhat higher seroconversion rates were observed in subjects with pre-existing immunity to yellow fever (2). Thus. The tetravalent vaccine produced by combining the four chimeric dengue viruses is protective when administered to mice. At least two doses were required to achieve high rates of tetravalent neutralizing antibodies. Original and rederived attenuated viruses have been extensively tested both individually and in tetravalent formulation in phase 1 and phase 2 trials in human volunteers of different ages. Phase 1 testing has taken place with all four monovalent vaccines. immunogenicity and protection have been obtained in rhesus monkeys for each of the four dengue viruses in this way (4). Several DNA vaccines designed to deliver structural dengue viral genes into cells have been generated. the nonstructural genes of yellow fever are provided to allow replication of the chimeric virus. Monkey challenge experiments have been conducted but preparations for clinical trials are underway. Dengue vaccines in advanced preclinical development include DEN-DEN chimeras. One is a chimeric tetravalent vaccine in which the structural genes (prM and E) of each of the four dengue viruses were inserted individually to replace those of yellow fever virus in the backbone of the yellow fever 17D vaccine. Tetravalent anti-DEN neutralizing antibodies are raised to high rates following the administration of at least two doses at an interval of six months. and attenuation is imparted by the yellow fever portion of the chimera. as well as tetravalent mixtures of all four viruses. the prM and E protein genes of DEN-1. The three attenuating mutations are located outside the structural protein genes of PDK53 and appear to be quite stable. Other vaccine candidates in phase 1 testing include live attenuated viruses. In this vaccine. Monovalent vaccines. Here.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. • A balanced immune response to all four dengue viruses must be elicited. Another comprises strains of the four serotypes of the dengue virus. have been given to human volunteers of varying ages in phase 1 and phase 2 trials in both non-endemic and endemic regions. especially if volunteers have previously been exposed to flaviviruses. In addition. attenuated DEN-2 (PDK53). prevention and control • The viruses should replicate well in cell culture and be sufficiently immunogenic to provide long-lasting immunity in humans. and a monovalent DEN-1 DNA vaccine is currently undergoing phase 1 testing. • The genetic basis for attenuation must be known and must be stable (4). and (ii) the construction of chimeric viruses consisting of DEN-2 and DEN-3 structural genes in the non-structural backbone of the DEN-4 strain with 30 nucleotides deleted from the 3’ untranslated region. candidate vaccines that have successfully protected monkeys from viraemic challenge include recombinant 80% envelope protein from the four DEN serotypes in conjunction with DEN-2 NS1 administered with several new-generation adjuvants. Each attenuated dengue virus was rederived by transfecting cells with purified viral RNA. treatment. Several live attenuated vaccines are in advanced stages of development. vaccine development is being approached in two ways: (i) via direct removal of 30 nucleotides in the 3’ untranslated region of DEN-1 and DEN-4. There is also work in progress on subunit vaccines based on domain III 138 . DEN-3 and DEN-4 were each inserted into the infectious clone of PDK-passaged. Satisfactory attenuation.

prime-boost strategies combining vaccines of distinct formulations are under investigation. non-human primates do not present clinical disease but do demonstrate viraemia (originally measured as infectivity. infection by one dengue virus followed by infection by a different DEN serotype) can lead to severe disease (DHF/DSS) and that anti-DEN antibodies passively 139 . the first major problem in developing a dengue vaccine is to develop not just one immunogen but four immunogens that will induce a protective immune response against all four viruses simultaneously.e. homotypic immunity. i. A wealth of data suggests that neutralizing antibodies are the main effector of protection against DEN virus infection. However. the tetravalent formulations must balance viral interference with longlasting immunogenicity and reactogenicity. New avenues of the E protein. Herein lies the third problem. Finally. However. but neither of these faithfully recapitulates both the disease outcome and the immune response in humans. many studies have shown that some secondary DEN infections (i. as have formalin-inactivated vaccines of the four dengue viruses.2.e. Further studies are necessary to elucidate the mechanism of protective immunity so that correlates of protection can be established to demonstrate that the candidate vaccines induce a protective immune response (9). a candidate vaccine that protects mice may not be as effective in other animal models.3 Challenges Since dengue is caused by four serologically related viruses. albopictus) with humans as the vertebrate host. the mouse and non-human primate models must be used to evaluate candidate dengue vaccines before they are tested in humans. Mice are often used as a small animal model to evaluate initially the ability of candidate vaccines to induce a protective immune response. and neutralizing titres to all four viruses need to be achieved regardless of the previous immune status of the vaccinated individuals. Therefore. now normally measured by real-time RT-PCR and immunological parameters as proxies). However. which is considered to be the principal neutralizing epitope region of the virus. However. It is clear that an infection by one dengue virus leads to lifelong protective immunity against the infecting virus. the results are not always predictive of what will happen in higher animal species – i. Interference between the four vaccine viruses must be avoided or overcome. including antibody-dependent enhancement. without relying on other animal reservoirs. and good progress has been made recently in developing mouse models for DEN virus infection and disease. CHAPTER 6 The dengue viruses are arboviruses whose normal transmission cycle involves mosquitoes (most commonly Ae.Chapter 6. The second issue is the lack of a validated correlate of protection since the mechanism of protective immunity against DEN infection is not fully understood. The fourth challenge for the development of dengue vaccines is the potential for immune enhancement. A tetravalent replication-defective-recombinant adenovirus (cAdVaX) has also been prepared.e. and a variety of species have been used as models to evaluate candidate dengue vaccines. The second animal model is the non-human primate. Two animal models (mice and non-human primates) are used to evaluate candidate vaccines. Unfortunately. employing different strategies to increase immunogenicity. neither the precise antibody titres nor neutralizing epitopes nor the contributions of other immune mechanisms to protection have been defined. Thus. the vaccine must be tetravalent. unexpected discordance has occasionally been observed between preclinical and clinical outcomes (10). aegypti and Ae. Clearly. 6.

timing and serotype/genotype composition of dengue epidemics varies from year to year and is somewhat unpredictable. It should be emphasized that. Box 6. ranging from febrile illnesses to severe forms such as DHF and DSS. and the methodology of capturing clinical events may differ by age group and between countries. • The exact location. longterm evaluation of volunteers will be required to demonstrate lack of evidence for immune enhancement/severe disease. Rather. can be tested against all four DEN serotypes. to date. immunogenicity. Nonetheless. • Ideally.1 The complexity of developing a dengue vaccine Development • Need for a tetravalent vaccine with not just one but four immunogens that will give a balanced immune response whereby a protective long-lasting immunity is induced against all four viruses simultaneously (balancing viral interference. thus. It is assumed that neutralizing antibodies are the main effector of protection against DEN infection. a vaccine should be efficacious against all forms of dengue illness. • Lack of immune correlate of protection since the mechanism of protective immunity against DEN infection is only partially understood. long-term dengue surveillance data about the potential vaccine testing 140 . including antibody-dependent enhancement Implementation • Need for long-term follow-up.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. the risk of immune enhancement by a candidate vaccine must be evaluated through prolonged follow-up of vaccinated cohorts. or post-marketing. Trials need to take place in multiple countries – particularly in both Asia and the Americas – due to the distinct epidemiological characteristics and the viruses circulating in each region. • Lack of a suitable animal model that recapitulates human disease and can be used to evaluate candidate vaccines. treatment. Trials need to be large enough to address a vaccine’s impact on the different clinical forms of dengue. The epidemic peak varies somewhat in timing and exact location from year to year even in endemic countries. trials will be particularly important for dengue for the same reason. and reactogenicity). prevention and control transferred from mothers to infants increase the risk of DHF/DSS in the infants for a certain period of time. there is theoretically a danger that a dengue vaccine could potentially cause severe disease (including DHF or DSS) in vaccine recipients if solid immunity was not established against all four serotypes. • Potential immunopathogenesis. Also vaccine recipients may have been exposed to less symptomatic DEN infections than control groups. some of which are related to the above-mentioned challenges.4 Implementation The clinical evaluation of candidate vaccines for dengue has several unique aspects. Thus. • Need for testing in both Asia and the Americas. although this is based on small numbers thus far (11). This may be influenced by the candidate vaccine. Dengue illness has many clinical manifestations and poses diagnostic challenges. The greatest burden of disease is found in distinct age groups in different countries. Likewise.2. Ideally. 6. Phase 4. vaccine recipients have shown evidence of immunity for varying lengths of time. there is no evidence that a vaccine recipient who has received a candidate vaccine has subsequently succumbed to severe disease.

To facilitate the vaccine development process.Chapter 6. If the vaccine is to be delivered to older age groups.g. 6. even so. defining neutralizing and potentially enhancing epitopes. WHO has produced generic guidelines to guide national authorities in their decision-making on the introduction of new vaccines (13). the potential impact of a vaccine on dengue transmission needs to be studied (e. the role of herd immunity). Since HCV and dengue virus are members of the Flaviviridae family. WHO has developed guidelines for the clinical evaluation of dengue vaccines (12).3. If the vaccine is to be used for infants. A number of modelling approaches are being taken to address this and other similar issues. The Paediatric Dengue Vaccine Initiative (PDVI) supports the establishment of field sites for the testing of vaccines. Similar differences in viral load have been observed in animal models of ADE (15. Furthermore. CHAPTER 6 6. This observation suggests that progress to serious dengue disease and adverse morbidity may be reversed by administering potent and safe small molecule compounds that target essential steps in 141 . as well as the characteristics of the mosquito population transmitting the virus and climatographic parameters. extensive drug discovery efforts in HIV and HCV have taught us important lessons that encourage similar strategies to be adopted for dengue. countries may decide to introduce dengue vaccines into the national immunization programmes for routine administration.5 Vaccine utilization for dengue control Additional work is required to bring a vaccine from licensing to programmatic use in dengue-endemic areas. New avenues site(s) is crucial and.16. the unpredictability of timing and location adds a level of complexity to calculations of trial sample size. it is imperative to continue scientific research that is directed at improving our understanding of the immune response in both natural DEN infections and vaccinees (e. Interference between dengue vaccine and other vaccines likely to be given in the same time period must be ruled out.2. Depending on cost-effectiveness and the outcome of financial and operational analysis.3 DENGUE ANTIVIRAL DRUGS 6. Given the complexity of dengue and dengue vaccines.g.1 Overview The search for dengue antivirals is a new endeavour that is gaining momentum due to both increased interest in dengue and substantial progress in the structural biology of dengue virus. the dengue vaccination will need to be carried out on a schedule compatible with other vaccines. improving animal models) alongside vaccine development and evaluation. In addition. the intensive work on HCV antivirals – especially those that target the RNA-dependent RNA polymerase – can benefit the search for dengue antivirals (14). The rationale for dengue antivirals arises from clinical studies that have noted that the quantity of virus circulating in the blood of patients who develop DHF and DSS is higher by around 1–2 logs compared with patients suffering from the milder dengue fever. packaging and stability requirements should be compatible with large-scale use. vaccine presentation. proper contact points will need to be established to deliver the vaccine effectively and to ensure post-marketing surveillance.17). To maximize the effect of vaccination.

2 Product development The life cycle of dengue virus readily shows that the steps involved in virus entry. protease inhibitors).25).and transition-state-based as well as nonsubstrate-based inhibitors. such as high through-put screening of both target protein activity and viral replication in cultured cells. the AG129 mouse demonstrates a vascular leak early- 142 . Screening efforts are continuing and will increase.28). Early preclinical in vivo testing can be conducted in certain mouse models of dengue infection. and NS5 methyltransferase – are being explored (20). As more is understood about the mechanism of severe dengue disease. academic institutions and non-profit pharmaceutical enterprises and consortia are progressing in their search for antiviral compounds active against these targets in dengue virus. Reporter replicons based on yellow fever or DEN infectious clones have facilitated screening in cell culture for both primary and secondary screens (22.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. as is the idea of incorporating multiple targets in one formulation so as to delay the possible development of resistance. This hypothesis requires field-testing when a suitable anti-dengue agent is discovered. In the past five years alone.3. thereby lowering the viral load substantially. For instance. a number of in silico and high through-put screens have been and are being undertaken. focused libraries of compounds synthesized to specific targets (e. Distinct classes of inhibitors are being explored. assembly and ultimate release from the infected cell can be targeted by small molecules (18). tissue and cellular tropism of DEN in AG129 mice (mice of the 129 background lacking interferon a/b and g receptors) is similar to that in humans (24. which have undergone high through-put screening and lead compound optimization. Initial studies of such compounds in mice against the related West Nile virus have been reported (29). In addition. Other nucleotide-based approaches. treatment. A further approach is to target key disease manifestations.23).g. Currently the most advanced targets are the NS3/NS2B protease and NS5 RNA-dependent RNA polymerase. including RNAi methodologies. For instance. such as substrate. New targets – including E. Alternative approaches. prevention and control virus replication early during the disease. RNA genome replication. and AG129 mice are being used as the first step in preclinical testing of candidate antivirals (26). cellular targets are under consideration. The field is also benefiting from new insights afforded by x-ray crystallography and cryo-electron microscopy data. Recent advances in understanding the mechanism of membrane fusion during DEN infection of target cells has opened up new possibilities for designing novel antiviral strategies that target the fusion step as well (21). seven new 3-D structures of dengue proteins have been solved and nine structures of other flavivirus proteins have become available. and fragment-based screening using NMR and x-ray crystallography. animal models that reproduce specific manifestations may be useful for testing anti-dengue drugs. Different approaches have been taken to screening compounds. high through-put docking in silico. natural products and approved drugs. have also been proposed and are effective in cell culture (27. have been investigated in the exploratory phase (30). Based on these. The importance of targets such as the viral protease and polymerase have been studied by reverse genetics using infectious clones to validate them as targets for drug discovery. On the basis of success in the HIV and HCV fields in finding small molecules that target viral enzymes that are essential for virus replication in infected cells. 6. They include the proprietary libraries of pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies. designed libraries based on structural information. yielding several lead compounds so far (19). and others will soon be added to the list. NS3 helicase. such as interfering with viral replication using peptide-conjugated phosphorodiamidate morpholino oligomers (P-PMOs). membrane fusion.

3. and NS5 methyltransferase. frequency of dosing of once per day.4 Implementation One of the biggest challenges in testing antivirals is that to be effective the drug(s) should presumably be delivered early after onset of symptoms. and a prophylactic trial is not an option. Although prospective dengue diagnosis before treatment in a clinical study would be ideal. where it would be possible to enrol patients during the first two days after the onset of symptoms. and have low/reasonable production costs. this would potentially be problematic as it would require rapid RT-PCR testing at or near the site of the study. • Must be active orally. • Possible development of resistance: use cocktails of multiple drugs to avoid this eventuality. children and adults. • Must be tested in acute DEN infection. of which the most advanced are NS3/NS2B protease and NS5 polymerase. Implementation • Need for rapid point-of-care diagnostic tool to apply antiviral most effectively. perhaps on days 3 or 4 of fever. With respect to clinical efficacy. stability in the face of heat and humidity. the vast majority of dengue patients present late during their illness. whereas hospital admission is more likely to occur on days 3 or 4 or later. New avenues death phenotype when infected with DEN-2 strain D2S10 (31). 6. the earlier the presentation with fever. stable to heat and humidity. NS3 helicase. and low/reasonable cost of goods and ease of formulation to allow a reasonably priced product (18). reduce symptoms. a safe drug may be evaluated for prophylactic as well as paediatric use after proper trials. The availability of new serological reagents such as NS1 antigen capture tests may make early point-of-care diagnosis 143 . The minimal target product profile includes oral route of administration. It can also reproduce antibody-dependent enhancement of infection and disease (17) and is currently being used to test compounds that target disease phenotypes such as vascular leak.3. However. • Short window of viraemia. However. have a long shelf-life. and reduce the incidence of severe disease. including few or no secondary effects. Even during clinical studies.2 The challenge of developing dengue antivirals Development • Several potential viral targets. Box 6.3 Challenges There are numerous requirements for an anti-dengue drug (Box 6. the drug must be active against all serotypes. a trial of dengue antivirals would have to capture patients presenting to primary care facilities.2). In this respect. Furthermore. CHAPTER 6 6. • Exploration of cellular targets? • Good safety profile. • Must be active against all serotypes. • Useful in infants. a long shelf-life. patients do not present to study staff much earlier. • Must be effective in both primary and secondary DEN infections.Chapter 6. the less likely it is that the diagnosis will be dengue. work in progress on E.

a drug trial may be better performed in the first instance in adults (>15 years of age). Although vaccines and drugs for dengue pose significant challenges during both product development and field-testing. Towards a dengue vaccine: progress to date and remaining challenges. Lancet. Hombach J. 21:254–260. 2005. 2007. treatment. Economic impact of dengue fever/dengue hemorrhagic fever in Thailand at the family and population levels. 7. In addition. Anderson KB et al. because of the problematic nature of clinical trials in children. 6.4 REFERENCES 1. 5:518–528. Dengue vaccines approach the finish line. Lancet. Nature Reviews. Guy B. Microbiology. 369:1410–1411. The burden of dengue infection. Suaya JA. Revista Panamericana de Salud Pública. 2007. which raises a series of issues. 2007. 2008. The target population for dengue drugs would be all age groups but. tremendous strides have been made recently in both areas. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. For instance. 2007. Burden of symptomatic dengue infection in children at primary school in Thailand: a prospective study. A robust study design with a single protocol followed meticulously at all sites would solve the problem but would be challenging to achieve. Clark DV. Almond JW. 3. 2. 2007. Edelman R. Microbiology and Infectious Diseases. prevention and control possible. getting physicians to document parameters and outcomes carefully in busy clinical situations is often difficult – though not impossible – and is clearly essential for any trial. 2–3:239–252. It would also be ideal to test reactions between an anti-dengue drug and other drugs often used to treat dengue patients. 45(Suppl 1):S56–S60. 369:1452–1459. although in some areas older age groups are also significantly affected. The greatest burden of dengue in most countries is in children. Halstead SB. and the way clinicians treat dengue cases varies greatly both within and between institutions. 5. Clinical Infectious Diseases.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. Shepard DS. the treatment that dengue cases receive in hospitals is known to have a dramatic effect on the disease outcome. Prospects for a dengue virus vaccine. 72:786–791. Vaccines against dengue: a review of current candidate vaccines at advanced development stages. Comparative Immunology. 4. 144 . It is likely that a multicentre trial of a candidate dengue antiviral drug would be indicated. such as paracetamol. Whitehead SS et al. 6.

Monoclonal antibody-mediated enhancement of dengue virus infection in vitro and in vivo and strategies for prevention. 14. insights. Virtual screening and bioassay study of novel inhibitors for dengue virus mRNA cap (nucleoside-2’O)-methyltransferase. 25:4130–4139. Short report: immune response and occurrence of dengue infection in thai children three to eight years after vaccination with live attenuated tetravalent dengue vaccine. 20. 17.18). 2007. Innis BL et al. Geneva. Scientific consultation on immunological correlates of protection induced by dengue vaccines report from a meeting held at the World Health Organization 17-18 November 2005. New avenues 8. 12. Hombach J. Journal of Infectious Diseases. HTS identifies novel and specific uncompetitive inhibitors of the two-component NS2B-NS3 proteinase of West Nile virus. 1979. Vaccine introduction guidelines. Shepard DS et al. 13. 104:9422–9427. Virulence of a live dengue virus vaccine candidate: a possible new marker of dengue virus attenuation. 2007. 2007. 75:26–28. Animal models of dengue virus infection: applications. 2006. 158:876– 880. A 7-deaza-adenosine analog is a potent and selective inhibitor of hepatitis C virus replication with excellent pharmacokinetic properties. Assay and Drug Development Technologies. 26(33):4113–4119. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. In: Hanley KA. 15. 9. 19. Edelman R. and frontiers. WHO. Finding new medicines for flaviviral targets. 10. 5(6):737–750. Cost-effectiveness of a pediatric dengue vaccine. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America. Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry. 2006. 145 CHAPTER 6 .140:527–533. 2004. Novartis Foundation Symposium. 2007 (Document WHO/IVB/05. 16. Olsen DB et al. 2009 (in press). 2004. Balsitis SJ. Frontiers in dengue virus research. Goncalvez AP et al. In vivo enhancement of dengue virus infection in rhesus monkeys by passively transferred antibody. Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy. Norwich. Halstead SB. 1998. 18. 11. Johnston PA et al. eds. Vaccine. World Health Organization. Weaver SC. 15:7795–7802. Vaccine. 277:102–114. Journal of Infectious Diseases. Keller TH et al. 22:1275–1280. Luzhkov VB et al. Harris E. 2008. 2007. Guidelines for the clinical evaluation of dengue vaccines in endemic areas: summary of a World Health Organization technical consultation. Vaccine. Horizon Scientific Press. 48(10):3944–3953.Chapter 6. Chanthavanich PC et al. Hombach Jet al.

51:2470–2482. 2008. Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy. 22. 27. Kuhn RJ.Dengue: Guidelines for diagnosis. 24. 2006. Shi PY. Kyle JL. Journal of Infectious Diseases. Beatty PR. 80:10208–10217. American Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene. Deas TS et al. 80(3):416–424. Harris E. 277:57–65. Development of novel antivirals against flaviviruses. 277:41–52. Tropism of dengue virus in mice and humans defined by viral nonstructural protein 3-specific immunostaining. Heinz FX. 2006. 2007. Kiermayr S. 31. 13:1385–1395. Holden KL et al. 23. 30. Ng CY et al. 79:5116–5128. Patkar CG. 28. Balsitis SJ et al. Inhibition of dengue virus serotypes 1 to 4 in vero cell cultures with morpholino oligomers. 76(3):222–231. Frontiers in Bioscience. 25. Journal of Virology. Schul W et al. 146 . A dengue fever viremia model in mice shows reduction in viral replication and suppression of the inflammatory response after treatment with antiviral drugs. Virology. Stein DA. Novartis Foundation Symposium. Entry functions and antigenic structure of flavivirus envelope proteins. A murine model for dengue lethal disease with increased vascular permeability. Dengue virus infects macrophages and dendritic cells in a mouse model of infection. Construction and characterization of a stable subgenomic dengue virus type 2 replicon system for antiviral compound and siRNA testing. Journal of Infectious Diseases. 26. 2007. Journal of Virology. Antiviral Research. In vitro resistance selection and in vivo efficacy of morpholino oligomers against West Nile virus. 2006. 29. Kinney RM et al. Shresta S et al.195:665–674. 2007. Novartis Foundation Symposium. Nucleic acid-based inhibition of flavivirus infections. 195:1808–1817. 2009. prevention and control 21. 2005. Inhibition of dengue virus translation and RNA synthesis by a morpholino oligomer to the top of the 3’ stem-loop structure. 344:439– 452. 2006. Stiasny K. 2007. treatment.

Chapter 6. New avenues 147 CHAPTER 6 .

int TDR/World Health Organization 20.int . Switzerland Fax: +41 22 791 48 69 www.Neglected Tropical Diseases (NTD) HIV/AIDS.int/neglected_diseases/en neglected.who.int/tdr tdr@who. 1211 Geneva 27.who.diseases@who. Avenue Appia 1211 Geneva 27 Switzerland Fax: +41 22 791 48 54 www. Tuberculosis and Malaria (HTM) World Health Organization Avenue Appia 20.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful